Server Configuration Guide

Server Configuration Guide
Doc. Version: 9.0 (1)
Date: Dec 2012
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
The Officelinx Server Configuration Guide is designed to be a complete reference covering every setting available in
Officelinx. However, due to the vast nature of the Officelinx application, you may find the content overwhelming or difficult to
understand at times. If you are trying to find out how to implement a certain feature within the Officelinx platform, it is
recommended that you reference the Feature Description Guide first. If a certain setting during such feature implementations
raises concerns, you should refer to this guide for details and technical notes for clarification.
Another point to consider while utilizing this guide is the dependencies of fields. Some fields within OL Admin are closely tied
to others and require the parent field to be activated first. The easiest way to learn about a group of fields which are related
is to reference the Feature Description Guide as it covers all of the fields related to a specific topic.
The Server Configuration Guide also covers the various applications which are installed on the Officelinx server. These utilities
are designed to make server management as easy as possible, allowing you to efficiently administer a site. Familiarize
yourself with these applications so that you can make the most of them right from the start.
Contacting Esna
Esna Technologies Inc.
30 West Beaver Creek Rd., Suite 101
Richmond Hill, ON L4B 3K1
Tel: +1 905-707-9700
Fax: +1 905-707-9170
Website: www.esnatech.com
For hardware and software support, contact:
Tel: +1 905-707-1234
E-mail: techsupp@esna.com
For documentation request and feedback, contact:
E-mail: documentation@esna.com
Copyright & Trademarks
Esna Technologies Inc., Inc.
30 West Beaver Creek Rd., Suite 101
Richmond Hill, ON L4B 3K1
Copyright © 1992-2012 by Esna Technologies Inc. Inc. All rights reserved.
Officelinx Unified Communications Server is made available under the terms of the Esna Technologies Inc. Inc. license
agreement without express or implied warranties of any sort, including, specifically, any warranties relating to the
performance or maintenance of the program.
While every effort has been made to ensure accuracy, Esna Technologies Inc. Inc. will not be liable for technical or editorial
errors or omissions contained within the documentation. The information contained in this documentation is subject to
change without notice.
Esna software and related documentation may be used only in accordance with the terms of the Esna Technologies Inc. Inc.
license Agreement and copied only to provide adequate backup protection.
Other brands and products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders and should be noted as such.
i
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
ii
iii
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Table of Contents
1
Introduction to Server Configuration
2
Introduction
2
Before you begin
2
Basic system maintenance
2
Questions and Answers
2
Reporting problems
PBX
4
Introduction
5
PBX Buttons
6
General
6
7
7
8
General Tab
Transfer
Transfer Tab
Call
8
Call Tab
9
Disconnect
9
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3
Disconnect Tab
10 Message Light
10
Message Light Tab
11 Inband
11
11
12
12
Inband Tab
Options
Definition
Confirm Codes
13 PBX Node
13
PBX Node Tab
14 Other PBX Related Options/Configurations
14
Add / Modify PBX Node
14
14
14
Add / Modify PBX Template
Adding a New PBX Template
Modifying a PBX Template
15
Caller ID Lines
15
Channel Parameters (for Dialogic)
16
Modify Disconnect Tone
17
Fax Board Extension
17
Voice Mail Extension
19 Company
20 Introduction
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iv
21 Company Buttons
22 General Tab
23 Advanced Tab
24 Call Options Tab
25 Mailbox Options Tab
26 Integrated Fax Tab
27 Admin Broadcast Messages Tab
28 Synchronization Options Tab
28
Image Directory Settings
TABLE OF CONTENTS
29 Speech Options Tab
29
Voice Verification Security Settings
30 Company Languages Tab
31 C.O./Channel Assignment Tab
31
C.O. Assignment
31
Voice Channel Assignment
31
Business hours Channels
32
After hours Channels
33 Passwords/Security Tab
34 AMIS Parameters Tab
35 Other Company Related Options/Configuration
v
35
35
35
Add C.O./Voice Channel Assignment
Adding a C.O. Assignment Entry
Adding a Voice Channel Assignment Entry
36
36
36
36
36
36
36
Add / Modify Language Properties
Operator Schedule
Operator Keyword(s)
Cancel Keyword(s)
Login Verification Keyword(s)
Recognition Keyword(s)
TTS Voice
37
37
37
Business Hours
Buttons
Business Hours Configuration
38
38
39
39
39
Company Contacts
Adding / Modifying a Contact
Other Info
Notes
User-defined Info
40
Compile Grammar
41
41
41
42
42
42
42
Distribution List
Distribution List Buttons
Distribution List Configuration
After Selecting the Item(s) on the Left Pane:
After Selecting the Item(s) on the Right Pane:
Adding an Remote Site Entry
Adding a Manual Entry (Email/Fax/SMS/Phone)
43
43
43
During Record Menu
During Record Menu Buttons
During Record Menu Configuration
44
44
Holidays
Holidays Buttons
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
44
Configuring Holidays
Key Mapping
Key Mapping Buttons
Key Mapping Configuration
47
47
47
47
48
48
48
Key Mapping Schedule
Key Mapping Schedule Buttons
Key Mapping Schedule Configuration
Time
Recurrence Pattern:
Range of Recurrence
Start Menu
49
49
49
49
50
50
50
Operator Schedule
Operator Schedule Buttons
Operator Schedule Configuration
Time
Recurrence Pattern:
Range of Recurrence
Operator
51
51
52
Send Message Menu
Send Message Menu Buttons
Send Message Menu Configuration
53
53
53
Sending an Admin Broadcast Message
Add / Modify a Admin Broadcast Message
Confirmation
TABLE OF CONTENTS
45
45
46
55 Feature Group
56 Introduction
56 Feature Group Buttons
57 General Tab
58 Storage Options Tab
59 Notification Options Tab
59
Message Light
59
Message Light Type
59
Outcalling Options
60 Transfer Options Tab
60
Auto Attendant
61
Enhanced Call Control
61
Paging Zone
62 Transfer Types Tab
62
Internal Supervision
63
External Supervision
63
Screen Pop Duration & Pre Transfer Event
64 Mailbox Options Tab
64
Settings available for the user for Mailbox configuration
64
Settings Activated by the Administrator
65 Message Options Tab
66 Synchronization Options Tab
67
Synchronization Settings
67
Image Directory Settings
68 DID Properties Tab
68
DID Calls
68
Re-route Options for DID and Internal Calls Using CTI:
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
vi
69 Speech Options Tab
70 Other Feature Group Related Options/Configuration
70
70
70
Add/Modify Feature Group
Adding a Feature Group
Modifying a Feature Group
71 Mailbox
72 Introduction
72 Mailbox Buttons
73 General Tab
TABLE OF CONTENTS
74 Advanced Tab
75 Mailbox Options Tab
76 Transfer Options Tab
77 Message Options Tab
78 Notification - Options Tab
78
Voice Mail
78
email
79 Notification - Notification Addresses Tab
79
Schedule Notification:
80 Addresses Tab
81 Synchronization Options Tab
82 Locations - Set Current Locations Tab
82 Locations - Locations List Tab
83 Re-route CTI Options Tab
83
When DND is set on my phone
83
When Forward to Voice Mail Group
84 Speech Options Tab
84
Voice Verification Options
85 Other Mailbox Related Options/Configurations
vii
85
85
85
85
85
86
86
86
86
86
Add / Modify Addresses
Adding an Address
Phone Number - Internal
Phone Number - External
email
VPIM
Beeper
Fax - Internal / External
SMS - Phone
SMS - email
87
87
87
88
88
89
Add / Modify Location
General
Location Greetings
Availability Filters
Find Me Rules
Assign My Calls Rules
90
Add / Modify Message Options
91
Add / Modify Notification Addresses
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
91
Adding a Range of Mailboxes
91
92
92
Directory Listing
Company Buttons
Directory Listing Configuration
92
92
93
Finding a Mailbox
Desktop Capabilities
Storage Mode
Folders
93
93
94
IMAP4/POP3 Configuration
Activating the Mail Server
Configuring Individual Accounts
95
95
95
95
96
96
Location Schedule
Location Schedule Buttons
Location Schedule Configuration
Time
Recurrence Pattern:
Range of Recurrence
97
97
97
97
98
98
98
Notification Schedule
Notification Schedule Buttons
Notification Schedule Configuration
Time
Recurrence Pattern:
Range of Recurrence
Address
TABLE OF CONTENTS
93
99 Organizational Unit
99
Adding/Modifying a Organizational Unit
100 Workgroup
100
Workgroup Buttons
100
Workgroup Configuration
100
Adding Users to Workgroup
100
Removing Users from Workgroup
101 Mailbox Template
102 Introduction
103 General Tab
103
Numeric Password
104 Advanced Tab
105 Mailbox Options Tab
106 Transfer Options Tab
107 Notification Tab
107
Voice Mail
107
email
108 Synchronization Options Tab
109 Speech Options Tab
109
Voice Verification Options
111 Remote Site
112 Introduction
113 AMIS Site
113
Remote Site Buttons
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
viii
113
114
Adding/Editing an AMIS Site
Call Back Number
115 VPIM Site
115
Remote Site Buttons
115
Adding/Editing a VPIM Site
116 Enabling Remote Site Network
117 Voice Menu
118 Introduction
118 Voice Menu Buttons
TABLE OF CONTENTS
119 Adding/Editing a Voice Menu
119
Sub Menu
119
Actions & DTMF Key Assignment
120 Voice Menu Actions
120
Ask Password
120
Ask Pin Number
120
Ask Question
121
Beep Caller Phone Number
121
Call Mailbox
121
Disconnect
121
Get Destination from DB
121
Get Transfer Mailbox
121
Get Transfer Phone Number
121
Page Current Mailbox
122
Play Date and Time
122
Record Conversation
122
Return to Customized TUI
122
Send a Mass Recall Message
122
Send LAP Message
122
Send to Directory
122
Send to Express Voice Mail
122
Send to Fax Mail
123
Send Fax Start Tone
123
Send to Login
123
Send to Main Greeting
123
Send to Operator
123
Send to Phone Number
123
Send to Requested Voice Mailbox
123
Send to Sub Menu
123
Send to Voice Mail
124
Send to Voice Mail Record Tone
124
Send to Voice Menu
125 Sub Menu
ix
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
126 Schedule
126
Voice Menu Schedule Buttons
126
126
127
Configuring Voice Menu Schedule
Recurrence Pattern:
Range of Recurrence
128 Printing a Voice Menu
129 Routing Table
130 Introduction
131 Caller ID/DNIS
131
Routing Table Buttons
TABLE OF CONTENTS
131
131
Caller ID/DNIS Entries
Adding/Editing a Caller ID/DNIS Entry
132 PIN Number
132
Routing Table Buttons
132
132
PIN Number Entries
Adding/Editing a PIN Number Entry
133 PIN Number Schedule
133
PIN Number Schedule Buttons
133
134
134
Configuring PIN Number Schedule
Recurrence Pattern:
Range of Recurrence
135 Caller ID/DNIS Schedule
135
PIN Number Schedule Buttons
135
136
136
Configuring Caller ID/DNIS Schedule
Recurrence Pattern:
Range of Recurrence
137 Customizing the TUI
138 Introduction
139 Main Screen
140 Actions
140
Common Fields
140
Accept Meeting
140
Accept Meeting Tentatively
140
Active Features
140
Add Distribution List
140
Add Distribution List Member
140
Add Notification Schedule
140
Add Recipient
141
Append to Recorded Message
141
Auto Forward Message
141
Auto Play
142
Browse Folder
142
Call Back to Sender
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
x
Cancel Message and Exit
143
Change Availability
143
Change Future Delivery Date/Time
143
Change Location
143
Change Voice Verification Security Level
143
Choose TTS Language
143
Clear Mass Recall
143
Clear Numeric Password
143
Decline Meeting
143
Define Default Fax Address
143
Delete Distribution List
144
Delete Distribution List Member
144
Delete Message
144
Delete Notification Schedule
144
Delete Recipient
144
Deliver Now
144
Disable Speech Command
144
Disconnect
144
Envelope Information
145
Forward Message
145
Go Back to the Locations Calendar
145
Keep Future Delivery Date/Time
145
Listen to Distribution List
145
Listen to Messages
146
Listen to Notification Schedule
146
Listen to Numeric Password
146
Listen to Recipients
146
Make Caller ID Active Address
146
Mark Message Unread/Read
147
Modify Distribution List
147
Modify Notification Schedule
147
Move Message to Another Folder
147
Place Call
147
Print Fax
147
Recall Caller
147
Record Busy Greeting
147
Record Customized Greeting
147
Record Internal Busy Greeting
148
Record Internal Personal Greeting
148
Record Internal Unavailable Greeting
148
Record Location Greeting
148
Record Message in Current Mailbox
148
Record Name Greeting
148
Record Personal Greeting
148
Record Unavailable Greeting
148
Reply to All Recipients
TABLE OF CONTENTS
xi
142
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
149
Reply to Sender Only
149
Rerecord List Name
149
Rerecord Message
149
Return to Auto Attendant
149
Review Availability and Location
149
Review Contacts
149
Review Distribution List Members
Review List Name
150
Review Message
150
Review Recorded Message
150
Rewind Message
150
Save Recorded Message in Draft and Exit
150
Say Delivery Date and Time
150
Send A Message
150
Send Recorded Message
151
Send Recorded Message In Future
151
Send to Sub Menu
151
Send to Tutorial
151
Set Numeric Password
151
Set Wakeup Call
151
Skip to Next Message without changing Read Status
151
Skip to Previous Message
151
Skip to Previous Message without Changing Read Status
152
Skip/Save
152
Toggle Certified Flag
152
Toggle Confidential Flag
152
Toggle Mass Recall
152
Toggle Urgent Flag
152
Transcribe and Send Recorded Message
152
Transfer to Mailbox
152
Transfer to Operator
153
Turn Call Forwarding On/Off
153
Turn Call Queuing On/Off
153
Turn Call Screening On/Off
153
Turn Notification Schedule On/Off
153
Turn Post Paging On/Off
153
Turn Pre Paging On/Off
153
Voice Print Training
TABLE OF CONTENTS
149
154 Printing Flowchart
155 Control Keys
157 Print Server
158 Introduction
158 Print Server
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
xii
158 Add / Modify Print Server
159 Message UNC Storage Path
160 Introduction
160 Creating the UNC Path
161 Redirecting Messages Along the Path
162 Using Web Client with Storage Paths
165 TSE IMAP Server
TABLE OF CONTENTS
166 Introduction
166 TSE IMAP Server - Add / Modify
167 Voice Server
168 Introduction
168 Field Description
169 Advanced Field Description
169
169
169
169
169
170
170
170
170
170
170
171
171
171
171
171
171
172
172
172
172
172
172
173
173
173
173
173
173
174
174
174
174
174
174
175
175
175
xiii
List of Items
Absorb Inband Digits
Activate Location Type Greeting
Add Extension for UM Advanced user
Allow Non Numeric value in Caller ID Number
Allow Say Operator in CustMbx
Auto Login
Backup MITAI Audio log
BargeIn Blind Dial
Busy Alternative System Greeting
Caller Mailbox DID Display
Cancel Transfer Wait Time
Catch Exception
Centrex OutCall Access Code
CheckIn ClassOfService Number
CheckOut ClassOfService Number
Clear Connection After Cancel Transfer
CTI Answer Ring
CTI DNIS for Inband
CTI Initialize Delay
CTI MakeCall without Account Code
CTI Monitor Hangup
CTI Record All
CTI Use SMDI
Dedicated SoftFax Ports
Desktop Dial Supervised Transfer
Dial String Alpha Remove
Direct Call Ask FindMe
Direct Dial paging
Direct Paging Channels
Disable Caller Name Resolution
Disable Slave Server
Discard Fax DID
Dnic Mitel Inband
Dnic Mitel Trunk Name Terminator
DNIS Digit Length for Multiple Companies
DNIS Multiple Companies
Do Task Interval
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Duplicate Call History Interval
Dynamic SMDI Digits
Express VoiceMail Mailbox First Digit Match
Extensions with Dedicated CTI Log
External Phone Log in
Fax Handshake Delay
Fax Tone Mode
Fax Tone Work Around
FaxMail Blind Transfer
FGroups Listening Expired Messages
Flush log right away
Force External Trombone Transfer
Force Internal Trombone Transfer
Force Replace CallerName
Free format digit allow POUND in middle
Free format digit minimum length
Free Format Trombone Transfer
Hangup InterDigit Delay
Ignore Digit Caller Name
Ignore Unavailable Greeting
IMAP Sync Mode
Inband First E as extension
Integration Remove Leading Zero
Internal Extension Longer than External
Internal Extension Pattern
ISDN Multiple D Channel Message Light
IVR Call Back Channels
IVR Call Back Object
IVR Call Back Object IP
LAN Call Dial Pause milliseconds
Last Event For OutCall
Local Print Message
Long Digit for CTI PlaceCall
Message Count INI File Name
Message Subject without Extension
Message Volume Scale
Military Time
Mitel CallerID Flip
NoAnswer Alternative System Greeting
No CTI MakeCall Extensions
No Message For Tutorial ON
Only Supervised Trombone Transfer
Optional Arguments for Fax Gateway
Other Valid Phone Digits
Pause Between Customized TUI phrases
Pause Outcall Task
PBX Record End Code
PBX Record Pause Code
PBX Record Restart Code
Performance Average Counter
Play Message Delay
Play Message Type
PMS Switch Wakeup
PMS Wait for ACK before Sending
Pop External Only
Print to default fax machine directly
Program phone when Empty HuntGroup
Proxy Transfer Number As Is
Record Hangup Delay
Recover Message Light
Remove Outcall Access Code
Replace CallerId Name By DNIS Number
RightFax Password
RightFax ServerName
RightFax Use NTAuthentication
RightFax UserId
Route Priority
Second Fax Tone
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
TABLE OF CONTENTS
175
175
175
176
176
176
176
176
176
177
177
177
177
177
177
177
178
178
178
178
178
178
179
179
179
179
179
179
180
180
180
180
180
180
181
181
181
181
181
181
181
182
182
182
182
182
182
183
183
183
183
183
183
184
184
184
184
184
184
185
185
185
185
185
185
185
186
186
xiv
Simple Tutorial
SIP Mixed Integration
Slow States Counter
SMDI Aging
SMDI Packet Reading Way
SMDI Serial Device Index For PBXNode
SMDI Service Terminator
SMDI Terminator
Softkey Customized Menu Name
Standby If Not in Notification Channel Range
Star Stop Greeting
Start System Delay
Start up Delay
StayUp Date Time
Take CallerName from SIP Integration
Task Number
Transfer Proxy
Trim Digit Length
Unavailable Alternative System Greeting
Unique Temp Record File
Use EEAM Helper
Use Local COM MWI
Use Local LAP
Use Local PMS
Use Local SMDI
Use MakeCall
Use Menu Cache
Voice Menu Get Transfer Type
Voice Menu Special Record Conversation
VM Port Minimum Length
Wakeup call retries
Web Report EEAM Helper
TABLE OF CONTENTS
186
186
186
186
187
187
187
187
187
187
188
188
188
188
188
188
188
189
189
189
189
189
189
190
190
190
190
190
190
191
191
191
192 Adding a New Voice Server
193 Configuration
194 Introduction
195 Advanced
198 Custom Interface Settings
198 Dealer Info
199 Device Management
199
199
199
Local Area Paging Device
TCP/IP Connection
COM Port Connection
200
200
200
Serial Integration Device
TCP/IP Connection
COM Port Connection
201
201
201
Caller ID Device
TCP/IP Connection
COM Port Connection
202
CTI Serial Integration Device
202
CTI TCP/IP Integration Device
203
203
203
PMS Device
TCP/IP Connection
COM Port Connection
204 Device Management Settings
204
xv
CTI Settings
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
205
Serial Integration Settings
205
Caller ID Settings
206
PMS Settings
207 Fax Settings
209 Global Parameters
210 HTTP
211 IMAP Server
212 LDAP Synchronization
214 Logs
TABLE OF CONTENTS
215 POP3 Server Settings
216 Remote Site Setting
216 Reorg
217 Reports
218 User Manager
218
Edit / Add User
219 Telephony Settings
220 VPIM/SMTP
223 LDAP Import Utility
224 Introduction
225 Toolbar Buttons
226 Importing a user into the system
228
228
Changing a user
To change a non-Messaging user to a Messaging user:
229 Importing Directory users into the system
231
Importing from a file
232 Configuring and Connecting
235 Adding and Importing mailboxes
235 Checking Imported and Saved Mailboxes
236 Clearing a mailbox
236 Updating the Directory
236 Synchronizing the database with the Directory
237 IVR ActiveX
238 Introduction
238
How it works
238
What you need to do
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
xvi
239 Private functions
239
PlaySalutation()
239
PlaySysPrompt()
239
PlayMbxGreeting()
240
PlayFile()
240
PlayTTS()
240
PlayDateTime()
241
PlayFileWithCtrlKeys()
242
ASRPlay()
242
GetDigits()
243
GetMbxFormat()
GetMsgRecInfo()
243
RecordWithDigit()
243
RecordWithDigitHangup()
244
GetMsgAppendRecInfo()
244
AppendRecordWithDigit()
244
AppendRecordWithDigitHangup()
244
SendRecMsgToMbx()
245
LeaveMsgToMbx()
245
TransferToMailbox()
245
SendFax()
245
SendToVoiceMenu()
245
SendToSubMenu()
246
HoldCall()
246
HangUp()
246
DoesMbxExist()
246
SetCallerId()
TABLE OF CONTENTS
243
247 Public interface of the ActiveX Object exposed to OL
247
GetDestination(Method)
247
GetPersistDataArray(Method)
247
PutPersistDataArray (Method)
247
TotalRetries (Property)
247
Retries (Property)
247
MbxGreetingVFormat(Property)
247
MbxMsgVFormat(Property)
247
RecFileName
247
RecMaxTime
247
RecFormat
248
AppendRecTime
248
IsMbxExists(Property)
248
IsASRResult(Property)
248
MsgCountString (Property)
248
ErrCode
249 Protected (Friend) Functions
249
xvii
MessageLight
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
250
SendFax
250
CTISetPinNumber
251
CTIIndividualParkCall
251
CTIPickupIndividualPark
251
CTISetLampOn
252
CTISetLampOff
252
CTIPlaceCall
252
CTIAnswerCall
253
CTISetDND
253
CTIDisplay
253
CTIClearConnection
CTISetForwarding
254
CTIVMTransferCall
255
CTIAddNewExtension
255
CTIRemoveExtension
TABLE OF CONTENTS
254
256 Example Applications & Code Samples
258
Input Validation
261
Pharmacy Dictation
267 DBConst.dll Configuration
268 Introduction
268
Preparation
269 Parameters and Variable Description
269
269
269
Feature Group Section
GetFeatureGroup
GetListOfFGroupsInCompany
269
269
270
270
270
271
Mailbox Section
MailboxAdd
MailboxUpdate
MailboxDelete
GetMailbox
FindMailbox
271
271
272
272
272
Address Section
GetMailboxAddresses
MailboxAddrAdd
MailboxAddrUpdate
MailboxAddrDelete
273
273
273
Other Section
Init
ReleaseCls
275 iPD Plug-in API
277 Introduction
277
How iLink Pro finds plug-in files
277
How iLink Pro loads plug-ins
277
Assembly references
278 Classes
278
Enumerations
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
xviii
279 Call Class
279
Syntax
279
Inheritance Hierarchy
279
280
281
Call Members
Public Fields
Public Methods
282 Calls Class
282
Syntax
282
Inheritance Hierarchy
282
282
282
Calls Members
Public Properties
Public Methods
TABLE OF CONTENTS
285 ExternalContact Class
285
Syntax
285
Inheritance Hierarchy
286
286
286
286
287
287
ExternalContact Members
Public Constructors
Public Fields
Public Properties
Public Methods
Public Methods
287
ExternalContact Constructor
288 ExternalContactAddress Class
288
Syntax
288
Remarks
288
Inheritance Hierarchy
288
289
289
289
290
ExternalContactAddress Members
Public Constructors
Public Fields
Public Properties
Public Methods
291 ExternalContactAddressType Enumeration
291
Syntax
291
Remarks
291
Members
292 Group Class
292
Syntax
292
Inheritance Hierarchy
292
293
293
Group Members
Public Fields
Public Methods
294 Groups Class
294
Syntax
294
Inheritance Hierarchy
294
294
294
Groups Members
Public Properties
Public Methods
297 Location Class
297
xix
Syntax
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
297
Inheritance Hierarchy
297
298
298
Location Members
Public Fields
Public Methods
299 NotificationKind Enumeration
299
Syntax
299
Members
300 OpResult Class
Syntax
300
Inheritance Hierarchy
300
301
303
303
304
OpResult Members
Public Constructors
Public Properties
Public Methods
Explicit Interface Implementations
TABLE OF CONTENTS
300
305 PropBool Class
305
Syntax
305
Inheritance Hierarchy
305
306
306
308
309
PropBool Members
Public Constructors
Public Properties
Public Methods
Explicit Interface Implementations
310 PropObject Class
310
Syntax
310
Inheritance Hierarchy
310
311
311
PropObject Members
Public Properties
Public Methods
312 PropString Class
312
Syntax
312
Inheritance Hierarchy
312
313
313
315
316
PropString Members
Public Constructors
Public Properties
Public Methods
Explicit Interface Implementations
317 UCCMIf Class
317
Syntax
317
Remarks
317
Inheritance Hierarchy
317
318
320
UCCMIf Members
Public Properties
Public Methods
327 UCCMPlugin Class
327
Syntax
327
Example
328
Remarks
328
Inheritance Hierarchy
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
xx
328
328
329
330
333
UCCMPlugin Members
Public Constructors
Public Fields
Public Properties
Public Methods
344 User Class
344
Syntax
344
Remarks
344
Inheritance Hierarchy
344
344
346
User Members
Public Fields
Public Methods
347
Syntax
347
Inheritance Hierarchy
347
348
348
Users Members
Public Properties
Public Methods
TABLE OF CONTENTS
347 Users Class
351 Default Prompts
352 Introduction
353 File Names and Text
381 Supervisory Functions Over Phone
382 Introduction
383 Supervisor Menu
383
383
383
Accessing the Supervisor Menu
Internal Extension
External Extension
383
Creating a mailbox / range of mailboxes
384
Deleting a mailbox
384
Recording a system prompt
385
Recording a company greeting
385
Changing the holiday setting
387 Client Preparations
388 Introduction
388 Web Client Preparations
388
Configuring your browser
388
388
389
Java Plug-In
Downloading the Java plug-in
Installing the Java plug-in
390 Permissions
xxi
390
Downloading Permissions
390
Installing Permissions
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
391 Getting Started
391
Enabling SSL for Web Client
393
Ensuring SSL requirement for Web Client
394 Domain Name System (Auto Discovery from iPD)
394
394
395
DNS Auto Discovery Configuration
Configuring a Service: _webclient
Configuring a Service: _umst
396 Single Sign On (Integrated Credentials)
397 Push Install for iLink Pro Desktop
397
397
Creating transformations for MSI installation
When transformations are necessary
Modifying the transformation
398
To create a transform:
399
How to publish transformations for MSI installation
TABLE OF CONTENTS
397
401 Push iLink Pro Desktop Settings to Client PCs
401
402
402
402
Client.xml
UMST Connectivity Parameters
Window size/position
iLink Pro Desktop Settings
404
405
405
405
406
406
406
406
407
407
407
407
407
plugins.xml
Bluetooth Plug-in
Smart tags Plug-in
Skype Plug-in
Google Talk Plug-in
Microsoft Dynamics CRM Plug-in
ACT! Plug-in
OCS Plug-in
Microsoft Office Plug-in
MSN/Live/Windows Messenger Plug-in
PCRecruiter Plug-in
SalesForce Plug-in
TAPI Plug-in
408
Creating a Custom MSI Package
409 Web Report
410 Introduction
411 Starting Web Report
412 Creating a Reports Template
413 User Reports
413
Generating a User Report
415
Generating a Remote Sites Report
417
Generating a Call Activity Report
419
Generating a Notification Report
421
Generating a System Report
422 System Activity
422
Generating a Call Per Hour Report
423
Creating a Port Usage By Hour Report
424
Creating a Port Usage By Port Report
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
xxii
425
Creating a Port Usage By Company Report
426
Creating a Port Usage By Usage Report
427
Generating a Caller ID Report
428 Web Reports Legend
428
Availability
428
Destination Type
429
Greeting Type
429
Location Type
431 International Dial Plan
TABLE OF CONTENTS
432 Introduction
433 The Dial Plan Engine
433
Starting the Engine
434
Default Rules
435
435
435
Abbreviations
Phone Number Formatting Codes
Parsing Alphabet
436 Parser Rules
437
437
438
Add / Edit a Rule
General Information
Components
439 Formatting Rules
440 Dialing Rules
440
441
441
Displaying a Rule
General Information
Formats
441
Add / Edit a Rule
442 Alphabet Rules
443 Tests
444
Add / Edit a Test Number
445 Sample Rule #1
446 Sample Rule #2
447 Sample Rule #3
447
Results
449 Security Enhancements
450 Introduction
451 Send URL (Voice Mail & Fax Security)
xxiii
451
Overview
451
Configuration Process
452
Configuration with IIS 7
453
Configuration with IIS 6
454
Officelinx Configuration
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
456
Send URL Example
457 Enabling SSL from the IIS
457
Introduction
457
Requirements
457
Procedure
461 Server PC Name Change
462 Introduction
462
Requirements
463 Server Configuration
TABLE OF CONTENTS
465 Creating an MMC Admin Console
466 Introduction
466
Requirements
467 Server Configuration
467
Procedure
471 UC Folder And File Structure
472 Introduction
472
472
472
472
472
472
472
473
473
473
473
473
473
Handling the Application Folder
Admin (OL Administration program folder)
AppWebFolder
DB (Database file folder)
DBbackup (Backup files of EEAM_DB.mdb)
DBCOM (Database component folder)
Messages (Message file folder)
Prompts (Prompt file folder)
UMST (Unified Message Service Tasks service Folder)
VPIM
WebClient
Download
WebReport
473
Handling the Windows Folder
474
Backing Up System Files
477
Restoring Files
481 Understanding IMAP TSE
482 Introduction
483 IMAP TSE Gateway architectural diagram:
484 Operating Requirements
484
484
484
484
Data flow
Active session support
Background file transfers
Managing mailbox statistics
485 Integrating IMAP TSE Gateway
486 Installing and configuring IMAP SSL connection
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
xxiv
486
Creating certification authority
487
Assigning certificate to IMAP server
490 Configuring IPSec
490
490
493
493
496
498
498
499
499
The Security Policy MMC
Configuring an IPSec policy
Configuring an IKE authentication method
Configuring an IPSec filter list
Configuring an IPSec filter action
Configure IPSec policy on the email server
Assigning the IPSec policies
Verifying that the IPSec policies are working
Your traffic is secure
500 IMAP TSE and Exchange Transaction Logs
What are transaction logs?
Managing the transaction logs
500
500
501
501
The IMAPTSE and your Exchange transaction logs
Accounting for accelerated transaction log growth
Summary
Turning off the transaction logs
TABLE OF CONTENTS
500
500
503 User Dictionary
504 Introduction
504 User Dictionary
504
Adding a dictionary entry
504
Limitation
505 Network Optimization
506 Optimizing Network Traffic with Multiple Adaptors
506 Environments with multiple subnetwork addresses
508 Binding SIP voice traffic to one network adaptor
509 Ensuring application data separation
509
email (IMAP) Synchronization
509
Web Client Access
509
Desktop Clients (iLink Pro Desktop)
510
Mobile Clients
510
SMTP, IMAP, LDAP and others
512 Reference Documents
513 Service Recovery Manager
514 Introduction
515 Configuring Service Recovery Manager (SRM)
517 Alerts
517 CPU Usage
518 Memory Usage
xxv
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
519 Disk Usage
520 Services
522 Processes
523 Events
525 High Availability Server Configuration
526 Introduction
526 HA Fax Configuration
On the Master Server
526
On the Master & Slave Server(s)
526
On the Consolidated Server
TABLE OF CONTENTS
526
526 HA ASR Configuration
526
On the Master Server
526
On the Consolidated Server
527 Glossary
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
xxvi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
xxvii
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Introduction to Server
Configuration
In This Chapter:
Before you begin
2
Basic system maintenance
2
Questions and Answers
2
Reporting problems
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 1
2
1
Introduction to Server Configuration
Introduction
Officelinx Unified Communications Server is a voice processing system designed to function with an organization’s existing
telephone system to enhance its overall telecommunications environment. Officelinx acts as an unified messaging solution,
offering call and voice messaging control from virtually any device on the user end. System Administrative functions may also
be performed either by using a touch-tone telephone or the Windows interface from the Voice Mail server.
Before you begin
The Supervisor plays a key role in the everyday operation of the Officelinx server. It is important that the Supervisor
understands the basics of how Officelinx operates. The Supervisor should be familiar with all features available to users and
completely understand the various user guides including the current document which explains the server configuration in
detail.
Basic system maintenance
The Supervisor performs a key role in the operation of the Officelinx system. The following are some examples of the basic
duties as a Supervisor:

Add a new user to the Officelinx system

Generate reports showing basic system administration such as call counts, port use, message counts

Understand how to record the system greetings
Questions and Answers
The Supervisor is responsible for answering questions from users and having a working knowledge of how the system
operates. The Supervisor will also help new or inexperienced users become accustomed to using the system. Resources can
be found in a variety of locations, including the following documents:

Server Installation Guide

Server Configuration Guide

Client Application Guide

Telephone User Guide
Reporting problems
In the event that a user or caller reports a problem with the system, the Supervisor and/or the vendor's technical personnel
work to determine the cause of, and the solution to, the problem. Problems may be a result of one or more of the following:

User error

Insufficient training

Incorrect system configuration

Faulty hardware

Faulty software
The Supervisor plays a central role in separating those issues that can be addressed from within the organization (for
example, training or user error), and those issues that need to be addressed by the vendor's technical personnel. A complete
description of the situation is vital in determining the problem and the solution. Information should be gathered regarding
when the situation occurred, who was involved (caller and/or User), what occurred, and how the system was being used at
the time.
2
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
PBX
In This Chapter:
Introduction
5
PBX Buttons
6
General
7
Transfer
8
Call
9
Disconnect
10
Message Light
11
Inband
13
PBX Node
14
Other PBX Related Options/Configurations
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 2
4
3
PBX
Introduction
The PBX make and model is selected during the installation of Officelinx. The installer will automatically append the specific
PBX related settings to the appropriate fields when you choose a template. Due to the variance in both hardware & software
configurations that are involved in a PBX, you may have to fine-tune the settings to match your site’s specific requirements.
From the PBX settings, you will have the ability to specify exactly how the voice server will interact with the PBX and
customize the different types of codes which may be involved in the communication between devices.
This chapter explains all the fields that are involved in a PBX configuration so please use it as a guideline when creating a
custom setting for your site.
Due to the sensitive nature of server configuration, it is recommended that you backup your settings
 Note:
and other important files (e.g. messages, custom prompts) before attempting significant changes.
4
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
PBX
PBX Buttons
Button
Description
Save all the settings that you have modified in the current PBX properties.
Refresh the properties of the current PBX to view the latest changes in effect.
Modify the Manufacturer / Model of the current PBX.
Add New PBX.
Launch the SIP Configuration Wizard (only functional under SIP integration).
Start the Dial Plan editor (see Introduction on page 432 for details).
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
5
PBX
General
The General tab of PBX allows you to view your current PBX information. You may also modify your extension assignments
manually from this section.
General Tab
Manufacturer: This field displays the manufacturer of your PBX.
Model: This field displays the model of your PBX.
Version: This field displays the version of your PBX.
PBX Extension Length Fixed: Enable this checkbox to force the
digit length of the extension (e.g. length of 3 will translate to
extensions in the form of 001 instead of being simply 1). The
default fixed length will be 3 but may be modified using this field.
PBX Extension Max Length: Enter the maximum desired digit
length of the extension here. If the PBX Extension Length Fixed
checkbox is enabled, the extension length will be forced to match
the number of digits defined here. If the checkbox is not enabled,
the extension length can vary between 1 digit to the assigned
maximum in this field.
Channel Parameters: This button allows you to modify the
default parameters for a Dialogic Voice Board. Refer to the section Other PBX Related Options/Configurations on
page 14 for more information.
Fax Board Extensions: This button allows you to manually map a port number to the extension number for Fax purpose.
Refer to the section Other PBX Related Options/Configurations on page 14 for more information.
Voice Mail Extensions: This button allows you to manually map a port number to the extension number for Voice Mail
purpose. Refer to the section Other PBX Related Options/Configurations on page 14 for more information.
Caller ID Lines: This button allows you to manually integrate outside Caller ID equipment if your PBX does not support it by
default. Refer to the section Other PBX Related Options/Configurations on page 14 for more information.
6
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
PBX
Transfer
The Transfer tab of PBX allows you to specify the codes that are required by the PBX to perform various actions. These codes
are vital for communication between the voice server and the PBX.
Transfer Tab
Blind Transfer Code: Enter the code required to perform a Blind
Transfer, which is a transfer without supervision.
The codes required here are PBX dependant. Please
 Note:
contact your PBX provider for these codes. The '&' code
may be used as a universal code for flash hook.
Supervised Transfer Code: Enter the code that puts the caller on
hold and performs a supervised transfer.
No Answer Release Code: Enter the code that allows return to
caller in the event of a no answer.
Busy Release Code: Enter the code that allows return to caller in
the event of a busy signal.
Connect Code: Enter the code required to connect a call. If your
telephone switch requires a connect code (a code that must be dialed when connecting a transferred call), here is where you
would define it.
Hands Free Announce Code: Enter the code required to enable the speaker phone.
Call Pickup Code: Enter the code required to initiate the pick up of a call from another station.
Conference Code: Enter the code required to establish a conference call to record the current conversation.
Centrex Transfer Code: Enter the code required to access a Centrex call.
Centrex is a switching feature offered by the central office (usually the telephone company) that is
 Note:
usually off site. The Centrex related codes must be defined correctly in order for your PBX and the UC
server to communicate properly with the Centrex host.
Centrex Release Code: Enter the code required to release a Centrex transfer call.
Centrex Recall Code: Enter the code required to recall a Centrex transferred call.
Default Rings: Enter the number of rings before system returns a no answer signal.
Barge In Code: Enter the code required to allow a third party to enter into an existing conversation.
Centrex N/A Recall Code: Enter the code to recall a no answer Centrex call.
Centrex busy recall code: Enter the code to recall a busy transferred Centrex call.
Centrex conference code: Enter the code to establish a Centrex conference call.
Centrex cancel conference code: Enter the code to cancel a Centrex conference call.
Cancel conference code: Enter the code to cancel a conference call.
Code pause duration: Enter the duration (in milliseconds) for a pause.
Conference Splitable: Enable this checkbox to allow the conference split feature, which allows you to split a conference and
speak privately with the original party.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
7
PBX
Call
The Call tab of PBX allows you to specify the parameters which are related to the call in progress, such as ring durations or
DTMF tones that are sent to signify each stage of a call.
Call Tab
Allow Server Dialing: Enable this checkbox to allow server dialing
as opposed to user dialing.
DTMF inter-digit Timeout: Enter the DTMF inter-digit timeout of
your PBX.
DTMF dial tone: Enter the DTMF dial tone of your PBX.
DTMF call progress tone: Enable this checkbox to allow DTMF call
progress tones. Call progress tones are tones sent from the switch to
tell the caller of the progress of the call. E.g. busy.
DTMF ringing tone: Enter the DTMF ringing tone of your PBX. This
code will be used to identify the ringing status.
DTMF answer tone: Enter the DTMF answer tone of your PBX. This
code will be used to identify the answered status.
DTMF busy tone: Enter the DTMF busy tone of your PBX. This code
will be used to identify the busy status.
Blind Connection delay: Enter the delay (in milliseconds) before
the Voice Server generates a connected event for a blind transfer.
Supervised Connection delay: Enter the delay (in milliseconds) before the Voice Server generates a connected event for a
supervised transfer.
One ring duration: Enter the duration (in milliseconds) of a single PBX ring.
8
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
PBX
Disconnect
The Disconnect tab of PBX allows you to specify the parameters sent to the UC server to initiate a call disconnect (hang up).
Disconnect Tab
Hangup Code: Enter the DTMF code supplied by the PBX to signal a
disconnect.
Hangup Delay Time: Enter the length of time (in seconds) the
system will wait before hanging up after receiving the hangup code.
Silence Detection: Enter the maximum length of silence (in
seconds) that the system will detect before considering it as a
disconnect.
Noise Detection: Enter the maximum length of noise (such as dial
tone) that the system will detect before considering it as a
disconnect.
Global Tone Templates: This field displays the current frequency
settings.
Edit: This button allows you to manually edit a chosen frequency
field and configure a disconnect tone. Refer to Modify Disconnect
Tone on page 16 for detailed information.
Reset: This button resets the frequency field to default values.
You can only modify the Global Tone Templates under the systems which utilize a physical voice
 Note:
board (such as Dialogic systems). A typical IP based system will not have the ability to edit the frequencies.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
9
PBX
Message Light
The Message Light tab of PBX allows you to define the method in which message lights will be activated or deactivated on
integrated telephones.
Message Light Tab
On Code: Enter the code to turn on the message light. If this field is
left blank, the code contained in the system parameters will be used
for activating the message waiting lights. You must ensure that the
letter ’E’ is included as a suffix to the On and Off Codes. The letter ’E’
signifies ’extension’.
Off Code: Enter the code to turn off the message light. If this field is
left blank, the system uses the code contained in the system
parameters for deactivating the message waiting lights. You must
ensure that the letter ’E’ is included as a suffix to the On and Off
Codes. The letter ’E’ signifies ’extension’.
Interval Time: Enter the interval (in seconds) in which the system
will check the ports that are configured to be notified. When all
notification ports are busy, the system will check again after the
defined period of time.
Wait for Dial Tone: Enable this checkbox to instruct the system to
check for the dial tone. When the system goes off hook, it checks for
dial tone first. If no dial tone is detected, it returns to the company
greeting. If the checkbox is not enabled the system will return to the
company greeting immediately.
 Note: This field is incompatible with SIP systems.
On Hook: Enable this checkbox to instruct the system to dial the message waiting light string then go Off hook then On hook
to operate the lights. This method is utilized by certain legacy systems.
Dial Digits: Select this radio button to manually indicate which port to use to enable lighting of the message waiting light. In
the Channels field, enter the channels assigned to display the Message Waiting Light. This is for systems that dial On/Off
Code to turn message lights on/off.
Channels: Enter the channel(s) that is/are going to be used to display the Message Waiting Light. This option is only
available when Dial Digits radio button is selected.
Send Through COM: Select this radio button if the Message Waiting Light is triggered by a serial port. From the Device drop
down menu, select the COM port.
Devices: From the drop down menu, select the COM port that is going to be used for the Message Waiting Light. This option
is only available when Send Through COM radio button is selected.
CTI: Select this radio button if the system uses CTI to turn message lights on/off.
SIP: Select this radio button if the system uses SIP to turn message lights on/off.
10
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
PBX
Inband
The Inband tab of PBX allows you to simulate a C.O. Line identification feature if your telephone system does not have it
natively.
Inband Tab
Options
Integration: From the drop down menu, select the type of
integration your system uses.
Verify Inband Length: Enable this checkbox to verify if all inband
codes are the same length. This ensures that the inband codes being
sent from the PBX are correct. This setting is applicable to Mercator
and Matra switches.
Confirm Inband Signals: Enable this checkbox to indicate that the
system must confirm the inband signals. This is applicable to
Mercator and Matra switches. You must also configure the
corresponding tab when you enable this option.
Inband Use Invalid Sender as C.O.: Enable this checkbox to
indicate that the system is to use an invalid sender as a C.O. This is
applicable to Mercator and Matra switches.
Variable Length Inband Caller ID: Enable this checkbox to
indicate to the system that it can receive calls from integers of
variable length. This option is used for Inband integration for the
Mercator PBX.
CTI Device: From the drop down menu, select the device (or the port) that will be used.
Serial Integration Device: This drop down menu is only available when you choose MD110, MCI, CTI, or ASCOM from
Integration drop down list. From the drop down list, select the Serial Integration device (or the serial port) that is going to be
used.
Inband Signalling Delay: Enter the delay (in milliseconds) between packets.
Maximum Inband Digits: Enter the maximum inband digits that the system can accept.
C.O. Digits Length: Enter the digit length of the C.O. that will be accepted by the system.
Caller ID Length: Enter the digit length of the phone number that the Caller ID receives.
Delimiter: Enter the delimiter value. Leave this value as default. This field is usually used for troubleshooting purposes by
the technicians.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
11
PBX
Definition
The definition tab is only available on Inband integrations.
Add: Click this button to add a new entry.
Delete: Click this button to delete the currently selected entry.
Move Down: Click this button to move the selection bar down.
Move Up: Click this button to move the selection bar down.
Code: Enter the code that is going to be used.
Type: Define the function that the selected code is going to be
associated with. The following are the choice of functions available.

Not Defined

Login

No Answer

Busy

C.O. Call

Record Conversation

Invalid

Refresh Message Light

Extension Verify

PBX Authentication
Confirm Codes
This tab is only necessary for PBX’s that require the inband codes to
be confirmed.
Code for Confirm Login: Enter the confirmation code for login
event.
Code for Confirm No Answer: Enter the confirmation code for no
answer event.
Code for Confirm Busy: Enter the confirmation code for busy
event.
Code for Confirm C.O. Call: Enter the confirmation code for C.O.
call event.
Code for Confirm Invalid: Enter the confirmation code for invalid
event.
Code for Confirm Extension Verify (Valid): Enter the
confirmation code for valid extension verification event.
Code for Confirm Extension Verify (Invalid): Enter the
confirmation code for invalid extension verification event.
Code for Confirm PBX Authentication: Enter the confirmation code for PBX authentication.
Confirm PBX Authentication Algorithm: From the drop down menu, select the algorithm which will be used during PBX
authentication.
12
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
PBX
PBX Node
The PBX Node tab of PBX allows you to specify additional PBX Nodes manually so that the server can utilize multiple PBX’s at
the same time.
PBX Node Tab
Display Field: This field displays all the PBX nodes that have been defined.
Add: Click this button to add a new PBX node. Refer to Add / Modify PBX Node on page 14 for more information.
Remove: Click this button to remove one of the current PBX nodes.
Edit: Click this button to edit one of the current PBX nodes.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
13
PBX
Other PBX Related Options/Configurations
The following lists common scenarios and solutions involved with PBX settings.
Add / Modify PBX Node
If you have multiple PBX’s in your system, you will have to define a PBX node so that the
server will know where the calls are routed to.
PBX Network ID: Enter the PBX node network ID.
Node Description: Enter an unique name/description for the PBX node.
Node Address: Enter the PBX Node IP address.
Dial Prefix: Enter a dial prefix for the PBX node.
HuntGroup: Enter the HuntGroup of the PBX node.
HuntGroup Speech Dial: Enter the HuntGroup of the PBX node which is used for speech
dialing as opposed to typical integration.
Country Code: Enter the Country Code from which most calls will be made.
Area Code: Enter the Area Code from which most calls will be made.
Add / Modify PBX Template
PBX templates will make the configuration of a site easier for you by applying the typical settings for a selected PBX make
and model. However, since each site is unique, you must fine tune the settings to ensure proper functionality.
Adding a New PBX Template
If the PBX you wish to use does not exist as a default template, you may add your own
template for easier reference.
When you click on the Add PBX button from the PBX properties, the above window will
appear.
Add New Model to Manufacturer: Select this radio button to add another PBX Model to the list of manufacturers that are
already available.
Add New Manufacturer: Select this radio button to create a new PBX manufacturer and model.
Modifying a PBX Template
If you decide to change the PBX in your system you can reflect the changes to the UC Admin by
modifying the current PBX from the PBX Properties.
When you click on the Modify PBX Template button from the PBX properties, the above window
will appear.
Manufacturer: From the drop down menu, select the manufacturer of the PBX.
Model/Version: From the drop down menu, select the specific PBX model/version.
The selections made here will be reflected on the General tab of the PBX properties.
14
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
PBX
Caller ID Lines
While the UC system supports Caller ID, some PBX systems require that all calls first go
through a third-party Caller ID device (Rochelle, for example), which then passes the
call to the PBX.
Port Number: Enter the number of the first port.
Line Number: When you click on this field after entering the Port Number, the system
prompts you to confirm the auto adding of all line numbers.
Voice Server: Enter the PBX node.
Channel Parameters (for Dialogic)
When you install the UC system, the system automatically pre-loads the required settings regardless of the voice board it has
detected.
Channel Parameters allow you to change one or more of these predetermined settings. You can also configure UC Voice Mail
to integrate with other PBX systems here.
When you install the UC system with a Dialogic voice board, the Dialogic dialog box allows you to change one or more of
these pre-installed parameters.
 Note: Select Internal, External or Other to indicate the source of the call and the strength of the signal.
Field
Function
Start Delay
The delay, once dialing has been completed and prior to analysis for Cadence Detection,
Frequency Detection, and Positive Voice Detection, in 10 msec increments.
The default is 250.
Continuous No Signal
The maximum time of silence (no signal) allowed immediately after Cadence Detection
begins. If exceeded, a no ringback is returned in 10 msec increments.
The default is 40000.
Loop Current Delay
The delay after dialing has been completed and before beginning Loop Current
Detection, in 10 msec increments. A value of –1 will Disable Loop Current Detection.
The default is 4000.
Loop Current Delay 1
The delay after Loop Current Delay detects a transient drop in loop current and before
Call Analysis returns a connect to the application, in 10 msec increments.
The default is 100.
Hello Edge
The point at which a connect will be returned to the application.
Valid Range 1 (rising edge – immediately when a connect is detected) or 2 (falling edge
– after the end of the salutation.
The default is 2.
Continuous NonSilence
The maximum length of the first or second period of non-silence allowed. If exceeded, a
no ringback is returned in 10 msec increments.
The default is 6500.
Reserved
Reserved. This must be set to 0 (zero).
Intercept Mode Flag
This parameter enables or disables SIT-Frequency Detection, Positive Voice Detection
(PVD), and/or Positive Answering Machine Detection (PAMD), and selects the mode of
operation for Frequency Detection.
The default is 4. Do NOT alter this value. This value is only used for troubleshooting.
Reserved
Reserved. This must be set to 1.
Maximum Answer
The maximum allowable length of Answer Size. When Answer Size exceeds Maximum
Answer, a connect is returned to the application in 10 msec increments.
The default is 10000.
Answer Deglitcher
The maximum silence period allowed between words in a salutation. This parameter
should be enabled only when you are interested in measuring the length of the
salutation. Measured in 10 msec increments. A value of –1 disables this option.
The default is –1.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
15
PBX
Field
Function
Dial Tone Present
The length of time that a dial tone must be continuously present. Measured in 10 msec
units.
The default is 1000.
Dial Tone Not Present
The maximum length of time to wait before declaring dial tone failure. Measured in 10
msec increments.
The default is 3000.
Dial Tone Debounce
The maximum gap allowed in an otherwise continuous dial tone before it is considered
invalid. Measured in 10 msec increments.
The default is 100.
PAMD Fail Time
Maximum time to wait for Positive Answering Machine Detection or Positive Voice
Detection after a cadence break. Measured in 10 msec increments.
The default is 4000.
Minimum PAMD Ring
Minimum allowable ring duration for Positive Answering Machine Detection, in 10 msec
increments.
The default is 1900.
No Answer
Length of time to wait after first ringback before deciding that the call is not answered.
Measured in 10 msec increments.
The default is 30000.
Maximum Inter-ring
Delay
Maximum time to wait between consecutive ringback signals before deciding that the
call has been connected. Measured in 10 msec increments.
The default is 8000.
Modify Disconnect Tone
The UC system allows you to manually define the frequency of the signal used for the PBX
disconnect tone.
If no disconnect tone has been detected, you must first determine the
 Note:
frequency of the unrecognized prompt. To do this, use a secondary audio
application (Prompt Studio, for example). In most cases, however, you do not
need to make any changes since your disconnect settings have been pre-set
during installation.
Frequency 1: Enter the first frequency.
Frequency 2: Enter the second frequency.
Cadence On: Enter the amount of time that the signal is on.
Cadence Off: Enter the amount of time that the signal is off.
No of Cycles: Enter the number of cycles that the system analyses before reporting the disconnect signal.
 Note: Two cycles are recommended for the latter field.
16
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
PBX
Fax Board Extension
Specifying a fax board extension allows you to match a port number to an
extension number. When a fax is received by the voice mail system, the fax call
will be transferred to the specified extension.
Fax board settings must be configured only if you have either fax
 Note:
mail or fax on demand software installed. In addition, a fax board
must be installed on the fax server.
 Note: The following settings apply to all but soft fax.
Port Number: Enter the fax port on the installed fax card.
You must enter the port numbers in consecutive order. If you are specifying more than one fax port,
 Note:
they must be specified in numerical order.
Extension Number: Enter the analog extension connected to the associated port.
Voice Server: This field should be automatically defined during installation. If not, enter the Voice Server name.
PBX Node: This field should be automatically defined during installation. If not, enter the PBX node.
 Note: PBX Node is only required if you have 2 or more nodes.
Voice Mail Extension
In the UC system, you must match the port number with the line number declared
in the PBX configuration.
These are predefined during installation of the switch. For more
 Note:
information, refer to the appropriate TAPI guide.
If you are using inband integration, these extensions do not have
 Note:
to be populated. If you are using SMDI, Ericsson MD 110 or MCI
integration, the extensions must be populated.
Extension Number: Enter the first extension number.
When you click on the next Extension Number field, the system prompts you to confirm the auto adding of all line
numbers. Click Yes to let the system add the rest of the extension numbers, or No to enter the rest of the extension
numbers manually.
The extension numbers must be entered in sequential order (for example: 100, 101, 102, etc). 
 IfNote:
an extension number changes, you must specify the new port number/extension number combination.
Voice Server: Enter the Voice Server name.
PBX Node: Enter the PBX node of the extension.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
17
PBX
18
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Company
In This Chapter:
Introduction
21
Company Buttons
22
General Tab
23
Advanced Tab
24
Call Options Tab
25
Mailbox Options Tab
26
Integrated Fax Tab
27
Admin Broadcast Messages Tab
28
Synchronization Options Tab
29
Speech Options Tab
30
Company Languages Tab
31
C.O./Channel Assignment Tab
33
Passwords/Security Tab
34
AMIS Parameters Tab
35
Other Company Related Options/Configuration
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 3
20
19
Company
Introduction
The Officelinx system allows you to create a single or multiple companies on a single server with multiple configurations for
better management and segregation. Company settings will set the ground rules for security, message management, ASR
features, etc. All Feature Groups and Mailboxes under a Company will share the rules and settings established for that
Company. The Company settings are also responsible for the greetings and business hour schedules for that group.
The number of companies that you can create is determined by the terms of your license. By default,
 Note:
you must have at least one company in order for the system to function properly.
20
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Company
Company Buttons
Button
Description
Add a new company.
Copy the configuration of one company to another company. If only a single company
exists, clicking this button creates a new company.
Delete current company.
Save company settings.
Refresh company settings.
Move to first company.
Move to previous company.
Move to next company.
Move to last company.
Key mapping configuration.
Configure message menu that is employed by outside callers wishing to leave a
message in a Mailbox.
Configure functionality available while a recording is in progress.
Configure company distribution lists.
Configure company contacts.
Configure company business hours.
Configure company holidays.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
21
Company
General Tab
The General tab of Company allows you to specify general information about
the company, including name, phone number, and company Mailbox.
Company Number: This field is entered automatically when you save the
company.
Company Name: Enter the name of the company. The company name is used
to associate users with a particular company when there are two or more
companies sharing the same server. If this system is configured for only one
company, this field will not affect any functionality of the system.
Domain Name/IP Address: Enter the domain name or the company IP
address of the server.
This domain name or IP address should not be the same as
 Warning:
your mail server, especially when using IMAP synchronization or BES.
For example, if you are using company.com as your mail server
domain (e.g. user@company.com), the domain you enter here
should be something in the range of voiceserver.company.com and
never company.com.
Phone Number: Enter the company’s phone number. This information must be specified if you want to create a VPIM
address.
Use Mailboxes From: From the drop down menu, select another company if the current company is to share the Mailboxes
with another company.
Fax Extension: Enter a Mailbox that is associated with a fax extension. This Mailbox will receive all faxes directed to this
company.
Admin Mailbox: Enter the Administrator’s Mailbox. The Admin Mailbox specified must have a VPIM address defined which is
used for sending delivery notifications.
PBX Node: From the drop down menu, select the PBX node that the current company will utilize. This option is only available
if you have multiple PBXs defined in the PBX settings. You must choose a node whenever the option is available to you so
that the system can properly manage the calls.
Country: From the drop down menu, select the country in which the system is located.
Greeting Format: From the drop down menu, select the format that you wish to use to record the greetings.
Collaboration URL: Enter the URL of the collaboration service that your company is using. Collaboration services are
enabled in the Web Client.
Time Zone: Select the time difference in hours between your primary office location and Greewich Mean Time (GMT).
Relate Company to: Select the C.O. Line radio button if C.O. lines are employed to identify the company. Otherwise, select
the Port radio button. This field is used for clear identification of how incoming calls are managed in a multiple company
environment.
22
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Company
Advanced Tab
The Advanced tab of Company allows you to specify a variety of options, such
as rules followed during calls and paging options within the company.
Allow Sequential Directory: Enable this checkbox to indicate whether or not
to allow callers to access the sequential directory when they press * while
accessing the directory.
Add Number of Messages to Beeper Number: Enable this checkbox to
indicate whether or not to indicate the number of new messages in the Mailbox
when outcalling to a beeper. This is shown with an asterisk (*), followed by the
number (for example, 201 *3 indicates 3 new messages in Mailbox 201).
Play Mailbox Greeting for Express Voice Mail: Enable this checkbox to
indicate whether to play the Mailbox greeting when callers are sent to Express
Voice Mail, or merely the name prompt.
Drop Messages Less than Max Silence: Enable this checkbox to disable the
delivery of messages that are less than the specified Maximum Silence. Max
silence is defined in the PBX properties under Disconnect.
Use Silence Detection in Record Conversation: Enable this checkbox to end
a recording of conversation when silence is detected. Max silence is defined in
the PBX properties under Disconnect.
Barge in Record Conversation: Enable this checkbox to allow the barge in during recording of conversations.
Allow Dialing Extension Starting with 0: Enable this checkbox to allow the creation of extensions that lead with digit 0
(e.g. 033).
When Transferring, Play Prompt: Enable this checkbox to play the “Thank You. Please Hold” prompt when transferring
calls from the automated attendant.
Paging Transfer Code: Enter the sequence of actions or digits that the system is to dial to make a transfer.
Paging Access Code: Enter the PBX port number for paging.
Paging Release Code: Enter the sequence of actions or digits that the system is to dial to get the caller back after intercom
paging.
Paging Delay Time: Enter the length of time (in seconds) that the system is to wait after paging before transferring to the
extension.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
23
Company
Call Options Tab
The Call Options tab of Company allows you to define the specific logic related
phone calls. These settings will also determine the ground rules for users who
are calling or receiving calls through the server.
Outcall Access Code: Enter the code required for the system to access an
outside line. The code must be followed by a comma.
Account Code: Enter the appropriate long distance code. Enable the Prefix
checkbox if you require the Account Code to be dialed before the long distance
number.
Account Code Dialing Format: Enter the format required to successfully
employ the Account Code. For example, if you require the account code to be
entered both before and after the dialed number or even within the dial string,
you will define it through here.
Outcall Retry Time: Enter the period of time (in minutes) that the system is
to wait before attempting to make another outside call. The default is 2.
Minimum Message Length: Enter the minimum length (in seconds) a
recorded message should be before the system recognizes it to be valid. If a
recorded message is shorter than this value, the system will reject it. 
The default is 2.
Caller Number of Retries: Enter the number of allowable invalid attempts an outside caller is allowed before being
disconnecting from the call. 
The default is 3.
User Number of Retries: Enter the number of allowable invalid attempts an internal user is allowed before being
disconnecting from the call. 
The default is 3.
Maximum Call Length: Enter the maximum time (in minutes) that an incoming call can last. A value of 0 indicates
unlimited time. The default is 30 minutes.
Call needs to be supervised by the server (i.e. Trombone) for maximum call length to be enforced.
 Note:
Calls connected via blind transfer do not have a time limit.
Maximum Time for Call back: Enter the maximum time (in minutes) that a call-back call can last.
Inter-Digit Delay Time: Enter the maximum time (in msec) that the system should wait between inband digit strings
before reading. The default is 3000 msec.
Enhanced Call Control Trigger Key: Enter the sequence of keys that the user may press to access the Enhanced Call
Control feature. The user must have this feature enabled in the feature group for these keys to have an effect.
Oncall Reply Trigger Key: Enter the sequence of keys that the user may press to return the user to their mailbox while
utilizing the "Call Back to Sender" feature from their TUI. When the trigger keys are pressed, the sender who was called will
be disconnected and the user will be returned to their mailbox.
Number of Rings During Business Hours: Enter the number of rings before the auto attendant answers during business
hours. A value of one (1) intercepts calls quickly.
Number of Rings after Business Hours: Enter the number of rings before the auto attendant answers after business
hours. A value of one (1) intercepts calls quickly.
Press Key: From the drop down menu, select either 1 for Q and Z or 7 for Q and 9 for Z to specify the numbers to use
when entering these letters.
Free Format Digit Dialing: Enable this checkbox to allow free format dialing. Free format dialing allows callers to dial any
system extension even if a Mailbox is not associated with that extension.
24
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Company
Mailbox Options Tab
The Mailbox Options tab of Company allows you to specify the options for all
Mailboxes associated with the current company, including the Mailbox length
(number of digits representing the Mailbox), the length of the directory list, and
the method used to sort the Mailboxes.
Mailbox Length Fixed: Enable this checkbox to indicate whether or not the
Mailboxes associated with this company will be fixed in length. Otherwise, the
Mailbox number may be variable in length.
Mailbox Max Length: Enter the maximum number of digits that Mailboxes can
be.
Sorted by Last Name: Select this radio button to have system playback the
company sequential directory according to last name.
Sorted by Mailbox No: Select this radio button to have system playback the
company sequential directory according to Mailbox number.
Deactivate MWI if: Enable this checkbox to deactivate message waiting
indicators under a set condition below. Selecting this checkbox will enable the
Number of internal Recipients more than field.
Number of internal Recipients more than: Enter the maximum number of
active recipients that will deactivate the MWI. Deactivate MWI if must be
enabled to modify this value.
Refresh Mailbox Message Lights: Enable this checkbox to automatically audit Mailbox status and reset Mailbox message
lights in cases of power failures and computer reboots. This option is turned off by default and is only used when the PBX
does not have the capability to store message light status in memory.
Skip greeting termination keys: Enter the DTMF key(s) that can be used for skipping the greeting.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
25
Company
Integrated Fax Tab
The Integrated Fax tab of Company allows you to specify fax options for all
Mailboxes associated with the company.
Integrated Fax incoming folder: Enter the path of the incoming fax folder
for the current company.
Integrated Fax outgoing folder: Enter the path of the outgoing fax folder for
the current company.
FTP server address: Enter the current company’s FTP server address.
FTP server account: Enter the account name required to access the above
FTP server.
FTP server account password: Enter the password associated with the
above FTP account.
Confirm account password: Re-enter the FTP server account password.
FTP server virtual folder: Enter the path of the folder on the FTP server
where the files will be passed to and from the UC server.
Send fax expired: Enter the number of days that must pass before a fax
expires.
Repeat printing of file if no response after: Enter the length of time (in
minutes) the system will wait for a response after a print before attempting to print again.
Number of retries for printing file if no response: Enter the number of times the system will attempt a re-print if there
is no response.
26
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Company
Admin Broadcast Messages Tab
The Admin Broadcast Messages tab of Company allows you to send text
messages to all users in the current company. Please refer to Sending an
Admin Broadcast Message on page 53 for details on the procedure.
List of messages: This field displays all of the broadcast messages that has
been saved.
New: Click this button to create a new broadcast message.
Delete: Click this button to delete the selected broadcast message.
Edit: Click this button to edit the selected broadcast message.
Send: Click this button to send the selected broadcast message.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
27
Company
Synchronization Options Tab
Users can upload photographs to Google as part of their profile. The
Synchronization Options tab allows the UC System to update these profile
pictures when changes are made to the original online source files.
This tab provides company wide access for the system and requires an OAuth
administrator consumer key and password to have been created on Google first.
Public Contact: Enable to include all corporate Public contacts. Disable to include only corporate contacts in the
synchronization.
Server ID: Select the server where the profile picture are stored (e.g. Gmail).
User Account: Enter the OAuth Consumer key (account name).
User Password: Enter the OAuth Consumer secret (account password).
Confirm User Password: Re-enter the OAuth Consumer secret to confirm.
Directory: Select None to disable profile picture synchronization. Choose Pictures to synchronize with the online source
directory.
Image Directory Settings
Officelinx includes contact pictures if they have loaded a picture onto their Google profile. Image Directory Settings controls
how the UC server deals with updated picture files.
Remote directory images, except non-existing: Picture files that are already in the storage directory that have
changed since the last update will be downloaded.
All remote directory images, including non-existing: All picture files for contacts will be downloaded to the image
directory.
Only images that are not present in local directory: Picture files that are not already in the image directory will be
downloaded.
28
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Company
Speech Options Tab
The Speech Options tab of Company allows you to customize the voice
recognition options for the Company.
Voice Recognition: Enable this checkbox to activate the ASR (automatic
speech recognition) engine within the company.
Confirm Names in Voice Recognition: Enable this checkbox to play the
confirmation prompt when the caller says the name of the desired party.
Allow Barge-In in Voice Recognition: Enable this checkbox to allow the
voice recognition function to be active during prompts. For example, the caller
can say the name of the desired party during the prompt as opposed to waiting
for the prompt to finish if this option is enabled.
Allow Barge-In in Confirm Names: Enable this checkbox to allow
confirmation during the confirmation prompt. For example, the caller can say
"Yes" to be transferred right away without listening to the entire confirmation
message.
Allow Say Operator: Enable this checkbox to allow a caller to be transferred
to the operator by saying “Operator”.
Compile Grammar: Click this button to have the system recompile the
grammar files located on the system.
Voice Verification: Enable this checkbox to allow voice verification as a login method. This feature may be used in
conjunction with the traditional DTMF key input or as a stand alone option. Click on the Settings button for detailed
configuration options.
Failed Voice Menu: Select the menu that the user will be sent to after voice verification has failed. This option is only
available if voice verification is enabled.
Wait for License Timeout: Enter the time (in msec) that voice verification will wait before proceeding with a failed action.
The voice verification feature requires a license to function and in some cases, the license cannot be verified due to the high
volume of traffic on the voice verification ports. Setting a reasonable time within this field will allow the users to wait in the
queue rather than failing right away.
Contact Priority: From the drop down list, select which of your contacts (Public, Private or None) is less important when
performing speech recognition on contacts. This information will be used to streamline the way in which the server processes
the contact database.
Do not send notification when system disables contacts: Enable this checkbox to disable message notification when
contacts are disabled from the system.
Voice Verification Security Settings
DTMF:
Allow Numeric Password: Select this option to permit the user to enter their password
through the telephone keypad instead of using a voiceprint.
Allow Numeric Password after...retries: Select this option to permit the user to enter
their password through the telephone keypad after the specified number of failed attempts
using their voiceprint.
Verify only from Trusted Phone: Enable this checkbox to allow voice verification only from
trusted phones. Trusted phones are defined under the Mailbox > Address tab for each individual
address setting.
Allow Identification Number: Enable this checkbox to allow the users to log into their Mailbox by saying their
Identification Number (usually from an external number).
Force Enrollment: Enable this checkbox to force Mailbox users to enroll for voice verification at the company level instead
of individually.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
29
Company
Company Languages Tab
The Company Languages tab of Company allows you to configure the languages
for the UC system according to the modules that you have installed. The UC has
the ability to play system prompts, holiday, business hours and company
greetings in selected languages. Please refer to Add / Modify Language
Properties on page 36 for details.
Add: Click this button to add a language to selected DTMF key.
Edit: Click this button to edit the language associated with the selected DTMF
key.
Remove: Click this button to remove the language associated with the selected
DTMF key.
 Note: Each company can have its own default language.
 Note: Language availability is controlled by licensing.
30
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Company
C.O./Channel Assignment Tab
The C.O./Channel Assignment tab of Company allows you to manually define
C.O. Lines and Voice Channels to a company. This allows you to efficiently
manage your resources, especially under a multi-tenant (multi-company)
environment.
Assigning C.O. lines to companies will allow you to control which company picks
up calls on a particular C.O. line.. For example, if C.O. Line 1 is assigned to
Company 1 and C.O. Line 2 is assigned to Company 2, all calls received by C.O.
Line 1 will be answered by Company 1 while calls received by C.O. Line 2 will be
answered by Company 2. Dividing the companies through C.O. line definition
will also allow all the companies to share the port resources.
If your PBX does not support C.O. Line identification, you may divide the
companies through ports (Voice Channels). In this case, the ports will be
confined to the company they are assigned to.
You may also assign specific channels that are to be used for certain functions
in this tab to better manage your resources. You will be able to define channels
for 2 scenarios at each company: one for during business hours and one for
after hours.
When there is only one company, there is no need to dedicate
 Note:
C.O. lines.
Voice Channels will be defined automatically in the default company upon initial installation/
 Note:
configuration.
C.O. Assignment
Add: Click this button to add a C.O. assignment.
Remove: Click this button to remove the selected C.O. assignment.
Voice Channel Assignment
Add: Click this button to add a voice channel assignment.
Remove: Click this button to remove the selected voice channel assignment.
Business hours Channels
The settings defined here will be used during the business hours of the current company.
Notification: Enter the channels to be used for outcall notification (e.g. phone, beeper).
A range of channels can be addressed with a dash (e.g. 1-4)
 Note:
while many individual channels are divided by commas (e.g. 1,3).
Wakeup Call: Enter the channels to be used for the wakeup call function.
Mass Recall: Enter the channels to be used for Mass Recall.
This field can have dedicated channels. For light port activity usage, they can be the same as the
 Note:
notification ports.
Desktop: Enter the channels to be used for message playback (from Outlook and Client).
It is recommended that you allocate separate ports for Desktop and Notification to eliminate the
 Note:
chance of collisions between the two events.
AMIS: Enter the channels to be used for AMIS.
Broadcast: Enter the channels to be used for Broadcast.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
31
Company
Soft Fax: Enter the channels to be used for soft fax.
Record Conversation: Enter the channels to be used for various recording features.
After hours Channels
The settings defined here will be used outside of the business hours of the current company.
Notification: Enter the channels to be used for outcall notification (e.g. phone, beeper).
A range of channels can be addressed with a dash (e.g. 1-4) while many individual channels are
 Note:
divided by commas (e.g. 1,3).
Wakeup Call: Enter the channels to be used for the wakeup call function.
Mass Recall: Enter the channels to be used for Mass Recall.
This field can have dedicated channels. For light port activity usage, they can be the same as the
 Note:
notification ports.
Desktop: Enter the channels to be used for message playback (from Outlook and Client).
It is recommended that you allocate separate ports for Desktop and Notification to eliminate the
 Note:
chance of collisions between the two events.
AMIS: Enter the channels to be used for AMIS.
Broadcast: Enter the channels to be used for Broadcast.
Soft Fax: Enter the channels to be used for soft fax.
Record Conversation: Enter the channels to be used for various recording features.
32
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Company
Passwords/Security Tab
The Passwords/Security tab of Company gives you control over the level of
password security for the company.
Password Auto-Unlock after: Enable this checkbox to automatically unlock a
locked Mailbox (e.g. after too many login attempts, etc.) after the set amount
of time passes. The field to enter the amount of time becomes active once the
Password Auto-Unlock after checkbox is enabled.
Forced password change: Enable this checkbox to force each Mailbox user
(in the current company) to change their password after a period defined in the
text box below. The field to enter the period becomes active once the Forced
password change checkbox is enabled.
Enable Password change every X day(s): Enter the number of days after
which a Mailbox user must change their password. For example, if you enter 30
in this field, users will be forced to change their password every 30 days. This
field becomes active when Forced password change is enabled.
You must enter a value greater than 0 day(s) on this field
 Note:
when utilizing this feature. This is also true when you are utilizing
force password change upon reset feature.
Password length Fixed: Enable this checkbox to establish a fixed length for passwords.
Password Length/Minimum Password length: When Password length Fixed is enabled, enter the length for fixed
passwords. For example, if you want all Mailbox passwords to be seven characters long, enter 7 in this field. When Password
length Fixed is not enabled, enter the minimum allowed length for passwords. Longer passwords can be used if desired.
Default User password: Enter the default password for all new Mailbox accounts created under current company.
Ask to change password on first access: Select the Yes radio button to force the users to change their password when
they first log in to their mailbox. Select No to allow the users to use the default password continuously.
Allow password to be same as Mailbox number: Enable this checkbox to allow a user’s Mailbox number and password to
be the same (i.e. the password for Mailbox ’1234’ can be set as ’1234’).
Allow sequential numbers in password: Enable this checkbox if you want to allow users to use sequential numbers in
their password (e.g. ’12345’).
Allow repeat number in password: Enable this checkbox to allow repeated numbers in the password (e.g. '55555').
Allow reuse of passwords: Enable this checkbox to allow a previous password to be reused. The number of times a
password can be reused is defined in the field below.
Number of periods where passwords cannot be reused: Enter the period in which the old password becomes reusable.
(i.e. if you enter ’2’ in this field, a user can use a specific password again after 2 cycles of enforced password changes while
entering '0' allows the users to reuse the same password continuously).
Number of incorrect attempts after Mailbox is locked: Enter the number of failed user login attempts allowed before a
Mailbox is locked.
Allow only alphanumeric passwords (IMAP/POP3) from all clients: Enable this checkbox to allow alphanumeric
passwords (IMAP/POP3) from all clients. If disabled, only all numeric passwords can be used.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
33
Company
AMIS Parameters Tab
The AMIS Parameters tab of Company allows you to specify the AMIS (Audio
Messaging Interchange Specification) settings. AMIS is a standard that enables
voice messaging systems produced by different vendors to be networked
together.
Auto Add New Sites: Enable this checkbox to automatically add sites that are
not registered to the network database. The Description field of the autoadded sites will show the date the site was auto-added.
Loop Back Request ID: Enter the AMIS loop back test number for this site.
For LOCAL sites, this defines the loop back test for incoming calls from other
sites.
Admin Message User ID: Enter the user ID that will receive messages that
cannot be delivered or returned.
The default value for this field is blank. If the field is left
 Note:
blank, undeliverable and returned messages will be deleted. This
field is used for local sites only.
System ID Number: Enter an unique string that identifies this company to all
other sites as an AMIS site. It will also identify the callback telephone number.
Digital Timeout For Send: Enter the number of seconds to wait for all digits before timeout. The default is 15.
Digit Timeout For Receive: Enter the number of seconds to wait for all digits before timing out. The default is 15.
Packet Delay For Send: Enter the number of seconds the system should wait before sending a time out message. The
default is 3.
Packet Delay For Receive: Enter the number of seconds the system should wait before sending a time out message. The
default is 3.
34
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Company
Other Company Related Options/Configuration
Add C.O./Voice Channel Assignment
Line Answering parameters define how the telephone system and the auto attendant system ports are utilized. When more
than one company shares the same telephone system, it is possible to set-up the system with "Floating Ports." This means
both companies can share the same Inbound Ports.
However, the C.O. Lines used by each company must be identified so that the system knows which company should pick up
the call. For example, if you have two companies using a four port system and each company has two incoming C.O. Lines,
C.O. Lines 1 and 2 for company A, and C.O. Lines 3 and 4 for company B, both companies will use Inbound Ports 1 to 4, or as
many as you have installed.
When there is only one company, there is no need to dedicate any C.O. lines. These assignments
 Note:
do not have to be independent of one another if you setup multi-tenanting with C.O. Line assignment.
Under voice channel allocation you must configure channels that have been allocated to this particular
company. If the UC server is set up for only one company, follow the outline for a single company. For
multiple companies, follow the outline for Multi-Tenanting.
Adding a C.O. Assignment Entry
From: Enter the first number of C.O. lines that the current company will use to receive incoming
calls.
To: Enter the last number of C.O. lines that the current company will use to receive incoming calls.
If you want to add a single entry, simply enter the same number in the From and To field (e.g. From:
 Note:
1, To: 1).
If your telephone system does not have C.O. Line identification, you may simulate C.O. Line
 Note:
identification. Set up the C.O. Lines to ring into real extensions that are programmed to forward all calls to
Server Pilot. On the “Inband Parameters” screen, enter the inband that you would normally receive from a
forwarded extension into the Parameter 190 - "Inband Outside C.O. Call". On the company screen, enter
the extension number of this forwarded extension in the C.O. Lines field. 

For example, Extension 123 is to be used to identify a call for company A. The code sent by the telephone
system to the server is 99E. In parameter 190, enter 99E. On the company screen, in the C.O. Lines field
enter From: 123 and To: 123.

Companies must be listed sequentially according to C.O. Line Number whenever multi-tenanting based on
C.O. Line Number is used.
Adding a Voice Channel Assignment Entry
From: Enter the first voice channel that will be used by the current company.
To: Enter the last voice channel that will be used by the current company.
 Note: In majority of cases, the channels will be assigned automatically upon UC server installation.
If you want to add a single entry, simply enter the same number in the From and To field (e.g. From:
 Note:
1, To: 1).
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
35
Company
Add / Modify Language Properties
Language: From the drop down menu, select a language.
Operator: From the drop down menu, select the mailbox number of the company operator
(receptionist) for this language. This allows callers to transfer to this extension when they press
zero (0) to speak to an operator in the preferred language.
Greeting: From the drop down menu, select a company greeting to be associated with this
language.
Operator Schedule
Refer to Operator Schedule on page 49 for more information.
Operator Keyword(s)
Operator Keywords will be recognized by the ASR system which will then transfer the call to the
default operator when the keyword is spoken by the caller.
Cancel Keyword(s)
Cancel Keywords will be recognized by the ASR system to cancel input when the keyword is spoken by
the callers.
Login Verification Keyword(s)
Login Verification Keywords will be recognized by the ASR system to send the caller to the
corresponding mailbox to login. The caller will have to say additional information (e.g. their
name, ID number) if the system does not recognize the user right away. The caller must be a
voice verification user to use this feature.
Recognition Keyword(s)
Recognition keywords are used by the ASR engine to match the voice print of the user during
voice verification. It is best to choose words that are easy to pronounce that also have a good
mixture of vowels and consonants.
TTS Voice
Female: From the drop down menu, select the female voice that will be used for the current
language.
Male: From the drop down menu, select the male voice that will be used for the current language.
TTS Default: Select Female radio button to make the default TTS voice female or Male radio button to make the default TTS
voice male.
Set Language as Default: Enable this checkbox to make the current language the default for the Company.
Active: Enable this checkbox to activate the current language. If not activated, the language will be unavailable in the
system when multiple languages are present.
36
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Company
Business Hours
The Business Hours dialog box allows you to designate your company's office
hours. These business hours are used in conjunction with Greeting Times to play the appropriate greeting.
Buttons
Button
Description
Delete the entire Business Hours schedule.
Save Business Hours schedule.
View a report of all Business Hours schedules.
Create a new Business Hours schedule entry.
Delete the current Business Hours schedule entry.
Move to first Business Hours schedule entry.
Move to previous Business Hours schedule entry.
Move to next Business Hours schedule entry.
Move to last Business Hours schedule entry.
Business Hours Configuration
Schedule Enabled: Enable this checkbox to activate the current schedule.
Closed Greeting: From the drop down menu, select the phrase that you
want to play when a call is received outside of business hours.
Days: Select the checkboxes of the days of the week on which you want the
greeting to run.
Time From: Scroll to the time (hours and minutes in 24-hour format) that
the greeting is to start, or manually enter the time in the field.
Time To: Scroll to the time (hours and minutes in 24-hour format) that the greeting is to end, or manually enter the time in
the field.
Note: Select the All Day checkbox if you want the greeting to play by default, regardless of the time. If no
 time
is entered in the Time From/Time To fields, the system will select All Day for its default value.
Note: A value of From 13:00 to no value indicates 1:00 PM to midnight. The minimum value is 0:00
 and
the maximum value is 23:59.
 Note: The From field can not be greater than the To field.
Greeting: From the drop down menu, select the greeting that is to play during the specified business hour.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
37
Company
Company Contacts
The Admin console allows you to create company contacts.
Company Contacts Buttons
Button
Description
Add new Company Contact.
Delete selected Company Contact.
Edit selected Company Contact.
Search for a Company Contact.
Adding / Modifying a Contact
General
Speech Enable: Enable this checkbox to allow this contact to be dialed using
voice recognition.
User Name: Enter the contact’s name as you want it to appear in the list.
Gender: From the drop down menu, select the gender for the contact.
Personal Info
Title: From the drop down menu, select a salutation for the contact (e.g. Mr.)
First Name: Enter the contact’s first name.
Middle Name: Enter the contact’s middle name.
Last Name: Enter the contact’s last name.
Suffix: From the drop down menu, select a suffix for the contact’s (e.g. Jr.).
Birthday: Enter or click on the ellipsis button to select it from a calendar.
Business Info
Company: Enter the name of the contact’s company.
Job Title: Enter the contact’s official job title.
Office: Enter the location name of the office where the contact works.
Department: Enter the name of the company department in which the contact works.
Business Address
Address: Enter the contact's address directly or through the dialog box by pressing the Address button.
Phone: Enter the contact’s primary telephone number.
Phone 2: Enter the contact's secondary telephone number.
Fax: Enter the contact’s fax number.
Mobile: Enter the contact’s mobile phone number.
Beeper: Enter the contact’s beeper number.
email: Enter the contact’s email address.
Web Site: Enter the contact’s business or personal web site.
38
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Company
Description: Enter a short description for your reference.
Other Info
Use the Other Info tab to enter additional personal information for the
contact.
Click the Address button to include more detailed address details.
Notes
Use the Notes tab to enter any notes/comments about the contact.
User-defined Info
Use the User-defined Info tab to create your own entries for this contact.
For example, enter a contact's nickname in the space provided here. In such a
case, you would click on the Add button. The New Field dialog box appears.
If that contact's nickname was 'Growler', you would enter ‘Nickname’ in the
Name field and 'Growler' in the Value field, then click OK.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
39
Company
Compile Grammar
Each time you create a Mailbox, you enter the first and last name of the user.
Using speech recognition technology, the system allows a caller to speak a
user's name and be directly transferred to the appropriate Mailbox. Creating
and compiling the grammar file allows you to maximize the ASR/Voice
Verification functionality.
When Mailboxes are added or names are modified, grammar compilation is
necessary and will automatically be scheduled 5 minutes after the last change
is made. To compile grammar manually, go to the Company > Speech
Options tab and click on the Compile Grammar button.
Compiling Grammar also does the following:
40

Allows people to say the name of contacts.

Allows people to say the name of the party that they wish to message.

Compiles the Voice Verification keyword list.

Compiles the list of people who have Voice Verification enabled.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Company
Distribution List
The UC system allows you to create a distribution list consisting of one or more
message recipients. This enables you to send a voicemail, email, or fax to more than one user simultaneously.
When creating the distribution list you can add internal users, users on a site that is networked via AMIS to the server, users
on a site that is networked via VPIM to the server, and external email users. This allows you to send messages to any user
with one of these profiles.
Each Mailbox has the ability to hold all the distribution lists that you need, each consisting of an unlimited number of
Mailboxes.
When you are viewing a personal distribution list that consists of both Private & Public contacts,
 Note:
you will only see the Public contacts on the list from the Admin. However, the list still holds the Private
contacts and can be accessed by the user who created the contact. This ensures the privacy of individual
users and their personal contacts.
Distribution List Buttons
Button
Description
Create a new Distribution List.
Delete current Distribution List.
Save current Distribution List.
Move to first Distribution List.
Move to previous Distribution List.
Move to next Distribution List.
Move to last Distribution List.
Distribution List Configuration
List Number: Enter the Distribution List number.
List Name: Enter a name for the Distribution List.
The list name can consist of any combination of
 Note:
alphanumeric characters. If you require the voice mail system
to read your distribution lists to you, it will read the characters
that you have entered in this field through the telephone
handset using the Text-to-Speech (TTS) feature.
Both the list number and list name must be unique within
 Note:
a company.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
41
Company
After Selecting the Item(s) on the Left Pane:
Add: Click on this button to add the selected entries to the Distribution List.
Due to the nature of Remote Site entries you must add them individually. Please refer to the below
 Note:
section to learn more about adding entries to the Distribution List from Remote Sites.
Add All: Click on this button to add all Mailbox entries to the Distribution List.
After Selecting the Item(s) on the Right Pane:
Remove: Click on this button to remove the selected entries from the Distribution List.
Remove All: Click on this button to remove all entries from the Distribution List.
Adding an Remote Site Entry
After Selecting a Remote Site Number from the Left Pane:
Enter the address of the user/Mailbox/extension that you wish to reach.
 Note: An AMIS address must be numeric. A VPIM address can be alphanumeric.
Adding a Manual Entry (Email/Fax/SMS/Phone)
You may add Email, SMS Email, Fax and SMS Phone entries manually to the distribution list.
email: Enter the full email address then click on the Add button.
SMS email: Enter the full SMS email address then click on the Add button.
FAX: Enter the FAX number then click on the Add button. Alternatively, click on the ellipsis button to open a dialogue to
define country code, area code and phone number separately.
Phone: Enter the Phone number then click on the Add button. Alternatively, click on the ellipsis button to open a dialogue to
define country code, area code and phone number separately.
SMS Phone: Enter the SMS Phone number then click on the Add button. Alternatively, click on the ellipsis button to open a
dialogue to define country code, area code and phone number separately.
42
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Company
During Record Menu
The During Record Menu allows you to configure a message menu that will be
used by outside callers during a message recording session.
During Record Menu Buttons
Button
Description
Delete current During Record Menu.
Save current During Record Menu.
During Record Menu Configuration
Menu Name: Enter a name for the sub menu.
Actions: Drag and drop an action in this panel to the DTMF key of choice. By
assigning actions to specific keys, outside callers will be presented with the
actions you have defined.
Click Save when finished.
Action
Function
Append to Recorded Message
Adds the message to a previously recorded message.
Cancel Message and Exit
Cancels the message and exits.
Rerecord Message
Allows a caller to rerecord a message.
Review Recorded Message
Plays back the recorded message for review.
Send Recorded Message
Sends the message to the destination. When you
attach this function to a DTMF key the following
window will appear.

Urgent: Enable this checkbox to mark the
message as urgent.
Certified: Enable this checkbox to notify the
caller when the message is received.
Confidential: Enable this checkbox to restrict the receiver from
forwarding the message.
Do not play prompt: Enable this checkbox to disable the prompt, if
desired. The default value is to enable the prompt.
Toggle Certified Flag
Flags message as certified.
Toggle Confidential Flag
Flags the message as confidential.
Toggle Mass Recall
Enables mass recall.
Toggle Urgent Flag
Flags the message as urgent.
Transfer to Operator
Sends the caller to the company operator.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
43
Company
Holidays
The Holidays parameter allows you to specify holidays so that an appropriate
greeting can be played on that day. You can enter as many holiday dates as you require.
Holidays Buttons
Button
Description
Create a new Holiday entry.
Delete the current Holiday entry.
Delete all Holiday entries.
Save Holiday entries.
View a report of all Holidays.
Configuring Holidays
When the Company starts with a Voice Menu, the
 Note:
Holidays phrase will only take effect if the Phrase field says
“Company Active Greeting” in the Voice Menu. This tells the
system to use the Phrase defined on the Greetings tab of the
Holiday screen, and to check if the current day is a Holiday.
You can also double click on the date instead of manually
 Note:
adding a Holiday entry on the selected date by clicking on the
button.
Month: From the drop down menu, select the month that the holiday appears in.
Year: Select or enter the year in which the holiday appears in.
Start Time: Select or enter the start time of the holiday. The callers will hear the selected greeting and be sent to the define
Voice Menu starting at the define time on the selected holiday. The holiday will expire at 23:59 PM of that day.
All day: Enable this checkbox to honor the holiday for the entire day. The callers will hear the selected greeting and be sent
to the define Voice Menu starting at 12:00 AM of the holiday. The holiday will expire at 23:59 PM of that day.
Holiday Greeting: From the drop down menu, select the prompt that corresponds to the selected holiday.
You must record a new prompt for each holiday that you add. To record these greetings, refer to
 Note:
Recording a company greeting on page 385.
Voice Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Voice Menu that the system will use during the Holiday hours.
44
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Company
Key Mapping
The Key Mapping dialog allows you to specify single digit key access, enabling
callers to perform actions using a telephone keypad. For example, you can setup your system to allow a caller to press <1>
for the Sales Department, <2> for Technical Support, and so on.
Before customizing key mapping, you must be aware of the default keys:
*
Directory (access to company directory)
#
Login (user's access to the system)
0
Operator
Key Mapping Buttons
Button
Description
Delete current Key Mapping.
Save current Key Mapping.
Open Start Menu Schedule. Use this schedule to define when the
custom Key Mapping is going to be used.
Create a new Sub Menu.
Delete the current Sub Menu.
Move to first Sub Menu.
Move to previous Sub Menu.
Move to next Sub Menu.
Move to last Sub Menu.
Search for a Sub Menu.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
45
Company
Key Mapping Configuration
Creating a key mapping sub menu allows the user to create a series of different
key mapping definitions based on different times and days of the week. For
example, if a caller presses 1 in the morning, they are transferred to Sales. If
they press 1 when the company is closed, however, the system transfers the call
to the west coast office where operations are still open to handle the call.
Menu Name: Enter a name for current key mapping. This is for administrator
use only and has no affect on performance.
Sub Menu Number: This number is automatically assigned when you create a
sub menu.
Extension Dialing: Enable this checkbox to allow callers to transfer to a Mailbox
user by pressing the DTMF keys (i.e. if you set 2 to be a disconnect, the user can
enter 2022 to be transferred to Mailbox 2022 instead of being disconnected).
Description: Enter a description for current key mapping sub menu. This is for
administrator use only and has no affect on performance.
Actions: This field displays a list of predefined actions you can configure in the automated attendant. The following actions
are available for key mapping:
Action
Function
Disconnect
Hangs up the call
Recall Caller
Recalls the caller out of the Voice Menu of a defined Mailbox.
Note: The DTMF Key assigned to this action cannot be the same as the
first number of the user’s Mailbox number. For example, if a user has the
Mailbox number 255, the Recall Caller action cannot be assigned to DTMF
key 2.
Send to Company Operator
Sends the caller to the company operator.
Send to Directory
Sends the caller to the company directory.
Send to Login
Allows the caller to log into the system as a user.
Send to Mailbox
Transfers the caller to a defined Mailbox.
Send to Sequential Directory
Lists the company directory by name in alphabetical order.
Send to Voice Mail
Sends the caller to the Mailbox that was entered.
Note: This action works in the same way as if you had pressed # E# (for
example, 7#E#).
Send to Voice Menu
This transfers the call into a custom Voice Menu for further processing.
There are two methods available to add an action to a DTMF key:
46

Highlight an action, right click and select Set Action To. Select a DTMF key to match to the action. For example, if
Disconnect is to be set to DTMF key 1, right click on Disconnect, click on Set Action to, and then select 1. Disconnect
should be assigned to DTMF key 1.

Click and drag the desired action to the DTMF Key in the right pane.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Company
Key Mapping Schedule
Key Mapping Schedule Buttons
Button
Description
Delete Key Mapping Schedule.
Save Key Mapping Schedule.
View a list of all Key Mapping Schedules.
Create a new Schedule.
Delete the current Schedule.
Move to first Schedule.
Move to previous Schedule.
Move to next Schedule.
Move to last Schedule.
Key Mapping Schedule Configuration
Schedule Enabled: Enable this checkbox to active the key mapping schedule.
Default Start Menu: From the drop down menu, select the start menu that
should be active when there is no start menu defined individually in the sub
menus.
Description: Enter a brief title/description of the sub menu for your reference.
Time
Start and End: Enter the times between which the sub menu will be active.
Enabling the All day checkbox will make the sub menu active for 24hrs.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
47
Company
Recurrence Pattern:
None: Select this radio button to have the sub menu occur only once for the period of time with no recurrence.
Daily: Select this radio button to indicate that the sub menu will be active on a day-by-day basis. Afterwards, you will have
(2) options:
Every weekday: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to be active every weekday.
Every X day(s): Select this radio button to specify an interval of activity for the sub menu (every second day
by entering 2 in the field, for example).
If you wish to define the settings as Every weekday, please opt for the Weekly settings and define the
 Note:
weekdays manually. The UC Admin algorithm favors the weekly setting and will enhance your user
experience.
Weekly: Select this radio button to indicate that the sub menu will be active on a weekly
basis. Then, in the Recur Every X week(s) on field, enter an interval of activity for the
sub menu (every third week by entering 3 in the field, for example). Finally, check the
boxes of the days of the week you want the sub menu to be in effect. For example, if you
wanted a sub menu to be active every second Monday, Wednesday and Thursday, you
would enter 2 in the field and select the Monday, Wednesday and Thursday checkboxes.
Monthly: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to recur on a monthly basis.
You have two (2) options:
Select the Day radio button and indicate which day of the month you want the sub menu
to be used.
Select the The radio button and indicate which day of a month you want the sub menu to be used. For example, if you want
the sub menu to be active on the second Monday of every second month, you would select the The radio button, select
Second and Monday, and enter 2.
Yearly: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to be active on a specific day of
the year. You have two (2) options:
Select the Every radio button and indicate the day of the year on which you want the sub
menu to be active.
Select the The radio button and indicate a specific day of a specific month of the year on which you want the sub menu to be
active. For example, if you want the sub menu to be active on the second Thursday of every March, you would select the
radio button and select Second, Thursday and March from the drop down menu.
Range of Recurrence
Start: Select the date on which the first occurrence of the sub menu is to take effect.
 Note: The sub menu must have a recurrence pattern defined.
No end Date: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to occur indefinitely
End After: Select this radio button if you want to disable the sub menu after the specified number of times.
End by: Select this radio button if you want to disable the sub menu by the specified date.
Start Menu
From the drop down menu, select the start menu that will run during the scheduled sub menu.
 Note: If not defined, this will default to the sub menu defined in Default Start Menu field.
48
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Company
Operator Schedule
Following the creation of operators and their languages, you can specify when each operator is to receive calls based on their
spoken languages through the Operator Schedule feature.
Operator Schedule Buttons
Button
Description
Delete Operator Schedule.
Save Operator Schedule.
View a list of all Operator Schedules.
Create a new Schedule.
Delete the current Schedule.
Move to first Schedule.
Move to previous Schedule.
Move to next Schedule.
Move to last Schedule.
Operator Schedule Configuration
Schedule Enabled: Enable this checkbox to activate the current operator
schedule.
Language: From the drop down menu, select a language for the operator.
Default Operator: From the drop down menu, select the default operator that
will be used by the schedules unless a specific operator has been defined.
Description: Enter a description or name.
Time
Start and End: Enter the times between which the sub menu will be active.
Enabling the All day checkbox will make the sub menu active for 24hrs.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
49
Company
Recurrence Pattern:
None: Select this radio button to have the sub menu occur only once for the period of time with no recurrence.
Daily: Select this radio button to indicate that the sub menu will be active on a day-by-day basis. Afterwards, you will have
(2) options:
Every weekday: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to be active every weekday.
Every X day(s): Select this radio button to specify an interval of activity for the sub menu (every second day
by entering 2 in the field, for example).
If you wish to define the settings as Every weekday, please opt for the Weekly settings and define the
 Note:
weekdays manually. The UC Admin algorithm favors the weekly setting and will enhance your user
experience.
Weekly: Select this radio button to indicate that the sub menu will recur on a weekly
basis. Then, in the Recur Every X week(s) on field, enter an interval of activity for the
sub menu (i.e. 3 for every third week). Finally, check the boxes of the days of the week
you want the sub menu to be in effect. For example, if you wanted a sub menu to be
active every second Monday, Wednesday and Thursday, you would enter 2 in the field and
select the Monday, Wednesday and Thursday checkboxes.
Monthly: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to recur on a monthly basis.
You have two (2) options:
Select the Day radio button and indicate which day of the month you want the sub menu
to be used.
Select the The radio button and indicate which day of a month you want the sub menu to be used. For example, if you want
the sub menu to be used on the second Monday of every second month, you would select the The radio button, select
Second and Monday, and enter 2.
Yearly: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to be recur on a specific day of
the year. You have two (2) options:
Select the Every radio button and indicate the day of the year on which you want the sub
menu to be used.
Select the The radio button and indicate a specific day of a specific month of the year on which you want the sub menu to be
used. For example, if you want the sub menu to be used on the second Thursday of every March, you would select the radio
button and select Second, Thursday and March from the drop down menu.
Range of Recurrence
Start: Select the date on which the first occurrence of the sub menu is to take effect.
 Note: The sub menu must have a recurrence pattern defined.
No end Date: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to occur indefinitely
End After: Select this radio button if you want to disable the sub menu after the specified number of times.
End by: Select this radio button if you want to disable the sub menu by the specified date.
Operator
From the drop down menu, select the operator that will be active during the defined period.
50
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Company
Send Message Menu
The Send Message Menu allows you to configure a message menu that will be
used by outside callers who decide to leave messages in Mailboxes on your company system.
Send Message Menu Buttons
Button
Description
Save current Send Message Menu.
Create a new Send Message Menu.
Delete the current Sub Menu.
Move to first Sub Menu.
Move to previous Sub Menu.
Move to next Sub Menu.
Move to last Sub Menu.
Search for a Sub Menu.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
51
Company
Send Message Menu Configuration
Menu Name: Enter a name for the current Send Message Menu.
No. of Retries: Enter the maximum number of retries a caller is allowed
within the sub menu.
Play Method: From the drop down menu, select the play method to use.
Sub Menu Phrase: From the drop down menu, select the phrase to use for
the sub menu.
If you are using a language other than English, you must
 Note:
define your sub menu phrases so that they correspond to the
language that you are using. By default, the system installs the
English language ranges. If you are using a French system, you
must select the .VOX file in the French range that corresponds
to the default English .VOX file. For example, SAL9501.VOX is
installed by default. To define the French equivalent, you must
select SA9551.VOX (the last digit must match), and so on, for
each Sub Menu Phrase.
For more information on sub menu phrases in the Send Message Menu, refer to chapter 5 on page 71
 Note:
of this guide.
Description: Enter an accurate title/description for the sub menu.
Timeout: Enter the amount of time (in milliseconds) the caller has for input before the system processes it.
At the end of the defined timeout, if there is no input, the system will say “I'm sorry, I did not
 Note:
understand that.” If there was an input, system will check and process it if it matches any action.
Actions: Drag and drop an action in this panel to the DTMF key of choice. By assigning actions to specific keys, outside
callers will be presented with the actions you have defined.
Action
Function
Append to Recorded Message
Adds the message to a previously recorded message.
Cancel Message and Exit
Cancels the message and exits.
Re-record Message
Allows a caller to re-record a message.
Review Recorded Message
Replays the recorded message for review.
Send Recorded Message
Sends the message to the destination. When you
attach this function to a DTMF key the following
window will appear.
Urgent checkbox to mark the message as urgent.
Certified checkbox to notify the caller when the
message is received.
Confidential checkbox to restrict the receiver from forwarding the
message.
Do not play prompt checkbox to disable the prompt, if desired. The
default value is to enable the prompt.
52
Toggle Certified Flag
Flags message as certified.
Toggle Confidential Flag
Flags the message as confidential.
Toggle Mass Recall
Enables mass recall.
Toggle Urgent Flag
Flags the message as urgent.
Transfer to Operator
Sends the caller to the company operator.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Company
Sending an Admin Broadcast Message
You can send Admin Broadcast Messages to all users in the current company.
The message will be sent as a text message to the VPIM address defined in the
mailbox.
New: Click on this button to add a new admin broadcast message entry.
Delete: Click on this button to delete the selected entry.
Edit: Click on this button to edit the selected entry.
Send: Click on this button to send the selected message.
Add / Modify a Admin Broadcast Message
Send: Click on this button to send the message you are currently
creating/editing.
Save: Click on this button to save the current message.
Subject: Enter the subject of the message.
Body: Enter the content of the message.
Confirmation
Since Admin Broadcast Message is a mass messaging tool, you may be asked to confirm your
action. Click Yes to send your message or No to cancel the message. Once a message has
been sent, it cannot be recalled.
When the message has been sent, you will see the following prompt. Click OK to continue.
53
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Company
54
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Feature Group
In This Chapter:
Introduction
56
Feature Group Buttons
57
General Tab
58
Storage Options Tab
59
Notification Options Tab
60
Transfer Options Tab
62
Transfer Types Tab
64
Mailbox Options Tab
65
Message Options Tab
66
Synchronization Options Tab
68
DID Properties Tab
69
Speech Options Tab
70
Other Feature Group Related Options/Configuration
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 4
56
55
Feature Group
Introduction
Feature Group, similar to Company, determines the rules for the Mailboxes that are associated with it. By creating numerous
Feature Groups for different purposes, you will be able to allocate users to custom settings with a single click, rather than
having to individually assign multiple rules to each mailbox. The features that the FG is able to manage include recording
limits, message expiration, notification, transfer supervision, transfer options, IMAP settings and other features that are
related to the mailboxes. Feature Group will prove to be an invaluable tool, especially if you are managing large numbers of
users.
Feature Group Buttons
Button
Description
Add a new Feature Group.
Delete current Feature Group.
Save current Feature Group.
Refresh current Feature Group settings.
Move to first Feature Group.
Move to previous Feature Group.
Move to next Feature Group.
Move to last Feature Group.
56
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Feature Group
General Tab
The General tab of Feature Group allows you to configure the identification
and localized settings.
Group Number: Enter the number that will be assigned to the Feature
Group. By default, the next available number will be assigned to a new
Feature Group. The range of possible Feature Group numbers is 1-999.
Group Name: Enter a name for the Feature Group.
Mailbox Language: From the drop down menu, select the default
language the users will hear when picking up messages.
Caller Language: From the drop down menu, select the default language
that the caller is greeted by if the caller does not choose a language when
prompted by the automated attendant.
Message Format: From the drop down menu, select the format the
messages will be stored and played back in.
Note: If you are integrating Lotus Notes with the UC system you must select the WAV format and must use
 the
Dialogic JTC voice card.
The message format selections available are defined by the type of board drivers that are loaded on
 Note:
the system.
If set to the WAVMSGSM6106, 6108, 61011 or WAVETPGSM6106, 6018, 61011 formats, the user will
 Note:
not have full Control Key capabilities when using the Telephone User interface. Using the WAVGSM* formats
will disable the fast-forward and rewind capabilities while listening to a message.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
57
Feature Group
Storage Options Tab
The Storage Options tab of Feature Group allows you to configure
message storage settings that will be enforced on the Mailboxes
associated with the current Feature Group.
Maximum Number of Messages: Enter the maximum number of
messages that are allowed for each Mailbox associated with the current
Feature Group. The default is 200, and the maximum value is 32,000.
The maximum messages value should be based on the
 Hint:
needs of the user. You should allow more than enough message
storage space for each user to make sure that no messages get
lost when a Mailbox reaches capacity. Ten (10) megabytes of hard
drive space is equal to approximately one hour of voice message
storage.
The maximum value for this field is ignored if the mailbox
 Note:
is UM synchronized with an email environment.
Users may experience performance degradation with mailboxes having more than 32,000
 Warning:
messages.
Mailbox almost full pop up: From the drop down menu, select a percentage value at which the users will be notified that
their Mailbox is almost full in Web Client.
Maximum Message Length: Enter the maximum length of time (in seconds) that a recorded message can be for any given
Mailbox within the Feature Group.
This number is specified in seconds. This value should be set higher than the anticipated message
 Note:
length to ensure that callers are not disconnected in the middle of a message.
Maximum Greeting Length: Enter the maximum length of time (in seconds) that a recorded greeting can be for any
Mailbox within the Feature Group. The maximum greeting length is 600 seconds.
Days to Keep Unread Messages: Enter the number of days the system will store unread messages before moving them to
the deleted items folder.
Days to Keep Read Messages: Enter the number of days the system is to store read messages before moving them to the
deleted items folder.
Days to Keep Sent Messages: Enter the number of days the system will keep sent messages before moving them to the
deleted items folder.
Days to Keep Deleted Messages: Enter the number of days to keep deleted messages in the deleted items folder. The
messages are permanently deleted when they are removed from the deleted items folder.
Days to Keep Calls History: Enter the number of days to keep the call logs for inbound and outbound calls.
Maximum Conversation Length: Enter the maximum length of time (in minutes) that a conversation can be between two
parties before the call is ended by the system. The default is 60 minutes.
The call needs to be supervised (e.g. trombone transfer) in order for the system to restrict the
 Note:
conversation length.
58
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Feature Group
Notification Options Tab
Notification Options in the Feature Group allows you to configure Message
Waiting Light indicators along with paging and other outside notification
methods that are enabled for new messages. These settings will be
enforced on the Mailboxes associated with the current Feature Group.
Message Light
Message Light Activation: Enable this checkbox to allow the message
waiting light to be turned on under the conditions specified.
If you have telephone sets that provide for message
 Note:
waiting lights as well as some that do not, make sure that
separate Feature Groups are assigned for each type of set. Deselect Message Lights for the Feature Group that does not have
message waiting lights.

If you have any Mailboxes that do not have a corresponding
telephone extension (for example, phantom Mailboxes that are
used for Voice Menus, guest Mailboxes), do not enable this
feature, as there are no message lights to activate.
ON For All Msgs: Enable this checkbox to turn on the message waiting light (send ON code) when a new message arrives.
OFF For All Msgs: Enable this checkbox to deactivate the message waiting light (send OFF code) when at least one new
message is read.
OFF When No New Msg: Enable this checkbox to deactivate the message waiting light (send OFF code) when no new
messages are in the user's Mailbox.
No of ON Retries: Enter the number of retries the system will attempt when activating message light fails.
No of OFF Retries: Enter the number of retries the system will attempt when deactivating message light fails.
ON Between Retries: Enter the duration (in minutes) that the system will wait in between attempts to activate the
message light.
OFF Between Retries: Enter the duration (in minutes) the system will wait between attempts to deactivate the MWI.
ON Code: Enter the code required to turn on message waiting lights.
OFF Code: Enter the code required to turn off message waiting lights.
The ON Code and OFF Code fields should be used in situations where the code is too long to be input
 Note:
in the ON Code field in the PBX Message Light tab (usually MCI). As well, for multi-PBX configurations,
different codes must be used for different PBXs. In this situation, certain Feature Groups can be assigned to
a message waiting light code that reflects the different PBXs being used.
Channels: Enter the channel number that will be used to send message waiting light notifications.
Message Light Type
All: Enable this checkbox to send MWL code for all types of messages.
email: Enable this checkbox to turn on message lights only for new email messages.
Fax: Enable this checkbox to turn on message lights only for new fax messages.
Voice: Enable this checkbox to turn on message lights only for new voice messages.
Outcalling Options
Beeper: Enable this checkbox to send notification messages to a pager when a new message arrives.
Outcall: Enable this checkbox to send notification messages to a telephone when a new message arrives.
Long Distance: Enable to send notification messages to a telephone (long distance) when a new message arrives.
email: Enable this checkbox to send notification messages to an email when a new message arrives.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
59
Feature Group
Transfer Options Tab
The Transfer Options tab of Feature Group allows you to configure the way
in which the calls are handled. Transfer Options include Call Screening,
Call Forwarding, Busy Hold, Call Queuing, and Paging Capabilities, either
before the call is transferred or after the caller has reached the Mailbox.
Call Screening: Enable this checkbox to allow Mailbox users in this
Feature Group to use Call Screening. Before initiating a transfer, the
system will ask the caller for their name. When the recipient picks up,
they will hear the recorded name and can decide what to do with the call.
Call Forwarding: Enable this checkbox to allow Mailbox users in the
Feature Group to use Call Forwarding. When someone calls a Mailbox user,
instead of ringing the Mailbox user's location, the system will forward the
call to the person s/he has defined in their Mailbox.
Play Record Conversation Warning: Enable this checkbox to notify the
callers that the call is being recorded if the recipient has recording
enabled.
Busy Hold: Enable this checkbox to give callers the option to either hold for the extension, leave a message for that
extension, or try another extension if the called Mailbox is busy. While on hold, callers may leave a voice message by
pressing *.
This feature is only available on telephone systems that provide a busy tone. Most telephone sets
 Note:
with multiple extension appearances do not produce a busy tone.
Call Queuing: Enable this checkbox to allow Mailbox users in the Feature Group to use Call Queuing. If someone calls a busy
extension, they are given the option to be placed in a queue to hold or leave a message.
Note: Call queuing is available only on telephone systems that provide a busy tone. Most telephone sets with
 multiple
extension appearances do not produce a busy tone.
Camp On: Enable this checkbox to allow Mailbox users in the Feature Group to use Camp On. If someone calls a Mailbox
user who is on the phone, they can press * to be notified when the Mailbox user has finished their current call.
Forced Messaging: Enable this checkbox to force the caller to press a key before they can leave a message. If this is
disabled, the system will automatically starting to record a message after the mailbox greeting. This option can help to
reduce the number of blank messages left on the system.
Pre Transfer Paging: Enable this checkbox to allow Mailbox users in the Feature Group to use Pre Transfer Paging. Before a
call is transferred to a Mailbox user, the system will page the user first.
Post Transfer Paging: Enable this checkbox to allow Mailbox users in the Feature Group to use Post Transfer Paging. If the
Mailbox user is not available, the caller can page the user again.
Get Caller ID: Enable this checkbox to send a pop up screen with the Caller ID information to the Mailbox user when they
receive an incoming call.
Play Name During Transfer: Enable this checkbox to play the Mailbox user’s name when the caller is being transferred to
the Mailbox.
Confirm Name during Transfer: Enable this checkbox to confirm the Mailbox user’s name when a caller is being
transferred to the Mailbox.
Transfer Between Devices: Enable this checkbox to allow the Mailbox user to transfer calls between devices (e.g. internal
phone, cell phone) through their iLink Pro Desktop.
Auto Attendant
Try Other Extension After: Enable this checkbox to give callers an option to try another extension after they leave a
message in the Mailbox.
Notify User of Transfer: Enable this checkbox to notify the Mailbox user of an incoming call transfer.
60
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Feature Group
Enhanced Call Control
Internal Extension: Enable this checkbox to allow users to have access to Enhanced Call Control features from their
internal phones.
External or External/Internal(Find Me) Extension: Enable this checkbox to allow Mailbox users to have access to
Enhanced Call Control features from their external phones or phones that they are connected to through the Find Me/Follow
Me feature. Users must be dialed through the auto attendant in order for them to have access to Enhanced Call Control.
Paging Zone
Transfer Code: Enter the transfer code required for paging.
Account Code: Enter the account code required for paging.
Release Code: Enter the paging release code.
Delay Time: Enter the time (in seconds) that the server is to wait before it transfers the caller to the specified extension
after the user is paged.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
61
Feature Group
Transfer Types Tab
The Transfer Types tab of Feature Group allows administrators to configure
the rules associated with transfers that occur between the server and any
of the defined extensions.
Only one transfer option (in each of Internal and
 Warning:
External supervision groups) may be selected per Mailbox group.
Internal Supervision
None: Select this radio button to transfer calls to extensions without
supervising the call (blind transfer). The caller being transferred to an
extension is placed on hold while the system makes the connection. The
caller is then released to the telephone system and is no longer in control
of any of the actions. Calls may be transferred back to the system if the
telephone system has the ability to return the callers if the extension is
busy or unavailable.
Busy: Select this radio button to supervise the call while the caller is being transferred to the extension. The caller being
transferred to an extension is placed on hold while the system makes the connection. If the extension is busy, the system
instructs the caller to leave a message. However, if the extension is not busy and a ring signal is heard, the caller is released
to the telephone system and is no longer in control of any of the actions. Calls may be transferred back to the system only if
the switch has the capability to forward calls on a No-Answer condition.
 Note: Under IP integration the Busy and Busy/NA option will operate in the same manner.
Language: Select this radio button to supervise the call while the caller is being transferred to the extension, and keep a
record of the language selection that the caller has made. When the caller returns to the system (failed transfer or return to
system), they will hear the menu in the selected language.
The port used for supervised transfers will not be available to receive any calls as long as the
 Note:
supervision is active.
Busy/NA: Select this radio button to supervise the call while the caller is being transferred to the extension. The caller being
transferred to an extension is placed on hold while the system makes the connection. The system checks for both the busy
and the no answer conditions and informs the caller of the options available to them when either situation arises.
The port used for supervised transfers will not be available to receive any calls as long as the
 Note:
supervision is active.
No of rings: Enter the number of rings that the server will detect before returning the caller to the system. In most
scenarios this value is set to 0 which means that the value configured in the PBX is used. You may enter a different value
here to override the PBX value but the value must be lower than what is currently configured in the PBX.
Transfer validation prompt: Enable this checkbox to have the system prompt the extension before transferring the caller.
62
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Feature Group
External Supervision
None: Select this radio button to transfer calls to extensions without supervising the call (blind transfer). The caller being
transferred to an extension is placed on hold while the system makes the connection. The caller is then released to the
telephone system and is no longer in control of any of the actions. Calls may be transferred back to the system if the
telephone system has the ability to return the callers if the extension is busy or unavailable.
Busy: Select this radio button to supervise the call while the caller is being transferred to the extension. The caller being
transferred to an extension is placed on hold while the system makes the connection. If the extension is busy, the system
instructs the caller to leave a message. However, if the extension is not busy and a ring signal is heard, the caller is released
to the telephone system and is no longer in control of any of the actions. Calls may be transferred back to the system only if
the switch has the capability to forward calls on a No-Answer condition.
 Note: Under IP integration the Busy and Busy/NA option will operate in the same manner.
Centrex: Enable this checkbox to supervise a transferred Centrex line so that the system can send the call back to the
server if there is no answer.
Busy/NA: Select this radio button to supervise the call while the caller is being transferred to the extension. The caller being
transferred to an extension is placed on hold while the system makes the connection. The system checks for both the busy
and the no answer conditions and informs the caller of the options available to them when either situation arises.
The port used for supervised transfers will not be available to receive any calls as long as the
 Note:
supervision is active.
No of rings: Enter the number of rings that the server will detect before returning the caller to the system. In most
scenarios this value is set to 0 which means that the value configured in the PBX is used. You may enter a different value
here to override the PBX value but the value must be lower than what is currently configured in the PBX
Transfer validation prompt: Enable this checkbox to have the system prompt the extension before transferring the caller.
Outdialing Validation prompt: Enable this checkbox to have the system prompt the extension before forwarding according
to outdialing rules.
No of times to repeat prompt: Enter the number of times you want the system to repeat the validation prompts.
Screen Pop Duration & Pre Transfer Event
Ring: Select this radio button to present the caller with a ring. Enter a length of time value (seconds) in the field.
Music: Select this radio button to present the caller with the system default music. Enter a length of time value (seconds) in
the field.
Custom File: Select this radio button to present the caller with the a custom sound. Click on the ellipsis button to select the
file you want the caller to hear.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
63
Feature Group
Mailbox Options Tab
The Mailbox Options tab of Feature Group allows you to configure the level
of features that the Mailboxes associated with the current Feature Group
can utilize.
For some functions, the Feature Group only gives the
 Note:
authority to enable the setting from the Mailbox properties.
These functions must be manually added to the Mailbox after
authorizing from the Feature Group.
Settings available for the user for Mailbox
configuration
Change Location: Enable this checkbox to allow users in the Feature
Group to change their location in iLink Pro Desktop and Web Client.
Distribution List: Enable this checkbox to allow users in the Feature
Group to manage distribution lists.
Modify Public Distribution List: When enabled, the user will have access to change a public distribution list on the system
using Web Client. If disabled, users can access the list but not make changes to it.
Multilingual: Enable this checkbox to allow users in the Feature Group to record greetings for multiple languages. The user
will be prompted to select the language to record the greeting for.
Record All Incoming Calls: Enable this checkbox to allow users in the Feature Group to record all incoming calls.
Record Conversation: Enable this checkbox to allow users to record a telephone conversation, both incoming and outgoing
calls. Recording function is managed through the iLink Pro Desktop.
Wakeup Call: Enable this checkbox to allow users in the Feature Group to manage wakeup calls.
View Geo Location Data: Enables the Show on a Map feature in iLink Pro. Users can click that item and see your location
through Google Maps. When disabled, this menu item is not available.
Settings Activated by the Administrator
Allow Live Reply-Call Back: Enable this checkbox to allow Mailbox users to use the "Call Back to Sender" TUI action after
listening to a message.
Allow Multiple TUI Access: Enable this checkbox to allow two or more users to log into a single Mailbox account at the
same time. This feature is intended for shared/public Mailboxes.
Directory: Enable this checkbox to allow users to be listed both in the dial-by-name directory and the complete directory.
The dial by name directory is set up in ascending order with respect to Mailbox number. Callers may access the dial by name
directory by pressing the * key when they reach the auto attendant, or they may listen to the complete company directory
(arranged in ascending order according to Mailbox number) by pressing the * key a second time.
Do not check password: Enable this checkbox to skip the password check. The user will be sent directly to the TUI.
Ask For Password (Inband Login): Enable this checkbox to prompt the users to enter their passwords every time they log
in.
Forced Tutorial: Enable this checkbox to prohibit users from picking up messages until they have completed the tutorial.
Guest Mailbox: Enable this checkbox to utilize a simplified messaging menu.
Hide On Send List: Enable this checkbox to hide all Mailboxes associated with the current Feature Group from the directory
which is used to search users in iLink Pro Desktop and Web Client.
Chat: Enable this checkbox to allow users to send and receive Chat messages.
Press Star to Login to Another Mailbox: Enable this checkbox to allow users to log into another Mailbox at the Password
Request prompt when they dial into the system by pressing *.
Shared Extension: Enable this checkbox if the users in this Feature Group are sharing extensions. If the system is dialed
from a shared extension, the system will ask for the Mailbox number to log in to. If someone calls a shared extension, when
the phone is answered, the system will say who the call is for.
Web Access: Enable this checkbox to give the users Web Client capability.
Web Client Messaging: Enable this checkbox to allow users to have messaging capabilities (email, voice mail, fax mail)
while using Web Client. Users will have no access to their inbox from the Web Client if this feature is disabled.
64
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Feature Group
Message Options Tab
The Message Options tab of Feature Group allows you to configure
comment attachments to messages, as well as message sending
information.
Confirm Delete: Enable this checkbox to have the users prompted to
confirm the deletion of a message.
If Message Recovery is active any message that has
 NOTE:
been deleted may be reclaimed during the same day.
Confirmation Request-Certified Message: Enable this checkbox to
instruct the server to prompt users to send a standard or certified
message.
Future Delivery: Enable this checkbox to allow users to schedule a
message delivery at a later date.
Show Message Count: Enable this checkbox to have the Web Client
display how many unread messages are in the Mailbox user's Inbox. Also, when a new message notification appears in iLink
Pro Desktop, it will display the number of unread messages in the Inbox.
Allow Reply to all Recipients: Enable this checkbox to allow users to Reply All when replying to a message.
Attach Comment on Reply: Enable this checkbox to attach the original message body to the new message body when
replying.
Send all Comments: Enable this checkbox to indicate whether or not to send all attachments of the original message when
forwarding.
Verify Sending Destination: Enable this checkbox to verify the destination of outgoing messages.
Automatic Message Forwarding - Webclient: Enable this checkbox to allow messages received by this Feature Group to
be forwarded to other Mailboxes and extensions.
Allow to attach Voice Menu when sending Message: Enable this checkbox to allow users to attach a voice menu along
with the messages. This feature can be activated in the Voice Menu or the TUI. At the end of message playback, the
recipients will be sent to the attached Voice Menu instead of the typical end of message menu.
Cancel Auto Forwarding Only when Message Saved or Deleted: Enable this checkbox to instruct the server to cancel
auto forwarding if the message has been saved or deleted.
Message Send Inter-Digit Delay: Enter the number of seconds that the server will wait while the user is entering a
message before it decides that the caller has finished.
When Sending a Message, ask for Mailbox Number: From the drop down menu, choose the option to select the
destination Mailbox either before (first) or after (last) recording the message.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
65
Feature Group
Synchronization Options Tab
The Synchronization Options tab of Feature Group allows you configure the
IMAP account for all Mailboxes associated with the current Feature Group.
If you are using a superuser account with an Exchange server, this is
where you enter the credentials.
IMAP Account: Enter the superuser account name. This user was created
on the Exchange server and has full control over all other accounts and has
a permanent password.
Account Password: Enter the password for the superuser.
Confirm Password: Re-enter the superuser password for confirmation.
IMAP Server: Select the IMAP server from the drop down menu. The
IMAP servers are defined in the chapter Introduction on page 166.
Calendar Mode: From the drop down menu, select None to not sync any
calendar entries, Sync with mail server to sync calendar entries between
UC server and Exchange or Gmail servers, or Outlook client calendar to
sync calendar entries between UC server the Outlook email client. Outlook
client calendar requires the user to be logged into iLink Pro Desktop and
that a version of Outlook compatible with UC Client forms is installed.
Max Connections: Enter the maximum number of failed system connection attempts that can occur before the user is
locked out.
It is recommended that this number is kept fairly high (1000+). The user can get locked out when,
 Note:
for example, the IMAP or email server goes down and there is no possibility of establishing a connection.
This can happen on a re-boot.
Max No of Logons: Enter the maximum number of failed system logons to the IMAP server that can occur before the user is
locked out.
 Note: This number should be less than that specified in the user’s NT account for locking an account.
Send URL: From the drop down menu, select the type of messages that you wish to use the Send URL feature with. Send
URL will send a link of the attached files (rather than the actual file itself) for selected type of messages. This feature may be
used as a security measure, in addition to reducing bandwidth usage. This feature requires additional configuration setup
which can be found in Introduction on page 450.
66
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Feature Group
Synchronization Settings
Inbox folder: Enable this checkbox to synchronize the messages in the Inbox folder between the IMAP server and the UC
server. This is enabled by default.
Call History: Enable this checkbox to synchronize call history from the UC server to the IMAP server.
System folders: Enable this checkbox to synchronize messages in default system folders (e.g. Inbox, Sent, Deleted)
between the IMAP server and the UC server.
Custom folders: Enable this checkbox to synchronize messages in custom folders (i.e. user created folders) between the
IMAP server and the UC server.
Once IMAP synchronization is enabled and configured, the Inbox folder is synchronized at all times
 Note:
between the IMAP and the UC servers.
Note: In order for actions such as Copy and Delete to be available, checkboxes such as Sync folders and
 Custom
folders must be checked.
Contacts: Enable this checkbox to synchronize contacts if the email server is compatible with UC server.
Sync Priority: From the drop down menu, select the level of priority for IMAP Feature Group synchronization. This field will
work relative to other Feature Groups. For example, all FGs with Maximum priority will sync messages quicker than the FGs
with Medium or Minimum setting.
Msgs per Sync Cycle: Enter the number of messages that the server will attempt to synchronize during each
synchronization cycle.
The number you enter in this field depends on how evenly messages are distributed between all
 Note:
Mailboxes. The higher the number in this field, the longer it will take the server to start processing
messages for the next Mailbox.
TSE Location: Enter or select the location of the UC TSE Cache Manager. This is only required if your TSE server is different
from the UC server (e.g. using a stand alone TSE server).
Image Directory Settings
iLink Pro and iLink Pro Desktop include contact pictures if they have loaded a picture onto their Google profile. Image
Directory Settings controls how the UC server deals with updated picture files.
Remote directory images, except non-existing: Picture files that are already in the storage directory that have
changed since the last update will be downloaded.
All remote directory images, including non-existing: All picture files for contacts will be downloaded to the image
directory.
Only images that are not present in local directory: Picture files that are not already in the image directory will be
downloaded.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
67
Feature Group
DID Properties Tab
The DID Properties tab of Feature Group allows you to select specific
features for incoming DID calls.
DID Calls
Play Prompt: Enable this checkbox to have the default transfer prompt
played when a DID call comes in.
Play PreTransfer Sound: Enable this checkbox to play the default pretransfer sound for incoming DID calls.
Call Screening: Enable this checkbox to instruct DID callers who wish to
transfer to an extension to state their name at the tone.
Camp On: Enable this checkbox to enable the Camp On feature. When
this function is enabled and the extension is currently busy, the caller may
choose to be alerted when the user hangs up and the extension becomes
available.
Call Queuing: Enable this checkbox to place incoming DID calls in a queue when an extension is busy. Callers are informed
of their position in the hold queue and are given opportunities to either continue to hold or leave a voice message.
CallerID Popup: Enable this checkbox to have the Caller ID of the DID callers pop up when their call comes in.
Call Forwarding: Enable this checkbox to enable call forwarding on DID calls.
Re-route Options for DID and Internal Calls Using CTI:
No re-routing: Select this radio button if DID/Internal calls are not to be forwarded on the UC system. Incoming calls will
advance no further than the number originally dialed. This is the default option.
Forward calls to UC - Location options: Select this radio button to exploit the UC server’s Find Me/Follow Me abilities.
Incoming calls will search for the intended recipient according to a previously specified path.
Forward calls to default address: Select this radio button to re-route the call to the default address defined in the
Mailbox.
Hunt Group: Enter the number to be dialed to access DID messages.
68
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Feature Group
Speech Options Tab
The Speech Options tab of Feature Group allows you to configure
Automatic Speech Recognition (ASR) related features.
Allow Voice Verification Security Level: Enable this checkbox to give
the Mailboxes associated with the current Feature Group the ability to
change their Voice Verification security level through TUI. The Voice
Verification feature needs to be enabled in Company properties first.
Enable Speech Command: Enable this checkbox to give the Mailboxes
associated with the current Feature Group the ability to use voice as their
navigation method along with DTMF input. This feature has to be allowed
in Company properties first.
If there is an overlap of commands between a TUI action
 Note:
and an action key (e.g. 7 to save message and also 7 to fast
forward during playback), the speech action will always activate
the TUI action. Action keys can only be accessed through DTMF
key input.
Enable Speech Numeric Password: Enable this checkbox to give the Mailboxes associated with the current Feature Group
the ability to use voice to enter their password.
This means that the user will be able to say the numeric password (e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4) to log into their mailbox instead of
entering the number through DTMF. This feature is different from voice verification and can be a security risk since the
spoken password can be heard by a third party.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
69
Feature Group
Other Feature Group Related Options/Configuration
Add/Modify Feature Group
Adding a Feature Group
Double click on a Feature Group entry then click on the Add New button.
OR
Right click on the empty space on the right pane of the Admin window
then select New.
Modifying a Feature Group
Double click on a Feature Group entry that you wish to modify.
OR
Right click on the Feature Group Entry that you wish to modify then select Properties.
70
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox
In This Chapter:
Introduction
72
Mailbox Buttons
73
General Tab
74
Advanced Tab
75
Mailbox Options Tab
76
Transfer Options Tab
77
Message Options Tab
78
Notification - Options Tab
79
Notification - Notification Addresses Tab
80
Addresses Tab
81
Synchronization Options Tab
82
Locations - Set Current Locations Tab
82
Locations - Locations List Tab
83
Re-route CTI Options Tab
84
Speech Options Tab
85
Other Mailbox Related Options/Configurations
99
Organizational Unit
100
Workgroup
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 5
72
71
Mailbox
Introduction
The Mailboxes represent individual accounts that will be associated with a single user in most cases. The Mailboxes may be
customized by the users to configure their addresses, locations and other miscellaneous settings that will assist them with
the UC user experience.
The capabilities of each Mailbox are directly related to the Company and Feature Group that it is associated with. The
mailboxes may also be divided into different Organizational Units. Organizational Units can be viewed as a “folder” which
organizes the Mailboxes on the system. For example, you can create an OU named “Sales” for all users that belong to the
sales team. OU will also allow the end users to find someone easily through the Directory available under iLink Pro Desktop.
The number of Mailboxes that you can create and the features available in the Mailboxes are also
 Note:
dependent on the server’s license.
Mailbox Buttons
Button
Description
Add a range of Mailboxes.
Add a new Mailbox.
Reset/Clear current Mailbox settings.
Delete current Mailbox.
Save current Mailbox.
Refresh current Mailbox.
Move to first Mailbox.
Move to previous Mailbox.
Move to next Mailbox.
Move to last Mailbox.
Copy current Mailbox settings to clipboard.
Paste copied Mailbox settings from clipboard to current Mailbox.
Save current Mailbox settings as a Mailbox template.
72
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox
General Tab
The General tab of Mailbox allows you to configure the basic properties of a
Mailbox including the number, name, password, etc.
Mailbox Number: The UC system automatically fills in the Mailbox
number based on the other Mailboxes in the system upon Mailbox creation.
If you wish to change it, simply enter the new Mailbox number in the field.
If you want to change an existing user’s Mailbox number,
 Note:
enter the new number in the Mailbox Number field and click
Save. As a precautionary step to ensure Mailbox data is not
lost, a new Mailbox entry based on the new number is created.
The old Mailbox number will still exist, and can be deleted once
information regarding the newly assigned Mailbox is confirmed.
Last Name: Enter the last name of the user.
First Name: Enter the first name of the user.
Gender: This will be used to select the TTS Voice (female/male) used when playing an email for the user, or generating a
name greeting when name is recorded. The TTS Voice used for each gender is specified in the 
Company Setup > Company Languages > Add/Edit tab.
Feature Group: From the drop down menu, select the Feature Group that will be associated with the Mailbox.
Organizational Unit: Enter the full name of the Organizational Unit of the Mailbox.
Account Code: Enter the account number. This is used to pass account number information for toll charge billing back to an
individual user.
Internal Extension: This field displays the current address of the Mailbox.
Password: Enter the user’s password. This password must be numeric.
Confirm Password: Confirm the user’s password.
User Name: Enter the user name for the POP3/IMAP4 account if the user is using the UC server as an email server.
Password: Enter the user’s password for the email account.
Confirm Password: Confirm the user’s password for the email account.
 Note: Refer to IMAP4/POP3 Configuration on page 93 for details on activating email servers.
The IMAP password is for integrated messaging. If you are using IMAP, you must ensure that the
 Note:
IMAP settings are configured in VPIM Tools.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
73
Mailbox
Advanced Tab
The Advanced tab of Mailbox allows you to configure the features that may
be attached to the Mailbox such as Customize TUI, Web Client, etc.
Personal Operator: From the drop down menu, select a personal
operator if you have a different person as your operator other than the
company default.
This field is optional, but if you select an operator, you
 Note:
must also specify a Mailbox. This Mailbox is recognized as the
operator for this individual. When the caller is in a particular
Mailbox and hits 0, if this field is set, this user will be redirected
to the Mailbox specified in this field instead of going to the
company’s active operator.
D.I.D Trunk: Enter the trunk number that the system will use to access
the voicemail of this Mailbox. This field is normally used for Norstar
Systems.
Customize TUI: Enable this checkbox to select a customized TUI from the accompanying drop down menu. Clicking Browse
(...) allows you to create a TUI or modify one (if you selected a TUI from the drop-down) from the Customize TUI screen.
 Note: The Browse button is enabled only if you select Customize TUI.
Voice Menu: Enable this checkbox to have the user’s calls answered with a customized Voice Menu offering callers a variety
of choices. Select a Voice Menu to use for this Mailbox in the drop down menu beside. Click on the Browse (...) button to
browse the Voice Menus.
 Note: A Voice Menu must be created before it can be applied to a Mailbox.
Collect Geo Location Data: Enables the collection of location data from a GPS on a remote device.
Domain Account Name: Enter the Windows domain and account name for this mailbox user (e.g. DOMAIN\USER_NAME). If
this is configured alongside Auto Discovery, users will be able to log into their iLink Pro Desktop based on their domain
credentials without having to configure or enter any information in iLink Pro Desktop. This single sign on feature is only
available when the user is on the same network as the Officelinx server.
Desktop Capabilities: From the drop down menu, select the type of functionality that this user will have (i.e. UM, UC).
Date Format: From the drop down menu, select the date format which will determine the way in which the date is
expressed in Web Client and/or the telephone.
PBX Node: From the drop down menu, select the PBX node on which the Mailbox will reside. This option is only available if
there are multiple PBX nodes defined on the system.
Web Client User: Enable this checkbox to give the Mailbox Web Client capability.
Distribution Lists: Click on this button to manage the Distribution Lists associated with this Mailbox.
Folders: Click on this button to manage the message folders in this Mailbox.
Directory Listing: Click on this button to manage the way in which the Mailbox is found under the directories.
Workgroup: Click on this button to manage the Workgroup associated with this Mailbox.
74
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox
Mailbox Options Tab
The Mailbox Options tab of Mailbox allows you to configure additional
features that may enhance the user's experience with the associated
Mailbox.
Security Locked Mailbox: This checkbox becomes enabled when a
mailbox becomes locked after failing to log in X number of times. The X is
defined on the Company properties under Password/Security tab. Disable
this checkbox to allow users to log into their mailbox.
Send Business Card: Enable this checkbox to allow the user to send
personal contact “signature” information with all messages.
Receive Business Card: Enable this checkbox to allow the user to
receive personal contact "signature" information with all messages.
Record all Inbound Calls: Enable this checkbox to have all inbound calls
to the current Mailbox recorded.
Show Hints: Enable this checkbox to have Hints help documentation
displayed by default throughout the Web Client windows. The Hints help
documentation, shown in yellow strips at the top of each screen, will display in Web Client for the user until the user turns it
off.
Show Getting Started: Enable this checkbox to have the Getting Started page displayed by default in Web Client for the
user. The Getting Started page will display until the user turns it off.
Fax Detection: Enable this checkbox to allow incoming faxes to deliver their message to the user’s inbox if the call is
unanswered. With this box unchecked, the phone set will ring but a fax call will be dropped if it is not answered.
Tutorial: Select On from the radio buttons if you want the user to be prompted with a tutorial when accessing his/her
Mailbox through telephone.
Say Envelope Information: Select the Yes radio button if you want the user to be able to hear the envelope information
when listening to a message. The information to be relayed is defined in the TUI action.
Message Playback Order: Select one of the radio buttons. This allows the users to listen to their messages by either FIFO
(plays the oldest message first, newest message last) or LIFO (plays the newest message first).
Message Light Status: Select On from the radio buttons if you wish to enable the Message Light feature for this Mailbox.
Web Tutorial: Select On to enable a tutorial for the user when opening the Web Client. This option is enabled by default and
turned off once the user has completed the tutorial or turns it off themselves. When a mailbox is created or reset, an email is
sent to the user prompting them to complete the tutorial or to disable the feature.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
75
Mailbox
Transfer Options Tab
The Transfer Options tab of Mailbox allows you to configure the way in
which incoming calls for the current Mailbox will be managed.
Call Screening: Enable this checkbox to instruct callers who wish to
transfer to an extension to state their name at the tone.
Call screening requires the call to be supervised and the
 Note:
user must be in his or her group.
Before the call is transferred, the recipient hears the caller's name and is
prompted by the system to accept the call press <1>, to send to another
extension press <2>, to accept and record conversation press <3>, to
send to your Mailbox press <#>.
Call Queuing: Enable this checkbox to place incoming calls in a queue
when an extension is busy. Callers are informed of their position in the
hold queue and are given opportunities to either continue to hold or leave
a voice message.
Call queuing is available only on telephone systems that provide a busy tone. Most telephone sets
 Warning:
with multiple extension appearances do not produce a busy tone.
CampOn: Enable this checkbox to notify the caller when the recipient of the call is available, assuming that the dialed
number was originally busy.
Busy on Second Call: With this option enabled, incoming calls will be immediately routed to voicemail if the user is already
on the phone. If disabled, incoming calls will keep trying to reach the user at that extension until the line is free.
Pre Transfer Paging: Enable this checkbox to page users before the call is transferred.
When a caller requests an extension, the caller is put on hold and the UC system pages the user. The system then waits for a
definable period of time (this timer is defined in the Advanced dialog with a default of 5 seconds) and then transfers the caller
to the desired extension.
Post Transfer Paging: Enable this checkbox to page users after the call is transferred.
When a caller transfers to an extension that is busy or is not answered, the caller is forwarded to the user's Mailbox. In the
user's personal greeting, the caller can be given the option to page the user over the telephone intercom system (for
example, "Press 4 to have me paged"). Callers must be informed of the paging feature in the user's personal greeting. The
system does not have a pre-recorded prompt.
Caller ID: From the drop down menu, select the desired option to configure the Caller ID.
This option is required for desktop screen pops using iLink Pro Desktop. The iLink Pro Desktop
 Note:
settings must also be configured to accept screen pops.
 Note: If a blank Caller ID is sent to the iPD, there will be no pop-ups.
Call Forwarding - Enable: Enable this checkbox to forward incoming calls transferred from the automated attendant to
another Mailbox.
Call Forward to: Enter the Mailbox that calls will be transferred to manually or use the directory to select the Mailbox.
When assigning a Mailbox to the fax extension or Admin Mailbox, you can hit the Check Names or
 Note:
Address Book buttons to find the Mailbox you are looking for.
76
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox
Message Options Tab
The Message Options tab of Mailbox allows you to control the user’s
messaging options.
This field displays all the defined message options.
Add: This button allows you to add a new message option entry. Refer to
page 90 for more information.
Remove: This button allows you to remove the selected message option
entry.
Edit: This button allows you to edit the selected message option entry.
Delete After Forward: Select Yes from the radio buttons to delete all
incoming messages after they have been forwarded or relayed.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
77
Mailbox
Notification - Options Tab
The Notification Options tab of Mailbox allows you to specify internal or
external addresses that can be used to notify a user when they receive
new messages.
Cascade Notification: Enable this checkbox to instruct the system to
send notifications in consecutive order to a list or defined notification
schedule.
Cascade Notification Loop Back: Enable checkbox to allow cascade
notification loop back, which is like cascade notification except that it will
not stop notifications after all retries are complete. It will instead start
again from the beginning.
Fax Mail: Enable this checkbox to send a notification when fax mail is
sent.
Voice Mail
Select one or more options from the following choices to activate notification for voice mail messages.
All - Notifies user of all voice mail messages that are received
Urgent - Notifies user if an urgent voice message has been received
With Caller ID - Notifies user only if voice mail message is accompanied by Caller ID
Certified (Read Receipt) - Notifies user if a certified voice message has been received
Confidential - Notifies user if a confidential voice message has been received
Internal - Notifies user if a voice message has been received from an internal caller
External - Notifies user if a voice message has been received from an external caller
email
Select one or more options from the following choices to activate notification for email messages.
All - Notifies user of all email messages that are received
Urgent - Notifies user if an urgent email has been received
Certified (Read Receipt) - Notifies user if a certified email has been received
Confidential - Notifies user if a confidential email has been received
Internal - Notifies user if a email has been received from an internal caller
External - Notifies user if a email has been received from an external caller
78
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox
Notification - Notification Addresses Tab
You may define as many notification destination addresses as you want to
ensure that you receive all the notifications that you have defined.
Schedule Notification:
Add: Click this button to add a new Notification Address.
Remove: Click this button to delete the selected Notification Address.
Edit: Click this button to edit the selected Notification Address.
Summary View: Click this button to view a simplified version of the
Mailbox properties.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
79
Mailbox
Addresses Tab
The Addresses tab of Mailbox allows you to add many types of addresses
to be associated with the current Mailbox. These addresses may be utilized
to further customize the way in which the user interacts with the UC
system.
Select one of the following radio buttons to filter the displayed Addresses:
All: Display all added addresses
Defaults: Display all the default addresses
Only: After selecting this radio button choose a category from the
drop down menu to display the specific type of addresses
From the drop down menu, choose the type of addresses you wish to view
after selecting the Only radio button.
Add: Click this button to add an address. Refer to Add / Modify
Addresses on page 85 for detailed information.
Remove: Click this button to remove the selected address.
Edit: Click this button to edit the selected address.
80
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox
Synchronization Options Tab
The Synchronization Options tab of Mailbox allows you connect the current
Mailbox with the IMAP TSE feature, allowing you to synchronize
information between your UC server and the email server (e.g. Microsoft
Exchange, Lotus Domino).
Use Feature Group settings for IMAP: Enable this checkbox to use the
IMAP settings of the Feature Group. This is used when you are using a
superuser account to connect to the Exchange server for the IMAP TSE
feature.
User Name: Enter the IMAP account user name which the UC server will
use to synchronize the data. Follow the domainname/username/alias
format for this field.
User Password: Enter the IMAP account password.
Confirm Password: Re-Enter the IMAP account password.
IMAP Server: From the drop down menu, select the corresponding IMAP
server.
IMAP Locked: This checkbox is enabled if the user’s Mailbox becomes locked. The lock occurs when the account fails
authentication numerous times during the IMAP TSE synchronization activity. Disable this box to unlock the Mailbox.
IMAP Language: From the drop down menu, select the primary language of the IMAP account.
Storage Mode: From the drop down list, select IMAP to store messages in the IMAP store, or Database to store messages in
the UC database.
This field indicates whether or not the Mailbox is IMAP-synchronized. Setting storage to Database
 Note:
indicates no IMAP synchronization.
Voice Format: From the drop down menu, select the voice compression format which is to be used when the user is sending
a voice message outside of the UC server.
email: Enter the email address to synchronize for the current user.
Last Synchronization Time
Inbox: This field displays the last time that the inbox of the mailbox was synchronized through the IMAP TSE server with the
email server. This field cannot be modified and is for reference only.
Contacts: This field displays the last time that the contact entries of the mailbox were synchronized through the IMAP TSE
server settings with the email server. This field cannot be modified and is for reference only.
Calendar: This field displays the last time that the calendar entries of the mailbox were synchronized through the IMAP TSE
server settings with the email server. This field cannot be modified and is for reference only.
Update Message Status From: Enable this checkbox to synchronize the legacy Lotus Domino and the UC server at a
defined time. After enabling the checkbox click on the ellipsis button below to manually select the date.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
81
Mailbox
Locations - Set Current Locations Tab
The Locations tab of Mailbox allows you change the location status of the
Mailbox and also modify the list of locations defined for the current
Mailbox.
Use my locations calendar: Select this radio button to automatically set
the location according to the calendar schedule.
Override my locations calendar and set the current location: Select
this radio button to manually define a location for the current Mailbox. You
must also define the following options.
Location: From the drop down list, select the desired location for the
Mailbox.
Availability: From the drop down list, specify the availability of the
Mailbox.
Phone Number: From the drop down list, select the current phone
number that will be associated with the Mailbox.
Override availability filters: Enable this checkbox to have the system
override the availability filter settings associated with the selected location.
Appear unavailable if no Caller ID: Enable this checkbox to have the
user appear unavailable if no caller ID is given on incoming calls.
Until I change my Location: Select this radio button to keep the defined location settings until they are manually changed.
Until the next...: Select this radio button to keep the defined location settings until the next scheduled activity on the
calendar occurs.
Till: Select this radio button to keep the defined location settings until the designated time. The location will change to the
calendar schedule when the defined time is reached.
Locations - Locations List Tab
Add: Click on this button to add a new custom location.
Remove: Click on this button to delete the selected location. Only custom
created locations can be removed.
Edit: Click on this button to modify the selected location.
82
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox
Re-route CTI Options Tab
The Re-route CTI Options tab of Mailbox allows you to automatically
append availability and/or location settings depending on your telephone
settings. This feature is dependant on the telephone system that is utilized
with the Mailbox.
When DND is set on my phone
Nothing: Select this radio button to inform the caller that the phone is set
to DND.
Change my availability to Unavailable: Select this radio button to
inform the caller that the user is unavailable.
Set my location to: Select this radio button to manually define the
location and availability that the callers will be informed of when the phone
is set to DND.
Location: From the drop down menu, select the Location that the
DND status of the phone will be associated with.
Availability: From the drop down menu, select the availability that will be associated with above location.
When Forward to Voice Mail Group
Nothing: Select this radio button to forward the caller according to the phone settings.
Change my availability to Unavailable: Select this radio button to inform the caller that the user is unavailable.
Set my location to: Select this radio button to manually define the location and availability that the callers will be informed
of when forwarding is configured on the phone.
Location: From the drop down menu, select the Location that the forwarded status of the phone will be associated with.
Availability: From the drop down menu, select the availability that will be associated with above location.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
83
Mailbox
Speech Options Tab
The Speech Options tab of Mailbox allows you to configure the enrollment
of the current mailbox in the voice verification features and configure the
related security levels. You may also enable any transcription options here.
Enable ASR for Public Contacts: Enable this checkbox to allow the user
of the current mailbox to access their public contacts through ASR along
with the traditional DTMF method.
Enable ASR for Private Contacts: Enable this checkbox to allow the
user of the current mailbox to access their private contacts through ASR
along with the traditional DTMF method.
Enable Speech Command: Enable this checkbox to allow the user of the
current mailbox to navigate the TUI through speech commands along with
the traditional DTMF method.
Enable Voice Message Transcription: Enable this checkbox to activate
speech-to-text transcription for voice messages. Once enabled, voice
messages left in this mailbox will be rendered into text, and sent to the
associated email address. A transcription add-on to the Officelinx license is required.
Voice Verification Options
Enrolled: This checkbox becomes enabled when the user successfully finishes the voice verification configuration during
their tutorial or manually through the TUI.
Forced Enrollment: Enable this checkbox to force the user to configure the voice verification feature. The users will not be
able to skip the tutorial when this option is enabled.
Voice Verification Enabled: Enable his checkbox to allow this user to use the Voice Verification feature.
Security Levels
Normal: Select this radio button to use Normal as the voice verification security setting. The security settings are configured
under Company properties.
High: Select this radio button to use High as the voice verification security setting. The security settings are configured
under Company properties.
84
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox
Other Mailbox Related Options/Configurations
Add / Modify Addresses
UC server supports numerous types of addresses that may be assigned to a Mailbox for ubiquitous communication.
Adding an Address
Click on the Add button then select the type of address that you wish to add.
You can only have one default address for each type of address. For example, you have may a
 Note:
default Phone Number and a default Fax number together but you cannot have two default Fax numbers.
The Default address takes automatic priority when you are trying to be reached by the UC server.
Phone Number - Internal
Number: Enter the internal extension number.
PBX Node: From the drop down menu, select the PBX node that the extension resides in.
Set as Default: Enable this checkbox to make this address the default for the current
Mailbox.
Message Light Assignment: Enable this checkbox to enable message lights on the phone
system connected to this extension.
Phantom: Enable this checkbox to make the current extension a phantom extension. A
phantom extension is not connected to an actual phone but can still be used to play
greetings and accept messages.
Alternate ID: Enable this checkbox to make the current extension an alternate ID. The Mailbox user will be able to use this
extension number to login and accept calls as if it were a Mailbox number.
Trusted: Enable this checkbox to assign this extension as a trusted number for voice verification features.
Phone Number - External
Country: From the drop down menu, select the Country code for the telephone number.
Area/City Code: Enter the area code for the telephone number.
Number: Enter the telephone number.
Set as Default: Enable this checkbox to make this address the default for the current
Mailbox.
Trusted: Enable this checkbox to assign this extension as a trusted number for voice
verification features.
Identification: Enable this checkbox to use the defined external number as an
Identification Number. The Identification Number can be used as an alternative method to
log in to the Mailbox when Voice Verification is enabled on the system.
email
Address: Enter the full email address.
Set as Default: Enable this checkbox to make this address the default for the current
Mailbox.
Phantom: Enable to designate this address as a Phantom email. When the system is resolving the address, a phantom email
address will not be returned.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
85
Mailbox
VPIM
Address: Enter the VPIM address (the name portion only).
Set as Default: Enable this checkbox to make this address default for the current Mailbox.
Beeper
Country: From the drop down menu, select the Country code for the pager number.
Area/City Code: Enter the area code for the pager number.
Number: Enter the pager number.
PBX Node: From the drop down menu, select the PBX node that the extension resides in.
Set as Default: Enable this checkbox to make this address default for the current Mailbox.
Fax - Internal / External
Country: From the drop down menu, select the Country code for the fax number.
Area/City Code: Enter the area code for the fax number.
Number: Enter the internal extension number for fax.
PBX Node: For sites where there is more than one PBX installed, use this field to select
which node the fax traffic should be routed through.
Set as Default: Enable this checkbox to make this address the default for the current
Mailbox.
SMS - Phone
Country: From the drop down menu, select the Country code for the SMS capable phone
number.
Area/City Code: Enter the area code for the SMS capable phone number.
Number: Enter the SMS capable phone number.
Set as Default: Enable this checkbox to make this address the default for the current Mailbox.
SMS - email
Address: Enter the full email address.
Set as Default: Enable this checkbox to make this address the default for the current
Mailbox.
86
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox
Add / Modify Location
While most users will be able to add and modify their locations through the Web Client interface, you also have the option of
manually configuring them through the admin interface.
General
Description: Enter a title for the current location.
Local Location (within the same time zone): Enable this checkbox if the
location you are creating is in the same time zone as your primary location.
Default Availability: From the drop down menu, select the default availability
for the location.
Add: Click on this button to add an address to the current location.
Remove: Click on this button to remove the selected address.
Location Greetings
Greeting
Play default greeting: Select this radio button to play the default greeting
when the user is in the current location.
Automated Name and Location greeting: Select this radio button to play
an automated name and location greeting when the user is at the current
location.
Play Location greeting: Select this radio button to play the current location's
greeting when the user is at that location.
Options
Do not allow callers to skip the greeting: Enable this checkbox to force the
caller to listen to the entire greeting unless they disconnect.
Do not allow callers to leave messages: Enable this checkbox to prevent
the caller from leaving a message in the Mailbox as long as the location is set to the current location.
Hang up after the greeting: Enable this checkbox to hang up on the caller right after playing the location greeting.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
87
Mailbox
Availability Filters
When I am Available
Appear Available to everyone: Select this radio button to appear available
to everyone when set to available at the current location.
Appear Unavailable to: Select this radio button to appear unavailable
according to the settings defined below when set to available at the current
location.
Select the Internal calls check-box if you want to appear unavailable for
all internal calls. If there will be exceptions to this rule, select the
accompanying Only allow: Exception List check-box and select your
exceptions using the ... button.
Select the External calls check-box if you want to appear unavailable for
all external calls. If there will be exceptions to this rule, select the
accompanying Only allow: Exception List check-box and select your
exceptions using the ... button.
Select the All calls from Contacts check-box if you want to appear
unavailable for all calls from contacts. If there will be exceptions to this rule, select the accompanying Only allow:
Exception List check-box and select your exceptions using the ... button.
Appear Unavailable to only this list: Select this radio button to appear unavailable to a specific group of people even
when you are available. The list may be defined by clicking on the ellipsis button (...) on the right.
When I am Unavailable
Appear Unavailable to everyone: Select this radio button to appear unavailable to everyone when set to unavailable at
the current location.
Appear Available to: Select this radio button to appear available according to the settings defined below when set to
unavailable at the current location.
Select the Internal calls check-box if you want to appear available for all internal calls. If there will be exceptions to
this rule, select the accompanying Only block: Exception List check-box and select your exceptions using the ...
button.
Select the External calls check-box if you want to appear available for all external calls. If there will be exceptions to
this rule, select the accompanying Only block: Exception List check-box and select your exceptions using the ...
button.
Select the All calls from Contacts check-box if you want to appear available for all calls from contacts. If there will be
exceptions to this rule, select the accompanying Only block: Exception List check-box and select your exceptions
using the ... button.
Appear Available to only this list: Select this radio button to appear available to a specific group of people even when you
are available. The list may be defined by clicking on the ellipsis button (...) on the right.
Find Me Rules
When an incoming call arrives at your extension, the Find Me Rules determine
how the UC System will route the call if you are not currently at your desk.
General Rule to Find Me
Only call me at the first number...: Select this radio button to find the user
only at the first number assigned to current location.
Call me at each of the numbers...sequentially: Select this radio button to
find the user at each of the numbers assigned to current location in sequence.
Call me at all the numbers...at the same time: Select this radio button to
find the user at all numbers assigned to current location simultaneously.
88
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox
Find Me Options
Automatically Find me: Select this radio button to have the system automatically search for the user.
Ask caller to Find me: Select this radio button to have the system ask the caller if they want the system to search for the
user.
Exception List
Add: Click on this button to add Mailbox/contacts to the exception list.
Remove: Click on this button to remove the selected exception list item.
Edit: Click on this button to edit the selected exception list item.
Assign My Calls Rules
General Rule to Assign My Calls
Assign my call: Enable this checkbox to have your calls assigned to another
Mailbox in the same Company. In the text field to the right, enter or select the
Mailbox from the directory.
Play greeting before Transferring: Enable this checkbox to have the
greeting played before a call is transferred. You may specify the type of
greeting to be played below.
Play Name followed by name of person the call is assigned to: Select
this radio button to have the system explicitly state who the user is assigning
the call to before transferring the call.
OR
Play this greeting: Select this radio button to select a specific greeting from
the drop down menu to play before transferring a call. If applicable, select the
language of the greeting from the Language to play drop down menu.
Exception List
Add: Click on this button to add Mailbox/contacts to the exception list.
Remove: Click on this button to remove the selected exception from the list.
Edit: Click on this button to edit the selected exception from the list.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
89
Mailbox
Add / Modify Message Options
The messages that arrive in the current Mailbox may be automatically forwarded or relayed to a destination of choice.
Destination Type: From the drop down menu, select the address type of the destination.
Type
Destination
Address
AMIS
From the drop down menu, select the desired
Remote Site.
Enter the address within the
chosen Remote Site that you
wish to forward/relay to.
Distribution List:
From the drop down menu, select the
distribution list (both public and private from the
Mailbox that is being configured will be
available).
email:
Enter the desired email address.
Mailbox:
Enter the Mailbox number then click on verify or
select a Mailbox from the directory.
Print to Fax:
Enter the fax number or use the ellipsis button
to open a dialog box.
Print to Server Default Printer
SMS email
Enter the desired email address.
SMS Phone
Enter the phone number or use the ellipsis
button to open a dialog box.
VPIM
From the drop down menu, select the desired
Remote Site.
Enter the address within the
chosen Remote Site that you
wish to forward/relay to.
Storage Path
Enter the network path to the storage location.
Must be UNC Compatible path
Google Docs
Enter Google Docs Collection location.
Requires an existing collection
Destination: Refer to the above chart.
Address: Refer to the above chart.
Forward Type: From the drop down menu, select Forward or Relay.

Forward: Select this option to have messages forwarded automatically. A copy of
the message will be sent to the destination with 'FW:' in the subject header. The
sender of the message will be the current Mailbox.

Relay: Select this option to have messages relayed automatically. A copy of the
message will be sent to the destination. The sender of the message will be the
originating Mailbox.
Voice Format: From the drop down menu, select the format of voice messages. The
WaveUlaw8 format is recommended as the default.
Fax Format: From the dropdown menu, select TIFF or PDF. Fax messages that are
automatically forwarded to email addresses will be converted into the selected format.
Message Type: Enable the checkboxes for the type of messages you want forwarded/
relayed to the destination address.
After: Enter a numeric value on either or both of the hour(s) and minute(s) fields to delay the forward/relay by the defined
amount of time.
Attachment: Enable this checkbox to allow any attachments to be included in the forwarded/relayed message.
Disabled: Enable this checkbox to not automatically forward or relay received messages for the chosen address. This setting
can be toggled by the Mailbox user at any time.
Locked: Enable this checkbox to not automatically forward or relay received messages for the chosen address. This setting
can be toggled by the administrator and is active until changed.
HTML Content: Enable this checkbox to have files attached to messages accessible only through a hyper link (HTTP).
90
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox
Add / Modify Notification Addresses
After specifying notification addresses, they can be modified to suit your changing business
needs.
Address: From the drop down menu, select an address that will be used for notification. The
addresses available on this list are the addresses listed under the current Mailbox's Address
tab.
Busy: Enter the amount of time (in minutes) that the system will wait before retrying notification when the destination
address is busy.
No Answer: Enter the amount of time (in minutes) that the system will wait before retrying notification when the
destination address does not answer.
Call It: Enter the number of times the system will attempt to notify the Mailbox user. If the system is successful, it will not
retry.
Adding a Range of Mailboxes
Instead of creating Mailboxes one at a time, you can create a range of Mailboxes under a
particular Feature Group. Once you have created the Mailboxes, you can go back and
specify the options for each Mailbox.
Empty Mailboxes to be edited later: Select this radio button to add a range of empty
Mailboxes that can be edited later.
Apply Mailbox Template: Select this radio button to create a range of Mailboxes using
the selected Mailbox template. Mailbox templates need to be already defined on the system.
Copy from Mailbox: Select this radio button to use an existing Mailbox as the model for creating a range of new Mailboxes.
Group Name: From the drop down menu, select the Feature Group you want the Mailboxes to be associated with.
From: Enter the first number in the Mailbox range.
To: Enter the last number in the Mailbox range.
Directory Listing
The UC server allows the Mailbox user to create nicknames and store them in the company
directory. A caller can then spell the user’s name or speak the name to the speech enabled
automated attendant.
The Mailbox must be in a Feature Group that has the company directory feature enabled. The
Mailbox will then be accessible via ASR (Automatic Speech Recognition). In the Mailbox, a user
can define multiple names that are used for directory purposes (e.g. first name, last name,
maiden name).
When a Mailbox is created and the first name, last name and username are specified, the information is automatically input
to the Directory List screen. While in this window, you can add and move these names, as necessary.
The basic ASR license supports 250 names. Please check your ASR license for the number of names
 Note:
your system will support and upgrade the license if necessary.
 Note: The Mailbox must be in a Feature Group that has the Company Directory feature enabled.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
91
Mailbox
Company Buttons
Button
Description
Add a new Directory Listing entry.
Delete selected Directory Listing entry.
Edit selected Directory Listing entry.
Directory Listing Configuration
The basic ASR license supports 250 names. Please check your ASR license for the number of
 Note:
names your system will support and upgrade the license if necessary.
To add a new directory listing, click the Add icon, then enter the details for the new directory item.
Finding a Mailbox
In a system that has a large number of users, it may be difficult to scroll
through the entire directory to find a specific Mailbox. The find Mailbox function
can be used to easily locate the desired Mailbox(es) by using search filters.
Mailbox, From and To: Enter the range of Mailboxes you wish to search. Enter
the starting Mailbox number in the From field and the ending Mailbox number in
the To field.
Feature Group, From and To: Enter the range of Feature Groups you wish to
search. Enter the starting Feature Group number in the From field and the
ending Feature Group number in the To field. All Mailboxes that are associated
with the specified range of Feature Groups will be shown as results.
Name, First and Last: Enter the first name in the First field and/or enter the last name in the Last field to search for a
Mailbox by the user's name.
User Name: For contacts with a user name defined, enter it here to begin a search.
Extension Number: Type in or select
an extension number to search for.
Desktop Capabilities
If you have no Desktop Capabilities selected, the search results will be as if you have all Desktop
 Note:
Capabilities selected.
Enable one or more checkboxes to filter the search results according to the Desktop Capability of the Mailbox.
Unified Communications: Enable this checkbox to include Mailboxes with Unified Communications capabilities in the search
result.
Advanced Unified Messaging: Enable this checkbox to include Mailboxes with Advanced Unified Messaging capabilities in
the search result.
CTI: Enable this checkbox to include Mailboxes with CTI capabilities in the search result.
Basic Unified Messaging: Enable this checkbox to include Mailboxes with Basic Unified Messaging capabilities in the search
result.
Standard: Enable this checkbox to include Mailboxes with Standard capabilities in the search result.
92
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox
Storage Mode
If you have no Storage Mode selected, the search results will be as if you had all Storage Modes
 Note:
selected.
Enable one or more checkboxes to filter the search results according to the Storage Mode of the Mailbox.
Database: Enable this checkbox to include Mailboxes with Database storage mode in the search result.
IMAP: Enable this checkbox to include Mailboxes with IMAP storage mode in the search result.
Server Name: Enable this checkbox to include Mailboxes with a specific server storage mode in the search result. You must
also define the server name in the text field below when you enable this checkbox.
Folders
You can create custom folders in the user’s Mailbox for message storage and organization.
The folders created will automatically be created in another message server (e.g. both on UC
server and the email server) when the user is configured as a unified messaging user.
IMAP4/POP3 Configuration
The UC server has the ability to act as an email server should you not have a
separate server for email management. The UC server supports both IMAP and
POP3 email server protocols.
Activating the Mail Server
IMAP
From Configuration > IMAP Server Settings make sure that the IMAP
Enabled field is True.
POP3
From Configuration > POP3 Server Settings make sure that the POP3 Enabled field is True.
If you wish to have a proper domain name for the email account that you create (e.g.
 Note:
bob@company.com rather than bob@192.168.10.100), you must ensure that the domain name is properly
connected to the UC server. Also, the domain should be defined in the Company properties where the
email account is associated in.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
93
Mailbox
Configuring Individual Accounts
In order to create an email account for individual Mailboxes you must fill in
the POP3/IMAP4 section of Mailbox > General tab (see page 73).
User Name: Enter the desired IMAP4/POP3 account user name for the
current Mailbox.
Password: Enter the password for the email account.
Confirm Password: Re-enter the password.
Once the user name is configured you must also add a VPIM entry of the
email account on the Mailbox > Addresses tab so that the UC server will
recognize the email account.
Click Add and choose VPIM for the Address Type. The suffix of the email
account (e.g. @company.com from bob@company.com) is determined by the domain
name/IP address defined in the Company properties that the email account belongs to.
This means that when you are adding an email account as a VPIM address, you only have
to type in the user name portion in the field provided.
Note: Addition of the VPIM address is required to receive email messages to the email address being
 configured.
UC server also sends messages (voice and fax) for messaging integration using the VPIM address
 Note:
defined here.
94
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox
Location Schedule
Although most users will be managing their location and calendar through
the Web Client or iLink Pro, there is also the option of adding and modifying
them manually through the admin interface. Due to the nature of locations,
all location related schedules are saved under the location calendar.
Location Schedule Buttons
Button
Description
Create new Location Calendar.
Delete current Location Calendar.
Save current Location Calendar.
View a list of all Location Calendars.
Create a new Schedule.
Delete the current Schedule.
Move to first Schedule item.
Move to previous Schedule item.
Move to next Schedule item.
Move to last Schedule item.
Location Schedule Configuration
Change current location calendar: From the drop down menu, select the calendar that you wish to modify.
Enable: Enable this checkbox to activate the current schedule.
Calendar Name: Enter a descriptive name for the calendar.
Time Zone: Select the time zone to which the location belongs.
Default Location is: This field displays the default location for the current calendar. If there are no specific locations
defined, this will be used as a default.
Copy local locations from existing calendar: Enable this checkbox to copy the location settings from another calendar.
You must select the other calendar from the drop down menu after you enable this checkbox.
Working Hours, Start and End: Define the working hours of the calendar.
Location: From the drop down menu, select the location that will be active during the period specified below.
Availability: From the drop down menu, select the availability of current location.
Description: Enter a short description for your reference.
Time
Start and End: Enter the time in which the sub menu will be active. Enabling the All day checkbox will make the sub menu
active for 24hrs.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
95
Mailbox
Recurrence Pattern:
None: Select this radio button to have the sub menu occur only for the period of time once with no recurrence.
Daily: Select this radio button to indicate that the sub menu will be active on a day-by-day basis. Afterwards, you will have
(2) options:
Every weekday: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to be active every weekday
(Monday - Friday).
Every X day(s): Select this radio button to specify an interval of activity for the sub menu (every
second day by entering 2 in the field, for example).
Hint: If you wish to define the settings as Every weekday, you can instead choose the Weekly settings where
 you
can specify which days of the week you wish to be notified.
Weekly: Select this radio button to indicate that the sub menu will be active on a weekly
basis. Then, in the Recur Every X week(s) on field, enter an interval of activity for the
sub menu (i.e. enter 3 for every third week). Finally, check the boxes of the days of the
week you want the sub menu to be in effect. If you wanted a sub menu to be active every
second Monday, Wednesday and Thursday, you would enter 2 in the field and select the
Monday, Wednesday and Thursday checkboxes.
Monthly: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to be active on a monthly
basis.
You have two (2) options:
Select the Day radio button and indicate which day of the month you want the sub menu to be active.
Select the The radio button and indicate which day of a month you want the sub menu to be active. For example, if you want
the sub menu to be active on the second Monday of every second month, you would select the The radio button, select
Second and Monday, and enter 2.
Yearly: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to be active on a specific day of
the year. You have two (2) options:
Select the Every radio button and indicate the day of the year on which you want the sub
menu to be active.
Select the The radio button and indicate a specific day of a specific month of the year on which you want the sub menu to be
active. For example, if you want the sub menu to be active on the second Thursday of every March, you would select the
radio button and select Second, Thursday and March from the drop down menu.
Range of Recurrence
Start: Select the date when the first occurrence of the sub menu is to occur.
 Note: The sub menu must have a recurrence pattern defined.
No end Date: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to occur indefinitely
End After: Select this radio button if you want to disable the sub menu after it occurs the defined number of times.
End by: Select this radio button if you want to disable the sub menu by the defined date.
96
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox
Notification Schedule
You can create a notification schedule to specify a calendar setting for each
notification address. For example, you can schedule an email to be the active
notification address for a period of time.
Notification Schedule Buttons
Button
Description
Create new Notification Schedule.
Delete Notification Schedule.
Save Notification Schedule.
View a list of all Notification Schedules.
Create a new Schedule.
Delete the current Schedule.
Move to first Schedule.
Move to previous Schedule.
Move to next Schedule.
Move to last Schedule.
Notification Schedule Configuration
Schedule Enabled: Enable this checkbox to activate the notification schedule.
Default Address: From the drop down menu, select the address that will be used by the schedules by default unless they
have a specific address defined.
Description: Enter a brief title/description of the sub menu for reference.
Time
Start and End: Enter the time during which the sub menu will be active. Enabling the All day checkbox will make the sub
menu active for 24hrs.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
97
Mailbox
Recurrence Pattern:
None: Select this radio button to have the sub menu occur only once with no recurrence.
Daily: Select this radio button to indicate that the sub menu will be active on a day-by-day basis. Afterwards, you will have
(2) options:
Every weekday: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to be active every weekday.
Every X day(s): Select this radio button to specify an interval of activity for the sub menu (every
second day by entering 2 in the field, for example).
Hint: If you wish to define the settings as Every weekday, you can instead choose the Weekly settings where
 you
can specify which days of the week you wish to be notified.
Weekly: Select this radio button to indicate that the sub menu will be active on a weekly
basis. Then, in the Recur Every X week(s) on field, enter an interval of activity for the
sub menu (i.e. enter 3 for every third week). Finally, check the boxes of the days of the
week you want the sub menu to be in effect. If you wanted a sub menu to be active every
second Monday, Wednesday and Thursday, you would enter 2 in the field and select the
Monday, Wednesday and Thursday checkboxes.
Monthly: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to be active on a monthly
basis.
You have two (2) options:
Select the Day radio button and indicate which day of the month you want the sub menu
to be active.
Select the The radio button and indicate which day of a month you want the sub menu to be active. For example, if you want
the sub menu to be active on the second Monday of every second month, you would select the The radio button, select
Second and Monday, and enter 2.
Yearly: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to be active on a specific day of
the year. You have two (2) options:
Select the Every radio button and indicate the day of the year on which you want the sub
menu to be active.
Select the The radio button and indicate a specific day of a specific month of the year on which you want the sub menu to be
active. For example, if you want the sub menu to be active on the second Thursday of every March, you would select the
radio button and select Second, Thursday and March from the drop down menu.
Range of Recurrence
Start: Select the date on which the first occurrence of the sub menu is to occur.
 Note: The sub menu must have a recurrence pattern defined.
No end Date: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to occur indefinitely.
End After: Select this radio button if you want to disable the sub menu after it occurs the defined number of times.
End by: Select this radio button if you want to disable the sub menu by the defined date.
Address
From the drop down menu, select the address that will be active during the defined period.
98
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox
Organizational Unit
The purpose of an Organizational Unit is to organize the Mailboxes. In a
system with large number of Mailboxes, it may be difficult to sort and
keep track of all the Mailboxes in one folder. By having Mailboxes
allocated to an Organizational Unit you can easily group different types of
Mailboxes.
Organizational Units are not related to the settings of the Mailbox. However, you can designate a PBX
 Note:
node for the Organizational Unit. If you do so, the Mailboxes associated with the OU will use this PBX node
as default, assuming that you do not have a PBX node manually assigned to the Mailbox itself.
Adding/Modifying a Organizational Unit
Organizational Unit Name: Enter a unique name for the OU.
PBX Node: From the drop down menu, select the PBX node that this OU will be associated
with.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
99
Mailbox
Workgroup
A workgroup can be conveniently accessed through iLink Pro Desktop. It allows users to send messages to individual
members or workgroups via Chat.
Workgroup Buttons
Button
Description
Add a new Workgroup.
Delete current Workgroup.
Save current Workgroup.
Move to first Workgroup.
Move to previous Workgroup.
Move to next Workgroup.
Move to last Workgroup.
Workgroup Configuration
Go to: From the drop down menu, select the workgroup that you wish
to modify.
Workgroup Number: Enter a number for the workgroup you are
creating.
Workgroup Name: Enter a name for the workgroup you are creating.
Popup notification...: Enable this checkbox to inform members when
other members of the current workgroup log into iLink Pro Desktop.
Adding Users to Workgroup
Add: Select the desired Mailbox from the left pane then click on the Add
button to add them to the Workgroup in the right pane.
Add All: Click on the Add All button to add all Mailboxes from the same company to the Workgroup.
Removing Users from Workgroup
Remove: Select the desired Mailbox in the right pane then click on the Remove button to remove them from the Workgroup.
Remove All: Click on the Remove All button to delete all Mailbox from the Workgroup.
100
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox Template
In This Chapter:
Introduction
103
General Tab
104
Advanced Tab
105
Mailbox Options Tab
106
Transfer Options Tab
107
Notification Tab
108
Synchronization Options Tab
109
Speech Options Tab
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 6
102
101
Mailbox Template
Introduction
Mailbox templates are essentially pre-configured mailboxes. Mailbox templates contain settings that can be applied during
the creation of new mailboxes. It is recommended that you create multiple templates on the system so that different groups
of settings can be applied without having to create a custom format every time.
However, not all settings may be applied through a template. Many individual settings (e.g. user name, locations, etc.)
cannot be managed through a template and must be modified individually. When you are creating a range of Mailboxes by
copying a single Mailbox, individual settings will not be copied.
Some items shown in the screenshots that follow are disabled in the Template editor. Tabs which
 Note:
have no changeable values will be skipped.
102
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox Template
General Tab
Template Number: Enter the template number. This number will be
used for sorting the templates.
Template Name: Enter the template name for your reference.
Account Code: Enter the account number. This is used to pass account
number information for toll charge billing back to an individual user.
Numeric Password
Password: Enter the user’s password. This password has to be numeric.
Confirm Password: Confirm the user’s password.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
103
Mailbox Template
Advanced Tab
D.I.D Trunk: Enter the trunk number that the system will use to access
the voicemail of this Mailbox. This field is normally used by Norstar
Systems.
Fax Desktop: Enable this checkbox to give the Mailbox integrated fax
capability.
Domain Account: Enter the Windows domain and account name for this
mailbox user (e.g. DOMAIN\USER_NAME). If this is configured alongside
Auto Discovery, users will be able to log into their iLink Pro Desktop based
on their domain credentials without having to configure or enter any
information in iLink Pro Desktop. This single sign on feature is only
available when the user is on the same network as the Officelinx server.
Desktop Capabilities: From the drop down menu, select the type of
functionality that this user will have (i.e. UM, UC).
Date Format: From the drop down menu, select the date format which
will determine the way in which the date is expressed in Web Client and/
or the telephone.
Web Client User: Enable this checkbox to give the Mailbox Web Client capability.
Speech Server User: Enable this checkbox to allow the Mailbox Speech Server capability.
104
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox Template
Mailbox Options Tab
Send Business Card: Enable this checkbox to allow the user to send
personal contact "signature" information with all messages.
Receive Business Card: Enable this checkbox to allow the user to
receive personal contact "signature" information with all messages.
Record all Inbound Calls: Enable this checkbox to have all inbound calls
to the current Mailbox recorded.
Show Hints: Enable this checkbox to have Hints help documentation
displayed by default throughout the Web Client windows. The Hints,
shown in yellow strips at the top of each screen, will display in Web Client
until the user turns it off.
Show Getting Started: Enable this checkbox to have the Getting
Started page displayed by default in Web Client for the user. The Getting
Started page will display until the user turns it off.
Fax Detection: Enable this checkbox to allow incoming faxes to deliver
their message to the user’s inbox if the call is unanswered. With this box unchecked, the phone set will ring but a fax call will
be dropped if it is not answered.
Tutorial: Select On from the radio buttons if you want the user to be prompted with a tutorial when accessing his/her
Mailbox through telephone.
Say Envelope Information: Select Yes from the radio buttons if you want the user to listen to the envelope information
when listening to a message. The type of envelope information that will be played is defined from the TUI associated with the
current Mailbox.
Message Playback Order: Select one of the radio buttons. This allows the users to listen to their messages by either FIFO
(plays the oldest message first, newest message last) or LIFO (plays the newest message first).
Web Tutorial: Select On from the radio buttons to have the user work through the welcome tutorial when accessing Web
Client. This tutorial takes the user through the personalization of their mailbox and the recording of greetings.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
105
Mailbox Template
Transfer Options Tab
Call Screening: Enable this checkbox to instruct callers who wish to
transfer to an extension to state their name at the tone.
Call screening requires the call to be supervised and the
 Note:
user must be in his or her group.
Before the call is transferred, the user hears the caller's name and will
then be prompted by the system: to accept the call press <1>, to send
to another extension press <2>, to accept and record conversation press
<3>, to send to your Mailbox press <#>.
Call Queuing: Enable this checkbox to place incoming calls in a queue
when an extension is busy. Callers are informed of their position in the
hold queue and are given opportunities to either continue to hold or leave
a voice message.
Call queuing is available only on telephone systems that provide a busy tone. Most telephone sets
 Warning:
with multiple extension appearances do not produce a busy tone.
Camp On: Enable this checkbox to notify the caller that the intended target of the call is now available, assuming that the
dialed number was originally busy.
Busy on Second Call: With this option enabled, incoming calls will be immediately routed to voicemail if the user is already
on the phone. If disabled, incoming calls will keep trying to reach the user at that extension until the line is free.
Pre Transfer Paging: Enable this checkbox to page users before a call is transferred.
When a caller requests an extension, the caller is put on hold and the UC system pages the user. The system then waits for
the specified period of time (the timer is defined on the Advanced tab and has a default of 5 seconds) and then transfers the
caller to the desired extension.
Post Transfer Paging: Enable this checkbox to page users after the call is transferred.
When a caller transfers to an extension that is busy or is not answered, the caller is forwarded to the user's Mailbox. In the
user's personal greeting, the caller can be given the option to page the user over the telephone intercom system (for
example, "Press 4 to have me paged"). Callers must be informed of the paging feature in the user's personal greeting. The
system does not have a pre-recorded prompt.
Caller ID: From the drop down menu, select the desired option to configure the Caller ID.
This option is required for desktop screen pops using iLink Pro Desktop. The iPD settings must also be
 Note:
configured to accept screen pops.
 Note: If a blank Caller ID is sent to iPD, there will be no pop-ups.
106
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox Template
Notification Tab
 Note: LAP is no longer supported in Officelinx.
Cascade Notification: Enable this checkbox to instruct the system to
send notifications in consecutive order to a list or defined notification
schedule.
Cascade Notification Loop Back: Enable checkbox to allow cascade
notification loop back, which is like cascade notification except that it will
not stop notifications after all retries are complete. It will instead start
again from the beginning.
Fax Mail: Enable this checkbox to send a notification when fax mail is
sent.
Voice Mail
Select one or more options from the following choices to activate notification for voice mail messages.
All - Notifies user of all voice mail messages that are received
Urgent - Notifies user only if an urgent voice mail message is received
With Caller ID - Notifies user only if voice mail message is accompanied with Caller ID
Read Receipt - Notifies user if a sent voice message has been received
Confidential - Notifies user only if voice mail message is of a private status
Internal - Notifies user only if voice mail message is from an internal user
External - Notifies user only if voice mail message is from an external user
email
Select one or more options from the following choices to activate notification for email messages.
All - Notifies user of all email messages that are received
Urgent - Notifies users only if an urgent email message is received
Read Receipt - Notifies user if a sent email message has been received
Confidential - Notifies user only if email message is of a private status
Internal - Notifies user only if email is from an internal user address
External - Notifies user only email is from an external user address
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
107
Mailbox Template
Synchronization Options Tab
Use Feature Group settings for IMAP: Enable this checkbox to use the
IMAP settings of the Feature Group. This is used when you are using a
superuser account to connect to the Exchange server for the IMAP TSE
feature.
User Name: Enter the IMAP account user name which the UC server will
use to synchronize the data. Follow the domainname/username/alias
format for this field.
User Password: Enter the IMAP account password.
Confirm Password: Re-Enter the IMAP account password.
IMAP Server: From the drop down menu, select the corresponding IMAP
server.
IMAP Locked: This checkbox is enabled if the user’s Mailbox becomes
locked. The lock occurs when the account fails authentication numerous
times during the IMAP TSE synchronization activity. Uncheck this box to
unlock the Mailbox.
IMAP Language: From the drop down menu, select the primary language of the IMAP account.
Storage Mode: From the drop down list, select IMAP to store messages in the IMAP store, or Database to store messages in
the UC database.
This field indicates whether or not the Mailbox is IMAP-synchronized. Setting storage to Database
 Note:
indicates no IMAP synchronization.
Voice Format: From the drop down menu, select the voice compression format which is to be used when the user is sending
a voice message outside of the UC server.
Last Synchronization Time
Inbox: This field displays the last time that the inbox of the mailbox was synchronized through the IMAP TSE server with the
email server. This field cannot be modified and is for reference only.
Contacts: This field displays the last time that the contact entries of the mailbox were synchronized through the IMAP TSE
server settings with the email server. This field cannot be modified and is for reference only.
Calendar: This field displays the last time that the calendar entries of the mailbox were synchronized through the IMAP TSE
server settings with the email server. This field cannot be modified and is for reference only.
Update Message Status From: Enable this checkbox to synchronize the legacy Lotus Domino and the UC server at a
defined time. After enabling the checkbox click on the ellipsis button below to manually select the date.
108
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Mailbox Template
Speech Options Tab
Enable ASR for Public Contacts: Enable this checkbox to allow the user
of the current mailbox to access their public contacts through ASR along
with the traditional DTMF method.
Enable ASR for Private Contacts: Enable this checkbox to allow the
user of the current mailbox to access their private contacts through ASR
along with the traditional DTMF method.
Enable Speech Command: Enable this checkbox to allow the user of the
current mailbox to navigate the TUI through speech commands along
with the traditional DTMF method.
Enable Voice Message Transcription: Enable this option to provide
ASR transcription service to users of this template. Use of this feature
requires additional licensing.
Voice Verification Options
Enrolled: This checkbox becomes enabled when the user successfully finishes the voice verification configuration during
their tutorial or manually through the TUI.
Forced Enrollment: Enable this checkbox to force the user to configure the voice verification feature. The users will not be
able to skip the tutorial when this option is enabled.
Voice Verification Enabled: Enable his check to allow this user to use the Voice Verification feature.
Security Levels
Normal: Select this radio button to use Normal as the voice verification security setting. The security settings are configured
under Company properties.
High: Select this radio button to use High as the voice verification security setting. The security settings are configured
under Company properties.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
109
Mailbox Template
110
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Remote Site
In This Chapter:
Introduction
113
AMIS Site
115
VPIM Site
116
Enabling Remote Site Network
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 7
112
111
Remote Site
Introduction
Creating a Remote Site allows the UC server to communicate with other voice messaging servers. The two servers can send
and receive voice messages from one another by using one of two standardized methods, AMIS (Audio Messaging
Interchange Specification) or VPIM (Voice Profile for Internet Messaging).
112
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Remote Site
AMIS Site
From the Remote Site section in the UC Admin you may create a new Remote Site by selecting New from the menu or by
clicking the Add (+) button from a preexisting Remote Site. Please note that editing a Remote Site is the same as the create
window.
Remote Site Buttons
Button
Description
Add a new Remote Site.
Delete current Remote Site.
Save current Remote Site.
Refresh current Remote Site settings.
Move to first Remote Site.
Move to previous Remote Site.
Move to next Remote Site.
Move to last Remote Site.
Adding/Editing an AMIS Site
Site Number: The site number will be automatically assigned according to the number of
Remote Sites that you have defined.
Description: Enter the description of the site you want to connect to. Typically, this will
represent the company name of the site.
Location: Enter the location of the site you want to connect to. Typically, this will be the
city and state for U.S. locations and city and country for international locations.
PBX Node: From the drop down menu, select the PBX node of the AMIS site. The PBX
node is configured from the PBX properties under PBX Node tab.
Site ID Number: Enter the system identification number for the Remote Site. AMIS has
strict guidelines on the format of a system ID. It is composed of three numeric fields using
0 to 9, and each field is terminated by a # (pound sign). The maximum length of the
System ID Number is 18 characters, and the minimum is 3 characters.
System ID numbers can be public or private:

Public System ID numbers are for all sites that can be dialed directly using the public telephone network. These ID
numbers are always in the format of ccc#nnn#sssssss#, where the value “ccc” is the international country code (1-4
digits), the value “nnn” is the national significant number (area or city code of 0-14 digits) and the value of “sssssss” is a
local subscriber number of 0-14 digits. All locations in North America must use the format of 1#aaa#sssssss# where
“aaa” is the area code and “sssssss” is the local telephone number.

Private System ID numbers are for all sites that are accessible through a private network or behind a PBX. These
always have the format 0##nnnnnnn# where “nnnnnnn” is a site defined number. The site defined number is typically
the extension number of the site. The value “nnnnnnn” can be from 0-14 digits.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
113
Remote Site
Call Back Number
Country: From the drop down menu, select the country in which the site is located.
Area/City Code: Enter the area/city code of the site.
Number: Enter the dial string or number to be dialed to call the site.
This number should include any necessary access numbers (for example, 1 or 011). Do not include
 Note:
the trunk access code (usually a 9).
Call Settings...: Clicking on this button will open a window where you will be able to define the following settings.

Consecutive failures before stop: Enter the number of failures which can occur in
outbound calling before shutting down the action.

Minimum recall interval: Enter the number of minutes that must elapse before
attempting a second outbound call to this site.

Maximum recall interval: Enter the maximum number of minutes that must elapse
between outbound call retries until the value of the Consecutive Failures Stop is reached.

Message send expiration: Enter the expiration time in hours for messages waiting to
be sent via the network.
Enable logs: Enable this checkbox to log the AMIS activities such as handshaking, packet exchanges between sites, etc.
End record with any digit: Enable this checkbox to allow the recording of incoming messages to be terminated by any
DTMF tone.
Allow incoming messages: Enable this checkbox to accept all incoming network calls from Remote Sites.
Allow sending messages: Enable this checkbox to place calls to the Remote Site.
114
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Remote Site
VPIM Site
Voice Profile for Internet Mail (VPIM) is an International Telecommunications Union (ITU) standard that allows different types
of messaging servers to pass voice and fax messages among each other over the Internet.
Creating a VPIM address allows the UC server to use VPIM to send messages to assigned network voicemail users.
Remote Site Buttons
Button
Description
Add a new Remote Site.
Delete current Remote Site.
Save current Remote Site.
Refresh current Remote Site settings.
Move to first Remote Site.
Move to previous Remote Site.
Move to next Remote Site.
Move to last Remote Site.
Adding/Editing a VPIM Site
Site Number: The site number will be automatically assigned according to the number of
Remote Sites that you have defined.
Description: Enter a description of the site. Typically, it will be the company name of the
site.
Location: Enter the location of the site. Typically, this will be the city and state for U.S.
locations and city and country for international locations.
PBX Node: From the drop down menu, select the PBX node of the VPIM site. The PBX
node is configured from the PBX properties under PBX Node tab.
Domain Name: Enter the domain name of the VPIM site. Alternatively, you may use the
IP Address to connect to the VPIM site.
IP Address: Enter the IP address and the port number of the VPIM site. Alternatively, you
may use the Domain Name to connect to the VPIM site.
The Domain name or IP Address entered must correspond with the Domain
 Note:
name or IP address specified in the Company properties of the VPIM site.
Enter the information as a standard address, followed by a colon and the
 Note:
port number (e.g. 192.168.0.172:25).
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
115
Remote Site
Enabling Remote Site Network
You must make sure that both AMIS and VPIM is enabled in the configuration in order to utilize the Remote Site Function.
AMIS Initial Delay: This is a timer setting for receiving AMIS packets from other sites. The default is 3 but you can adjust
it for fine-tuning.
Remote Site Installed: In order to utilize the Remote Site function all linked servers must have this value set to True. This
will enable both AMIS and VPIM on the UC server as long as they are licensed on your system Sentinel.
116
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Voice Menu
In This Chapter:
Introduction
118
Voice Menu Buttons
119
Adding/Editing a Voice Menu
120
Voice Menu Actions
125
Sub Menu
126
Schedule
128
Printing a Voice Menu
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 8
118
117
Voice Menu
Introduction
Voice Menus are used to allow callers to interact with the voice server. Voice Menus contain actions that can be performed
when a specific key on the telephone is pressed. These actions are defined during the creation of the Voice Menu and are
deployed in a variety of places (e.g. Company Greeting, Mailbox Greeting, Message Sending, Outcalling, etc.) and can be
modified at any given time. Schedules can be applied to these menus, allowing a greater degree of flexibility in controlling
the caller's capabilities.
Voice Menu Buttons
Button
Description
Add a new Voice Menu.
Open a Voice Menu.
Delete current Voice Menu.
Save current Voice Menu.
Open current Voice Menu schedule.
Print Voice menu.
Add a new Sub Menu.
Delete current Sub Menu.
Move to first Sub Menu.
Move to previous Sub Menu.
Move to next Sub Menu.
Move to last Sub Menu.
Find a Sub Menu.
Verify entered Mailbox number.
Open Mailbox directory.
118
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Voice Menu
Adding/Editing a Voice Menu
Menu Number: This field is automatically generated when you add a new
Voice Menu and cannot be changed.
Menu Name: Enter the name of the Voice Menu. This is for your reference
and has no impact on performance.
Each voice menu file can have unlimited sub menus. You
 Note:
must begin the administration of Voice Menus in sub menu 1. If
there is no schedule applied, the UC system starts all Voice
Menus with sub menu number 1.
Web Client Access: Enter a Mailbox number to assign the current Voice
Menu as the Mailbox user's personal Voice Menu.
Default to Company: Enable this checkbox to make this Voice Menu the
default Voice Menu for the company. The company will use this menu by
default even if there are no Voice Menus assigned manually from the
company properties.
Default to Mailbox: Enable this checkbox to make this Voice Menu the
default Voice Menu for all Mailboxes.
Available for Outcall Service: Enable this checkbox to have this Voice
Menu usable for Outcall Jobs.
Generate Report: Enable this checkbox to have the system log the statistics of the Voice Menu on how many times a
particular action is chosen.
 Note: Even if Generate Report is disabled, the table will appear in the logs but it will not be populated.
Allow ASR Digit Recognition: Enable this checkbox to allow callers to say the key they want in addition to pressing it.
Sub Menu
Please refer to Sub Menu on page 125 for more information.
Actions & DTMF Key Assignment
Please refer to Voice Menu Actions on page 120 for more information
on this section.
The Voice Menu must have an action assigned to the DTMF keys to
function. The actions are added to a DTMF key by clicking and dragging
the desired action from the left pane to the specific DTMF key in the right
pane.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
119
Voice Menu
Voice Menu Actions
This section details the function of the Voice Menu actions.
The Description field in most of the actions are for report/logging purposes, as is the Question Label
 Note:
field which appears in some of the outcall related actions. You should fill these fields to make reports and
logs easier to understand.
Ask Password
This action prompts the caller for a pre-defined password before granting access to the sub menu.
The password must be numeric.
Password: Enter the password the caller must enter before granting access to the selected sub
menu.
Next Sub Menu, When Valid: From the drop down menu, select the sub menu in the current Voice Menu to send the caller
to when the entered password is correct.
Ask Pin Number
This action prompts the caller to enter their Pin Number. The system will verify the number against
the Pin Number Routing Table and route the call accordingly. If the number is incorrect, the caller
will be brought to the defined invalid Sub Menu.
Next Sub Menu, When Invalid: From the drop down menu, select the sub menu in the current
Voice Menu to send the caller to when the entered Pin Number does not exist in the Routing Table.
Phrase: From the drop down menu, select the phrase to prompt the caller for their Pin Number.
 Note: This is a custom prompt and needs to be recorded manually.
No. of Retries: Enter the number of times a caller may fail to provide a valid Pin Number before being disconnected.
Ask Question
This action is used for a Question & Answer script. It enables the system to ask the caller a
question and record their response. The results of the Q & A session will be sent to the defined
Mailbox.
After answering the question, the caller will be brought to the defined next Sub Menu. In this way,
you are able to link several questions together and have the results sent to the defined mailbox in
one results page instead of several.
Next Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu to bring the caller to after they
have answered the question(s).
Mailbox: Enter the mailbox where the answers of the callers will be stored.
Phrase: From the drop down menu, select the phrase to play to ask the caller a question.
 Note: This is a custom prompt and needs to be recorded manually.
Voice Message: Select this radio button to have the caller answer the question vocally.
DTMF: Select this radio button to have the caller answer the question with DTMF keys. The length of the answer is defined in
the adjacent field.
120
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Voice Menu
Beep Caller Phone Number
This action behaves like Send Beeper Message, an action that is available in all Mailboxes. A caller selecting this option is
prompted to enter his/her phone number using the telephone keypad. The DTMF digits that are entered are then sent to the
user's alphanumeric pager.
The user must have an alphanumeric pager that is configured in the Notification section of the user's
 Note:
Mailbox.
Call Mailbox
This action allows you to transfer a caller to a specific Mailbox.
Mailbox: Enter the Mailbox to which the caller will be sent.
Language: From the drop down menu, select the language you want the system to play when
greeting the caller.
Disconnect
This action disconnects the caller from the system.
Get Destination from DB
This action is associated with the desktop call control Active X. It asks the caller for their Pin
Number and sends the call information to the Active X that has pre-defined actions and an
integration setup.
Pin Number: Enter the Pin Number the caller must enter in order to continue.
Phrase: From the drop down menu, select the phrase to play to ask the caller for their Pin
Number.
 Note: This is a custom prompt and needs to be recorded manually.
Get Transfer Mailbox
This action allows callers to transfer directly from within the voice menu to a desired extension.
When a caller selects this action from a Voice Menu, they will hear the selected prompt, and then
they can enter the mailbox number they want to transfer to.
Phrase: From the drop down menu, select the phrase to play to ask the caller to enter the mailbox user they want to
transfer to.
 Note: This is a custom prompt and needs to be recorded manually.
Get Transfer Phone Number
This action allows the caller to transfer to a phone number that is off site. When the key for this
action is pressed, the caller will hear the dial tone. They can then enter the phone number and the
system will execute the transfer.
Prefix: Enter the number that is required to access an external line.
Page Current Mailbox
This action allows the caller to page a specific Mailbox user.
Mailbox: Enter the mailbox user to be paged.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
121
Voice Menu
Play Date and Time
This action is used to play the current date and/or time in the selected language.
Language: From the drop down menu, select the language to play back the date and/or time in.
Date: Enable this checkbox to have the system play back the date.
Time: Enable this checkbox to have the system play back the time.
Record Conversation
This action is used to initiate and record a conversation with a specific mailbox user.
Mailbox: Enter the mailbox user to initiate and record a conversation with.
Return to Customized TUI
This action allows a mailbox user to be brought back to their Customized TUI. The Voice Menu needs to be bound to a
mailbox user. At the mailbox greeting, press the key for this action and the caller will be brought to the mailbox user's TUI.
Send a Mass Recall Message
This action allows callers to use the Mass Recall feature. The chosen mailbox must have the
necessary Distribution Lists configured so that the message is sent to the right people.
Mailbox: Enter the mailbox user to have the Mass Recall message sent to. This mailbox must have
the proper Distribution Lists set up.
Language: From the drop down menu, select the language to service the caller in.
Voice Menu: From the drop down menu, select a Voice Menu to attach to the message. After the recipients listen to this
message, they will be brought to the selected Voice Menu instead of the default.
Send LAP Message
This action allows callers to send a message to a local area pager (LAP).
Mailbox: Enter the mailbox user to have the LAP message sent to.
Send to Directory
This action sends the caller to the company directory.
Send to Express Voice Mail
This action brings the caller directly to the mailbox user's voice mail. Instead of hearing the full
mailbox greeting, the caller will hear the mailbox user's name and the record tone.
Mailbox: Enter the mailbox user to which the express message is sent to.
Language: From the drop down menu, select the language to service the caller in.
Send to Fax Mail
This action causes a fax message received at the number to be sent to a mailbox.
Mailbox: Specify the mailbox to route the incoming fax message to. If no mailbox is entered, and
incoming fax will create a desktop prompt for the destination.
122
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Voice Menu
Send Fax Start Tone
This action alows incoming callers to tell the system that they want to transmit a fax to the
recipient. Selecting this option will ready the system to receive the fax.
Mailbox: Enter the mailbox number that is to receive the fax when this menu item is selected.
Send to Login
This action allows the caller to log in to a mailbox. The system will first prompt them for the
mailbox number and password.
Mailbox: Enter the mailbox user to which the caller will attempt to log in to.
If nothing is defined in this field, the system will prompt for both mailbox number and password.
 Note:
Else, the system will prompt just for the password.
Send to Main Greeting
This action sends the call to the main company greeting.
Send to Operator
This action transfers the caller to the system defined operator. If the action was performed with a Voice Menu bound to a
mailbox, the caller will be transferred to their Personal Operator if they have one defined.
Send to Phone Number
This action allows a caller to be sent to a specific phone number.
Country: From the drop down menu, select the country to which the call is to be made.
Area/City Code: Enter the Area/City code of the phone number to transfer to.
Number: Enter the number to transfer to.
PBX Node: From the drop down menu, select the node which the call is to be directed through.
Send to Requested Voice Mailbox
This action brings the caller directly to the requested mailbox user's voice mail.
When the key for this action is pressed, the caller will be prompted to enter the mailbox number.
After they enter the number, the caller will be brought to the mailbox user's voice mail."
Language: From the drop down menu, select the language in which the prompt will be played.
Send to Sub Menu
This action brings the caller to the specified sub menu for further processing.
Next Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the sub menu to send the caller to.
Send to Voice Mail
This action brings the caller directly to the mailbox user's voice mail greeting.
Mailbox: Enter the mailbox user to which the voice message is sent.
Language: From the drop down menu, select the language which the greeting will be played in.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
123
Voice Menu
Voice Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Voice Menu to attach to the voice message. After the mailbox user
listens to the message, they will be sent to the selected Voice Menu instead of the default.
Send to Voice Mail Record Tone
This action brings the caller directly to the mailbox user's voice mail. The caller will not hear any record prompts, but will just
hear the record tone.
 Note: This action is only available if the Voice Menu is bound to a mailbox.
Send to Voice Menu
This action sends the caller to a different Voice menu for further processing. By default, the system
will send the caller to the first sub menu of the selected Voice Menu.
Next Voice Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Voice Menu to sent the caller to.
124
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Voice Menu
Sub Menu
Sub menus are used to create multiple actions for a Voice Menu. For
example: a Q&A script, an account code verification, or an IVR with
password verification. All such applications would be created in a voice
menu with multiple layered sub menus to process the caller selection.
While there are no hard limits on the number of sub
 Note:
menus you can create, having too many sub menus can have an
impact on the system's performance.
Sub Menu Number: This number is generated automatically when you
add a new sub menu.
Extension Dialing: Enable this checkbox to allow callers in the current
Voice Menu to be transferred directly to a Mailbox.
Sub Menu Phrase: From the drop down menu, select the phrase you
want played at this particular level. There are several options:


Salutation
Function
Nothing
No greeting is played.
Company Active Greeting
Plays the active greeting of the automated attendant that the voice
menu is associated with.
Company Salutation
Plays a selected prerecorded company greeting.
Mailbox Active Greeting
Plays the active greeting for the Mailbox that the Voice Menu is
associated to.
Mailbox Customized Greeting
Plays a selected customized greeting.
Description: Enter a description for the current sub menu. This is for reference only and has no affect on performance.
No. of Retries: Enter the number of incorrect attempts a caller can make before they are disconnected.
Timeout: Enter the amount of time (in msec) that the system will wait before processing the caller's input. If the caller did
not enter anything, the system will perform the default action.
The default value is 2000. A value of 0 is not permitted. However, if you want the default action to
 Note:
take effect immediately, you can enter a value of 30 or 1.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
125
Voice Menu
Schedule
Creating a menu schedule allows you to define when the UC server is to activate a certain sub menu. You can define unique
caller actions for weekdays and weekends, so that weekend actions are activated automatically Friday evening and weekday
actions are reactivated on Monday morning.
Voice Menu Schedule Buttons
Button
Description
Delete Voice Menu Schedule..
Save Voice Menu Schedule.
View a list of all Voice Menu Schedules.
Create a new Schedule.
Delete the current Schedule.
Move to first Schedule.
Move to previous Schedule.
Move to next Schedule.
Move to last Schedule.
Configuring Voice Menu Schedule
Schedule Enabled: Enable this checkbox to activate the current sub menu.
Enabling one sub menu disables all other sub menus.
Default Start Menu: From the drop down menu, select the sub menu that will
be active during default hours. When all schedules expire, the system will use
this sub menu.
Description: Enter a brief title/description of the sub menu for reference.
Time Start and End: Select when the sub menu will become active and when
it will cease to be active. Enabling the All day checkbox will make the sub menu
active for 24hrs.
Recurrence Pattern:
None: Select this radio button to have the sub menu occur only for the period
of time once with no recurrence.
Daily: Select this radio button to indicate that the sub menu will be active on a
day-by-day basis. Afterwards, you will have (2) options:
Every weekday: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to be
active every weekday.
126
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Voice Menu
Every X day(s): Select this radio button to specify an interval of activity for the sub menu (every second day by entering 2
in the field, for example).
Hint: If you wish to define the settings as Every weekday, you can instead choose the Weekly settings where
 you
can specify which days of the week you wish to be notified.
Weekly: Select this radio button to indicate that the sub menu will be active on a weekly
basis. Then, in the Recur Every X week(s) on field, enter an interval of activity for the
sub menu (i.e. enter 3 for every third week). Finally, check the boxes of the days of the
week you want the sub menu to be in effect. If you wanted a sub menu to be active every
second Monday, Wednesday and Thursday, you would enter 2 in the field and select the
Monday, Wednesday and Thursday checkboxes.
Monthly: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to be active on a monthly
basis.
You have two (2) options:
Select the Day radio button and indicate which day of the month you want the sub menu to be active.
Select the The radio button and indicate which day of a month you want the sub menu to be active. For example, if you want
the sub menu to be active on the second Monday of every second month, you would select the The radio button, select
Second and Monday, and enter 2.
Yearly: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to be active on a specific day of
the year. You have two (2) options:
Select the Every radio button and indicate the day of the year on which you want the sub
menu to be active.
Select the The radio button and indicate a specific day of a specific month of the year on which you want the sub menu to be
active. For example, if you want the sub menu to be active on the second Thursday of every March, you would select the
radio button and select Second, Thursday and March from the drop down menu.
Range of Recurrence
Start: Select the date in which the first occurrence of the sub menu is to take effect.
 Note: The sub menu must have a recurrence pattern defined.
No end Date: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to occur indefinitely
End After: Select this radio button if you want to disable the sub menu after it occurs the defined number of times.
End by: Select this radio button if you want to disable the sub menu by the defined date.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
127
Voice Menu
Printing a Voice Menu
Voice menus can become quite complex, and are often customized to meet
a company’s needs. Use the Print Menu icon to generate an printable
version of the current setup.
This button creates the file VMFlowChart.htm which is displayed in a web browser. Each of the menus is tagged with its
Voice menu or Sub Menu number. It includes all of the keys available, and what action, if any, has been bound to each.
This file can be sent to a printer for distribution where necessary. Use the Print button in the browser window.
128
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Routing Table
In This Chapter:
Introduction
131
Caller ID/DNIS
132
PIN Number
133
PIN Number Schedule
135
Caller ID/DNIS Schedule
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 9
130
129
Routing Table
Introduction
The Routing Table allows you to customize the way calls are handled depending
on the information available. The information used for routing purposes is divided
into three parts:
Caller ID: UC systems can be configured such that when a caller with a
specific Caller ID dials into the system, the call will be routed to a specific
Mailbox user. Specific phone numbers or area codes can be routed to a
Mailbox user.
DNIS (Dialed Number Identification Service): The calls can be
routed according to the dialed number of the destination. While this is
usually configured at the switch level, you also have the option of
managing it through the UC server.
PIN verification: You can enforce a PIN entry on the default Voice Menu
and route the calls according to the PIN received. This feature is usually
adapted by support centers.
130
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Routing Table
Caller ID/DNIS
The Caller ID/DNIS tab allows you to create a routing destination that is based on Caller ID and the DNIS (Dialed Number
Identification Service). Routing destinations will be based on call information such as Caller ID, Voice Menu or Mailboxes and
Account Codes.
Routing Table Buttons
Button
Description
Add a new Routing Table.
Delete current Routing Table.
Edit selected Routing Table.
Open scheduling menu (during adding/editing of Routing Table).
Caller ID/DNIS Entries
Adding/Editing a Caller ID/DNIS Entry
Caller ID/DNIS: Enter the number that will be routed to the Mailbox.
You can enter either a Caller ID or a DNIS number.
The Automated Attendant will detect the Caller ID or the
 Note:
DNIS number only if it is configured properly in the PBX
configuration.
You can enter the full number or area code with wild cards “?”. You can
combine the wild cards with any configuration of numbers as well. For
example, 416? will redirect all numbers that lead with 416.
Select one of the following radio buttons:

Mailbox: Select this radio button to have callers that match the Caller ID/DNIS transfer to the selected Mailbox user
upon dialing into the system.

Voice Menu: Select this radio button to have callers that match the Caller ID/DNIS brought to the selected Voice Menu
upon dialing into the system.
Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the sub menu to use. Callers that match the Caller ID/DNIS will be brought to
selected sub menu of the chosen Voice Menu. This option is available only when the Voice Menu radio button is selected.
Associated Name: Enter the description of the types of calls being redirected to a Mailbox.
After setting Caller ID/DNIS destinations, you must enable the Caller ID feature. In the Admin tree,
 Note:
select Configuration > Device Management > Caller ID Settings and enable the Caller ID settings.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
131
Routing Table
PIN Number
Pin numbers are used to create a custom dialog and action set based on numerical inputs from the caller. Pin number
verification and routing may be used in a support centre, dealer, or partner log in scenarios.
Routing Table Buttons
Button
Description
Add a new Routing Table.
Delete current Routing Table.
Edit selected Routing Table.
Open scheduling menu (during adding/editing of Routing Table).
PIN Number Entries
Adding/Editing a PIN Number Entry
Pin Number: Enter the PIN Number to be verified for call processing.
The number can be up to 25 digits in length.
Voice Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Voice Menu to direct
callers to when they enter the correct Pin Number.
Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the sub menu of the
chosen Voice Menu to direct callers to when they enter the correct Pin
Number.
Associated Name: Enter the name that will appear for screen pop-ups
if using the “Pin Number as Caller ID” function.
After specifying PIN numbers, make sure that you enable the Ask Pin Number feature in the Voice
 Note:
Menu. In the UC Admin tree, expand the company that this PIN number is associated with and double-click
Voice Menu. The Voice Menus appear in the right pane of the UC Admin console.
132
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Routing Table
PIN Number Schedule
A schedule can be assigned to a PIN Number so that it is only valid during scheduled hours. The callers will not be forwarded
to their destination even if the PIN Number is correct when they are calling outside of scheduled times.
PIN Number Schedule Buttons
Button
Description
Delete PIN Number Schedule.
Save PIN Number Schedule.
View a list of all PIN Number Schedules.
Create a new Schedule.
Delete the current Schedule.
Move to first Schedule.
Move to previous Schedule.
Move to next Schedule.
Move to last Schedule.
Configuring PIN Number Schedule
Schedule Enabled: Enable this checkbox to activate the Pin Number routing
schedule.
Default Voice Menu: From the drop down menu, select the default Voice Menu
that will be active under the schedule. This will be the default Voice Menu that
will be used by all schedules that are created unless defined otherwise.
Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the sub menu from the above
Voice Menu that will be used as the initial sub menu.
Description: Enter a brief title/description of the sub menu for reference.
Time Start and End: Select when the sub menu will become active and when it
will cease to be active. Enabling the All day checkbox will make the sub menu
active for 24hrs.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
133
Routing Table
Recurrence Pattern:
None: Select this radio button to have the sub menu occur only for the period of time once with no recurrence.
Daily: Select this radio button to indicate that the sub menu will be active on a day-by-day basis.
Afterwards, you will have (2) options:
Every weekday: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to be active every weekday.
Every X day(s): Select this radio button to specify an interval of activity for the sub menu (every
second day by entering 2 in the field, for example).
Hint: If you wish to define the settings as Every weekday, you can instead choose the Weekly settings where
 you
can specify which days of the week you wish to be notified.
Weekly: Select this radio button to indicate that the sub menu will be active on a weekly
basis. Then, in the Recur Every X week(s) on field, enter an interval of activity for the
sub menu (i.e. enter 3 for every third week). Finally, check the boxes of the days of the
week you want the sub menu to be in effect. If you wanted a sub menu to be active every
second Monday, Wednesday and Thursday, you would enter 2 in the field and select the
Monday, Wednesday and Thursday checkboxes.
Monthly: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to be active on a monthly
basis.
You have two (2) options:
Select the Day radio button and indicate which day of the month you want the sub menu to be active.
Select the The radio button and indicate which day of a month you want the sub menu to be active. For example, if you want
the sub menu to be active on the second Monday of every second month, you would select the The radio button, select
Second and Monday, and enter 2.
Yearly: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to be active on a specific day of
the year. You have two (2) options:
Select the Every radio button and indicate the day of the year on which you want the sub
menu to be active.
Select the The radio button and indicate a specific day of a specific month of the year on which you want the sub menu to be
active. For example, if you want the sub menu to be active on the second Thursday of every March, you would select the
radio button and select Second, Thursday and March from the drop down menu.
Range of Recurrence
Start: Select the date when the first occurrence of the sub menu is to occur.
 Note: The sub menu must have a recurrence pattern defined.
No end Date: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to occur indefinitely
End After: Select this radio button if you want to disable the sub menu after it occurs the defined number of times.
End by: Select this radio button if you want to disable the sub menu by the defined date.
From the Start Menu dropdown list, select the sub menu that will run at the times specified.
134
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Routing Table
Caller ID/DNIS Schedule
A schedule can be assigned to a routing destination to determine when a call is to be transferred to an extension. When
Caller ID recognizes a particular number, the system will examine the appropriate schedule. If the current day and time fall
within that specified in the schedule, the call is routed directly to the Mailbox.
PIN Number Schedule Buttons
Button
Description
Delete Caller ID / DNIS Schedule.
Save Caller ID / DNIS Schedule.
View a list of all Caller ID / DNIS Schedules.
Create a new Schedule.
Delete the current Schedule.
Move to first Schedule.
Move to previous Schedule.
Move to next Schedule.
Move to last Schedule.
Configuring Caller ID/DNIS Schedule
Schedule Enabled: Enable this checkbox to activate the Caller ID/DNIS
routing schedule.
Default Mailbox: From the drop down menu, select the default Mailbox.
Default Voice Menu: From the drop down menu, select the default Voice
Menu that will be active under the schedule. This will be the default Voice Menu
that will be used by all schedules that are created unless specified otherwise.
Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the sub menu from the above
Voice Menu that will be used as the initial sub menu.
Description: Enter a brief title/description of the sub menu for reference.
Time Start and End: Select when the sub menu will become active and when it
will cease to be active. Enabling the All day checkbox will make the sub menu
active for 24hrs.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
135
Routing Table
Recurrence Pattern:
None: Select this radio button to have the sub menu occur only for the period of time once with no recurrence.
Daily: Select this radio button to indicate that the sub menu will be active on a day-by-day basis. Afterwards, you will have
(2) options:
Every weekday: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to be active every weekday.
Every X day(s): Select this radio button to specify an interval of activity for the sub menu (every
second day by entering 2 in the field, for example).
Hint: If you wish to define the settings as Every weekday, you can instead choose the Weekly settings where
 you
can specify which days of the week you wish to be notified.
Weekly: Select this radio button to indicate that the sub menu will be active on a weekly
basis. Then, in the Recur Every X week(s) on field, enter an interval of activity for the
sub menu (i.e. enter 3 for every third week). Finally, check the boxes of the days of the
week you want the sub menu to be in effect. If you wanted a sub menu to be active every
second Monday, Wednesday and Thursday, you would enter 2 in the field and select the
Monday, Wednesday and Thursday checkboxes.
Monthly: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to be active on a monthly
basis.
You have two (2) options:
Select the Day radio button and indicate which day of the month you want the sub menu to be active.
Select the The radio button and indicate which day of a month you want the sub menu to be active. For example, if you want
the sub menu to be active on the second Monday of every second month, you would select the The radio button, select
Second and Monday, and enter 2.
Yearly: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to be active on a specific day of
the year. You have two (2) options:
Select the Every radio button and indicate the day of the year on which you want the sub
menu to be active.
Select the The radio button and indicate a specific day of a specific month of the year on which you want the sub menu to be
active. For example, if you want the sub menu to be active on the second Thursday of every March, you would select the
radio button and select Second, Thursday and March from the drop down menu.
Range of Recurrence
Start: Select the date in which the first occurrence of the sub menu is to take effect.
 Note: The sub menu must have a recurrence pattern defined.
No end Date: Select this radio button if you want the sub menu to occur indefinitely
End After: Select this radio button if you want to disable the sub menu after it occurs the defined number of times.
End by: Select this radio button if you want to disable the sub menu by the defined date.
From the Start Menu dropdown list, select the sub menu that will run at the times specified.
136
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Customizing the TUI
In This Chapter:
Introduction
139
Main Screen
140
Actions
154
Printing Flowchart
155
Control Keys
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 10
138
137
Customizing the TUI
Introduction
A customized Telephone User Interface allows mailbox users to maintain
and personalize their mailbox profiles.
138
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Customizing the TUI
Main Screen
You can only assign 1 TUI to a Mailbox but the same TUI
 Note:
may be assigned to multiple Mailboxes.
Menu Number: This field is automatically generated when you create a
new Custom TUI.
Menu Name: Enter the name of the TUI. This is for reference only and has
no impact on functionality.
Default: Enable this checkbox to assign the current TUI to all mailboxes
that do not have TUIs defined in their profiles.
No. of Retries: Enter the number of retries a mailbox user has before the
system disconnects them.
Play Method: From the drop down menu, select a setting for the prompt. There are several options available:
Salutation
Function
Nothing
No prompt will be played on this sub menu.
Only Sub Menu Phrase
Only the defined Sub Menu Phrase will be played when the user accesses
this sub menu.
Only Segmented Phrase
Only the Segmented Phrase of each action will be played when the user
accesses this sub menu.
Both Sub Menu and
Segmented Phrase
Both the defined Sub Menu Phrase and the Segmented Phrase of each
action will be played when the user accesses this sub menu.
Description: Enter text describing the action of this sub menu in the TUI template.
Timeout: Enter the amount of time (in msec) that the system will wait before it processes the mailbox user's input. If the
mailbox user did not enter anything, the system will perform the default action.
Control Keys: Enable this checkbox to turn on the control key function while listening to a message.
 Note: Control Keys must be enabled in all sub menus before this function will work.
 Note: Control keys can only be accessed through DTMF input. It is not compatible with speech commands.
Announcements...: Click on this button to select which announcements to play when the mailbox user
logs in.
Play message count: Enable this checkbox to play back the number of message in the mailbox user's
inbox.

Unread: Enable this checkbox to play back the number of unread message in the mailbox user's
inbox.

Read: Enable this checkbox to play back the number of read message in the mailbox user's inbox.

Explicit Meeting Requests: Enable this checkbox to play back the number of meeting requests in
the mailbox user's inbox.
Play announcement: Enable this checkbox to play back the mailbox user's current availability and location.

Availability: Enable this checkbox to play back the availability of the mailbox user.

Location: Enable this checkbox to play back the location of the mailbox user.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
139
Customizing the TUI
Actions
Common Fields
DTMF Choice: From the drop down menu, select the DTMF key that the action will be associated with under the current sub
menu. Only 1 DTMF key may be assigned to an action. You must create duplicate actions if you need the action to be valid for
more than one DTMF key in a single sub menu.
Do not play prompt: Enable this checkbox to ignore the announcement of current action when the system announces all
the action in the current sub menu to the users. The action will still be valid and can be used, the users will simply not hear
anything when navigating through the menu.
Accept Meeting
This action will allow the users to accept the current meeting request message they are listening
to.
Accept Meeting Tentatively
This action will allow the users to tentatively accept the current meeting request message they
are listening to.
Active Features
This action will inform the user of their Transfer Options status.
Add Distribution List
This action will allow the users to create a Distribution List by entering the number then recording a
name for it.
Next Sub Menu: Select the sub menu that the user will be sent to after creating a Distribution List.
This sub menu should contain the actions to manage the list (e.g. Add Distribution List Member).
Add Distribution List Member
This action will allow the users to add a mailbox to an existing Distribution List. This action must be on
a sub menu which comes after Adding/Modifying a Distribution List action.
Add Notification Schedule
This action will allow the users to add a Notification Schedule entry via telephone. They will be able to
define the full phone number along with the exact schedule.
Add Recipient
This action will allow the users to add more recipients to a message. This action must be on a sub
menu which comes after an action that records, forwards or sends a message.
Next Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that the users will be sent to after
adding a recipient. This Sub Menu should be a Sub Menu which has the Send Recorded Message action.
140
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Customizing the TUI
Append to Recorded Message
This action will allow the users to add a message to an existing recorded message. This action must
be on a sub menu which comes after an action that records, forwards or sends a message.
Auto Forward Message
This action will allow the users to set automatic forwarding of all their messages to a destination of
their choice.
Auto Play
This action will allow the users to consecutively listen to all the messages in the specified
folder. The type of messages, and the specific information that will be played for the
users may be either asked for or forced by the action settings.
Folder: From the drop down menu, select the message folder that the action will browse
for messages.
Message Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that has message
management actions.
Meeting Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that has management
actions for meetings.
Future Delivery Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that has
management actions for messages flagged for Future Delivery.
Sort Order
From the drop down menu, select None, Read or Unread to prioritize messages according
to selected option. Select None if you do not wish to separate Read from Unread.
Importance: Enable this checkbox to sort the messages according to their flags (e.g. certified, private, etc.).
Meeting Request: Enable this checkbox to sort the meeting request messages separately.
Auto Play: Enable this checkbox to automatically start playing the messages in the defined order without user confirmation.
Message
Flag: Enable the Ask checkbox to ask the users to select which messages will be played (between Unread and Read). Enable
the Unread checkbox to only have unread messages available for playback. Enable the Read checkbox to only have the read
messages available for playback.
Type: Enable the Ask checkbox to ask the users to select which type of messages will be played (all types of messages will
be available to them). Enable the Fax checkbox to give users the fax message playback option. Enable the Voice checkbox
to give the users the voice message playback option. Enable the email (All) checkbox to give users the email message
playback option. Enable the email (Non-Meeting Request) checkbox to give users the non-meeting request email
message playback option. Enable the email (Meeting Request) checkbox to give users the meeting request email message
playback option.
Envelope Info
Certified: Enable this checkbox to inform the user that the message is certified before playback if it was flagged by the
sender.
Private: Enable this checkbox to inform the user that the message is private before playback if it was flagged by the sender.
Urgent: Enable this checkbox to inform the user that the message is urgent before playback if it was flagged by the sender.
Recipients: Enable this checkbox to inform the user of all the recipients of the message before playback.
Message From: Enable this checkbox to inform the user who the sender of the message is before playback.
Time Received: Enable this checkbox to inform the user when the message was received before playback.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
141
Customizing the TUI
Browse Folder
This action will allow the users to browse specific message folders. The type of messages
and the specific information that will be played for the users may be either asked for or
forced by the action settings.
Folder: From the drop down menu, select the message folder that the action will browse
for messages.
Message Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that contains the
message management actions.
Meeting Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that contains the
management actions for meeting.
Future Delivery Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that
contains the management actions for messages flagged for Future Delivery.
Sort Order
From the drop down menu, select None, Read or Unread to prioritize messages according
to the selected option. Select None if you do not wish to separate Read from Unread.
Importance: Enable this checkbox to sort the messages according to their flags (e.g. certified, private, etc.).
Meeting Request: Enable this checkbox to sort the meeting request messages separately.
Auto Play: Enable this checkbox to automatically start playing the messages in the defined order without user confirmation.
Message
Flag: Enable the Ask checkbox to ask the users to select which messages will be played (between Unread and Read). Enable
the Unread checkbox to have only unread messages available for playback. Enable the Read checkbox to have only read
messages available for playback.
Type: Enable the Ask checkbox to ask the users to select which type of messages will be played (all types of messages will
be available to them). Enable the Fax checkbox to give users the fax message playback option. Enable the Voice checkbox
to give users the voice message playback option. Enable the email (All) checkbox to give users the email message playback
option. Enable the email (Non-Meeting Request) checkbox to give users the non-meeting request email message
playback option. Enable the email (Meeting Request) checkbox to give users the meeting request email message playback
option.
Envelope Info
Certified: Enable this checkbox to inform the user that the message is certified before playback if it was flagged by the
sender.
Private: Enable this checkbox to inform the user that the message is private before playback if it was flagged by the sender.
Urgent: Enable this checkbox to inform the user that the message is urgent before playback if it was flagged by the sender.
Recipients: Enable this checkbox to inform the user of all the recipients of the message before playback.
Message From: Enable this checkbox to inform the user who the sender of the message is before playback.
Time Received: Enable this checkbox to inform the user when the message was received before playback.
Call Back to Sender
This action will allow the users to directly call the sender of the message. They can choose to call the
sender directly, assuming that the sender's address can be resolved by the system, or manually enter
the phone number to call. This action must be on a sub menu which comes after an action that plays
a message.
Cancel Message and Exit
Next Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that the users will be sent to after
cancelling a message. This Sub Menu should be a Sub Menu which comes after reviewing a message.
142
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Customizing the TUI
Change Availability
This action will allow the users to change their availability. If they are currently available, they will
now be unavailable and vice versa.
Change Future Delivery Date/Time
This action will allow the users to change the date on Future Delivery messages. This action must be
on a sub menu which comes after reviewing a message.
Change Location
This action will allow the users to change their location to the one defined in the action.
Location: From the drop down menu, select the location that users will be able to change to. This
location has to be one of the default locations. You cannot select a custom location through this
method.
Change Voice Verification Security Level
This action will allow the users to change the Voice Verification security level between none, normal
and high.
Choose TTS Language
This action will allow the users to choose the TTS language defined in the action.
Language: From the drop down menu, select the TTS language that the users will be able to choose.
Clear Mass Recall
This action will stop sending a Mass Recall broadcast, and clear the queue of all pending outgoing
messages.
Clear Numeric Password
This action will allow the users to reset their password to the default (1111).
Decline Meeting
This action will allow the users to decline the current meeting request message that they are listening
to.
Define Default Fax Address
This action will allow the users to manually define a destination for all incoming faxes. This will be
added as a fax entry under the Address tab of the mailbox.
Delete Distribution List
This action will allow the users to delete a selected Distribution List.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
143
Customizing the TUI
Delete Distribution List Member
This action will allow the users to remove a mailbox from the current Distribution List. This action
must be on a sub menu which comes after Adding/Modifying a Distribution List action.
Delete Message
This action will allow the users to delete the current message. This action must be on a sub menu
which comes after an action that plays a message.
Delete Notification Schedule
This action will allow the users to either delete a selected Notification Schedule entry or all schedules.
Delete Recipient
This action will allow the users to remove recipient from a message. This action must be on a sub
menu which comes after an action that records, forwards or sends a message.
Next Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that the users will be sent to after
deleting a recipient. This Sub Menu should be a Sub Menu which has the Send Recorded Message action.
Deliver Now
This action will allow the users to immediately send the current message in the outbox folder. This
action must be on a sub menu which comes after reviewing a message.
Disable Speech Command
This action will allow the users to disable the Speech Command feature for the duration of current
login session.
Disconnect
This action will disconnect the user from the system.
Envelope Information
This action will allow the users to play the envelope information of a message. The type of
envelope information played may be defined within the action. This action must be on a sub
menu which comes after an action that plays a message.
Certified: Enable this checkbox to inform the user that the message is certified if it was
flagged by the sender.
Private: Enable this checkbox to inform the user that the message is private if it was flagged by the sender.
Urgent: Enable this checkbox to inform the user that the message is urgent if it was flagged by the sender.
Recipients: Enable this checkbox to inform the user of all the recipients of the message.
Message From: Enable this checkbox to inform the user who the sender of the message is.
Time Received: Enable this checkbox to inform the user when the message was received.
144
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Customizing the TUI
Forward Message
This action will allow the users to forward the current message. The users may forward the
message as is or record a comment on the forward during the action. This action must be on
a sub menu which comes after an action that plays a message.
Next Sub Menu with Comment: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu which
contains actions related to recording (e.g. Review Recorded Message).
Next Sub Menu without Comment: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu which contains actions related to
sending a message.
Next Sub Menu During Record: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that the users will have access to while
making a recording.
Go Back to the Locations Calendar
This action will allow the users to change their location to what is currently defined in their Locations
Calendar.
Keep Future Delivery Date/Time
This action will allow the users to keep the current date on Future Delivery messages. This action
must be on a sub menu which comes after reviewing a message. The purpose of this action is to give
the users an option when they are on a TUI Sub Menu dedicated to Future Delivery management.
Listen to Distribution List
This action will allow the users to listen to the list of all available Distribution Lists.
Listen to Messages
This action will allow the users to listen to the messages in the specified folder. The type
of messages, and the specific information that will be played for the users may be either
asked or forced by the action settings.
Folder: From the drop down menu, select the message folder that the action will browse
for messages.
Message Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that has message
management actions.
Meeting Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that has management
actions for meeting.
Future Delivery Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that has
management actions for messages flagged for Future Delivery.
Sort Order
Drop down Menu: From the drop down menu, select None, Read or Unread to prioritize
messages according to selected option. Select None if you do not wish to separate Read
from Unread.
Importance: Enable this checkbox to sort the messages according to their flags (e.g. certified, private, etc.).
Meeting Request: Enable this checkbox to sort the meeting request messages separately.
Auto Play: Enable this checkbox to automatically start playing the messages in the defined order without user confirmation.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
145
Customizing the TUI
Message
Flag: Enable the Ask checkbox to ask the users to select which messages will be played (between Unread and Read). Enable
the Unread checkbox to only have unread messages available for playback. Enable the Read checkbox to only have the read
messages available for playback.
Type: Enable the Ask checkbox to ask the users to select which type of messages will be played (all types of messages will
be available to them). Enable the Fax checkbox to give the users fax message playback option. Enable the Voice checkbox
to give the users voice message playback option. Enable the email (All) checkbox to give the users email message playback
option. Enable the email (Non-Meeting Request) checkbox to give the users non-meeting request email message
playback option. Enable the email (Meeting Request) checkbox to give the users meeting request email message playback
option.
Envelope Info
Certified: Enable this checkbox to inform the user that the message is certified before playback if it was flagged by the
sender.
Private: Enable this checkbox to inform the user that the message is private before playback if it was flagged by the sender.
Urgent: Enable this checkbox to inform the user that the message is urgent before playback if it was flagged by the sender.
Recipients: Enable this checkbox to inform the user of all the recipients of the message before playback.
Message From: Enable this checkbox to inform the user who the sender of the message is before playback.
Time Received: Enable this checkbox to inform the user when the message was received before playback.
Listen to Notification Schedule
This action will allow the users to listen to all their Notification Schedules.
Listen to Numeric Password
This action will allow the users to listen to their current mailbox password.
Listen to Recipients
This action will allow the users to listen to all the recipient on a message. This action must be on a
sub menu which comes after an action that records, forwards or sends a message.
Next Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that the users will be sent to after
listening to the recipient. This Sub Menu should be a Sub Menu which has the Send Recorded Message action.
Make Caller ID Active Address
This action will allow the users to add their current Caller ID to their mailbox and use it as a default
under the location that they are in. If the number already exists in the addresses, it will become the
default.
Mark Message Unread/Read
This action will allow the users to mark the message as Unread or Read. This action must be on a sub
menu which comes after an action that plays a message.
146
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Customizing the TUI
Modify Distribution List
This action will list the entries of the Distribution List selected by the user then forward them to the
sub menu where they can manage the Distribution List.
Next Sub Menu: Select the sub menu that the user will be sent to modify the Distribution List. This
sub menu should contain the actions to manage the list (e.g. Add Distribution List Member).
Modify Notification Schedule
This action will allow the users to modify a selected Notification Schedule entry.
Move Message to Another Folder
This action will allow the users to move the message to the folder defined in the action. This
action must be on a sub menu which comes after an action that plays a message.
Folder: From the drop down menu, select the folder that the message will be moved to. If you
choose custom, enter the name of the folder manually on the field provided on the right.
Place Call
This action will allow the users to call a contact or a number they specify. The availability of call options
will depend on the configuration of the action.
Call Contact: Select this radio button, then from the drop down menu, select Private, Public or both to
give the user access to those contacts.
Dial Number: Select this radio button to allow users to dial a custom number.
Both: Select this radio button to allow users to dial both contacts or custom numbers.
Print Fax
This action will allow the users to print the fax message that they have just reviewed. This action
must be on a sub menu which comes after an action that plays a message.
Recall Caller
This action will allow the users to connect to a caller that is currently leaving a message on the
mailbox of the user.
Record Busy Greeting
This action will allow the users to record a greeting that can be played when their status is set to busy.
Record Customized Greeting
This action will allow the users to record a greeting that may be utilized in few different situations. The
users will have to assign a number to each Customized Greeting when they are recording a new one.
Record Internal Busy Greeting
This action will allow the users to record a greeting that can be played to internal callers when their
status is set to busy.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
147
Customizing the TUI
Record Internal Personal Greeting
This action will allow the users to record a greeting for personal purpose that will only be available to
internal callers. This will usually be the greeting that will be played when the user does not pick up
their phone.
Record Internal Unavailable Greeting
This action will allow the users to record a greeting that can be played to internal callers when their
status is set to unavailable.
Record Location Greeting
This action will allow the users to record a greeting for specified location.
Location: From the drop down menu, select the location that users will be recording the greetings
for. This location has to be one of the default locations. You cannot select a custom location through
this method.
Record Message in Current Mailbox
This action will allow the users to record a voice message which will be left in the mailbox they are
currently logged into.
Record Name Greeting
This action will allow the users to record a Name Greeting which will be played to identify the owner of
the mailbox in a directory or during a transfer.
Record Personal Greeting
This action will allow the users to record a greeting for personal purposes. This will usually be the
greeting that will be played when the user does not pick up their phone.
Record Unavailable Greeting
This action will allow the users to record a greeting that can be played when their status is set to
unavailable.
Reply to All Recipients
This action will allow the users to record a reply that will be sent to the sender as well as
anyone else that has received the same message. This action must be on a sub menu which
comes after an action that plays a message. This action is the equivalent of Reply to All
function from email clients.
Send Message Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that the users will be sent to review, send or
cancel their message. The actions to manage the recorded message (e.g. Review Recorded Message) should be in this Sub
Menu.
Next Sub Menu During Record: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that the users will have access to while
making a recording. The actions on this Sub Menu cannot use the same DTMF keys that the defined Send Message Sub Menu
is already utilizing. Having a same DTMF key entry will cause a conflict.
148
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Customizing the TUI
Reply to Sender Only
This action will allow the users to record a reply that will be sent to the sender of the message.
This action must be on a sub menu which comes after an action that plays a message.
Send Message Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that the users
will be sent to review, send or cancel their message. The actions to manage the recorded
message (e.g. Review Recorded Message) should be in this Sub Menu.
Next Sub Menu During Record: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that the users will have access to while
making a recording. The actions on this Sub Menu cannot use the same DTMF keys that the defined Send Message Sub Menu
is already utilizing. Having a same DTMF key entry will cause a conflict.
Rerecord List Name
This action will allow the users to rerecord the current Distribution List's name. This action must be on
a sub menu which comes after Adding/Modifying a Distribution List action.
Rerecord Message
This action will allow the users to rerecord a message to replace the one they have recorded. This
action must be on a sub menu which comes after an action that records, forwards or sends a
message.
Return to Auto Attendant
This action will return the users to the auto attendant.
Review Availability and Location
This action will allow the users to listen to their current availability and location.
Next Sub Menu: Select the sub menu that the user will be sent to after reviewing their status. This
sub menu should contain the actions to manage the locations (e.g. Change Location).
Review Contacts
This action will allow the users to review the contacts from the database specified in the action. The
contact's default numbers will be played by the system.
Contact: From the drop down menu, select Private, Public or both to give the user access to those
contacts.
Review Distribution List Members
This action will play all the existing entries on the current Distribution List for the user. This action
must be on a sub menu which comes after Adding/Modifying a Distribution List action.
Review List Name
This action will play the current Distribution List's name for the user. This action must be on a sub
menu which comes after Adding/Modifying a Distribution List action.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
149
Customizing the TUI
Review Message
This action will allow the users to review the current message. Afterwards, they will be returned to the
primary Sub Menu that has the actions for messages. This action must be on a sub menu which
comes after an action that plays a message.
Review Recorded Message
This action will allow the users to review the message that has been recorded. This action must be on
a sub menu which comes after an action that records, forwards or sends a message.
Rewind Message
This action will allow the users to rewind the current message (if under control key, you will be able to
define the amount of time you can rewind per key entry). Single entry will rewind the message for the
defined time (5 seconds by default) while double entry will rewind the message to the beginning.
Afterwards, they will remain in the same Sub Menu where the Rewind Message action is in. This action must be on a sub
menu which comes after an action that plays a message.
Save Recorded Message in Draft and Exit
This action will allow the users to save the recorded message in the Draft folder and exit. This action
must be on a sub menu which comes after an action that records message. This message may be
accessed by going to the Draft folder at any time.
Say Delivery Date and Time
This action will allow the users to listen to the Future Delivery time of the messages. This action must
be on a sub menu which comes after reviewing a message.
Send A Message
This action will allow the users to send a voice message to mailbox(es) in the system. They
will be prompted to record a message when they select this option.
Send Message Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that the users
will be sent to review, send or cancel their message. The actions to manage the recorded
message (e.g. Review Recorded Message) should be in this Sub Menu.
Next Sub Menu During Record: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that the users will have access to while
making a recording. The actions on this Sub Menu cannot use the same DTMF keys that the defined Send Message Sub Menu
is already utilizing. Having a same DTMF key entry will cause a conflict.
Send Recorded Message
This action will allow the users to send the message that has been recorded. This action must
be on a sub menu which comes after an action that records a message.
Voice Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Voice Menu that the message recipients
will be sent to after hearing the message.
Next Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that the users will be sent
to after sending a message.
Urgent: Enable this checkbox to automatically flag all messages sent through this action as Urgent.
Certified: Enable this checkbox to automatically flag all messages sent through this action as Certified.
Confidential: Enable this checkbox to automatically flag all messages sent through this action as Confidential.
150
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Customizing the TUI
Send Recorded Message In Future
This action will allow the users to send the message that has been recorded at a specific future
date that they choose. This action must be on a sub menu which comes after an action that
records a message.
Voice Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Voice Menu that the message recipients
will be sent to after hearing the message.
Next Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that the users will be sent to after sending a message.
Urgent: Enable this checkbox to automatically flag all messages sent through this action as Urgent.
Certified: Enable this checkbox to automatically flag all messages sent through this action as Certified.
Confidential: Enable this checkbox to automatically flag all messages sent through this action as Confidential.
Send to Sub Menu
This action will send the user to the Sub Menu defined in the action.
Send to Tutorial
This action will send the user to the Tutorial session.
Set Numeric Password
This action will allow the users to change their mailbox numeric password.
Set Wakeup Call
This action will allow the users to add a wakeup call entry to the system. They will be able to manually
define the time and the number to be called.
Skip to Next Message without changing Read Status
This action will allow the users to skip to the next message without changing Read Status of the
current message. This action must be on a sub menu which comes after an action that plays a
message.
Skip to Previous Message
This action will allow the users to skip to the previous message. This action must be on a sub menu
which comes after an action that plays a message.
Skip to Previous Message without Changing Read Status
This action will allow the users to skip to the previous message without changing Read Status of the
current message. This action must be on a sub menu which comes after an action that plays a
message.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
151
Customizing the TUI
Skip/Save
This action will allow the users to either skip or save the current message. This action must be on a
sub menu which comes after an action that plays a message.
Save Message: Select this radio button to make this action save the current message.
Skip Message: Select this radio button to make this action skip the current message.
Toggle Certified Flag
This action will allow the users to manually flag their message as Certified. This action must be on a
sub menu which comes after an action that records, forwards or sends a message.
Next Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that the users will be sent to after
flagging the message. This Sub Menu should be a Sub Menu which has the Send Recorded Message
action.
Toggle Confidential Flag
This action will allow the users to manually flag their message as Confidential. This action must be on
a sub menu which comes after an action that records, forwards or sends a message.
Next Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that the users will be sent to after
flagging the message. This Sub Menu should be a Sub Menu which has the Send Recorded Message action.
Toggle Mass Recall
This action will allow the users to activate mass recall. If the mass recall is already activated, this
action will stop the mass recall.
Toggle Urgent Flag
This action will allow the users to manually flag their message as Urgent. This action must be on a
sub menu which comes after an action that records, forwards or sends a message.
Next Sub Menu: From the drop down menu, select the Sub Menu that the users will be sent to after
flagging the message. This Sub Menu should be a Sub Menu which has the Send Recorded Message
action.
Transcribe and Send Recorded Message
This action will allow the users to dictate a message which will be sent to the target users as a text
message upon transcription.
Transfer to Mailbox
This action will allow the users to be transferred to the mailbox defined in the action.
Mailbox: From the drop down menu, select the mailbox that the user will be transferred to.
Transfer to Operator
This action will allow the users to be transferred to the Operator.
152
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Customizing the TUI
Turn Call Forwarding On/Off
This action will allow the users to activate/deactivate Call Forwarding. If the feature was on, it will be
turned off and vice versa.
Turn Call Queuing On/Off
This action will allow the users to activate/deactivate Call Queuing. If the feature was on, it will be
turned off and vice versa.
Turn Call Screening On/Off
This action will allow the users to activate/deactivate Call Screening. If the feature was on, it will be
turned off and vice versa.
Turn Notification Schedule On/Off
This action will allow the users to activate/deactivate their Notification Schedule. If the feature was
on, it will be turned off and vice versa.
Turn Post Paging On/Off
This action will allow the users to activate/deactivate Post Paging. If the feature was on, it will be
turned off and vice versa.
Turn Pre Paging On/Off
This action will allow the users to activate/deactivate Pre Paging. If the feature was on, it will be
turned off and vice versa.
Voice Print Training
This action will allow the users to train the voice print system so that the Voice Verification feature will
be able to recognize the user more fluently. The user may also remove and reenroll the voice prints
through this action as well.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
153
Customizing the TUI
Printing Flowchart
A fully customized TUI can be complex. To make things easier to understand, particularly for the
users, you can export the TUI structure as an HTML file and print it. When you click on the
Customize TUI Print-out button, you will see this window which maps out your current TUI's entire
structure.
 Hint: Disable the checkbox beside each TUI component to remove it from the print-out.
Color: Select the color of the text that will be used to generate the print-out.
Header Font: Select the style of font that will be used for headers (e.g. sub menu name) in the
print-out.
Text Font: Select the style of font that will be used for the descriptive/action text.
Max Number of Menus in Each Row: Select the number of menu items that a single row will hold. For example, setting
this to 3 will print 3 sub menus in a single row.
154
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Customizing the TUI
Control Keys
The Control Keys feature allows mailbox users to have control over the message
playback.
Fast Forward: Fast forward a message during playback. You may define the fast
forward duration (in msec) when you add the action to the DTMF key.
Rewind: Rewind message during playback. You may define the rewind duration (in
msec) when you add the action to the DTMF key.
Pause: Pause the message during playback. You may define the pause duration (in
msec) when you add the action to the DTMF key.
Double Control Key: Enable this checkbox to allow Double Control Key which
offers further customizing of control keys via options below.
Control Key Mode: From the drop down menu, select the Control Key Mode from
below to employ.

Double Keys: During message play back, press the assigned key twice to perform the desired action. For example, if
Rewind was assigned to DTMF key 1, press [1][1] to Rewind the message.

Toggle: During message play back, press the Toggle/Prefix Key and then the assigned key to perform the desired
action. For example, if '*' was the Toggle/Prefix Key, the mailbox user would press [*][1] to Rewind the message.
This method is recommended if you wish to use a DTMF key that is already in use for control keys.
 Note:
The Toggle/Prefix key will ensure that the two functions do not overlap even if they share the same DTMF
key.
Control Key Inter-Digit Timeout: Enter the duration (in msec) that the UC server will wait before defaulting to end of
message after the Toggle/Prefix Key is pressed.
Toggle/Prefix Key: Enter the DTMF key that will be used as the Toggle or Prefix key.
If control keys have not been assigned, and a caller presses a key while the message is playing, the
 Note:
system will respond as if it has reached the end of the message and assume that the associated action key
(e.g. Save Message) has been pressed. As a general rule, do not overlap the DTMF key used for action keys
and control keys. If the keys do overlap, use the Toggle/Prefix key to prevent potential issues.
Legacy Functions
The availability of these functions are limited to certain legacy PBX systems.
Softer: Reduce the volume level.
Normal Volume: Set the volume level to normal.
Louder: Increase the volume level.
Slower: Reduce the message playback speed.
Normal Speed: Set the message playback speed to normal.
Faster: Increase the message playback speed.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
155
Customizing the TUI
156
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Print Server
In This Chapter:
158
Introduction
158
Print Server
158
Add / Modify Print Server
CHAPTER 11
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
157
Print Server
Introduction
Print Server enables the printing of emails in a User mailbox via the Telephone User Interface (TUI) to a fax machine. This
process will convert the email’s text to a tiff formatted file.
Print Server
Launch UC Admin and locate Print Server in the left-hand pane.
Description: This field displays the name of the print server.
Workstation Name: This field displays the name of the PC where the print
server is installed.
Jobs in progress: This field displays the number of jobs being printed.
Available: This field displays the availability of the printer server.
Add / Modify Print Server
To create a new entry, right-click on the Print Server in the left-hand pane and choose
New > Print Server. To edit an existing entry, double-click it in the right-hand pane.
Description: Enter a name for the Print Server. This is for your reference and has no
impact on performance.
Workstation Name: Enter the name of the PC where the Print Server is installed.
Available: Enable this checkbox to activate the Print Server. Your selection will be displayed in
the Print Server screen as True or False.
Add Print Server: Create a new print server.
Delete Print Server: Remove the current print server from the system.
158
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Message UNC
Storage Path
In This Chapter:
Introduction
160
Creating the UNC Path
161
Redirecting Messages Along the Path
162
Using Web Client with Storage Paths
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 12
160
159
Message UNC Storage Path
Introduction
The UNC Storage Path feature allows the administrator to define locations on the network where incoming messages (email,
voice, and fax) can be stored outside of the user’s mailbox.
Creating the UNC Path
The first step in the process is for the administrator to create the public paths from the admin console.
These paths will be available to all users. To create a private path, available only to one specific
 Note:
user, the administrator must create that path through the user’s Mailbox Message Options tab 
(see page 161).
1.
From the Admin Console, right-click on Storage Path and select
New>Path.















2.
Type in the path to the network location, or browse to it using the ellipsis button (...), where the
messages will be stored. Click OK when finished.


Setting the path to C:\ will send the messages to the root of the voice server, not to the users’
 Note:
computers.
The paths entered must conform to the UNC standard including the use of backslashes ‘\’ 
 Warning:
(i.e. “\\192.168.1.10\path”).
3.
160
The newly created path will now appear in the Admin console. Repeat
these steps to create as many public paths as required.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Message UNC Storage Path
Redirecting Messages Along the Path
The administrator can now set storage path usage for anyone wishing to make use of the feature. The administrator can also
create Private Paths, accessible to one user only. Users can also manage the feature through Web Client (see page 162 of this
manual for more information).
1.
From Admin>Mailbox Structure>Message Options choose Add.
2.
Enter the following options. Click OK when finished:
Destination Type: Select Storage Path from the dropdown list.
Destination: Select the path from the dropdown list. Instead of using the dropdown
list you can enter a new path, either by typing it manually or using the browse
button (...). This will create a private path which only this user can access.
Forward Type: Choose Relay from the dropdown list.
Voice Format: Select the file format for storing voice messages.
Fax Format: Select the file format for storing faxes.
Message Type: Enable the checkboxes to choose which types of messages (Email,
Fax, Voice) will be directed to the storage location. Enable all that apply.
After (hours, minutes): Enter a delay before copying the messages from the user
mailbox into the storage location. If left blank, the messages will be copied
immediately upon receipt.

 Note: Once created here, storage paths are automatically activated for that user.
The message type(s) chosen here will cause only the current user’s messages to be sent to the
 Note:
storage location.
The paths entered must conform to the UNC standard including the use of backslashes ‘\’ 
 Warning:
(i.e. ‘\\192.168.1.10\path’ ).
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
161
Message UNC Storage Path
Using Web Client with Storage Paths
Users can choose to direct their messages to the specified storage locations by using Web Client.
1.
In the Web Client, click Message Forwarding. Select Add new forwarding address.
Any private paths setup for this user by the administrator will be shown in this window. Private
 Note:
paths cannot be edited or added by the user.
2.
Enable the Storage Path radio button.
3.
From the dropdown list, select the path from those provided. Custom paths cannot be entered here.
4.
Enter the following options.
Forward Type: Choose Relay from the dropdown list.
Message Type: Choose which types of messages (Email, Fax, Voice) will be directed to the storage location. Enable the
checkboxes of all that apply.
Voice Format: Leave at the default value.
Fax Format: Select the format for storing faxes.
After (hours, minutes): Enter a delay before copying the messages from the user mailbox into the storage location. If
left blank, the messages will be copied immediately upon receipt.
5.
162
Click Save and Close when finished.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Message UNC Storage Path
6.
The chosen path will now appear in the Message Forwarding window. Repeat steps 1-step 5 to add as many paths as
required.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
163
Message UNC Storage Path
164
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
TSE IMAP Server
In This Chapter:
166
Introduction
166
TSE IMAP Server - Add / Modify
CHAPTER 13
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
165
TSE IMAP Server
Introduction
Through the TSE IMAP Server, you will be able to add your mail servers so that they can be integrated with the UC server. UC
server supports most mail servers that are currently used by most organizations. These include, but are not limited to,
Microsoft Exchange, Google Apps/Gmail, Lotus Domino, and Novell Groupwise. Depending on the type of mail server you will
be integrating with, you may also gain additional features such as Contact and Calendar synchronization along with message
synchronization.
TSE IMAP Server - Add / Modify
Launch UC Administrator and right-click on TSE IMAP Server. Select New > TSE IMAP Server.
If there is a TSE IMAP Server that needs to be modified, double-click on it in the right-hand pane.
IMAP Server Name: Enter the name of the IMAP server. This is for your reference and does not
impact performance. This label will be seen when you are associating Feature Groups or
Mailboxes with a specific IMAP server for integration/synchronization.
IMAP Server Address: Enter the IP or Domain address of the IMAP server.
IMAP Server Port: Enter the port which will be used to communicate with the IMAP server.
Voice Format: From the drop down menu, select the voice format which will be used when
sending voice messages to external voice servers.
IMAP Server Domain: Enter the Domain address of the IMAP server. Since it is possible to
define IMAP Server Address fields using an IP address, the Domain address entered here will be
used to verify the Reply To address of a mailbox using IMAP TSE synchronization to prevent typical message looping
scenarios.
166
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Voice Server
In This Chapter:
Introduction
168
Field Description
169
Advanced Field Description
192
Adding a New Voice Server
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 14
168
167
Voice Server
Introduction
The Voice Server contains the primary information regarding the
system. You will be able to configure and confirm the number of
channels, ports and the path used by the UC server.
Field Description
You can modify each field of a Voice Server by double clicking the
desired entry.
Voice Server Computer Name: Enter a short name for the
Voice Server.
Voice Server Description: Enter a short description for the
Voice Server.
Master Voice Server: Define whether this Voice Server is Voice
Server 1. The master Voice Server is always Voice Server one.
Number of Voice Channels: Enter the number of voice
channels available in the system.
Number of TTS Channels: Enter the number of text-to-speech
channels available in the system.
Number of ASR Channels: Enter the number of channels for
auto-speech recognition available in the system.
Number of Soft Fax Channels: Enter the number of channels for soft fax available in the system.
Fax Enabled: Define whether this Voice Server has fax capabilities. This field is automatically enabled when the Voice
Server detects that the fax services is enabled on startup.
Number of Fax Channels: Enter the number of channels for fax available in the system.
Start Voice Channel Number: Enter the channel at which this Voice Server begins to serve. For example, Voice Server 1
might be channels 1 to 20, so Voice Server 2, with a Start Channel Number of 21, would serve channels 21 to 40.
Start Fax Channel Number: Enter the fax channel at which this Voice Server begins to serve.
External IP Address: Enter the external IP of the Voice Server. This IP address is used when connecting to the admin
remotely from an external computer.
Internal IP Address: Enter the internal IP of the Voice Server. This IP address is used when connecting to the admin
remotely from another internal workstation.
TCP/IP Port: Enter the port which can be used by UM Monitor to check the status of the Officelinx server. A value of 0
specifies the default (which uses port 11000).
Voice Server Path: Enter the installation directory path of the Voice Server (C:\UC by default).
Number of Resiliency Channels: Enter the number of Resiliency (Redundancy) Channels available in the system.
Number of Voice Verification Channels: Enter the number of Voice Verification Channels available in the system.
168
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Voice Server
Advanced Field Description
Double-click on Advanced to access additional fields.
These fields should not be modified unless you are
 Warning:
specifically instructed to do so by technical support staff.
Changing these settings incorrectly could cause the system
to fail.
List of Items
Absorb Inband Digits
Description: For Iwatsu/Panasonic switches, even though Officelinx
uses CTI or SMDI for integration, the switch still sends inband digits. The
server must absorb these digits and dump them before going to greetings.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 which means do not absorb the inband digits.
Activate Location Type Greeting
Description: Each location has three types of greeting: Default, Auto Location Name, and Location greetings. In case the
user chooses the third option (Play location greeting), there was no way in TUI to activate it. After recording the location
greeting through TUI, the system automatically activated this greeting. In 2.0, there is no way in TUI to switch back to other
types of greeting after this activation.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: default is “1” for OEM UCP; “0” for other OEMs
Add Extension for UM Advanced user
Description: For MITAI HCI Re-routing. Anytime the Admin adds a new extension, the MITAI should also add it to it’s own
list to monitor. Currently we only add UM or Advanced users to the list. If this entry is “0”, don’t add the new extension to
monitor list even if the mailbox is UM or Advanced user; if it’s “1”, add the new extension to monitor list if the mailbox is UM
or Advanced user. But there is an exception here: the user can add a new extension through showshell to add to monitor list,
in this case, this entry is ignored and the entry is added it to monitor list.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0
Allow Non Numeric value in Caller ID Number
Description: For CTI Enabled systems, when a CTI Ring event arrives with the form “RING!108! abc!722” where 108 is the
callee and “abc” is the caller, since “abc” is non-numeric, in most cases it is considered an invalid callerid and is reset to
empty. If this registry is “YES”, we allow non-numeric characters like “abc” as callerid. Otherwise, reset the callerid to “” if
the caller info packet does not begin with a number.
Values: Yes or No
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: No
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
169
Voice Server
Allow Say Operator in CustMbx
Description: Allow the user to say operator to transfer to operator when he/she is in a Customized TUI
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 menus don’t allow say operator in Customized TUI
Auto Login
Description: Only used in SMDI integration. This was created to resolve an issue where the PBX flipped the callerID and
mailbox info within the SMDI packet.
Values: “NOANSWER” means even if the CallerId is a mailbox profile, it plays the NoAnswer greeting of that mailbox. “BUSY”
means even if the CallerId is in a mailbox profile, it plays the Busy greeting of that mailbox. “NO” means even if the CallerId
is mailbox profile, it plays the Company greeting of that mailbox. “YES” or an empty string means if the CallerId is a mailbox
profile, it goes to the login prompt.
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: YES
Backup MITAI Audio log
Description: Backup MiAudio logs to subfolders during system restart.
Values: “0” don’t backup MiAudio log, “1” backup MiAudio log
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1
BargeIn Blind Dial
Description: Blind dialing BargeIn code instead of supervised. For some PBX switches (i.e. Panasonic), the server may need
to use blind dial only.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 means use supervised dialing
Busy Alternative System Greeting
Description: By default the system busy greeting is mess015.vox, but you can override it by specifying a full path file name
as the system busy greeting.
Values: Full path of voice file name.
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty means use the default system busy greeting mess015.vox.
Caller Mailbox DID Display
Description: Callee phone display shows either MailboxNum, DID, or CallerID depending on whether the callee is using an
internal or external phone, as well as if DID of caller is defined or not. Generally:
Callee is internal phone – show Caller MailboxNo; If caller is not a mailbox, show callerID;
Callee is external phone – show DID defined in Caller Mailbox profile; if caller is not a mailbox, show callerID.
This functionality is only effective on supported switch platforms such as Mitel SIP Trunk.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 means don’t control callee’s phone display.
170
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Voice Server
Cancel Transfer Wait Time
Description: For AASTRA M6501-RM, to dial the cancel transfer code with a single message doesn’t work. We have to dial
the first digit of the code, wait, and then send the rest of the code. This setting will cause the server to dial the first digit of
cancel transfer code, pause the amount of time defined in this registry entry and then send the rest of the code.
Values: Time in milliseconds
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1000
Catch Exception
Description: Enabling catch unhandled exception from middleware (EEVoice/EESip…etc.).
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 means catch and log exceptions thrown from middleware.
Centrex OutCall Access Code
Description: For Centrex transfer, sometimes we need to dial the outcall access code plus the Centrex code, sometimes we
don’t need to dial the outcall access code because the Centrex code itself already has the capability to dial out. “1” means
dial OutCall Access code + Centrex code; “0” means dial Centrex code only.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1
CheckIn ClassOfService Number
Description: For Panasonic PMS systems, Checkin/Checkout is fulfilled by the switch. VServer needs to change the
extension ClassOfService number on switch.
Values: Numeric value
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty
CheckOut ClassOfService Number
Description: For Panasonic PMS systems, Checkin/Checkout is fulfilled by the switch. VServer needs to change the
extension ClassOfService number on switch.
Values: Numeric value
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty
Clear Connection After Cancel Transfer
Description: Iwatsu SIP may have an issue cancelling a transfer when the call is connected (but not CompleteTransfer yet).
We need to use CTI to disconnect the callee.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 means don’t use CTI to clear the connection
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
171
Voice Server
CTI Answer Ring
Description: System will detect a ring from a CTI event if voice board is not detecting a ring. Usually happens on Brooktrout
borads.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 for Brooktrout board, 0 for other boards
CTI DNIS for Inband
Description: Use DNIS information received through CTI instead of inband strings.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: For CTI systems the default is “1”. Otherwise default “0”
CTI Initialize Delay
Description: For a Panasonic CTI, after starting the voice system, there must be a delay of about 50 seconds before
initializing the CTI service. Otherwise the system may hang during initialization.
Values: Delay length in seconds
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: “50” for Panasonic CTI, means wait for 50 seconds before initializing CTI Service; “0” for other systems.
CTI MakeCall without Account Code
Description: When using CTI to make an outbound call, some switches do not support dialing the account code. It must be
stripped off before dialing.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 for TAPI CTI means send the account code, 0 for others will strip off account code.
CTI Monitor Hangup
Description: Originally we called StopThenHangup whenever we received a CTI event Hangup, Idle or Clear. But Iwatsu
tried centrex transfer, after getting no answer and receiving back the call, the call was dropped because we got a CTI event
“CLEAR”. But this event “CLEAR” is for another line for Centrex Transfer.
Values: “0” call StopThenHangup for CTI Event Hangup, Idle, or Clear; “1” means call StopThenHangup for these.
Effective: Immediately CTI events.
Default Value: 0
CTI Record All
Description: Combines with FGroup.RecordAll to determine if the system should record all outbound calls.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 means don’t record all outbound calls.
172
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Voice Server
CTI Use SMDI
Description: For CTI Enabled systems, we use an SMDI approach for PBX integration for some systems like MITAI, 3COM,
and a Non-SMDI approach for other systems like IWATSU. Setting this entry to 1 will force IWATSU systems to use an SMDI
approach.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 which means don’t use SMDI
Dedicated SoftFax Ports
Description: This will determine if we use dedicated softfax ports. This is only for Iwatsu ECS systems version 4.0 and up.
Values: 0 and 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: ‘1’ for Iwatsu SIP system, “0” for other systems initially with ‘1’ meaning to use dedicated softfax ports.
Desktop Dial Supervised Transfer
Description: For iLink Pro Desktop outbound dial to a phone number, we can force it to use supervised transfer.
Values: 0 and 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 meaning blind transfer if possible.
Dial String Alpha Remove
Description: When we get dialing strings from Windows TAPI in Russian, it returns an extra char “W” in the return string
such as 8W5017079700, we should remove this wrong character.
Values: Any characters needs to be removed
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Ww. Lower or Upper case char “w” will be removed from dialing string returned from TAPI.
Direct Call Ask FindMe
Description: If a user’s location is configured to Auto FindMe and the internal extension is on the current location extension
list, call directly to the internal extension with Busy/NoAnswer forward to VMail port, the system can choose to Ask the user
to Findme or just go straight to Voicemail. If the registry = “0”, goto VoiceMail after NoAns/Busy. If = “1”, Ask to Findme after
NoAns/Busy If = “2”, System automatically try other phone numbers on the list.
Values: 0 or 1 or 2
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 2
Direct Dial paging
Description: Determines if the system will use direct dial instead of transfer functions, this is needed by 3Com Super Stack
3.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 for 3Com TAPI Super Stack 3, 0 for other cases.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
173
Voice Server
Direct Paging Channels
Description: Determines the channels used for direct dial paging.
Values: List channels with comma or hyphen delimiter. (1,3,4, 6-9)
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty means all channels will be used.
Disable Caller Name Resolution
Description: For a given caller number, we can find matching items in contacts or a mailbox list so that we can put
corresponding name on screen display, message envelope, etc. This setting controls how to resolve the name.
Values: 0 -- search contact and mailbox lists.
1 – Don’t search mailbox
2 – Don’t search contacts
3 – Don’t search contacts or mailbox
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 means search contacts and mailbox.
Disable Slave Server
Description: If the Common server is down, DBWatcher will notify slave VServer, VServer will check if Master is Up by
checking TCP connection. If it detects the Master is up, it will disable all slave channels to make only Master servicing so that
all messages will come to master to avoid synchronization issues.
Values: 0 means don’t disable slave when Common is down, 1 means disable slave when common down.
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 for VTI, 0 for others.
Discard Fax DID
Description: Discard Fax DID for faxmail, using our own internal memory variable faxmessage.extto to recover. It’s useful
for some hardware fax board environments where the DTMF of MbxID does not reliably pass through from voice channels to
fax channels, we can use vserver internal memory to remember the MbxID.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 meaning don’t discard fax DID.
Dnic Mitel Inband
Description: Dialogic has its own logic processing PBX integration for Dnic Mitel which translates the display to Inband code.
It has some issues and Esna has implemented its own logic which will display directly and parse it.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 which means do not use Dialogic inband.
Dnic Mitel Trunk Name Terminator
Description: For older SX200, usually the display is “T117 is calling” where T117 is the trunk. But sometimes there is no “is
calling” string as the terminator to extract trunk information. For example:an external call "T117 TIME 00:01" where T117 is
trunk name, we need to know TIME is the terminator so that we can extract "T117" out as trunk name.
Values: Any String as the terminator
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty which means the whole display is the trunk if “is calling” doesn’t show
174
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Voice Server
DNIS Digit Length for Multiple Companies
Description: This registry works together with the previous registry “DNIS Multiple Companies”. It defines the maximum
length of DNIS numbers to be used to judge which company takes the call.
Values: Digit Length
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 4
DNIS Multiple Companies
Description: When activated, the system will use DNIS information to separate multiple companies. To configure this you
need to enter the DNIS information under the C.O. Assignment field in the Channel Assignment window of the company.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: “0” don’t use DNIS numbers to judge company.
Do Task Interval
Description: This will determine the amount of time between tasks. Values are entered in milliseconds.
Values: Time in milliseconds
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1500
Duplicate Call History Interval
Description: In order to prevent duplicate entries in the call history, we can set an interval where any calls with the same
name and number will be entered only as a single entry.
Values: number of seconds for interval
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 50
Dynamic SMDI Digits
Description: For standard SMDI packets, the digits for a called number are usually of fixed length. But some variations may
have dynamic length for calling and called number
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0
Express VoiceMail Mailbox First Digit Match
Description: When activated, the digit entered in a voice menu for the action express voice mail stays as the first digit in the
mailbox.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 which means it is activated.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
175
Voice Server
Extensions with Dedicated CTI Log
Description: Comma delimited extension list who will have dedicated CTI log for easier analysis such as:
CTI#20100706[4330].log, CTI#20100706[4331]…,etc.
Values: Comma delimited extension numbers.
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty.
External Phone Log in
Description: User calls the system from a cell phone and wants to be automatically logged in.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 which means don’t login.
Fax Handshake Delay
Description: For faxmail, whenever a supervised transfer to a fax port is connected, pause the amount of time defined in
this entry and wait for the fax port to send the handshake string *, and then complete the transfer.
Values: Delay in milliseconds
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 3000
Fax Tone Mode
Description: The number of fax tones that must heard before taking action on that tone.
Values: Number of tones
Effective: After Restart
Default Value: 1
Fax Tone Work Around
Description: When a fax is detected, Voice server can specify in the registry how many tones have to be heard before taking
action on that tone. Due to a Dialogic problem, sometimes the board sends a channel stop event instead of a Fax Tone event
after a couple fax tones and stops fax detection. This key determines whether or not to activate the work-around: Whenever
a fax tone is detected, flag a global variable for that channel, any channel stop event after that which is not issued by the
application will be considered as fax tone and the application will take the appropriate action for that fax tone.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 which means use the work around
FaxMail Blind Transfer
Description: When activated, the system will do a blind transfer to a fax port instead of a supervised transfer.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 which means do a supervised transfer. 1 for SIP which means blind transfer.
176
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Voice Server
FGroups Listening Expired Messages
Description: Comma delimited Feature Group Numbers which are allowed to listen to expired messages.
Values: Comma delimited FeatureGroup numbers.
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty
Flush log right away
Description: In order to capture logs in real time this key must be activated.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 which means do not flush logs right away.
Force External Trombone Transfer
Description: When activated, this options forces all external transfers to be trombone transfers.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: “1” for Iwatsu ECS SIP system; “0” for any other systems.
Force Internal Trombone Transfer
Description: When activated, the system will force all internal transfers to be trombone transfers.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0
Force Replace CallerName
Description: When Caller Name comes from switch, we may choose to replace it with the name on the Mailbox/Contact for
Screen pop or Message envelope. “1” means always take the name on Mailbox/Contact for the screen pop or envelope.
Otherwise, take the mailbox/contact name only when the caller name from the switch is empty.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0
Free format digit allow POUND in middle
Description: For free format dialing, ‘#’ can be treated as a termination key or just part of the phone number.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 which means pound is a termination key.
Free format digit minimum length
Description: Minimum digit length needed for system to switch to free format dialing.
Values: Digit length
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 2
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
177
Voice Server
Free Format Trombone Transfer
Description: This determines if we need to do a trombone (supervised) transfer when doing a free format transfer.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 for Mitel and 0 for others. 1 means do a trombone transfer.
Hangup InterDigit Delay
Description: The AASTRA M6501-RM sends DTMF digits to the voice server to indicate a call hangup. For example, M6501RM sends A6 to the voice server to indicate a hangup. This registry indicates the maximum delay between the Hangup DTMF
digits. If it’s more than defined value, the voice server will not consider it a hangup situation.
Values: Time in milliseconds
Effective: After Readparms
Default Value: 300
Ignore Digit Caller Name
Description: If caller name is all numeric, make it empty.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 meaning ignore pure digit caller names.
Ignore Unavailable Greeting
Description: We introduced Unavailable greeting in 2.0 in addition to NoAnswer/Busy greeting, Some customers don’t want
it to allow backwards compatibility with ver 1.x. Setting to “1” will not play the Unavailable greeting. Instead the NoAnswer
greeting will be played in case location status is Unavailable.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 which means play unavailable greeting
IMAP Sync Mode
Description: Open IMAP Session synchronously or asynchronously. Generally it should be Synchronously since vServer
cannot use block function.
Values: YES or NO
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: NO meaning open IMAP session asynchronously.
Inband First E as extension
Description: Used when we receive more than one extension in inband patterns.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 which means use the first ‘E’ as extension
178
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Voice Server
Integration Remove Leading Zero
Description: Removes leading zero of extensions in integrations.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 means remove leading zero of extensions
Internal Extension Longer than External
Description: In some areas, an internal extension might be longer than an external number. The PBX Setting>ExtensionLength cannot be used in this case. Instead we should use pattern or presence in mailbox internal address list to
decide.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 for PNIA systems meaning internal extension might be longer than external, 0 for others.
Internal Extension Pattern
Description: It’s combined with setting “Internal Extension Longer than External“ to judge whether a number is internal or
external. This is a comma delimited string (i.e. 701,702,703). Phone numbers such as 7011234567, 7021234567,
7031234567 are treated as internal phone numbers even though the length is 10 digits.
Values: Comma delimited prefixed of internal extension.
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty
ISDN Multiple D Channel Message Light
Description: The system can support multiple D Channels to control message lights on ISDN systems.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1
IVR Call Back Channels
Description: Iwatsu asked Voice server to provide the ability for IVR ActiveX to call back to Voice server to initiate tasks like
Reminder Out call, WakeUp Call, MWI …etc. Since we don’t want to change Admin, use this registry instead
Values: List of channels to be used.
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: All channels will be used.
IVR Call Back Object
Description: Iwatsu asked Voice server to provide the ability for IVR ActiveX to call back to Voice server to initiate tasks like
Reminder Out call, WakeUp Call, MWI …etc. Since we don’t want to change Admin, use this registry instead
Values: The callback object name
Effective: After restart
Default Value: TestDB.clsIVRCallBack
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
179
Voice Server
IVR Call Back Object IP
Description: Iwatsu asked Voice server to provide the ability for IVR ActiveX to call back to Voice server to initiate tasks like
Reminder Out call, WakeUp Call, MWI …etc. Since we don’t want to change Admin, use this registry instead
Values: The IP address
Effective: After restart
Default Value: Empty which means use local IP
LAN Call Dial Pause milliseconds
Description: When using iLink Pro Desktop to dial and you are not using a CTI enabled extension, you can pause the dial to
final extension.
Values: Time in milliseconds
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 500 milliseconds
Last Event For OutCall
Description: This determines the last event on the channel before it is considered available for Outcall.
Values: Event Code number
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty, which means do not use the last event function.
Local Print Message
Description: We can choose to use either the Voice Server or the ReorgHelper components to print fax/email messages to
printer.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 which means to use voice server to print.
Long Digit for CTI PlaceCall
Description: A T1 Aastra does not support more than 20 digits CTI PlaceCall.
Values: Number
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0
Message Count INI File Name
Description: This is a feature requested by a customer where the MWI information is copied into an INI file instead of Dial/
SMDI/CTI to switch. Another application then picks up the information from the INI and lights the phones. The information in
the INI is in the following format for example:
[Message Count Company 1]
Mailbox 1000=3/25V:0/10F:5/35E
Meaning: Mailbox 1000 has -- 3 unread voice mails, and 25 read voice mails; 0 unread faxes, 10 read faxes; 5 unread
emails, 35 read emails. In order for this feature to work, MWI light On/Off code should be “INI”. And user can put the INI full
path file name in the registry.
Values: Full path file name of the INI file such as “C:\Windows\MsgCount.ini”.
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: UC product path\MsgCount.ini.
180
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Voice Server
Message Subject without Extension
Description: In order to provide privacy, you can set this to not include extension numbers in messages from internal users.
Values: 0 and 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0” means show extension number on subject
Message Volume Scale
Description: For Dialogic E1 systems, the default volume of messages may be very low. This entry is used to adjust it.
Values: From -4 to 4
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0
Military Time
Description: Determines if the system will use military time (24-hour).
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 which means do not use military time, 12-hour
Mitel CallerID Flip
Description: An issue with Dnic Mitel systems where the callerid after offhook is different than before offhook (which is VM
port most case). Use this entry to take the callerid after offhook.
Values: 1 means take after offhook callerid, 0 means take the before offhook callerid.
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1
NoAnswer Alternative System Greeting
Description: By default the system no answer greeting is mess034.vox, but you can override it by specifying a full path file
name as the system busy greeting.
Values: Full path of voice file name.
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty means use the default system no answer greeting mess034.vox.
No CTI MakeCall Extensions
Description: CTI Place call is supported or not.
Values: Empty means support CTI place call; Non-Empty string means do not support CTI place call.
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty
No Message For Tutorial ON
Description: Don’t receive messages when tutorial is still on.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 meaning allow receiving messages while tutorial is on.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
181
Voice Server
Only Supervised Trombone Transfer
Description: Determines if the system only supports trombone as supervised transfer so that it can do pre-ring popup
instead of CTI Ring popup.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 for Dialogic T1, ISDN, Diva ISDN which means trombone is the only way to do supervised transfer; 0 for
others
Optional Arguments for Fax Gateway
Description: For third-party fax server integration like VSI, voice server just executes a DOS command line to send the fax
to the VSI server. This registry defines the extra command line arguments to include.
Values: Complete argument
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty
Other Valid Phone Digits
Description: Dnic Lucent sent CallerId including hyphen “-“, but our logic only supported digit as valid CallerId. This registry
string will solve the problem. It’s implemented in none-Mitel OEM version. This registry contains characters that are valid
phone number even though they may not be numeric characters for PBX integration purposes. Any phone numbers coming
from PBX integration data packet that include the characters defined in this registry will be valid phone numbers.
Values: We can define multiple characters delimited by ^. For example, -^ ^(^) means hyphen-, space, brackets can be
valid phone number.
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty
Pause Between Customized TUI phrases
Description: Pause around 800ms between each segmented phrases in Customized TUI.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: default is “1” for OEM Voice Mobility which means pause 800ms between phrases in Customized TUI; “0” for
other OEMs
Pause Outcall Task
Description: We introduced a new outcall task TASK_CUSTOMOUTCALL (56) for out dialing. It is similar to the OutCall
feature in 2.1. This registry temporarily Pauses processing the task. It is usually set by a separate GUI utility. We can write
our own GUI application to set this registry to Pause or continue processing Outcall tasks.
Values: “0” don’t Pause. “1” Pause
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0
PBX Record End Code
Description: For AASTRA M6501-RM, the phone set can ask voice server to record conversations by pressing a special
button. Usually it’s inband call, and user can pause, resume, and end the recording. If this registry is not empty, it means the
system supports record conversation from the phone set and the code defined here is for terminating the recording.
Values: Example: “B34E#”, where the E is the phone extension number the initiated the command. For example, if
extension 2007 wants to terminate recording, it sends “B342007#”
Effective: After Readparms
Default Value: If the PBX is AASTRA M6501-RM(Model ID 154), default is “B34E#”; otherwise default is empty
182
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Voice Server
PBX Record Pause Code
Description: For AASTRA M6501-RM, the phone set can ask voice server to record a conversations by pressing a special
button. Usually it’s inband call, and user can pause, resume, and end the recording. If this registry is not empty, it means the
system supports record conversation from the phone set and the code defined here is for pausing the recording.
Values: Example: “B32E#”, where the E is the phone extension number who initiates the command. For example, if
extension 2007 wants to pause recording, it sends “B322007#”
Effective: After Readparms
Default Value: If the PBX is AASTRA M6501-RM(Model ID 154), default is “B32E#”; otherwise default is empty
PBX Record Restart Code
Description: For AASTRA M6501-RM, the phone set can ask voice server to record a conversation by pressing a special
button. Usually it’s inband call, and user can pause, resume, and end the recording. If this registry is not empty, means the
system supports record conversation from the phone set and the code defined here is for resuming the record after a Pause.
Values: Example: “B33E#”, where the E is the phone extension number who initiates the command. For example, if
extension 2007 wants to resume recording, it sends “B332007#”
Effective: After Readparms
Default Value: If the PBX is AASTRA M6501-RM(Model ID 154), default is “B33E#”; otherwise default is empty
Performance Average Counter
Description: We’ve found a performance bottleneck in Voice server and we introduced some logic to measure the execution
time of particular code blocks. For example, to measure each state execution time, we calculate the average execution time
for a particular code block. This entry determines how many times to measure block execution before calculating the
average.
Values: number of code blocks
Effective: After Readparms
Default Value: 30
Play Message Delay
Description: This is a delay on call progress tones, the value is in ms.
Values: Delay in milliseconds
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0
Play Message Type
Description: When a mailbox logs into Customized TUI, the system always plays message count for each type (Voice/Email/
Fax) which could be lengthy. Some customers want to play only one or two of the types. The value is bitwise addable: 1 –
Voice, 2-Email, 4-Fax. So 7 (1+2+4) means play message count for each type as before.
Values: “1, “2”, “4” or addition of them
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 7 which means play all 3 types
PMS Switch Wakeup
Description: Panasonic switch can do wakeup itself instead of voice server calling out. VServer just use CTI to set wakeup
time on switch.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 means don’t use switch wakeup
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
183
Voice Server
PMS Wait for ACK before Sending
Description: For some PMS protocol, Voice server should send data packet only after getting ACK from PMS device.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 which means send the patch right away
Pop External Only
Description: For CTI Enabled systems, whenever a CTI Ring event occurs, system pops up UM Client Manager indicating
new call coming. This entry can disable the popup for the call comes from internal extension. Especially used for direct call
between internal extensions. If this registry is “YES”, system won’t popup if the caller is internal extension. If “NO”, popup
even it comes from internal extension.
Values: Yes or No
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: No
Print to default fax machine directly
Description: In a Customized TUI print fax action, the system by default asks the user to choose between printing fax to
default machine or entering a specific fax phone number to send to. Some customers want to simplify the process to print
straight to default fax machine. Setting to “1” means always print fax to default fax machine.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0
Program phone when Empty HuntGroup
Description: When activated, users phone will be set to DND when ever their status changes to Unavailable. Setting to “1”
means set the phone to DND whenever user status changes to Unavailable even though FGroup->HuntGroup is empty
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: “0”, don’t turn on DND when status changes to Unavailable in case FGroup->HuntGroup is empty
Proxy Transfer Number As Is
Description: Dialing from Tandberg or Polycomm or Softphone, it can be dial as is, which means caller has to manually add
any outcall access code, account code, long distance code, etc.; while if it’s not dial as is, caller enters phone number and
system will generate a dialable string.
Values: 1 means dial as is; 0 means user just put phone number.
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1
Record Hangup Delay
Description: When hangup during recording, delay this amount of seconds before set on hook.
Values: Number of seconds
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 meaning immediately set on hook
184
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Voice Server
Recover Message Light
Description: Some PBXs automatically turn off message light during login even though there are still unread messages. This
registry will ensure we double check Messages and FGroup settings and recover the message light status when user goes out
of Customized TUI
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 means doesn’t recover message light
Remove Outcall Access Code
Description: For dialing history, we can remove the outcall access code since it’s not part of phone number.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 which mean remove the access code in dial history.
Replace CallerId Name By DNIS Number
Description: For some customers on some switches, user needs the DNIS number to be displayed as Caller Name.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 which mean do not replace the caller name with DNIS
RightFax Password
Description: Credentials for VServer to login to the RightFax server.
Values: User Password for RightFax
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty
RightFax ServerName
Description: For third party RightFax, we need to provide its Server Name.
Values: Right Fax Server Name
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty
RightFax Use NTAuthentication
Description: We can use the Windows NT account to login to a RightFax Server.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 means not using NT account for RightFax server
RightFax UserId
Description: Credentials for VServer to login to RightFax server.
Values: User account for RightFax Server
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
185
Voice Server
Route Priority
Description: For routing table in old logic, DNIS always had priority over CALLERID, which means if the system got a DNIS
number defined in the routing table, it will take the matched entry in the table even though the CallerID may also be defined
in the table. This entry changes the situation by allowing the user to choose CallerID over DNIS, as well as only “CallID” or
“DNIS” or even if no matching entries are found when searching in routing table.
Values: “DNIS,CALLERID” or “CALLERID,DNIS” or “CALLERID” or “DNIS” or just Empty
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: “DNIS,CALLERID”
Second Fax Tone
Description: Most Dialogic boards use standard fax tone definitions to detect fax tone. But on some switches/boards, it
generates false fax tone detection (very rare). This registry selects an alternate tone definition to avoid false detections.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 which means use standard tone definitions
Simple Tutorial
Description: This will determine if the tutorial will include all greetings or just name and personal greeting.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 which means do full tutorial.
SIP Mixed Integration
Description: SIP may need inband, CTI, and SMDI together to get complete integration information especially for CallerId
information.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 means don’t used mixed source to get integration information.
Slow States Counter
Description: We’ve found a performance bottleneck in Voice server and introduced some logic to measure the execution
time of particular code blocks. For example, to measure each state execution time, we log some top slow states. This registry
determines how many slow states we should log.
Values: Number of states
Effective: After Readparms
Default Value: 10
SMDI Aging
Description: SMDI packets come from serial ports which can be out of sync with voice channel calls especially for busy
systems. Sometimes the packet in the memory may be for previous call instead of the current call. We may need to wait
several seconds for new packet to update the memory before processing the PBX integration parser.
Values: Number of seconds to wait
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 3
186
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Voice Server
SMDI Packet Reading Way
Description: We implemented different ways to read SMDI packets. 0 is optimized. All other values use methods which are
not as good.
Values: 0 for optimum performance. Other values are not recommended.
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0
SMDI Serial Device Index For PBXNode
Description: -1 > Force MWI Output to broadcast to all SMDI Serial devices
Empty > Default, matching the sequencing number of PBXNode and SerialDevice in the database
Comma delimited sequence > e.g: 0,2,1 means
First PBXNode - SerialDevice 0
Second PBXNode - SerialDevice 2
Third PBXNode - SerialDevice 1
Values: --Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty
SMDI Service Terminator
Description: Termination character for PEX Service.
Values: ASCII code
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 127 means ASCII code 127
SMDI Terminator
Description: For standard SMDI packets, there is always an ASCII code 25 character at the end. Some variations may
define other ASCII codes as the termination character such as 10.
Values: “25”, “10” or any ASCII codes that apply.
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 25
Softkey Customized Menu Name
Description: Comma delimited customized menu name list supporting softkey (Iwatsu only).
Values: --Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty
Standby If Not in Notification Channel Range
Description: In HA systems, if this setting value is 1, vserver will check if its channel range is within notification port range
of first company; if not within range, then don't connect to UMST which will make tVServer.VSActive = False, and all the
outbound tasks won't be generated into this vserver.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
187
Voice Server
Star Stop Greeting
Description: During playing mailbox greeting, pressing STAR will hangup the call by default. Aastra wants to terminate the
greeting and go straight to record message.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: “1” for OEM UCP; “0” for other OEMs.
Start System Delay
Description: For Aculab, system needs to wait for the Aculab firmware start up.
Values: Delay time in seconds
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 120
Start up Delay
Description: Delay in seconds to initialize EEAM instance. Used to be for 1.x EEAM.exe. Ver 2.0 doesn’t need the delay.
Values: in seconds
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 means no delay to initialize EEAM
StayUp Date Time
Description: Works together with setting “Disable Slave Server”. In case HA Common server is down, we usually shutdown
Slave Server, this StayUp DateTime should allow the slave to keep running till this Date/Time.
Values: Date/Time such as: 6/26/2010 5:10:05 PM
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty. In case “Disable Slave Server” is set 1, this setting has to be set to valid date/time.
Take CallerName from SIP Integration
Description: Sometimes integration is not from SIP (e.g: Inband,etc.), but we still take CallerName from SIP.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 meaning don’t take CallerName from SIP.
Task Number
Description: How many tasks to read at once from EEAM.
Values: Number
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 20
Transfer Proxy
Description: For Tandberg or Polycomm systems, vserver needs to behave as a switch to bridge between regular switch and
Tandberg/Polycomm. This setting controls whether to support it or not.
Values: 1 or 0
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 for SIP with Multiple PBX Nodes. 0 for others
188
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Voice Server
Trim Digit Length
Description: The amount of time in ms, that the system will trim from end of recordings if the record was terminated by
digits.
Values: Time in milliseconds
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0
Unavailable Alternative System Greeting
Description: By default the system unavailable greeting is mess2790.vox, but you can override it by specifying a full path
file name as system unavailable greeting.
Values: Full path of voice file name.
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: Empty means using default system unavailable greeting mess2790.vox.
Unique Temp Record File
Description: Usually when vserver records a message, it is put in a temporary file named after the channel number such as
temp1.msg, temp2.msg,etc. We experienced an issue with Dialogic systems there the file is locked even after finished
recording, which prevents next record session on same channel from recording. With this set to 1, we create a new unique
file name every session to prevent the lock.
Values: 0 means not using unique temp record file; 1 means using unique temp record file.
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0
Use EEAM Helper
Description: This determines if the system uses EEAM Helper.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 which means use EEAM Helper.
Use Local COM MWI
Description: Choose to use VServer to send MWI from local machine COM port versus sending from PEXService.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 means use VServer to send MWI
Use Local LAP
Description: Choose to user VServer to send LAP from local machine COM port versus sending from PEXService.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 means use VServer to send LAP
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
189
Voice Server
Use Local PMS
Description: Choose to use Voice Server (local) to do PMS jobs or use a separate PMS service.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 means use Voice Server (local) to do PMS task
Use Local SMDI
Description: We can choose to use Voice Server(local) to parse SMDI information or a separate PexService(remote) to
parse.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 means use Voice Server to parse SMDI packet
Use MakeCall
Description: Outbound call involves two steps: OffHook and Dial. This may cause collision when there is an incoming call at
the same time. MakeCall combines these two steps to avoid collisions.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 for VTI system which means use one-step MakeCall; 0 for other systems.
Use Menu Cache
Description: Determines if the system caches certain functions like voice menus, customized mailboxes and keymapping in
memory or rAastra them from the database.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 which means read the menus in cache.
Voice Menu Get Transfer Type
Description: For voice menu action “Send to Phone Number”, determines whether this is a supervised or blind transfer. 0
means supervised transfer; 1 means blind transfer.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 0 for OEM Mitel(supervised); 1 for other OEMs(blind)
Voice Menu Special Record Conversation
Description: For Nortel switches, during phone conversations the user can press a special “Record” button which initiates a
new call to VM port with Inband information of NoAnswer of a phantom mailbox. A voice menu with default action Record
Conversation should be already attached with this phantom mailbox and the new incoming will come to this menu and start
recording the conversation.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: “0” means don’t do this special record conversation. It should do regular transfer and complete conference.
190
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Voice Server
VM Port Minimum Length
Description: It’s for Ericsson SMDI integration systems. When parsing voicemail port extension from SMDI packet, we take
the minimum length between this setting and voice port definition in Admin PBX Settings.
Values: Numeric value start from 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 means minimum VM port length is 1
Wakeup call retries
Description: Determines how many times to retry dial wakeup extension in case NoAnswer/Busy
Values: Number of retries
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 3
Web Report EEAM Helper
Description: This determines if we use EEAM Helper for web report functions.
Values: 0 or 1
Effective: Immediately
Default Value: 1 means use EEAM Helper.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
191
Voice Server
Adding a New Voice Server
Name: Enter a short name for the Voice Server.
Description: Enter a short description for the Voice Server.
ASR Channels: Enter the number of channels for auto-speech recognition available in the
system.
TTS Channels: Enter the number of text-to-speech channels available in the system.
Voice Channels: Enter the number of voice channels available in the system.
Soft Fax Channels: Enter the number of channels for soft fax available in the system.
Voice Verification Channels: Enter the number of Voice Verification Channels available in
the system.
Resiliency Channels: Enter the number of Resiliency (Redundancy) Channels available in
the system.
Start Channel Number: Enter the channel at which this Voice Server begins to serve. For
example, Voice Server 1 might be channels 1 to 20, while Voice Server 2, with a Start
Channel Number of 21, would serve channels 21 to 40.
Start Fax Channel Number: Enter the fax channel at which this Voice Server begins to serve.
Internal IP: Enter the internal IP of the Voice Server. This IP address is used when connecting to the admin remotely from
another internal workstation.
External IP: Enter the external IP of the Voice Server. This IP address is used when connecting to the admin remotely from
an external computer.
TCP/IP Port: Enter the port that the Voice Server will use for TCP/IP communication.
Master: Enable this checkbox if the Voice Server is Voice Server 1. The master Voice Server is always Voice Server one.
Fax Enabled: This checkbox is automatically enabled when the Voice Server detects that the fax services is enabled on
startup.
192
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Configuration
In This Chapter:
Introduction
195
Advanced
198
Custom Interface Settings
198
Dealer Info
199
Device Management
204
Device Management Settings
207
Fax Settings
209
Global Parameters
210
HTTP
211
IMAP Server
212
LDAP Synchronization
214
Logs
215
POP3 Server Settings
216
Remote Site Setting
216
Reorg
217
Reports
218
User Manager
219
Telephony Settings
220
VPIM/SMTP
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 15
194
193
Configuration
Introduction
Configuration tables contain system settings for optional applications such as fax, email, external add-on devices,
maintenance and unified messaging.
After the software has been installed, the system will display the configuration settings. You can then modify or fine tune the
default values.
194
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Configuration
Advanced
The Advanced settings allow you fine-tune your UC system.
Available settings include board settings, setting logs on or off
for debugging, voice, and other specific and detailed options.
In order for the changes made to the
 Note:
Advanced settings to take effect, it is required that
you stop and restart the UC service.
Setting
Function
Authentication Key Depth
Previous decryption keys are kept to provide the ability to read older encrypted
messages. Use this value to set the number of old keys to keep in the system.
See also Re-Create Authentication Key Every (days) below.
Backup Consolidated Server
Name
This item is no longer supported.
BlackList of CallerId
Numbers listed here will be blocked by the UC Server. The call will be dropped.
Consolidated Server Path
Location of the server on the system hard drive.
Disable Fax Detection
If set to True, this prevents the voice board from recognizing both fax tones (1 and 2
below).
NOTE: If you set this parameter to True, both Disable Fax Detection 1 and Disable Fax
Detection 2 must also be set to True.
Disable Fax Detection 1
If set to True, this prevents the voice board from recognizing fax tone 1.
Disable Fax Detection 2
If set to True, this prevents the voice board from recognizing fax tone 2.
Extended Absence Greeting
Type
Set the greeting that will be played to callers when your location is set to Extended
Absence.
Set to 0 = Play the system default greeting.
Set to 1 (default) = Play the name and location greeting.
Set to 2 = Play the Location greeting.
Extension Length
This determines the extension length. Enter an integer.
First Day Of Week
This represents the first day of the week. Sunday is ’1’, Monday is ’2’, Tuesday is ’3’ and
so on up to Saturday (’7’). Enter the appropriate number for your environment.
Fixed Extension
This determines if the extension length is fixed. Select True (yes) or False (no).
Function Time Out
This is the maximum time the system is to wait for a function to complete its task
before timing out.
HA Synchronization Filter
Mode
Activating the filter will prevent the UC Server from synchronizing email messages.
Voice traffic will still be synchronized. In large companies, this can improve server
performance considerably by reducing network traffic. The default is 0 (no filtering). Set
this value to 1 to enable filtering.
Logo URL
Allows you to choose the logo URL.
Loop Current On In Dial
Select True to enable loop current detection during dialing. Select False to disable this
parameter.
Loop Current On In Record
Select True to enable loop current detection during recording. Select False to disable
this parameter.
Mass Recall Installed
Select True to indicate that mass recall is installed. Select False to indicate that mass
recall is not installed.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
195
Configuration
196
Setting
Function
Messages Temporary Folder
Path
This is an alternate folder for receiving messages.
Number of Address
Resolution Digits
This is the number of digits in a phone number needed to resolve non-critical cases (i.e.
Contact Resolution). The default value is 7.
Packet Exchange Server IP
Address
How the voice server connects to the PBX.
Packet Exchange Server Port
This is for the port number of the packet exchange server.
Path for System
This allows you determine the path of the system.
Print Wakeup Calls
This allows you enable the printing of wakeup call activity.
Select Com 1, Com 2, Com 3 or Com 4, depending on your printer port.
Provide Extended Attachment
Information
Set to True to include more information (i.e. callback ID, file name details) with an
attachment so that other programs can use this detail (i.e. adding a callback button).
Proxy IP Address
This allows you to declare the proxy IP address.
Queue Debug Mode
This defines whether or not to queue the Debug Mode. Select True or False.
Queue Mode
This enables call queueing. A value of ’2’ is recommended.
Record with AGC
This indicates whether or not to use Automatic Gain Control during recording. Select
True or False.
Re-Create Authentication Key
Every (days)
Set the value (in days) to change the security decryption key.
See also Authentication Key Depth above.
SMS Account PIN
This allows you to enter the personal information number for the SMS account.
SMS Account Username
This allows you to enter a username for the SMS account.
SMS Add Reply to Email
This item is no longer supported.
SMS HTTP Servers
This allows you to enter an HTTP address.
SMS Insert mailbox Reply-To
address
This allows you to add a reply-to address to an SMS email.
SMS length limit
Enter the maximum number of characters allowed in an SMS message. Service
providers typically limit messages to 160 characters. If your provider has a different
limit, enter their value here.
SMS Provider
This allows you to select a SMS provider from a list box.
SMS Reply to Phone Number
This allows you to send a SMS reply to a phone number.
SMS Site
This will display your SMS site name (HTTP server).
Store MIME Format
This allows you to store messages in MIME format.
Time Zone
Specifies the default time zone
Transfer Time Out
With TAPI – This value indicates the amount of time the system will wait after dialing
an outside call over an analog CO line before playing the prompt.
With Analog voice boards – If no connect or busy signal is received by the end of the
entered value, the system will assume a not busy state and release the call.
Trim Digit
This enables the elimination of unnecessary digits at the beginning of a string. Select
True or False.
Trim From End of File
This enables the trimming of milliseconds from the end of a recorded message.
TTS Mode
This allows you to choose the application to be used for Text-to-Speech. Select None or
RealSpeak.
UMST Server Address
This allows you to enter the IP address of your UMST server. In most cases, make sure
the field contains the IP address 127.0.0.1.
UMST Server Port
This allows you to enter the port number that your UMST server is using.
Unique Mailbox Address
Determines if mailbox addresses can be reused on other nodes and companies on the
UC System.
Set to 0 (default) = No enforcement of unique addresses.
Set to 1 = The Web Client will ensure address uniqueness.
Set to 2 = All components will enforce address uniqueness.
Unresolved From Address
Format
Select Administrator E-mail to tag all unknown communications as being from the
admin account. Choose TelNT URI to receive an unresolved message as a phone
number (TEL:905-555-1212) for callback or TTS purposes.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Configuration
Setting
Function
Use Mailbox Language as
Default
This indicates whether or not to use the mailbox’s defined language as the system
language when a caller returns to the automated attendant from the mailbox. Select
True or False.
Use Port Monitor
This indicates whether or not the system will return a port to idle after a fixed time
period. Select True or False.
Voice Recognition Mode
This allows you to configure the application to be used for voice recognition.
Web Site URL
This allows you to enter your corporate web site address.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
197
Configuration
Custom Interface Settings
The Custom Interface settings allow you to specify the
configurations that deal with integrating a third party database
into the UC system.
Setting
Function
Database Object Method Type
Enter a value of 1 to support PIN-to-mailbox translations only. Enter a value of
2 (recommended) to provide a richer set of Interactive Voice Response (IVR)
functionality.
Database Object Name
Set the value to Object name.Get Destination, where Object name is the
calling program name.
Forced Popup from Database
Object
Select True to enable the forcing of pop ups from the database. Select False
to disable this parameter.
Get Destination from Database
Select True to enable the retrieving of the folder destination from the
database. Select False to disable this parameter. Pertains to the IVR object.
On Max Errors
Select Hang Up to instruct the system to disconnect from the third party
database in situations where too many errors occur. Select Operator to switch
to the operator in situations where too many errors occur.
Dealer Info
The Dealer Information settings allow you to specify the
information of the dealer who has installed the UC system.
Setting
Function
Contact Name
Shows the dealer representative contact name
Dealer Email
Shows the dealer contact email address
Dealer Fax
Shows the dealer contact fax number
Dealer Name
Shows the dealer company name
Dealer WebSite
Shows the dealer company website
Technical Support Number Shows the dealer technical support phone number
198
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Configuration
Device Management
Device Management allows you to add and manage the
integration of specific devices with the UC application.
The following devices are managed here. Please refer to the
appropriate sections for more information.

Local Area Paging Device

Serial Integration Device

Caller ID Device

CTI Serial Integration Device

CTI TCP/IP Integration Device

PMS Device
After adding and configuring devices, you can always edit device settings by clicking 
 Note:
Configuration > Device Management > Device Management Settings. The settings will appear in the
right window, and you can edit the configurations by double-clicking the settings.
Local Area Paging Device
Local Area Paging is a module that allows you to use the pager function to notify you when you receive a call or message. In
the Local Area Device tab, you can specify the associated settings to your paging device.
The device settings that are selected must match the hardware settings of your pager in order to
 Note:
function properly.
TCP/IP Connection
COM Port Number: From the drop down menu, select the method through which the device will
be connected to the UC server. If you are using a COM port instead of TCP/IP, please refer to the
COM port section below.
TCP/IP Address: Enter the IP address of the LAP device that the UC server can connect to.
TCP/IP Port: Enter the port number of the LAP device that the UC server can connect to.
COM Port Connection
COM Port Number: From the drop down menu, select the method through
which the device will be connected to the UC server. If you are using TCP/IP as
opposed to a COM port please refer to the TCP/IP section above.
The value ranges in the COM Port Number/Baud Rate/
 Note:
Parity/Data Bits/Stop Bits/Padding fields are entirely dependent
on the switch employed by your system. Consult with your
Switch Administrator before altering these values.
Baud Rate: From the drop down menu, select the rate (speed) of communication between the UC server and the connected
device.
Parity: From the drop down menu, select the value to be used in determining the integrity of data.
Data Bits: From the drop down menu, select the number of bits to be used to represent one character of data.
Stop Bits: From the drop down menu, select which last two bits are to indicate the end of a word.
Padding: From the drop down menu, select a value to be used to prefix or pad an extension number.
Carrier Detect: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the modem is to wait before indicating that the first packets of data have
been received.
Clear To Send: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the receiving station is to wait before indicating that it is ready to accept
data.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
199
Configuration
Data Set Ready: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the modem is to wait before indicating to the PC that it is able to
accept data.
Request To Send: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the node is to wait before attempting to initiate the sending of data.
Validation Time: Enter a value (in seconds) that the system is to wait before checking that data has been successfully sent
or received.
Integration With LAP: Enable the checkbox.
Serial Integration Device
TCP/IP Connection
COM Port Number: From the drop down menu, select the method through which the device will
be connected to the UC server. If you are using a COM port as opposed to TCP/IP please refer to
the COM port section below.
TCP/IP Address: Enter the IP address of the SMDI device that the UC server can connect to.
TCP/IP Port: Enter the port number of the SMDI device that the UC server can connect to.
COM Port Connection
COM Port Number: From the drop down menu, select the method
through which the device will be connected to the UC server. If you
are using TCP/IP as opposed to a COM port please refer to the TCP/IP
section above.
The value ranges in the COM Port Number/Baud
 Note:
Rate/Parity/Data Bits/Stop Bits/Padding fields are entirely
dependent on the switch employed by your system. Consult
with your Switch Administrator before altering these
values.
Baud Rate: From the drop down menu, select the rate (speed) of communication between the UC server and the connected
device.
Parity: From the drop down menu, select the value to be used in determining the integrity of data.
Data Bits: From the drop down menu, select the number of bits to be used to represent one character of data.
Stop Bits: From the drop down menu, select which last two bits are to indicate the end of a word.
Padding: From the drop down menu, select a value to be used to prefix or pad an extension number.
Carrier Detect: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the modem is to wait before indicating that the first packets of data have
been received.
Clear To Send: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the receiving station is to wait before indicating that it is ready to accept
data.
Data Set Ready: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the modem is to wait before indicating to the PC that it is able to
accept data.
Request To Send: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the node is to wait before attempting to initiate the sending of data.
Validation Time: Enter a value (in seconds) that the system is to wait before checking that data has been successfully sent
or received.
Switch Data Packet Length: Enter the maximum digit length of the packets being sent.
Protocol: From the drop down menu, select the type of serial integration standard to be used (SMDI, MCI or User Defined).
Hand Shaking: From the drop down menu, select the protocol to be employed in establishing communication between your
system and another device.
The value in the Hand Shaking field is of considerable importance, and may require several attempts
 Note:
to set properly.
 Hint: For the Settings button, refer to the section on Device Management Settings.
200
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Configuration
Caller ID Device
The Caller ID Device dialog box indicates the specifications of the Caller ID Device you are using.
TCP/IP Connection
COM Port Number: From the drop down menu, select the method through which the device will
be connected to the UC server. If you are using a COM port as opposed to TCP/IP please refer to
the COM port section below.
TCP/IP Address: Enter the IP address of the Caller ID device that the UC server can connect to.
TCP/IP Port: Enter the port number of the Caller ID device that the UC server can connect to.
COM Port Connection
COM Port Number: From the drop down menu, select the method through
which the device will be connected to the UC server. If you are using TCP/IP as
opposed to a COM port please refer to the TCP/IP section above.
The value ranges in the COM Port Number/Baud Rate/Parity/
 Note:
Data Bits/Stop Bits/Padding fields are entirely dependent on the
switch employed by your system. Consult with your Switch
Administrator before altering these values.
Baud Rate: From the drop down menu, select the rate (speed) of communication between the UC server and the connected
device.
Parity: From the drop down menu, select the value to be used in determining the integrity of data.
Data Bits: From the drop down menu, select the number of bits to be used to represent one character of data.
Stop Bits: From the drop down menu, select which last two bits are to indicate the end of a word.
Padding: From the drop down menu, select a value to be used to prefix or pad an extension number.
Carrier Detect: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the modem is to wait before indicating that the first packets of data have
been received.
Clear To Send: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the receiving station is to wait before indicating that it is ready to accept
data.
Data Set Ready: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the modem is to wait before indicating to the PC that it is able to
accept data.
Request To Send: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the node is to wait before attempting to initiate the sending of data.
Validation Time: Enter a value (in seconds) that the system is to wait before checking that data has been successfully sent
or received.
No. Of CO Lines: Enter the number of CO lines that are utilized by the current setup.
Protocol: From the drop down menu, select the type of serial integration standard to be used (SMDI, MCI or User Defined).
 Hint: For the Settings button, refer to the section on Device Management Settings.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
201
Configuration
CTI Serial Integration Device
The CTI Serial Integration allows you to define the type of CTI integration for
CSTA integration that you are receiving through a serial link.
COM Port Number: From the drop down menu, select the method through
which the device will be connected to the UC server. If you are using TCP/IP
as opposed to a COM port please refer to the TCP/IP section above.
The value ranges in the COM Port Number/Baud Rate/Parity/
 Note:
Data Bits/Stop Bits/Padding fields are entirely dependent on the
switch employed by your system. Consult with your Switch
Administrator before altering these values.
Baud Rate: From the drop down menu, select the rate (speed) of communication between the UC server and the connected
device.
Parity: From the drop down menu, select the value to be used in determining the integrity of data.
Data Bits: From the drop down menu, select the number of bits to be used to represent one character of data.
Stop Bits: From the drop down menu, select which last two bits are to indicate the end of a word.
Padding: From the drop down menu, select a value to be used to prefix or pad an extension number.
Carrier Detect: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the modem is to wait before indicating that the first packets of data have
been received.
Clear To Send: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the receiving station is to wait before indicating that it is ready to accept
data.
Data Set Ready: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the modem is to wait before indicating to the PC that it is able to
accept data.
Request To Send: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the node is to wait before attempting to initiate the sending of data.
Validation Time: Enter a value (in seconds) that the system is to wait before checking that data has been successfully sent
or received.
 Hint: For the Settings button, refer to the section on Device Management Settings.
CTI TCP/IP Integration Device
The TCP/IP Integration allows you to specify CTILINK or CSTA integration over
TCP/IP.
TCP/IP Address: Enter the IP address of the device that the UC server can
connect to.
TCP/IP Port: Enter the port number of the device that the UC server can
connect to.
 Hint: For the Settings button, refer to the section on Device Management Settings.
202
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Configuration
PMS Device
Specifying the Property Management Device Settings allows for interaction with the PMS system for Hotel applications.
TCP/IP Connection
COM Port Number: From the drop down menu, select the method through which the device
will be connected to the UC server. If you are using a COM port as opposed to TCP/IP please
refer to the COM port section below.
TCP/IP Address: Enter the IP address of the SMDI device that the UC server can connect to.
TCP/IP Port: Enter the port number of the SMDI device that the UC server can connect to.
COM Port Connection
COM Port Number: From the drop down menu, select the method
through which the device will be connected to the UC server. If you
are using TCP/IP as opposed to a COM port please refer to the TCP/IP
section above.
The value ranges in the COM Port Number/Baud
 Note:
Rate/Parity/Data Bits/Stop Bits/Padding fields are entirely
dependent on the switch employed by your system. Consult
with your Switch Administrator before altering these
values.
Baud Rate: From the drop down menu, select the rate (speed) of communication between the UC server and the connected
device.
Parity: From the drop down menu, select the value to be used in determining the integrity of data.
Data Bits: From the drop down menu, select the number of bits to be used to represent one character of data.
Stop Bits: From the drop down menu, select which last two bits are to indicate the end of a word.
Padding: From the drop down menu, select a value to be used to prefix or pad an extension number.
Carrier Detect: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the modem is to wait before indicating that the first packets of data have
been received.
Clear To Send: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the receiving station is to wait before indicating that it is ready to accept
data.
Data Set Ready: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the modem is to wait before indicating to the PC that it is able to
accept data.
Request To Send: Enter a value (in milliseconds) that the node is to wait before attempting to initiate the sending of data.
Validation Time: Enter a value (in seconds) that the system is to wait before checking that data has been successfully sent
or received.
Hand Shaking: From the drop down menu, select the protocol to be employed in establishing communication between your
system and another device.
The value in the Hand Shaking field is of considerable importance, and may require several attempts
 Note:
to set properly.
 Hint: For the Settings button, refer to the section on Device Management Settings.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
203
Configuration
Device Management Settings
Device Management Settings allow you to configure the
specifics of the devices that are integrated with the UC
application. Although you are prompted to specify device
settings when adding new devices, you can conveniently edit
these settings through this feature.
These settings may play an integral part in
 Note:
the proper integration of your PBX and other
devices to the UC server. The settings will often
take affect even in the absence of separate
hardware since the PBX itself must be configured
(e.g. CTI Settings should be completed for proper
CTI functionality integration).
Device Management Settings consists of the following items.
Please refer to the individual sections for more information.

CTI Settings

Serial Integration Settings (SMDI)

Caller ID Settings

PMS Settings
CTI Settings
CTI Installed: Enable this checkbox to indicate that a CTI link from the PBX is
active and available for monitoring.
CTI Debug Mode: Enable this checkbox to monitor and log the CTI events.
CTI Debug File: Enable this checkbox to enable the creation of a debug file from
CTI event monitoring.
CTI Object Debug: Enable this checkbox to enable object debug.
Pop Caller ID When Event: Enable this checkbox to activate screen pop-ups on
station-to-station and internal dialing.
CTI Message Light: Enable this checkbox to use the CTI serial link to light a
message light.
CTI Multiple Message Lights: Enable this checkbox to use the CTI serial link to light multiple message lights.
CTI Automatic Extension Change: Enable this checkbox to use the CTI serial link to enable automatic extension changes
when altering the default address of a Mailbox.
SIP CSTA: This item is no longer supported.
CTI Service Client Timeout: Enter the length of time that the system will continue to retry connections before failing.
CTI Message Light Button: Enter the numeric digit on the phone keypad that will enable the message light option. This is
an optional setting for activating lights through the link.
CTI Message Light Ports: Enter the ports on the switch where the lights are located.
CTI Mode: Enter the type of CTI events that the system is to look for.
CTI Server Name: Enter the server machine or phone system on the network that will be sending the CTI events.
CTI Version: Enter the version description of the CSTA or CTI link on the switch.
CTI VM Group: Enter the VM ports that are to be monitored for events.
CTI First Trunk: Enter the first VM port to monitor.
Pad Extension with: Enter a numerical digit to represent the number of spaces that will pad those unused in the screen
popup when an incoming call contains a string of digits less than the maximum specified.
CTI Service IP: Enter the IP address used by the CTI Service.
CTI Service Port: Enter the port used by for CTI Service traffic.
SIP CSTA Port: This item is no longer supported.
SIP CSTA Log Level: This item is no longer supported.
204
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Configuration
Paging Zone from: Enter the appropriate PBX number.
Paging Zone to: Enter the appropriate PBX number.
Serial Integration Settings
SMDI Always No Answer: Enable this checkbox to treat all busy / no answer
conditions as no answer.
Use Message Desk as CO Line Number: Enable this checkbox for multitenanting configuration - message desk configuration must be programmed on
the phone system.
Use Short Mailbox No as CO Line Number: Enable this checkbox for multitenanting purposes.
 Note: This option must be programmed on the phone system.
SMDI Debug Mode: Enable this checkbox to log all SMDI events.
Use Office Codes: Enable this checkbox for central office integration in a centralized voice mail setup.
Number of Digits in SMDI: Enter the maximum number of digits in an SMDI string for the calling and called parties. The
standard setting is 7 or 10 digits in length.
Office Codes - Value fields: Enter the codes used to distinguish one office from another. These will be the first three digits
which comprise that part of a phone number following the area code.
Copy SMDI Packet to Remote Servers: In a High Availability environment, enabling this option will send SMDI packet
data to the other servers in the array.
Caller ID Settings
Caller ID Installed: Enable this checkbox to use third-party a device for
passing the Caller ID.
Ask for Phone Number when No Caller ID: Enable this checkbox to
prompt the caller for a phone number when device fails to detect one.
Keep Caller ID in Forwarded Messages: Enable this checkbox to
maintain and attach original Caller ID information to the message during
forwarding.
Play Caller ID if Say Date and Time is set to Yes: Enable this checkbox to play time and date stamp in addition to Caller
ID information.
Pop CTI Events Only: Enable this checkbox to perform screen pop-ups only on events driven by the CTI Link.
Use PIN Number as Caller ID: Enable this checkbox to treat PIN number inputs as Caller ID information.
Fake Caller ID: Enable this checkbox to define a fake number to use on all calls.
Caller ID Type: Enter the type of device connected for tracking caller ID such as Rochelle, Zeus or CTI.
Caller ID Mode: Enter the mode in which the system receives the caller ID information, such as inband, SMDI, or CTILink.
Caller ID Length: Enter the maximum digits that can be sent for caller ID packets.
Pad Short Caller ID: Enter any prefixes (such as an area code) when only 7 digits are sent. It will pad the number to ensure
a proper lookup in a database.
Max Items in Caller ID List: Enter the maximum list view for the system administration.
Fake Caller ID Name: Enter a name that you want to appear on the screen pop-ups.
Fake Caller ID Number: Enter the number you want to appear on the caller ID screen pop-ups and messages.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
205
Configuration
PMS Settings
PMS Installed: Enable this checkbox to interact with a property management system
(PMS) for hotels.
Welcome Message Active: Enable checkbox to activate a welcome message in a room
voicemail every time a room is reset.
PMS Mode: Enter the mode to be employed for PMS. Valid choices are File or Sentinel.
Note that this field is case-sensitive. Do not misspell the mode.
PMS Type: Enter the type of serial port protocol that is to be employed. Options include:
Fidelio, Lanmark, CAPA, AVT, MCORP, Centigram and COMTROL.
Polling Interval: Enter the time interval (seconds) to be used to poll the COM port for
PMS events.
PMS Shared Directory: Enter the directory name in which the PMS is to store files to be accessed by UM.
Local PMS Shared Directory: Enter the local directory name in which these files are to be stored.
Auto Action On Message: Enter the action the system is to automatically perform when a message is received.
PMS Check Out Message Destination: Enter the integer value to be placed in front of the Mailbox number of a departed
guest. This action will create a phantom Mailbox to which messages will be forwarded, and where the guest/client may
retrieve them if needed. For example, if the PMS Check out Message Destination value is set at 7, and a guest checks out
from room 197, messages may still be retrieved from phantom Mailbox 7197 until the next check out action from that room
is performed.
206
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Configuration
Fax Settings
Fax Settings allow you to specify the information required for
a user to be able to receive a fax into the Auto Attendant.
Fax On Demand can be used to forward the fax to an
appropriate Mailbox or location.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
207
Configuration
Setting
Function
Allow Printing of Faxes
This indicates whether or not users can print received faxes via the telephone.
Select True or False.
Ask For 
Extension Number
This indicates whether or not to ask the caller for an extension number to put
on the received faxes when using the Fax Mail module. Select True or False.
Default Fax Mailbox
This defines the mailbox that incoming faxes will be delivered to if no
destination is given. Select a company, then a specific company mailbox.
Banner Format String
A string value denoting how the fax banner will appear.
Default Fax Number
This defines the default number to dial to print received faxes. Enter a number.
Dialing Suffix
This is the long distance account code required in order to make toll calls from
the Phone system. This will apply if the default fax number is an external toll
call.
Fax Board Type
This identifies the fax board that is integrated with the system. Select one of
the fax boards. Applies to inbound faxes only.
Fax Busy Timer
This indicates the number of seconds to wait after initiating a transfer to the
fax port before reverting back to an idle state.
Fax Directory
This specifies the path for the directory that contains the fax documents.
Fax Job Expiry in days
Specify the number of days to keep fax job status records.
Fax Job Failure
Notification
Choose whether or not to send a notification email to the sender when a fax
attempt fails. The default is False (do not send notification).
Fax Mail Installed
This indicates whether or not the Fax Mail option is enabled for receiving faxes.
Select True or False.
Fax On Demand
This indicates if the Fax On Demand option is enabled. Select True or False.
Fax Resolution
This sets the resolution type for fax transmissions. 
Select either Coarse or Fine.
File and Path 
for Fax Viewer
This is the path to the directory containing the fax viewer application.
Local And Toll 
Area Code 1
This is the area code(s) in your region that covers both local and toll calls.
Local And Toll 
Area Code 2
This is the area code(s) in your region that covers local calls.
NOTE: Code Number 1 for both entries is for 7-digit dialing. Code Number 2
and higher are for 10-digit dialing.
Local Area Code 1
This is the first local area code for the country.
Local Area Code 2
This is the second local area code for the country.
Local Area Code 3
This is the third local area code for the country.
Number Of Digits 
In Area Code
This indicates how many digits to view from the entered number as the Area
Code.
Number Of Digits 
In Phone Number
This indicates how many digits to view from the entered number as the Phone
Number.
Number of Log Entries
to Delete
This sets the housekeeping rules for deleting old fax log entries starting from
the oldest record.
Outbound Fax Board
Type
This indicates the type of fax board for outgoing faxes.
Outside Line Access Code This sets the code for line access to dial out a fax-on-demand call.
208
Path for Fax Drivers
This indicates the path to the directory that stores the fax drivers.
System CSID
This specifies the fax header information.
Toll Line Access Code
This defines the code for Alternate Carrier Access.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Configuration
Global Parameters
Global Parameters allow for the configuration of specific
boards and pulse detection.
Setting
Function
Digitization Rate
This is the value used for digitization.
Flash Character
This is the character used in a dial string to indicate that a hook flash has
occurred.
Flash Duration
This is the value of the duration of the hook flash in 10msec intervals.
Loop Current Time
The value of the minimum time that the loop current must be off before Loop
Current CST can be generated (10msec intervals).
Offhook Delay
The value for the offhook delay time (10msec intervals).
Pause Duration
The value of the length of a pause used in a dialing string. (10msec intervals).
Pulse Break Interval
The value of the break interval for pulse dialing (10msec increments).
Pulse Inter Digit Delay
The value of the inter digit interval for pulse dialing (10msec increments).
Pulse Make Interval
The value of the make interval for pulse dialing (10msec increments).
Pulse Maximum Make
The value of the maximum make pulse time for pulse dialing (10msec
increments).
Pulse Minimum Break
The value of the minimum break interval for valid loop pulse dialing (10msec
increments).
Pulse Minimum Interdigit
The value of the minimum inter digit interval for pulse dialing (10msec
increments).
Pulse Minimum Make
The value of the minimum make interval for pulse dialing (10msec
increments).
Record Tone Edge
The value for the Record DTMF filter time (10msec increments).
Record Tone Length
Indicates the event edge to use for record tone:
1=event detection on trailing edge of tone
2=event detection on leading edge of tone
Ring Delay
The value of the wait delay after which the ring count is reset ( 100msec
increments).
Ring Off
The value of the minimum Ring Off interval to detect an incoming ring
(100msec increments).
Ring On
The value of the minimum Ring On interval to detect an incoming ring
(100msec increments).
Scheduler Time
The value of the Scheduler Time Slice, expressed as the maximum number of
timer ticks (expressed in 1/20 sec), before the driver must return control to
the program (50msec increments).
Silence Debounce
The value of the Silence message debounce interval (10msec increments).
Tone Duration
The value of the duration of dialed DTMF tones (10msec increments).
Tone Inter Digit Delay
The value of the inter digit tone dialing delay (10msec increments).
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
209
Configuration
HTTP
HTTP Settings allows you to configure settings to view
members of your voice mail system, and the status of each
Mailbox through any internet connection.
These settings are managed through the Web Mail Utility and should not be changed from here.
I Caution:
For details, refer to Officelinx Configuration on page 454 in this manual.
210
Setting
Function
Templates Directory
Specify the path to the location on the hard drive where templates are stored.
By default, this is the UC Installation directory on the local drive.
URL - Data
Displays the internet accessible address of the UC Server where the necessary
icons and image files are stored.
URL - Messages
This is the path to the internet accessible voice and fax message store.
URL - UMST
Contains the path to the internet accessible files needed for web based
telephone control.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Configuration
IMAP Server
IMAP Server settings allow you to configure IMAP messaging
behavior.
Setting
Function
Audio Format
This is the audio format for messages sent through IMAP
Composer pool timeout
The maximum length of time in milliseconds one must wait before a
new composer is created (for message creation).
Note: Composer is the IMAP component that translates messages to
mime format.
Connection delay
This is the allowable length of time to wait to connect
Encapsulate messages
Select True to allow the encapsulation of messages, False to deny
that option.
HTML Content
Set to True to allowing the sending of messages in HTML format.
IDLE Enabled
Set to True to enable Idle mode
IMAP Enabled
Set to True to enable IMAP
IMAP Port
This is the IMAP port
IP Address
This is the default IMAP gateway address.
Maximum number of Composers
The composer is the means by which information from the DB is
converted to the MIME format. A ratio of 1 composer to 3 users in
suggested. For a system of 300 users, enter a value of 100.
Session timeout (ms)
This is the length of time (in milliseconds) to wait before timing out
the session.
The maximum number of sessions
This is the maximum allowable number of IMAP sessions.
TNEF Extension
This is the message class or ID.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
211
Configuration
LDAP Synchronization
LDAP Synchronization settings allows the administrator to
specify the network accessible directory information for the
Internet Protocol (IP).
Email clients and other programs and services use this
information to reach needed files.
Settings
Function
Anonymous access
Select True if an anonymous bind (connection) is to be used. This
allows login by any client, without authentication.
Set this to True to have the system route any undefined imports to
Assign mailbox number or
the first available user of the first defined company. When set to
company name if not user defined
False, undefined LDAP imports will fail.
212
Authorization Type
Allows you to select the synchronization authorization type. Select
Simple if simple authentication is to be used, or GSS if GSS
authentication is to be used.
Base DN
This is for the unique base name.
Class schema for contact
This is for the object’s class name to be synchronized with Public
Contact.
Class schema for group
This is for the object’s class name to be synchronized with Feature
Group.
Class schema for mailbox
This is for the object’s class name to be synchronized with mailbox.
Directory application server
Allows you to select the LDAP directory server. Your choices are
Microsoft Active Directory, Novell eDirectory, iPlanet, or
Others.
Domain
This is for the User’s domain name.
Feature Group Filter DN
This is a data string describing what you are looking for on the
directory server.
Feature Group Search DN
This is a data string describing the directory server location. This is
the feature group search location.
Feature Group search scope
Select One level for a one-level search, or Sub-tree level for a
multiple-level search.
FG Last check date
This value is read-only.
FG Last check USN or Date
This value is read-only.
Host name
This is for the directory server name.
Language
Allows you to select the language of the active system.
Last check date
This value is read-only.
LDAP Port number
Specify the LDAP port number.
LDAP Version
Specify the LDAP protocol version.
Mailbox Template Number
Apply the selected template number to imported accounts. The
number is found in the Mailbox Template section of UC Admin.
Page size
Indicates the number of entries to show per page when retrieving
results from the server
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Configuration
Settings
Function
Paging allowed
Select True to enable paging specifications.
Password
This is for the administrator password.
PC Last check date
This value is read-only.
PC Last check USN or Date
This value is read-only.
Pop up the query window
Set to True to enable query window popup, set to False to disable.
Public contact Filter DN
This is a data string describing what you are looking for on the
directory server
Public contact Search DN
This is a data string describing the directory server location. This is
the public contact search location.
Public contact search scope
Select One level for a one-level search, or Sub-tree level for a
multiple-level search
SSL connection
Select True if Secure Socket Layers are being used
Synchronization direction
Usually this will be Only Directory to Database. For synchronization
with an IMAP source, selecting Both ways will synch updated
information only.
Synchronization Time (the last
time)
This value is read-only
Synchronization timeout
Allows you to specify the maximum number of seconds before a
connection and/or operation times out
Synchronization Type
Allows you to select the type of synchronization to occur. Select
DateTime only when you want synchronization between the
messaging and directory servers to occur on a time basis. In most
cases, you will select USN.
Synchronization USN (The last
value)
This value is read-only.
Synchronize deletions
This item is no longer supported.
Synchronize nested 
organizational units
For companies that have a hierarchical organization (ie. Sales on top,
with regions below), setting this option to True will force LDAP to
maintain the structure. Set to False to flatten the structure into the
highest layer (i.e. all contacts into Sales).
Timeout
Allows you to specify the maximum number of seconds before a
connection and/or operation times out.
Tombstone object DN
This item is no longer supported.
Update phone number
Select True to allow a phone number(s) to be updated, or False to
deny that option.
User DN
This is the unique name for the User (admin).
User Filter DN
This is a data string describing what you are looking for on the
directory server.
User Search DN
This is a data string describing the directory server location. This is
the user search location.
User search scope
Select One level for a one-level search, or Sub-tree level for a
multiple-level search
UUID
Specify the LDAP attribute to use as a Universally Unique
Identifier in case the usual ID (i.e FirstName+LastName) may
change.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
213
Configuration
Logs
Logs settings allow you to specify report logging on all system
components.
Settings
Function
Admin Log Level
This will create a log file for all Admin activity.
Business Object Log Level
This will create a log file for all EE Application Manager activity.
Days to Keep Report Logs
Defines the number of days that data is stored in log files. These are
the logs that contain the data used for generating Web Reports, not
system performance/maintenance monitoring data.
Debug Level
This sets the level of information sent to a log file when Debug mode
is activated. Enter a number between 0 and 5, depending on the
level of detail required.
Debug Mode
Debug mode for all main voice server activities.
Log Fax Activity
Logs all fax activity.
Log Lan Activity
This will create a log file for all Lan activity.
Log Mailbox Activity
This will create a log file for all Mailbox activity.
Log Mass Recall
Logs all Mass Recall activity.
Log Message Lights
Logs all Message Light activity.
Log PMS Activity
Logs all Property Management System activity.
Log Queue Activity
Creates a log file for all Queue activity.
Log Record Termination
Creates a log file for all Record termination activity
Log SMDI
Logs all SMDI activity.
Log Speech Engine
Creates a log file for all Log Speech Engine activity.
Log System Statistics
Creates a log file for all system statistics.
Log Wakeup Calls
Creates a log file for all Wakeup Call activity.
Status Log Level
Select a value that indicates the level at which status logs should be
created. Set to 0 = Least detailed. Set to 5 = Most detailed.
Trace Log Level
Select a value that indicates the level at which trace logs should be
created. Set to 0 = Least detailed. Set to 5 = Most detailed.
UMST Log Level
This will create a log file for all UMST activity.
VPIM/SMTP Debug
This allows for VPIM/SMTP debug.
VPIM/SMTP Log Level
This indicates the level of information sent to a log file for all VPIM/
SMTP activity, provided debug is activated.
Log and Debug information allow technical support representatives to more accurately pinpoint
 Note:
server issues. If there are no problems, however, you should, in order to save resources, leave your Log and
Debug settings as default or even disable them entirely.
214
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Configuration
POP3 Server Settings
POP3 Server settings allow you to configure settings for POP3
compliant email.
Settings
Function
Audio Format
This is the default audio format for POP3 voice messages.
Connection delay
This is the number of times a message send attempt will occur
before the sender receives a “message delayed” notification.
Encapsulate messages
Select True to allow the encapsulation of messages, False to
deny that option.
HTML Content
Set to True to allowing the sending of POP3 messages in HTML
format.
IP Address
This is the default IP address for POP3 messages.
POP3 enabled
This indicates whether or not POP3 is enabled.
POP3 Port
Indicates the port used for POP3 messaging.
Session timeout (ms)
Indicates the length of time (in milliseconds) that can pass before
the session times out.
The maximum number of sessions
Indicates the maximum number of POP3 sessions allowed.
TNEF Extension
This is the message class or ID.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
215
Configuration
Remote Site Setting
Remote Site settings allow you to configure both AMIS and
VPIM parameters.
Setting
Function
AMIS Initial delay
The value of the delay, in seconds, that the system will use to ignore the C
tone sent by AMIS. This is required only if there is a C tone sent via Inband
signaling from the PBX. Set to zero if no delay is needed.
Remote Site Installed
Indicates if remote networking is installed. Required for AMIS/VPIM.
Reorg
Reorg settings allow you to specify the rules to activate and run the
function that cleans and compacts the database.
Setting
Function
Backup Files Before Reorg
Indicates whether or not to back up the database files before
initiating the reorg.
Batch Files to run at Reorg Time
Defines a batch file to initiate before the reorg is performed. (i.e.
network or tape drive backup)
Reorg Time
Sets the time of day (24-hour format) to initiate the reorg function.
Select the Disable Reorg checkbox to disable the reorg function.
Depending on the size of the system (e.g. number of users), the time it takes Reorg to complete its
 Note:
tasks will vary. All services are stopped during this time.
216
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Configuration
Reports
Reports settings allow you to enable or disable specific
component activity reports.
Setting
Function
Administration Activity Report
Select True to allow for the creation of administration activity reports.
ASR Activity Report
Select True to allow for the creation of ASR activity reports.
Call Activity Report
Select True to allow for the creation of call activity reports.
Mailbox Activity Report
Select True to allow for the creation of mailbox activity reports.
Message Activity Report
Select True to allow for the creation of message activity reports.
Notification Activity Report
Select True to allow for the creation of notification activity reports.
Remote Sites Activity Report
Select True to allow for the creation of remote sites activity reports.
Telephony Activity Report
Select True to allow for the creation of telephony activity reports.
Transfer Activity Report
Select True to allow for the creation of transfer activity reports.
iLink Pro Desktop Activity Report
Select True to allow for the creation of Client Manager activity
reports.
Voice Menu Activity Report
Select True to allow for the creation of voice menu activity reports.
Web Client Activity Report
Select True to allow for the creation of Web Client activity reports.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
217
Configuration
User Manager
The User Manager configuration setting allows you to specify
one or more Administrators and the system properties that
they control. The Administrators can have limited control over
the UC systems (i.e. Edit PBX), up to Full Access.
Edit / Add User
Specify the following:
User Name: Enter the name of the administrator.
Full Name: Enter the administrator’s full name.
Description: Enter the title or purpose of this administrator.
Password: Create the administrator’s password.
Confirm Password: Re-enter the password.
Language: Select the language preference for this administrator.
If multiple language support is needed for your
 Note:
administrators, a new administrator must be created for each
language. When accessing the Supervisor Menu in the TUI, the
password entered for the configured Administrator account will
define the language to play.
Related Company: Select the companies this administrator has administrative rights over.
Account Disabled: Select to disable this account.
Enable the following tasks by selecting the corresponding checkboxes:
Task
Function
Full Access
Allows a user full access to the system.
Edit System Configuration
Allows the administrator to edit system configuration files.
Edit PBX
Allows the administrator to edit the PBX.
Add/Delete/Edit Company, Feature
Group, Remote Site, Routing Table,
Voice Menu, Customize TUI
Allows the administrator to add, edit, and delete a company, feature
group, remote site, routing table, voice menu, and to customize a
TUI.
Add Range of Mailboxes
Allows the administrator to add a range of mailboxes.
Create/Edit/Delete Mailbox
Allows the administrator to create, edit, and delete a mailbox.
Log Management
Allows the administrator to set and define logs.
Backup Management
Allows the administrator to perform and define backup management.
Report Management
Allows the administrator to define and create reports and run the Web
Reporter utility.
You must be logged into the server as an administrator to be able to edit and delete User Manager
 Note:
settings.
218
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Configuration
Telephony Settings
Use Telephony Settings to configure the behavior of the
telephone phone system.
Setting
Function
Accucall External File Name
(Brooktrout only)
Indicates the external filename used.
Accucall File Name (Brooktrout only)
Indicates the accucall filename used.
Accucall Internal File Name
(Brooktrout only)
Indicates the internal filename used.
Accucall Other File Name (Brooktrout
only)
Indicates the other filename used.
Norstar 7310 Dialing***
Allows for out-dialing to be performed on the virtual set dial pad rather
than via the voice boards (Dialogic).
Norstar Busy Time Out***
Used to set timer for Busy Transfer.
Number of Channels
Indicates the total number of voice channels installed. *Must be set by the
administrator.
Number of Digits in Message Count for
Display
This value sets the number of digits used to send to a display pager or a
supported display PBX telephone indicating the number of the message
sending the notification.
Pulse Detection Enabled
Indicates whether or not to use pulse detection. Requires the correct
hardware.
Refresh Ports Interval
Indicates the time interval between generating an offhook/onhook
sequence on each port. Used to keep ports listed as active in certain PBXs.
Silence Truncation
Removes silence from recording (used for Rhetorex only).
Telephone System Name
Indicates the make of the telephone system.
Voice Board Type
Indicates the type of voiceboard used.
Vox Format
Indicates the format of all recordings in the system (for example, WAV).
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
219
Configuration
VPIM/SMTP
VPIM/SMTP settings allow you to configure VPIM
server behavior.




















Setting
Function
Admin Email
Indicates the administrator’s email address.
Always use administrator’s email
Replaces the sender’s email with that of the admin account. The
display will still show the original sender. This is used when
receiving messages from outside sources (i.e. Gmail) that may
lack vital routing information.
Audio format for SMTP
This is the audio format for SMTP voice messages.
Audio format for VPIM
This is the audio format for VPIM voice messages.
Binary Mode
Set to False to allow binary encoded messages.
Check the sender domain
220
Enable to have the system check the domain of message
senders, for purposes of confirming the legitimacy of message
source.
DNS PTR record checking for sender’s IP
address
Select True to enable DNS PTR record checking for a sender’s IP
address.
Encapsulate messages
Select True to enable message encapsulation, False to disable.
ePage domain
Not generally implemented. Used in a proprietary installation.
ePage email
Not generally implemented. Used in a proprietary installation.
ePage format string
Not generally implemented. Used in a proprietary installation.
Fax format for SMTP forwarding
Select either PDF or TIFF for fax handling. Typically used for
IMAP systems. The Message Options in each user’s mailbox will
override this setting.
Fax gateway authorization
Enable to authenticate fax gateway before sending a fax
message.
Fax gateway default company
Indicates the default company number for sending of faxes.
Fax gateway domain
Indicates the domain of the fax gateway.
Forwarding allowed
Set to True to enable the forwarding of messages from remote
machines.
HTML - Allow Delete
With Send URL, this enables or disables Deletion.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Configuration
HTML - Allow Dial
With Send URL, this enables or disables Dialing.
HTML - Allow Mark as Read
With Send URL, this enables or disables marking a message as
Read.
HTML - Allow Phone Playback
With Send URL, this enables or disables message playback.
HTML Content
Set to True to allowing the sending of messages in HTML format.
HTML Filter
Allows for the filtering of HTML in messages to text.
IP Address
This is the default IP address for SMTP messages.
Maximum of the SMTP tasks
Indicates how many SMTP messages can be processed at one
time.
Maximum of the VPIM tasks
Indicates how many VPIM messages can be processed at one
time.
Smarthost
In case of a "non-connected" PC, all messages will be sent after
being forwarded to this connected host.
SMS Length limit
Determines the length of a SMS text message.
SMTP Enabled
Indicates whether or not SMTP is enabled.
SMTP Port
Indicates the port used for SMTP messaging.
The maximum number of incoming
connections
This is for the maximum number of VPIM/SMTP connections
allowed.
The number of attempts before delay
notification
Indicates the number of times a message send attempt will occur
before the sender is sent a “message delayed” notification.
The number of delivery attempts
Indicates the number of times a message delivery attempt will
occur before the sender is sent a “message delivery failure”
notification.
TNEF Extension
This is the message class or ID
Use email verification for outbound faxing
Enable this option to require outbound faxes originating outside
the company to be verified through email before sending. An offsite sender, after requesting to send a fax, will receive an email
with a link which must be clicked before the fax will be sent.
Use email verification for SMS
Enable this option to require outbound SMS messages originating
outside the company to be verified through email before sending.
An off-site sender, after requesting to send an SMS message, will
receive an email with a link which must be clicked before the
message will be sent.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
221
Configuration
222
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
LDAP Import Utility
In This Chapter:
Introduction
225
Toolbar Buttons
226
Importing a user into the system
229
Importing Directory users into the system
232
Configuring and Connecting
235
Adding and Importing mailboxes
235
Checking Imported and Saved Mailboxes
236
Clearing a mailbox
236
Updating the Directory
236
Synchronizing the database with the Directory
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 16
224
223
LDAP Import Utility
Introduction
The LDAP Import Utility allows you to import user information from your Active Directory servers or from text files into the
Officelinx database. This utility is suited to situations where there is already existing user information prior to installing
Officelinx.
The LDAP Import Utility is installed with Officelinx. To access it from the Windows Desktop, click 
Start > Programs > Officelinx > LDAP Import Tool.
224
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
LDAP Import Utility
Toolbar Buttons
Button
Name
Function
Import mailboxes
Imports one or several mailboxes.
Import contacts
Imports one or many contacts.
Import Distribution List
Imports one or more distribution lists.
Print
Print a file.
Help
Accesses LDAP Import Utility help file.
What’s this?
Provides a brief explanation for the selected item.
Settings
Opens the Settings dialog box.
Connect LDAP Server
Connects to the LDAP server.
Disconnect from LDAP Server Disconnects from the LDAP server.
Save mailboxes in database
Saves mailboxes data to the Officelinx database.
Assign mailbox numbers
Allows you to modify the attributes of a range of mailboxes.
Reset mailbox numbers
Allows you to clear mailbox settings for selected users.
Select All
Select all mailboxes.
Read Mailboxes
Display all mailboxes.
Assign OU & Company
Import the company/organizational unit information from a database.
Assign Mailbox number and
extension from database
Assigns a mailbox number and extension directly from a database.
Link User with database
Synchronizes the Voice Server database with the directory.
USN & Timestamp
Specify USN or Time.
Update Directory
Updates the directory.
Adjust mailbox number and
extension
Edit the attributes associated with a mailbox in the directory.
Check for mailbox duplication Validates mailbox information before importing.
Import Companies
Allows you to import all selected Companies.
Import OUs
Allows you to import all selected Organizational Units.
Check Selected Branch
Select all items/subitems of the selected object in the directory pane.
Uncheck Selected Branch
Deselect all items/subitems in the directory pane.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
225
LDAP Import Utility
Importing a user into the system
The LDAP Import Tool allows you to gather user data from a text file or from your directory. When using LDAP to import a
user from the directory to the voice server, the following steps must be performed:
1.
Open the LDAP Importer. Go to Start > All Programs > Officelinx > LDAP Import Tool.
2.
Click the Settings toolbar button
. The Settings screen (Server tab)
appears.
3.
Verify the following LDAP Server information:

The Directory Server field contains the correct Directory Server.

The Host field contains the correct directory server name.
Click the ellipsis ... or DNS button if you want to browse
 Note:
through the available server locations.
The Port field contains the correct LDAP Server port number.

The value in the Protocol Version drop down list is correct.



4.
Click Paging. The Paging dialog box appears:
5.
Set the Paging specifications:
6.
7.
226


Page Size specifies the number of entries to show per page when retrieving results
from the server.

Enable Paging allowed to use paging specifications.

Click the Detect button to check if the server supports the paging mode.

Click OK to save specifications.
In the Connections options feature box, specify the following:

In the Timeout field, enter the time (in minutes) for the length of a connection.

Enable the SSL Connection checkbox to use Secure Sockets Layers.
In the Credentials/Authorization feature box:

Enable the Anonymous Bind checkbox to allow login to LDAP by any client without authentication.

Select either Simple, for no encryption, or GSS, to encrypt communications.

Enter the User DN/Username for the administrator account.

Enter the directory Domain name.

Enter the administrator Password.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
LDAP Import Utility
8.
Click on the Searching tab.
9.
You can search either by Users, Public Contacts or Feature Groups.
For all search methods:
10. In the Search DN field, enter a data string describing the directory server
location. This defines where to search.
11. Enter a data string describing what you are looking for on in the Filter
field.
12. Select either One level, to search only the current tier of the directory
hierarchy, or Sub-tree level to include all levels in the search.
13. Select Matching Rules. This screen shows which fields in the Officelinx
database correspond to which fields in the directory database.



Note: By default, all attributes are predetermined to match most
 existing
Directory servers. Also, this is where you will define which field
in the AD will be used for mailbox number on the Officelinx side. You may
use any free field within AD to assign mailbox numbers, as long as you
match them accordingly under the Matching Rules.
14. Highlight the Class Object for which you want to define a unique matching rule, and
then click the ellipsis ... button. The Class Attributes dialog box appears.
15. Select the attribute that you want to assign to the Class Object, then close the Class
Attributes dialog box. The chosen Class Object will now be associated with the
specified field in the Officelinx database.
16. Repeat Steps 13-15 for all matching rules you want to define.
17. When finished click Apply.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
227
LDAP Import Utility
18. Click on the Database & Synchronization tab.
In the Class schema feature box complete the following:

Enter the object class name to be synchronized with Mailbox.

Enter the object class name to be synchronized with Public Contact.

Enter the object class name to be synchronized with Feature Group.
In the Synchronization feature box:

Choose USN to synchronize data based upon the Update Sequence
Number. Choose DateTime to synch based upon time stamps. Select
Cumulative to have both servers compare their contents and make
updates where appropriate.
USN is best for most applications. Time stamps between
 Note:
servers can be out of synch, which can prevent the accurate
replication of data. Cumulative synchronization can be time
consuming.
Not all servers support all methods of synchronization.

Make sure the correct language for the interface is selected in the
Language drop down list.
19. Click Apply, then OK. You are returned to the main LDAP Import Tool
screen.
20. Back on the main LDAP Import screen, click on the Connect LDAP
Server button
. Double click on a user. 

The Attributes screen appears. You should see the same user
parameters in this window as are defined in the Directory.










21. Return to the Directory and open the properties for the user.
22. Change the mailbox number value (Unified Messaging tab) and re-synchronize the LDAP. The user's mailbox number in
both LDAP and the directory should be the same.
23. Press
to save the changes to the database. You will be prompted to enter additional information (password, IMAP
Server, tutorial).
24. Click the Import Mailboxes toolbar button
, then go to the main system window and view the mailboxes pane. 
The user should now be among the listed users.
Changing a user
To change a non-Messaging user to a Messaging user:
1.
In the directory, select a user who does not have messaging options defined.
2.
Add information to the required fields and save.
3.
Press the Connect LDAP Server toolbar button
to view the users in the directory. You should see the old user, but
now with additional fields declared.
4.
Press the Save mailboxes in database toolbar button
to save the user to the database. You will be prompted to
enter additional information (password, IMAP Server, tutorial).
5.
228
Go to the Admin window to view the mailboxes pane. The user should be a part of the Admin.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
LDAP Import Utility
Importing Directory users into the system
1.
2.
Open the LDAP Import Tool.
Select Tools > Settings, or click the Settings toolbar button
. The
Settings screen (General tab) appears:
3.
Enter the following information:

Make sure the Directory Server drop down list indicates the correct
Directory Server.

In the Host field, enter the directory server name.
Click the ellipsis or DNS button if you want to browse
 Note:
from a list of server locations.
Use if you want default server parameters to load
 Note:
automatically.
4.
5.
6.

Make sure the Port field contains the correct LDAP Server port
number.

Make sure the value in the Protocol Version drop down list is correct.
Click Paging. The Paging dialog box appears:
Adjust the Paging specifications as follows:

Indicate the number of entries to show per page when retrieving results from the
server.

Select the Paging allowed checkbox to enable paging specifications.

Click the Detect button to check if the server supports the paging mode.

Click OK to save specifications.
On the Server tab, check the following administrator credentials information:

Select the Anonymous Bind checkbox to allow login to LDAP by any client, without authentication.

Select either the Simple (no encryption) or GSS (encrypted) radio button.

Make sure the User DN/Username field contains the correct administrator user name.

Make sure the Domain field contains the correct directory domain name.

Make sure the Password field contains the correct administrator password.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
229
LDAP Import Utility
7.
Click on the DSE tab.
8.
If you want to view DSE information, click Request. The list box is
populated with DSE entries:
9.
Click on the Object Classes tab.
10. If you want to view object class information, click Request. The listbox is
populated with object class information:
230
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
LDAP Import Utility
Importing from a file
1.
In the LDAP Importer toolbar, click File > Import Mailboxes. The Import
from File dialog box appears:
2.
In the Data File field, enter the path of the source file to import, or click
Browse to select the source file.
3.
In the Delimiter field, select the delimiter from the list of predefined
characters, or define your own.
4.
Select the file format of the Data file, either DOS or Unix.
5.
Click Preview to ensure that your settings are correct. The preview of the
settings appears.
6.
Click Edit to change the settings. The Notepad dialog box appears.
7.
Make your changes and proceed to Step step 8.
8.
Assign a column for each attribute by selecting the attribute and clicking the
Type column. The number appears in the Column.
9.
When all attributes are assigned a column, click Import. The system
imports the data from the selected file to the Officelinx database. After
importing from the text file, proceed to the Import section.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
231
LDAP Import Utility
Configuring and Connecting
1.
In the LDAP Importer toolbar, click the Settings toolbar button:
2.
In the Host field, enter or select an LDAP server name or address.
3.
In the Port field, enter the LDAP Port. (Also applicable to SSL).
4.
In the Protocol version drop down list, select the protocol version.
5.
Click Paging. The Paging dialog box appears:
6.
Adjust the paging specifications:

In the Page Size text box, indicate the number of entries to show per page when
retrieving results from the server.

Select the Paging allowed checkbox to enable paging.

Click the Detect button to check if the server supports paging mode.

Click OK to save specifications and return to the Settings screen.
7.
In the Base DN field, enter an unique name for the base.
8.
In the Timeout box, indicate the maximum number of seconds before a connection or operation has timed out.
9.
Select the SSL Connection checkbox if Secure Socket Layers are being used.

In the Credentials/Authorization box, select Anonymous Bind if an anonymous bind is to be used.
OR
Select Simple if simple authentication is to be used.
OR
Select GSS if GSS authentication is to be used.
If Anonymous Bind is selected, User DN/Username, Domain, and Password fields are disabled. 
 Note:
If Simple is selected, the User DN/Username and Password fields are enabled. 
If GSS is selected, the User DN/Username, Domain, and Password fields are all enabled.
10. In the User DN/Username field, enter the user name.
11. In the Domain field, enter the domain name.
12. In the Password field, enter the user’s password.
232
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
LDAP Import Utility
13. Click Apply and OK, then click on the Searching tab:
14. You can search by Users, Public Contacts, and Feature Groups.
FOR EITHER SEARCH METHOD:
15. Make sure the Search DN field contains a data string describing the
directory server location. This is the search location.
16. Make sure the Filter field contains a data string describing what you are
looking for on the Directory server.
17. Select either the One level radio button for a one-level search, or the
Sub-tree level radio button for a multiple-level search.
18. Select Matching Rules to redefine the Matching Rules to use. 
The Matching Rules window appears:.
Note: By default, all attributes are predetermined to match most
 existing
Directory servers. Also, this is where you will define which field
within AD will be used for mailbox number on the Officelinx side. You
may use any free field within AD to assign mailbox numbers, as long as
you match them accordingly under the Matching Rules.
19. Highlight the Class Object that you want to define a unique matching rule for, and
then click the ellipsis button. The Class Attributes dialog box appears:
20. Select the attribute that you want to assign to the Class Object, then close the Class
Attributes dialog box.
21. Repeat Steps step 19 and step 20 for all matching rules you want to define.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
233
LDAP Import Utility
22. When finished click Apply and OK, then click on the Database &
Synchronization tab:
By default, the attributes are set. Double check them to
 Note:
ensure that they correspond with your specific Directory settings.

Enter the object class name to be synchronized with Mailbox.

Enter the object class name to be synchronized with Public Contact.

Enter the object class name to be synchronized with Feature Group.

Make sure the correct language is selected in the Language drop
down list.
In the Synchronization feature box:

You will most likely select the USN radio button. Select the DateTime
radio button only when you want synchronization between the
messaging and directory servers to occur on a time basis.

Select the Update telephone number checkbox if you want the
telephone number to synchronized with the user’s mailbox number.
23. Click Apply, then OK to return to the main LDAP Import Tool screen.
24. When all settings have been defined, click the Connect LDAP Server
toolbar button. The following dialog box appears:
25. Click Yes.
The system attempts to connect to the
Active Directory and will import all users
that were defined in the IMAP server. It
displays the hierarchy of the information
and specified attributes can be viewed by
doubleclicking on each (The Attributes
dialog box appears, displaying the
attributes associated with the selected
user).











234
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
LDAP Import Utility
Adding and Importing mailboxes
After connecting and receiving the data from the directory server, you can import a selection of users or assign mailbox
attributes.
Note: The import time for 500+ users is approximately 15 minutes. This ensures that all mailbox
 information
is correctly imported.
1.
To import defined users, highlight the user(s) you want to import and click the Assign Mailbox number and extension
from db toolbar button.
2.
Click Import to import all selected users.
OR
To assign mailbox attributes to users before importing, highlight a user and hit the 
Assign Mailbox Number and extension from db toolbar button. 
The Assign Mailbox dialog box appears:
3.
In the Mailbox number FROM field, enter a mailbox number for the selected user.
4.
In the Mailbox number FROM Increment by spinbox, select the number to
increment the mailbox by.
5.
In the Extension FROM field, enter the extension number.
6.
In the Extension FROM Increment by spinbox, select the number to increment the
extension by,
7.
From the Company drop down list, select the company that the user is to be
associated with.
8.
From the Feature Group drop down list, select the feature group that the user is to
be associated with.
9.
From the Department drop down list, select the department that the user is to be
associated with.
10. From the Desktop Capabilities drop down list, select which capability to assign to
the user.
11. Click Assign and close the Assign Mailbox dialog box.
12. Repeat Steps step 4~step 11 to assign mailboxes for all users.
13. Click Import to import and save user settings.
 Note: If any errors occur, the Report window displays all errors.
Checking Imported and Saved Mailboxes
1.
To check the imported and saved mailboxes, go to the LDAP Importer toolbar and click the Read Mailboxes button. The
Mailboxes dialog appears, displaying all the assigned mailboxes and attributes.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
235
LDAP Import Utility
Clearing a mailbox
To clear a mailbox, highlight a user in the LDAP Importer and click Clear.
Updating the Directory
Whenever attributes are defined or configured in the LDAP Import Utility, you need to update the objects (users) on the
directory server.
In the LDAP Import Utility toolbar, click the Update Directory toolbar button. The system updates the directory server.
Synchronizing the database with the Directory
You must synchronize the Database with the Directory.
1.
In the LDAP Import Utility toolbar, click the USN and Timestamp toolbar button.
The Global USN & Time dialog box appears:
If you selected USN on the Officelinx + Synchronization tab, the The Highest USN
field is enabled. If you selected DateTime, the Date and Time boxes are enabled.
2.
In the The Highest USN field, enter the highest unique sequence number.
3.
Click Request to retrieve the USN.
Click Save.
OR
For the Date, indicate the date the object is to begin synchronizing from.
236
4.
For Time, indicate the time the object is to begin synchronizing from.
5.
Click Save.
6.
In the LDAP Import Utility Toolbar, click on the Link User with database toolbar button. The system synchronizes the
information from the Database with the Directory.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
IVR ActiveX
In This Chapter:
Introduction
239
Private functions
247
Public interface of the ActiveX Object exposed to OL
249
Protected (Friend) Functions
256
Example Applications & Code Samples
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 17
238
237
IVR ActiveX
Introduction
Officelinx software provides a connection to an IVR ActiveX object for extending the functionality of the voice server. Through
this connection, calls can be directed to specific mailboxes and the voice server can be instructed to act on them.
Please refer to Custom Interface Settings on page 198 for details on appending your custom
 Note:
settings from the admin.
How it works
This ActiveX object runs as a state machine, pushed initially by Officelinx from Voice Menu. Once started, IVR ActiveX
performs according to its own logic. When it needs Telephony voice functionality, IVR communicates with Officelinx through
the function GetDestination() by passing XML-like commands (play a voice file, retrieve DTMF digits, etc.).
What you need to do
The developer of this ActiveX object needs only fill in his logic in the internal private function InterStateMachine() as a
state machine.
You can also modify MakeCtrlKeyTag() which produces control keys.
238
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
IVR ActiveX
Private functions
Whenever ActiveX needs a service from Officelinx, such as Play or Record, it will send an XML-like command. The following
private functions help make this XML string.
PlaySalutation()
This function plays specific company salutations and receives DTMF digits.
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
SalNum
Company Salutation Number needs to be played
String (input)
2
NextInternalState
The next state number to go after play finishes.
String (input)
3
Param
The specification of receiving digits.
tParamGetDigits
(input)
4
BWithDigit
Whether to receive digits or not after play. Required
as a rule.
Boolean (input)
PlaySysPrompt()
This function plays specific system prompts and receives DTMF digits.
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
SysPromptNum
System prompt number needs to be played
String (input)
2
NextInternalState
The next state number to go after play finishes
String (input)
3
Param
The specification of getting digits
tParamGetDigits
(input)
4
BWithDigit
Whether to receive digits or not after play. Required
as a rule..
Boolean (input)
PlayMbxGreeting()
This function plays specific mailbox greetings and receives DTMF digits.
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
MbxNo
Mailbox number whose greeting you want to play.
String (input)
2
GreetingNum
What kind of Mailbox greeting to play. The naming
convention is following the enumerator
eMbxGreetingType.
String (input)
3
LangNum
What language greeting to play.The naming
convention is following the enumerator
eLanguages. If 0, the system current active
language is used.
String (input)
4
NextInternalState
The next state number after play finishes
String (input)
5
Param
The specification of retrieving digits
tParamGetDigits
(input)
6
BWithDigit
Whether to receive digits or not after play. Required
as a rule.
Boolean (input)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
239
IVR ActiveX
PlayFile()
This function plays specific voice files and receives DTMF digits.
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
FileName
Full path name of voice file.
String (input)
2
VoxFormat
Format of the voice file
eVoiceFormatTypes
(input)
3
NextInternalState
The next state number after play finishes
String (input)
4
Param
The specification of receiving digits
tParamGetDigits
(input)
5
BWithDigit
Whether to receive digits or not after play. Required
as a rule.
Boolean (input)
PlayTTS()
This function plays specific text using TTS based on the system voice format and receives DTMF digits.
TTS must already be installed and configured.
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
SpeechText
Text needs to be played with TTS
String (input)
2
LangNum
In which language it will be played. If 0, the system
current active language is used.
ELanguages (input)
3
NextInternalState
The next state number to go after play finishes
String (input)
4
Param
The specification of retrieving digits
tParamGetDigits
(input)
5
BWithDigit
Whether to retrieve digits or not after play.
Required as a rule.
Boolean (input)
PlayDateTime()
This function plays a specific date and time based on the system phrase voice format and receives DTMF digits.
240
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
StrDate
Year-Month eg.: 200309 = Sept., 2003
String (input)
2
strTime
Hour:Minute eg.: 13:50
String (input)
3
NextInternalState
The next state number after play finishes.
String (input)
4
Param
The specification of retrieving digits
tParamGetDigits
(input)
5
bWithDigit
Whether to retrieve digits or not after play. Required
as a rule.
Boolean (input)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
IVR ActiveX
PlayFileWithCtrlKeys()
This function plays a specific file using control keys (i.e. fast forward, rewind, louder, softer) turned on, and receives DTMF
digits. The IVR can play Voice as well as email (plain text), but you should verify that the Officelinx version supports TTS
control keys for email play.
TTS must already be installed and configured.
Many control keys parameters need to be passed to Officelinx as XML strings. There is another private function,
MakeCtrlKeyTag(), to build this XML string.
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
FileName
Full path name of file to be played
String (input)
2
VoxFormat
Voice format of the file
eVoiceFormatTypes
(input)
3
LangNum
In which language it will be played
eLanguages (input)
4
bEmail
Is this file email text or Voice?
Boolean (input)
5
StrTextPrefix
Prefix text to be played before playing email body.
Usually, it's Message Subject. 
Only when BEmail = TRUE
String (input)
6
NextInternalState
The next state number after play finishes
String (input)
7
Param
The specification of retrieving digits
tParamGetDigits
(input)
8
BWithDigit
Whether to retrieve digits or not after play.
Required as a rule.
Boolean (input)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
241
IVR ActiveX
ASRPlay()
This function plays a voice file with speech recognition functionality.
If the caller says something and Officelinx achieves a valid result, the property IsASRResult will be set to TRUE and
m_PersistData() holds the result string.
If the caller presses the DTMF key or says nothing, the property IsASRResult is set to FALSE and m_PersistData() holds
DTMF digits.
The developer of this ActiveX object should ensure that the grammar file is created properly.
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
FileName
Full path name of the voice file
String (input)
2
VoxFormat
Format of the voice file
eVoiceFormatTypes
(input)
3
LangNum
In which language it will be played
eLanguages (input)
4
Grammar
Grammar is the grammar name (not the grammar
filename).
Example: "1_names". The function will then
undertake recognition using a grammar file located
in the \installdir\packages that is named
"1_names.grammar"
String
5
ConfTmeqYes
When a caller is prompted with a yes/no question,
and the ASR engine is not sure of the answer or
the caller doesn't say anything, ASR will pickup
whatever this parameter defines. "1" means YES,
"0" means NO.
String
(value "1" or "0")
6
BargeIn
This variable allows (or bars) the ASR subsystem to
barge in on the user input. If this parameter is true
and a full-duplex telephony subsystem is installed,
the ASR subsystem allows barging in. Otherwise,
the prompt plays out completely, followed by a
tone, and only then will user input be collected by
the ASR engine.
String
(value “1” or “0”)
7
BargeInConfirm
If BargeInConfirm is “0”, the subsystem does not
barge-in during confirmations (ie, we wait for the
tone to allow callers to speak the answer).
Otherwise, callers can barge-in on the word(s) we
are trying to confirm, even if the voice server has
not finished saying them.
String
(value “1” or “0”)
8
ASRConfirm
If ASRConfirm is “0”, we do not confirm caller
response at all. Otherwise, we confirm only if
accuracy level is lower than the global value for
confirming. The default global value to confirm is
60%.
String
(value "1" or “0”)
9
NextInternalState
The next state number after play finishes
String (input)
The specification of retrieving digits
tParamGetDigits
(input)
10 Param
GetDigits()
This function waits for the caller to press DTMF digits and inserts them into the array m_PersistData(). You can choose
where to put it into the array by specifying the value tParamGetDigits.PersistDataIndex.
242
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
NextInternalState
The next state number after GetDigits finishes
String (input)
2
Param
The specification of retrieving digits
tParamGetDigits
(input)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
IVR ActiveX
GetMbxFormat()
This function asks Officelinx to get a mailbox greeting format and message format and put them into the variables
m_nMbxGreetVFormat and
m_nMbxMsgVFormat.
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
MbxNo
Mailbox No.
String (input)
2
NextInternalState
The next state number after function finishes
String (input)
GetMsgRecInfo()
This function asks Officelinx to collect information before recording a message in the mailbox. The information includes:
Message Format: m_nRecFormat
Max Length(Time) of Record: m_lRecMaxTime
Record File Name: m_RecFileName
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
MbxNo
Mailbox No.
String (input)
2
NextInternalState
The next state number after function finishes.
String (input)
RecordWithDigit()
This function will record a voice file according to the settings in the variables: m_nRecFormat, m_lRecMaxTime,
m_RecFileName.
If you want to record a message for a mailbox, call the function GetMsgRecInfo() to prepare these variables. If you want to
record your own message, fill in these variables before calling RecordWithDigit():
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
NextInternalState
The next state number after function finishes
String (input)
2
Param
The specification of retrieving digits
tParamGetDigits
(Input)
RecordWithDigitHangup()
This function will record a voice file according to the settings in the variables: m_nRecFormat, m_lRecMaxTime,
m_RecFileName.
This function is the same as RecordWithDigit(), except that when the recording is completed - by pressing a key or hanging
up the phone - the voice server passes control to the IVR by calling the GetDestination() function. It is then up to the IVR to
hang up the voice mail channel and finish the call.
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
NextInternalState
The next state number after function finishes
String (input)
2
Param
The specification of retrieving digits
tParamGetDigits
(Input)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
243
IVR ActiveX
GetMsgAppendRecInfo()
This function asks Officelinx to calculate how much more a caller can append to an existing recorded voice file based on
m_lRecMaxTime. Officelinx will put the maximum appending time into the variable m_lAppendRecTime.
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
NextInternalState
The next state number after function finishes
String (input)
AppendRecordWithDigit()
This function will append a recording to a previously recorded file.
You must call GetMsgAppendRecInfo() in advance to determine how much you can append. You must also have called
RecordWithDigit().
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
NextInternalState
The next state number after function finishes
String (input)
2
Param
The specification of retrieving digits
tParamGetDigits
(Input)
AppendRecordWithDigitHangup()
This function will append a recording to a previously recorded file.
You must call GetMsgAppendRecInfo() in advance to determine how much you can append. You must also have called
RecordWithDigit().
This function is the same as AppendRecordWithDigit(), except that when the recording is completed - by the pressing of a
key or hanging up the phone - the voice server passes control to the IVR by calling the GetDestination() function. It is then
up to the IVR to hang up the voice mail channel and finish the call.
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
NextInternalState
The next state number after function finishes
String (input)
2
Param
The specification of retrieving digits
tParamGetDigits
(Input)
SendRecMsgToMbx()
This function sends a recorded voice message to the mailbox's Inbox. You must already have called the function
RecordWithDigit() to record the voice message.
244
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
MbxNo
Mailbox No to receive the message
String (input)
2
CallerExtension
The internal phone extension from where this call
comes, so that the message FROM field will show
this extension Name.This takes priority over
CallerIDName & Number
String (input)
3
CallerIDName
The CallerId's Name you want to show on the
Message FROM field. The CallerExtension must be
empty.
String (input)
4
CallerIdNumber
The CallerId's Number you want to show on the
Message FROM field. The CallerExtension must be
empty.
String (input)
5
NextInternalState
The next state number after this function finishes
String (input)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
IVR ActiveX
LeaveMsgToMbx()
This function simulates a caller leaving a message to a Mailbox. After this function, ActiveX will pass control to Officelinx (i.e.
the state machine stops running).
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
MbxNo
Mailbox number to receive the message
String (Input)
TransferToMailbox()
This function simulates a call to Officelinx and that is transferred to a Mailbox. Through this function, ActiveX will pass control
to Officelinx (i.e. the state machine stops running).
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
MbxNo
Mailbox number that receive the call
String (Input)
SendFax()
This function sends the fax to a designated fax machine. If the fax number is not provided, the system will prompt you for
one.
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
FaxFileName
Full path name of fax file to be sent
String (Input)
2
FaxCountryCode
Fax number's country code
String (Input)
3
FaxAreaCode
Fax number's area code
String (Input)
4
FaxPhoneNumber
Fax number's phone number
String (Input)
5
NextInternalState
The next state number after this function finishes
String (Input)
SendToVoiceMenu()
This function passes control to Officelinx (i.e. the state machine stops running) by going to the submenu of the specified
Voice Menu.
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
MenuNo
Menu No
String (Input)
2
SubMenu
Sub Menu Level
SendToSubMenu()
This function passes control to Officelinx (i.e. the state machine stops running) by going to the submenu of the current active
Voice Menu.
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
1
SubMenu
Sub Menu Level
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Type
245
IVR ActiveX
HoldCall()
This function puts the call on hold for a specified time period.
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
HoldTime
How long to hold (in milliseconds)
String (Input)
2
NextInternalState
The next state number to go after this function
finishes.
String (Input)
HangUp()
This function hangs up a call with or without playing the “Thank you for calling, goodbye” salutation.
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
bWithGreeting
Play the hangup greeting or not
Boolean (Input).
Values are
True or False.
DoesMbxExist()
This function verifies the existence of a mailbox.
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
MbxNo
Mailbox number
String (Input)
2
NextInternalState
The next state number after this function finishes
String (Input)
SetCallerId()
This function sets the Caller ID information on Officelinx so that on a TransferToMailbox or LeaveMsgToMbx, the caller
receives popup and caller ID information.
246
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
CallerIDName
Specify the caller Id Name
String (Input)
2
CallerIDNumber
Specify the caller Id Number
String (Input)
3
NextInternalState
The next state number after this function finishes
String (Input)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
IVR ActiveX
Public interface of the ActiveX Object exposed to OL
GetDestination(Method)
Main entry point for Officelinx. Officelinx passes the state number of the state machine to let ActiveX know which piece of
logic should be running. The start point is usually state 1. ActiveX reports the next state number to let Officelinx call this
function to push the ActiveX state machine to roll.
GetPersistDataArray(Method)
ActiveX OBJDB.GetDestination maintains an array of String data for its own use. This data can be exposed to Officelinx.
PutPersistDataArray (Method)
Officelinx can set persist data to transport data to an ActiveX object. For example, when getting DTMF digits from a caller,
Officelinx can put the digit string to this persist data to inform ActiveX.
TotalRetries (Property)
Total retry events for a certain action.
Retries (Property)
Current number of retry events. If the number of retries exceeds TotalRetries, the ActiveX object may take its own action
(such as Hangup) or go to the next state.
MbxGreetingVFormat(Property)
Officelinx can put Mailbox personal greeting voice formats here.
MbxMsgVFormat(Property)
Officelinx can put Mailbox message voice formats here.
RecFileName
This is the file name that will be recorded. This property may be set by Officelinx or by ActiveX itself, depending on the logic.
RecMaxTime
This is the maximum time of the next recording. This property may be set by Officelinx or by ActiveX itself, depending on the
business logic.
RecFormat
This is the voice format of the next recording. This property may be set by Officelinx or by ActiveX itself, depending on the
business logic.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
247
IVR ActiveX
AppendRecTime
This is the appending time of the next recording. This property may be set by Officelinx or by ActiveX itself, depending on the
business logic.
IsMbxExists(Property)
This is to verify the existence of the mailbox.
IsASRResult(Property)
This is to verify the result of ASRPlay when DTMF has been pressed or a caller has made a valid utterance.
MsgCountString (Property)
The message count information from last GetMessageCount() call.
ErrCode
Officelinx will return Err code to the object Get Destination’s request so that the Active X state machine can act accordingly.
The codes are:
IVR_OK = 0
IVR_MBXNOTEXIST = -1
IVR_WRONGVOICEMENU = -2
IVR_GENERALERROR = -100
248
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
IVR ActiveX
Protected (Friend) Functions
All protected functions can be used in the object GetDestination, as well as with clsIVRCallBack. Protected functions act
similarly to private functions when used with GetDestination. Be careful to always provide NextInternalState for
GetDestination.
If protected functions are used in object clsIVRCallBack, a Non-Voice channel call will be generated. Be careful to never
provide NextInternalState for clsIVRCallBack.
MessageLight


Parameters:
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
CompanyId
ComanyId.
Not used if called from object GetDestination.
Used in the object clsIVRCallBack.
String (Input)
2
MbxNo
Mailbox Number on which the MWI will be turned
on or off.
String (Input)
3
OnOff
“ON” means turn on MWI;
”OFF” means turn off MWI.
String (Input),
“ON” or “OFF"
4
ForceMWI
If 1, turn on or off MWI regardless of the Unread or
Read message count or feature group settings in
the inbox
If 0, turn on or off MWI following the feature group
settings and message count in the inbox
String (Input)
“1” or “0"
5
NextInternalState
Used only if called from object GetDestination.
Fill in empty string if called from object
clsIVRCallBack.
String (Input)
Logic:
This function turns the message light on or off for specified mailboxes.

Return Values:
XML command string for Officelinx.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
249
IVR ActiveX
SendFax


Parameters:
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
CompanyId
CompanyId.
Not used if called from object GetDestination.
Used in the object clsIVRCallBack.
String (Input)
2
FaxFileName
Full path fax file name to be sent
String (Input)
3
FaxCountryCode
Fax country code
String (Input)
4
FaxAreaCode
Fax area code
String (Input)
5
FaxPhoneNumber
Fax phone number
String (Input)
6
ExtToSend
Extension number that will be printed on the fax,
allowing it to be directed to a particular person's
attention
String(Input)
7
DialAsIsNumber
If not empty, use this as PhoneNumber, ignoring
the FaxCountryCode, FaxAreaCode,
FaxPhoneNumber;
If empty, use FaxCountryCode, FaxAreaCode,
FaxPhoneNumber and allow voice server to apply
the dialling rules, such as outcall access code,
account code, international code, etc.
String(Input)
8
NextInternalState
Used only if called from object GetDestination.
Fill in empty string if called from object
clsIVRCallBack.
String (Input)
Logic:
This function sends the specified fax to designated fax machine.
If called by object GetDestination and the fax machine phone number is not provided, system will prompt you to provide
fax number.

Return Values:
XML command string for Officelinx.
CTISetPinNumber


Parameters:
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
Extension
Phone Extension number that this CTI function will
act on.
String (Input)
2
PinNumber
The pin number caller has entered
String (Input)
3
NextInternalState
Used only if called from object GetDestination.
Fill in empty string if called from object
clsIVRCallBack
String (Input)
Logic:
This function takes the pin number pressed by the caller as the CallerId instead of the real CallerId.

Return Values:
XML command string for Officelinx.
250
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
IVR ActiveX
CTIIndividualParkCall


Parameters:
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
Extension
Phone Extension number that this CTI function will
act on.
String (Input)
2
NextInternalState
Used only if called from object GetDestination.
Fill in empty string if called from object
clsIVRCallBack
String (Input)
Logic:
Hold the call on the extension.

Return Values:
XML command string for Officelinx.
CTIPickupIndividualPark


Parameters:
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
Extension
Phone Extension number that this CTI function will
act on.
String (Input)
2
NextInternalState
Used only if called from object GetDestination.
Fill in empty string if called from object
clsIVRCallBack
String (Input)
Logic:
Release the call previously held on the extension.

Return Values:
XML command string for Officelinx.
CTISetLampOn


Parameters:
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
Extension
Phone Extension number that this CTI function will
act on.
String (Input)
2
LampNo
Indicates which button to light on the phone applies only to some CTI modes (Teltronics)
Set LampNo to 99 and it will use Multiple Message
lights for Iwatsu
Long (Input)
3
NextInternalState
Used only if called from object GetDestination.
Fill in empty string if called from object
clsIVRCallBack
String (Input)
Logic:
Turn on the message light directly on the extension.

Return Values:
XML command string for Officelinx.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
251
IVR ActiveX
CTISetLampOff


Parameters:
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
Extension
Phone Extension number that this CTI function will
act on.
String (Input)
2
LampNo
Indicates which button to light on the phone applies only to some CTI modes (Teltronics)
Set LampNo to 99 and it will use Multiple Message
lights for Iwatsu
Long (Input)
3
NextInternalState
Used only if called from object GetDestination.
Fill in empty string if called from object
clsIVRCallBack
String (Input)
Logic:
Turn off the message light directly on the extension.

Return Values:
XML command string for Officelinx.
CTIPlaceCall


Parameters:
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
Extension
Phone Extension number that this CTI function will
act on.
String (Input)
2
Digits
The phone number the extension is going to dial
String (Input)
3
NextInternalState
Used only if called from object GetDestination.
Fill in empty string if called from object
clsIVRCallBack
String (Input)
Logic:
Make a call from an Extension to a phone number.

Return Values:
XML command string for Officelinx.
CTIAnswerCall


Parameters:
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
Extension
Phone Extension number that this CTI function will
act on.
String (Input)
2
CallId
Unique Id identifying a call. Always put "0" here to
let TOL to decide
String (Input)
“0”
3
NextInternalState
Used only if called from object GetDestination.
Fill in empty string if called from object
clsIVRCallBack
String (Input)
Logic:
Answers a call on the Extension.

Return Values:
XML command string for Officelinx.
252
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
IVR ActiveX
CTISetDND


Parameters:
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
Extension
Phone Extension number that this CTI function will
act on.
String (Input)
2
Status
0 means turn off DND;
1 means turn on DND
String (Input)
“0” or “1”
3
NextInternalState
Used only if called from object GetDestination.
Fill in empty string if called from object
clsIVRCallBack
String (Input)
Logic:
Turn on or off the Do-Not-Disturb status on the extension.

Return Values:
XML command string for Officelinx.
CTIDisplay


Parameters:
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
Extension
Phone Extension number that this CTI function will
act on.
String (Input)
2
Display
The string is shown on the phone display.
String (Input)
3
NextInternalState
Used only if called from object GetDestination.
Fill in empty string if called from object
clsIVRCallBack
String (Input)
Logic:
Show the string on the extension screen.

Return Values:
XML command string for Officelinx.
CTIClearConnection


Parameters:
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
Extension
Phone Extension number that this CTI function will
act on.
String (Input)
2
NextInternalState
Used only if called from object GetDestination.
Fill in empty string if called from object
clsIVRCallBack
String (Input)
Logic:
Hang up the call on the extension.

Return Values:
XML command string for Officelinx.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
253
IVR ActiveX
CTISetForwarding


Parameters:
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
Extension
Phone Extension number that this CTI function will
act on.
String (Input)
2
FwdExtension
The extension the call will be forwarded to.
String (Input)
3
FwdType
Forward on which condition:
Internal NA
1
External NA 2
Internal Busy 3
External Busy 4
Always
5
BusyNoAnswer 6
String (Input)
4
NextInternalState
Used only if called from object GetDestination.
Fill in empty string if called from object
clsIVRCallBack
String (Input)
Logic:
Set forward to a specified extension under certain conditions:
• To set all internal and external conditions, use the FwdType BusyNoAnswer and all internal and external busy and
no answer will be set to the same destination.
• To Cancel Call Forwarding, pass the same FwdType , but set the destination to nothing.

Return Values:
XML command string for Officelinx.
CTIVMTransferCall


Parameters:
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
Extension
Phone Extension number that this CTI function will
act on.
String (Input)
2
TargetExtension
The destination extension the call will be
transferred to.
String (Input)
3
Mode
1 means supervised transfer
0 means blind transfer.
String (Input)
4
Timeout
Length of time (in milliseconds) before call times
out.
String (Input)
Default is
“10000” - 10 seconds.
5
NextInternalState
Used only if called from object GetDestination.
Fill in empty string if called from object
clsIVRCallBack
String (Input)
Logic:
Transfer a call on the extension to another target extension. Currently Officelinx only supports blind transfer(Mode 0).

Return Values:
XML command string for Officelinx.
254
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
IVR ActiveX
CTIAddNewExtension


Parameters:
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
Extension
Phone Extension number that this CTI function will
act on.
String (Input)
2
PhoneType
VOICEMAIL = 1
IPVOICEMAIL = 2
TRUNK = 3
IPPHONE = 4
ANALOG = 5
SOFTPHONE = 6
HUNTGROUP = 7
PAGINGNO = 8
HCI = 9
String (Input)
3
NextInternalState
Used only if called from object GetDestination.
Fill in empty string if called from object
clsIVRCallBack
String (Input)
Logic:
This is just for MITAI, add the extension to the monitor list.

Return Values:
XML command string for Officelinx.
CTIRemoveExtension


Parameters:
#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
Extension
Phone Extension number that this CTI function will
act on.
String (Input)
2
PhoneType
VOICEMAIL = 1
IPVOICEMAIL = 2
TRUNK = 3
IPPHONE = 4
ANALOG = 5
SOFTPHONE = 6
HUNTGROUP = 7
PAGINGNO = 8
HCI = 9
String (Input)
3
NextInternalState
Used only if called from object GetDestination.
Fill in empty string if called from object
clsIVRCallBack
String (Input)
Logic:
This is just for MITAI, remove the extension from the monitor list.

Return Values:
XML command string for Officelinx.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
255
IVR ActiveX
Example Applications & Code Samples
Don’t be overwhelmed by the apparent complexity of the sample project. Focus primarily on the two functions
GetDestination() and InterStateMachine() where:

GetDestination() is the public interface for Officelinx to communicate with IVR ActiveX. It is used to send XML-like
commands back and forth to drive the logic flow. Therefore, it is the main entry point for Officelinx.
Public Function GetDestination(ByVal InCommand As String, ByRef OutCommand As String) As Long
'Input --- InCommand, a XML like command string to tell this ActiveX what to do
'<NEXTINTERNALSTATE>1</NEXTINTERNALSTATE>
'Output --- 'OutCommand , a XML like command string to tell Voice Server what to do next
'the XML command should be documented in detail separately
Dim nState As Integer
On Error GoTo errhandler
GetDestination = -100 '-100 --- General Error
nState = Val(ExtractXMLField(InCommand, "<NEXTINTERNALSTATE>"))
OutCommand = InterStateMachine(nState, InCommand)
GetDestination = 0
Exit Function
errhandler:
GetDestination = -100
AddToLog "GetDestination", CStr(Err.Number) + " " + Err.Description
End Function
You can see that the only thing this function does is to call the function InterStateMachine. The parameter InCommand
contains a state number, which is provided by Officelinx to tell IVR ActiveX which piece of logic to visit. The detailed logic is
inside the function InterStateMachine().
The parameter OutCommand is an XML-like return string from the function InterStateMachine(), which tells Officelinx what
to do, such as Play Prompt, Get DTMF digits, etc.

256
InterStateMachine() is the single function that allows you to include your own logic. It is a state machine where you can
provide your own logic for different state numbers.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
IVR ActiveX
The following are code samples of the function InterStateMachine(), to help you acquire hands-on experience in writing your
own logic:
Private Function InterStateMachine(ByVal nState As Integer, ByVal strAdditionalCmd As String) As String
''This function is internal State Machine running the logic
''InterStateMachine --- Command string to ask Voice Server for help such as Play, WaitDTMF...etc.
On Error GoTo errhandler
Select Case nState
Case 1
‘logic piece 1
Case 2‘maybe get DTMF digits .
‘logic piece 2
.
.
Case else
End Select
End Function
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
257
IVR ActiveX
Input Validation
This sample demonstrates getting an access code from the user and validating it.
1.
The logic flow for this sample:

User calls in, system prompts “Please enter your 4-digit validation number”

User presses the 4 digits, and if correct the system plays “Your validation number is correct” and hangs up.

If the User input is incorrect, the system will ask the User to retry up to a maximum of 3 times and then hangup.
In order for this state machine to function, you must pre-record the following company prompts: 
 Note:
Sal5001 --- “Please enter your 4-digit validation number.”
Sal5002 --- “Your validation number is correct.”

Sample: Input Validation
Incoming call to
IVR
State
1
Play prompt
Sal5001.vox: “Please
enter your 4 digit
validation number.”
No
Caller presses
validation
number
State
2
Yes
Correct
Play prompt Sal5002:
“Your validation
number is correct”
State
3
Maximum
retries
reached?
Wrong
State
2
Play system prompt “Thank you
for calling” and then hang up.
The End
258
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
IVR ActiveX
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
259
IVR ActiveX
260
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
IVR ActiveX
Pharmacy Dictation
This sample demonstrates a typical Pharmacy dictation application. The system allows callers to Record, Pause and Send a
message. Caller can also play back the message, Fast forward, Rewind, Pause during playing.
Logic flow for this sample:
User calls in, and is prompted by the system: "Please enter your 4-digit access code."
User enters 4 digits, if it is "1234", the system deems it to be correct and plays "Please record your message at the tone,
press 1 to pause, any other digits to finish recording."
If the entered value is not "1234", system will ask user to retry up to maximum 3 times and then hang up.
When the system asks the user to record, and user starts speaking, the caller can press 1 to PAUSE and any other key to
continue after PAUSE.
After recording, the system asks: "To play back the message, press 1, or any other key to send the message.”
Caller presses 1 and the system plays "System is going to play back the message, you can press 9 to fast forward, 7 to
rewind, 8 to pause 4 seconds."
As the system plays the recorded message, the user can Fast forward, Rewind, or Pause playback.
After playing, the system will start playback or send the message depending on caller’s selection.
In order for this state machine to function, you need to pre-record the following company prompts:
Sal6001 --- Please enter your 4 digit access code.
Sal6002 --- Please record your message at the tone, press 1 to pause, any other digits to finish recording.
Sal6003 --- To play back the message, press 1, or any other key to send the message
Sal6004 --- System is going to play back the message, you can press 9 to fast forward, 7 to rewind, 8 to pause 4 seconds.
Sal6005 --- Your message has been sent.
Sal6006 --- You just PAUSED Recording, you can press any digit to continue recording.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
261
IVR ActiveX
262
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
IVR ActiveX
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
263
IVR ActiveX
264
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
IVR ActiveX
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
265
IVR ActiveX
266
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
DBConst.dll
Configuration
In This Chapter:
268
Introduction
269
Parameters and Variable Description
CHAPTER 18
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
267
DBConst.dll Configuration
Introduction
DBConst.dll is a Windows COM Object which exposes functions to third party applications to add/modify/search Mailboxes
and FeatureGroups within the Database of Esna’s Officelinx application (v. 7+). For example, an application can be written to
read all extension information from the PBX and call DBConst.dll to add corresponding mailboxes to Officelinx.
DBConst is a very simplified business object. It wraps the business object (EEAM.dll) to the main constant COM interface
across Officelinx versions while the EEAM.dll interface may evolve. Its main class clsEEAM_Const contains public functions to
manipulate Mailboxes, Mailbox Addresses and Feature Groups.
Here is an example in Visual Basic to create an instance of clsEEAM_Const:
Dim Obj as Object
Set Obj = CreateObject("DBConst.clsEEAM_Const")
Preparation
Ensure that all servers involved conform to the following:
268
1.
Ensure both the local machine and the Officelinx server is accessible via a UNC path with the local account credentials
(domain account or otherwise, test access by entering \\$MACHINENAME in the Run window).
2.
Compile your project with the appropriate path to the DBConst file. Officelinx versions 7.x and 8.x save that file in
different locations.
3.
Once compiled, copy the contents of your project to the destination machine (ensure that your executable and any
relevant library files, including DBConst.dll and Interop.DBConst.dll (if .NET) are moved to the destination machine).
4.
Register DBConst.dll on the destination machine. Enter the following command in the Run window or the command
console: regsvr32 ../$PATH/DBConst.dll.
5.
Install the Remote Admin utility from the installation DVD on the local machine. This loads the necessary ODBC drivers
on the connecting machine.
6.
Copy EEAM.dll from the Officelinx server intended to be connected to in the local directory of your program and
DBConst.dll, and register it (enter the following command on the Run window or the command console: 
regsvr32 ../$PATH/EEAM.dll).
7.
Execute your program, verifying connection and data calls. Be sure to include proper error catching so that end users can
be aware of connection problems.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
DBConst.dll Configuration
Parameters and Variable Description
Feature Group Section
GetFeatureGroup

#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
FGroup
DBConst.tFGroupConst
(OUTPUT)
Logic:
This function retrieves FeatureGroup information from provided FGroupID. Caller should be sure to fill in the correct
FGroup.ID prior to calling this function.

Return Values:
RET_OK : Read successfully.
Other than RET_OK : Error.asdf
GetListOfFGroupsInCompany

#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
FGroupsList ()
Array(Index from 0)
tFGroupConst
(OUTPUT)
2
NumberOfFGroups How many FGs are there in specific Company
Long(OUTPUT)
3
CompanyID
The specific Company ID.
Long(INPUT)
4
TSELocation
Optional.
String(INPUT)
5
IMAPonly
Optional.
Boolean(INPUT)
Logic:
This function will return all eligible Feature Groups in the specified company.

Return Values:
RET_GENERROR: Unknown error.
RET_OK: Read successfully even if there is no item in the FGroup Table.
Mailbox Section
MailboxAdd

#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
Mailbox
DBConst.tMailboxConst
All elements but MailboxID would be filled before
calling
tMailbox (INPUT for all
elements but
MailboxID) (OUTPUT
for MailboxID)
2
ReportToMSA
optional
Boolean, default value
is True
Logic:
This function adds a Mailbox into the system database.
If the provided MailboxNo already exists in the company, the function does nothing but return RET_RECEXISTS.
The function automatically generates a unique MailboxID, which is the maximum from the database, and fills it in the
Mailbox Structure for OUTPUT.
MailboxID is a system generated unique identifier (primary key) for a mailbox. The Caller can use this unique MailboxID
to access a mailbox, or alternatively, use CompanyID + MailboxNumber to access a mailbox.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
269
DBConst.dll Configuration
The function also creates the following default system folders for the new Mailbox:
TOP, DRAFT, INBOX, OUTBOX, SENT, TRASH.

Return Values:
RET_GENERROR: Unknown error.
RET_RECEXISTS: There is already a corresponding record in the database. Cannot add.
RET_OK: Add successfully.
MailboxUpdate

#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
prevMailbox
MailboxID must be filled before calling
tMailboxConst (INPUT)
2
newMailbox
3
ReportToMSA
tMailboxConst (INPUT)
optional
Boolean, default to
True
Logic:
This function updates the elements that are different between structures prevMailbox and newMailbox.
One approach is to make newMailbox equal to prevMailbox and then modify the elements which you want to update.

Return Values:
RET_OK: Update successfully.
Other than RET_OK: Error.
MailboxDelete

#
Parameters
1
MailboxID
2
ReportToMSA
Parameter Description
Type
Long (INPUT)
Optional
By default is
True(INPUT)
Logic:
This function calls the eeam function MailboxDelete to delete the specified Mailbox.

Return Values:
RET_OK: Delete successfully.
Other than RET_OK: Error.
GetMailbox

#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
Mailbox
MailboxID must be filled
tMailboxConst (INPUT
for MailboxID)
(OUTPUT for other
elements)
2
WithInfo
Optional parameter which is False by default. If
true, returns Message information for the mailbox
Boolean (INPUT)
Logic:
This function returns Mailbox information based on provided MailboxID.
If WithInfo = TRUE this function also reports the Message counter of the mailbox.

Return Values:
RET_GENERROR: Unknown error.
RET_NOREC: There is no corresponding data in the database.
RET_OK: Read successfully.
270
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
DBConst.dll Configuration
FindMailbox

#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
MailboxSearch
CompanyId
MailboxNo
MailboxType
DIDTrunk
tFindMailboxConst
(INPUT)
2
Mailbox
tMailboxConst
(OUTPUT)
Logic:
This function returns Mailbox information based on CompanyID and MailboxNo/MailboxType/DIDTrunk, which is different
than GetMailbox() where you search by MailboxID.
If MailboxSearch.CompanyId = 0, then search for any company;
For the members other than CompanyId in structure tFindMailboxConst, there must be only one member with a non-zero
or non-“” value and the search would be based on that member.
The result is expected to be unique. If more than one Mailbox is found, returns RET_ERR_NOTUNIQUEREC.

Return Values:
RET_GENERROR: Unknown error.
RET_ERR_WRONGPARAM : More than one member (except CompanyId) has non-zero or non-“” value, or all members
but CompanyId hold zero or “” value in MailboxSearch structure (except CompanyId).
RET_ERR_NOTUNIQUEREC: If there is more than one record in the result.
RET_NOREC: There is no corresponding data in the database.
RET_OK: Read successfully.
Address Section
GetMailboxAddresses

#
Parameters
1
MailboxID
Parameter Description
Type
Long (INPUT)
2
NumberOfAddress How many Addresses in the specific Mailbox
es
Long (OUTPUT)
3
AddressesList
Array (Index from 0)
tAddressConst
(OUTPUT)
4
AddressType
Enumerator
eAddressesConst
(INPUT)
5
Scheduled
6
ShowDefaults
Boolean (INPUT)
Optional parameter which is FALSE by default. If
True, only return default extensions.
Boolean (INPUT)
Logic:
This functions returns all eligible extensions of a mailbox based on provided MailboxID

Return Values:
RET_GENERROR: Unknown error.
RET_OK: Read successfully.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
271
DBConst.dll Configuration
MailboxAddrAdd

#
Parameters
1
Address
Parameter Description
Type
tAddressConst (INPUT
for all elements but
AddressID)
(OUTPUT for
AddressID)
Logic:
This function adds an extension for a mailbox.
If there is already a record with the same MbxID, Address, AddressType, the function does not add it and returns
RET_RECEXISTS.
System automatically generates the unique Address ID and fills into the Address Structure for OUTPUT.

Return Values:
RET_GENERROR: Unknown error.
RET_RECEXISTS: There is already a corresponding record in the database. Don’t need to add.
RET_OK: Add successfully.
MailboxAddrUpdate

#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
prevAddress
prevAddress.ID must be filled.
tAddressConst (INPUT)
2
newAddress
tAddressConst (INPUT)
Logic:
This function updates the elements that are different between structures prevAddress and newAddress.
A popular approach is to first make newAddress equal to prevAddress and then modify the elements in newAddress you
want to update.

Return Values:
RET_OK: Update successfully.
MailboxAddrDelete

#
Parameters
1
AddressId
Parameter Description
Type
Long (INPUT)
Logic:
This function deletes a specific Address according to the input AddressId.

Return Values:
RET_OK: Delete successfully.
Other than RET_OK: Error.
272
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
DBConst.dll Configuration
Other Section
Init

#
Parameters
Parameter Description
Type
1
StorageMode
Optional.
Always -1 (INPUT)
2
RemoteServerNa
me
Optional. Expect the computer name which has db
file installed. If this file in located on local computer
this value should be empty.
String
3
RemoteServerIP
Optional. Expect the computer IP Address which
has db file installed. If this file in located on local
computer this value should be empty.
String
4
FileLocationNodeI
D
Optional.
By default is 0
Logic:
This function is to initialize the database object. It must be called at the beginning prior to using any other functions.

Return Values:
RET_OK: Delete successfully.
Other than RET_OK: Error.
ReleaseCls

Logic:
This function is to uninitilize the database object. It should be called when you finish using this object.

Return Values:
RET_OK: Delete successfully.
Other than RET_OK: Error.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
273
DBConst.dll Configuration
274
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
In This Chapter:
Introduction
278
Classes
279
Call Class
282
Calls Class
285
ExternalContact Class
288
ExternalContactAddress Class
291
ExternalContactAddressType Enumeration
292
Group Class
294
Groups Class
297
Location Class
299
NotificationKind Enumeration
300
OpResult Class
305
PropBool Class
310
PropObject Class
312
PropString Class
317
UCCMIf Class
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 19
277
275
iPD Plug-in API
276
327
UCCMPlugin Class
344
User Class
347
Users Class
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Introduction
This chapter can be utilized by developers to create plug-ins for iLink Pro Desktop for in depth customizing. iPD plug-in is a
.Net class inherited from UCCM_NG.Plugin.UCCMPlugin abstract class and linked as a DLL file.
How iLink Pro finds plug-in files
All plug-ins are placed into separate folder named Plugins. The plug-ins folder is located in the same folder as the client
application. Plug-in file should be named as UCCM.Plugin.*.dll.
How iLink Pro loads plug-ins
On startup, iLink Pro Desktop goes through the plug-ins folder and tries to load any files satisfying UCCM.Plugin.*.dll mask.
If Assembly.LoadFrom() succeeded then the client enumerates all the types enclosed and looks for UCCMCreatePlugin
method:
public static object UCCMCreatePlugin();
When invoked, the method should return either an UCCMPlugin instance or diagnostic text to be logged.
Assembly references
Currently, any plug-in implementation should refer to UCCM_NG.exe assembly containing UCCMPlugin definition.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
277
iPD Plug-in API
Classes
Class
Description
Call
A call supervised by iLink Pro.
Calls
List of calls.
ExternalContact
External contact returned by plug-in.
ExternalContactAddress
Address of an external contact.
Group
Describes a user-created group.
Groups
List of groups.
Location
Describes a location.
OpResult
Deprecated
PropBool
PropObject
PropString
UCCMIf
Callback object.
UCCMPlugin
Plug-in prototype. This class is abstract (MustInherit in Visual
Basic)abstractMustInherit and so cannot be instantiated.
User
User class represents a user's mailbox.
Users
List of users.
Enumerations
278
Enumeration
Description
ExternalContactAddressType
Address type.
NotificationKind
Kind to treat a notification as.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Call Class
A call supervised by iLink Pro.
Namespace: UCCM_NG.Plugin
Assembly: UCCM_NG (in UCCM_NG.exe)
Syntax
Visual Basic (Declaration)
<SerializableAttribute>
Public Class Call
C#
[SerializableAttribute]
public class Call
C++
[SerializableAttribute]
ref class Call
J#
/** @attribute SerializableAttribute() */
public class Call
JScript
public
SerializableAttribute
class Call
Inheritance Hierarchy
System.Object
UCCM_NG.Plugin.Call
Call Members
A call supervised by iLink Pro. The following tables list the members exposed by Call.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
279
iPD Plug-in API
Public Fields
Name
Description
CallId
ID to address call with.
FromCallHistory
Not really a call but a record from call history.
ExternalContact
External contact returned by plug-in.
ExternalContactAddress
Address of an external contact.
Group
Describes a user-created group.
Groups
List of groups.
Syntax > CallID
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public CallId As String
C#
public string CallId;
C++
public:
String CallId sealed ;
J#
public string CallId
JScript
public CallId : String;
Syntax > FromCallHistory
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public FromCallHistory As Boolean
C#
public bool FromCallHistory;
C++
public:
bool FromCallHistory sealed ;
J#
public bool FromCallHistory
JScript
public FromCallHistory : bool;
Syntax > Call.OtherPartyName
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public OtherPartyName As String
C#
public string OtherPartyName;
C++
public:
String OtherPartyName sealed ;
J#
public string OtherPartyName
JScript
public OtherPartyName : String;
Syntax > Call.OtherPartyNumber
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public OtherPartyNumber As String
C#
public string OtherPartyNumber;
C++
public:
String OtherPartyNumber sealed ;
J#
public string OtherPartyNumber
JScript
public OtherPartyNumber : String;
Syntax > Call.Outgoing
280
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Outgoing As Boolean
C#
public bool Outgoing;
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
C++
public:
bool Outgoing sealed ;
J#
public bool Outgoing
JScript
public Outgoing : bool;
Syntax > Call.State
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public State As String
C#
public string State;
C++
public:
String State sealed ;
J#
public string State
JScript
public State : String;
Public Methods
Name
Description
Equals
Determines whether the specified Object is equal to the current
Object. (inherited from Object)
GetHashCode
Serves as a hash function for a particular type. GetHashCode is
suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a
hash table. (inherited from Object)
GetType
Gets the Type of the current instance. (inherited from Object)
ToString
Returns a String that represents the current Object. (inherited
from Object)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
281
iPD Plug-in API
Calls Class
List of calls. The following tables list the members exposed by Calls.
Syntax
Visual Basic (Declaration)
<SerializableAttribute>
Public Class Calls
Inherits List(Of Call)
C#
[SerializableAttribute]
public class Calls : List<Call>
C++
[SerializableAttribute]
ref class Calls : List<Call>
J#
/** @attribute SerializableAttribute() */
public class Calls extends List<Call>
JScript
public
SerializableAttribute
class Calls extends List<Call>
Inheritance Hierarchy
System.Object
System.Collections.Generic.List<T>
UCCM_NG.Plugin.Calls
Calls Members
Public Properties
Name
Description
Capacity
Gets or sets the total number of elements the internal data
structure can hold without resizing. (inherited from List)
Count
Gets the number of elements actually contained in the List.
(inherited from List)
Item
Gets or sets the element at the specified index. (inherited from
List)
Public Methods
282
Name
Description
Add
Adds an object to the end of the List. (inherited from List)
AddRange
Adds the elements of the specified collection to the end of the
List. (inherited from List)
AsReadOnly
Returns a read-only IList wrapper for the current collection.
(inherited from List)
BinarySearch
Overloaded. Uses a binary search algorithm to locate a specific
element in the sorted List or a portion of it. (inherited from List)
Clear
Removes all elements from the List. (inherited from List)
Contains
Determines whether an element is in the List. (inherited from
List)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Name
Description
ConvertAll
Converts the elements in the current List to another type, and
returns a list containing the converted elements. (inherited from
List)
CopyTo
Overloaded. Copies the List or a portion of it to an array.
(inherited from List)
Equals
Determines whether the specified Object is equal to the current
Object. (inherited from Object)
Exists
Determines whether the List contains elements that match the
conditions defined by the specified predicate. (inherited from
List)
Find
Searches for an element that matches the conditions defined by
the specified predicate, and returns the first occurrence within
the entire List. (inherited from List)
FindAll
Retrieves the all the elements that match the conditions defined
by the specified predicate. (inherited from List)
FindIndex
Overloaded. Searches for an element that matches the conditions
defined by a specified predicate, and returns the zero-based
index of the first occurrence within the List or a portion of it.
(inherited from List)
FindLast
Searches for an element that matches the conditions defined by
the specified predicate, and returns the last occurrence within the
entire List. (inherited from List)
FindLastIndex
Overloaded. Searches for an element that matches the conditions
defined by a specified predicate, and returns the zero-based
index of the last occurrence within the List or a portion of it.
(inherited from List)
ForEach
Performs the specified action on each element of the List.
(inherited from List)
GetEnumerator
Returns an enumerator that iterates through the List. (inherited
from List)
GetHashCode
Serves as a hash function for a particular type. GetHashCode is
suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a
hash table. (inherited from Object)
GetRange
Creates a shallow copy of a range of elements in the source List.
(inherited from List)
GetType
Gets the Type of the current instance. (inherited from Object)
IndexOf
Overloaded. Returns the zero-based index of the first occurrence
of a value in the List or in a portion of it. (inherited from List)
Insert
Inserts an element into the List at the specified index. (inherited
from List)
InsertRange
Inserts the elements of a collection into the List at the specified
index. (inherited from List)
LastIndexOf
Overloaded. Returns the zero-based index of the last occurrence
of a value in the List or in a portion of it. (inherited from List)
Remove
Removes the first occurrence of a specific object from the List.
(inherited from List)
RemoveAll
Removes the all the elements that match the conditions defined
by the specified predicate. (inherited from List)
RemoveAt
Removes the element at the specified index of the List. (inherited
from List)
RemoveRange
Removes a range of elements from the List. (inherited from List)
Reverse
Overloaded. Reverses the order of the elements in the List or a
portion of it. (inherited from List)
Sort
Overloaded. Sorts the elements in the List or a portion of it.
(inherited from List)
ToArray
Copies the elements of the List to a new array. (inherited from
List)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
283
iPD Plug-in API
284
Name
Description
ToString
Returns a String that represents the current Object. (inherited
from Object)
TrimExcess
Sets the capacity to the actual number of elements in the List, if
that number is less than a threshold value. (inherited from List)
TrueForAll
Determines whether every element in the List matches the
conditions defined by the specified predicate. (inherited from
List)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
ExternalContact Class
External contact returned the by plug-in.
Syntax
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Class ExternalContact
C#
public class ExternalContact
C++
ref class ExternalContact
J#
public class ExternalContact
JScript
public class ExternalContact
Inheritance Hierarchy
System.Object
UCCM_NG.Plugin.ExternalContact
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
285
iPD Plug-in API
ExternalContact Members
Public Constructors
Name
Description
ExternalContact
Initializes a new instance of the ExternalContact class.
Public Fields
Name
Description
Addresses
DisplayName
Syntax > ExternalContact.Addresses
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Addresses As List(Of ExternalContactAddress)
C#
public List<ExternalContactAddress> Addresses;
C++
public:
List<ExternalContactAddress> Addresses sealed ;
J#
public List<ExternalContactAddress> Addresses
JScript
public Addresses : List<ExternalContactAddress>;
Syntax > ExternalContact.DisplayName
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public DisplayName As String
C#
public string DisplayName;
C++
public:
String DisplayName sealed ;
J#
public string DisplayName
JScript
public DisplayName : String;
Public Properties
Name
Description
Image
Syntax > ExternalContact.Image
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Property Image As Image
C#
public virtual Image Image { get; set; }
C++
public virtual property Image Image {
Image get();
void set(Image value);
}
J#
/** property */
public Image get_Image();
/** property */
public void set_Image(Image value);
JScript
public function get Image() : Image
public function set Image(value : Image);
286
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Public Methods
Name
Description
Equals
Determines whether the specified Object is equal to the current
Object. (inherited from Object)
GetHashCode
Serves as a hash function for a particular type. GetHashCode is
suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a
hash table. (inherited from Object)
GetType
Gets the Type of the current instance. (inherited from Object)
HasDefaultAction
Open
ToString
Returns a String that represents the current Object. (inherited
from Object)
Syntax > ExternalContact.HasDefaultAction
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Function HasDefaultAction() As Boolean
C#
public virtual bool HasDefaultAction()
C++
public:
virtual bool HasDefaultAction()
J#
public virtual bool HasDefaultAction()
JScript
public virtual function HasDefaultAction() : bool
Syntax > ExternalContact.Open
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Sub Open()
C#
public virtual void Open()
C++
public:
virtual void Open()
J#
public virtual void Open()
JScript
public virtual function Open()
Public Methods
Name
Description
Add
Adds an object to the end of the List. (inherited from List)
AddRange
Adds the elements of the specified collection to the end of the
List. (inherited from List)
AsReadOnly
Returns a read-only IList wrapper for the current collection.
(inherited from List)
RemoveRange
Removes a range of elements from the List. (inherited from List)
ExternalContact Constructor
Initializes a new instance of the ExternalContact class.
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub New()
C#
public ExternalContact()
C++
public:
ExternalContact() sealed
J#
public ExternalContact()
JScript
public function ExternalContact()
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
287
iPD Plug-in API
ExternalContactAddress Class
Address of an external contact.
Syntax
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Class ExternalContactAddress
C#
public class ExternalContactAddress
C++
ref class ExternalContactAddress
J#
public class ExternalContactAddress
JScript
public class ExternalContactAddress
Remarks
Address of an external contact
Inheritance Hierarchy
System.Object
UCCM_NG.Plugin.ExternalContactAddress
ExternalContactAddress Members
Address of an external contact. The following tables list the members exposed by ExternalContactAddress.
288
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Public Constructors
Name
Description
ExternalContactAddress
Initializes a new instance of the ExternalContactAddress class.
Public Fields
Name
Description
Addresses
DisplayName
Type
Syntax > ExternalContactAddress.Address
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Address As String
C#
public string Address;
C++
public:
String Address sealed ;
J#
public string Address
JScript
public Address : String;
Syntax > ExternalContactAddress.DisplayName
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public DisplayName As String
C#
public string DisplayName;
C++
public:
String DisplayName sealed ;
J#
public string DisplayName
JScript
public DisplayName : String;
Syntax > ExternalContactAddress.Type
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Type As ExternalContactAddressType
C#
public ExternalContactAddressType Type;
C++
public:
ExternalContactAddressType Type sealed ;
J#
public ExternalContactAddressType Type
JScript
public Type : ExternalContactAddressType;
Public Properties
Name
Description
Image
Syntax > ExternalContactAddress.Image
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Property Image As Image
C#
public virtual Image Image { get; set; }
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
289
iPD Plug-in API
C++
public virtual property Image Image {
Image get();
void set(Image value);
}
J#
/** property */
public Image get_Image();
/** property */
public void set_Image(Image value);
JScript
public function get Image() : Image
public function set Image(value : Image);
Public Methods
Name
Description
Activate
CanBeActivated
Equals
Determines whether the specified Object is equal to the current
Object. (inherited from Object)
GetHashCode
Serves as a hash function for a particular type. GetHashCode is
suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a
hash table. (inherited from Object)
GetType
Gets the Type of the current instance. (inherited from Object)
ToString
Returns a String that represents the current Object. (inherited
from Object)
Syntax > ExternalContactAddress.Activate
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Sub Activate()
C#
public virtual void Activate()
C++
public:
virtual void Activate()
J#
public virtual void Activate()
JScript
public virtual function Activate()
Syntax > ExternalContactAddress.CanBeActivated
290
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Function CanBeActivated() As Boolean
C#
public virtual bool CanBeActivated()
C++
public:
virtual bool CanBeActivated()
J#
public virtual bool CanBeActivated()
JScript
public virtual function CanBeActivated() : bool
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
ExternalContactAddressType Enumeration
Address type.
Syntax
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Enum ExternalContactAddressType
C#
public enum ExternalContactAddressType
C++
public enum class ExternalContactAddressType
J#
public enum ExternalContactAddressType
JScript
public enum ExternalContactAddressType
Remarks
Type of the address the plug-in returns.
Members
Name
Description
Phone
General phone number
Mobile
Mobile phone number
Fax
Fax number
SIP
SIP address
Email
email address
Web
Web page
OtherSystemAssociated
Other address the system can follow/open
OtherUnknown
An address the system can't or shouldn't handle
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
291
iPD Plug-in API
Group Class
Describes a user-created group.
Syntax
Visual Basic (Declaration)
<SerializableAttribute>
Public Class Group
C#
[SerializableAttribute]
public class Group
C++
[SerializableAttribute]
ref class Group
J#
/** @attribute SerializableAttribute() */
public class Group
JScript
public
SerializableAttribute
class Group
Inheritance Hierarchy
System.Object
UCCM_NG.Plugin.Group
Group Members
Describes a user-created group. The following tables list the members exposed by Group.
292
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Public Fields
Name
Description
GroupId
Group ID.
GroupName
Group name.
Syntax > Group.GroupId
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public GroupId As String
C#
public string GroupId;
C++
public:
String GroupId sealed ;
J#
public string GroupId
JScript
public GroupId : String;
Syntax > Group.GroupId
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public GroupName As String
C#
public string GroupName;
C++
public:
String GroupName sealed ;
J#
public string GroupName
JScript
public GroupName : String;
Public Methods
Name
Description
Equals
Determines whether the specified Object is equal to the current
Object. (inherited from Object)
GetHashCode
Serves as a hash function for a particular type. GetHashCode is
suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a
hash table. (inherited from Object)
GetType
Gets the Type of the current instance. (inherited from Object)
ToString
Returns a String that represents the current Object. (inherited
from Object)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
293
iPD Plug-in API
Groups Class
List of groups.
Syntax
Visual Basic (Declaration)
<SerializableAttribute>
Public Class Groups
Inherits List(Of Group)
C#
[SerializableAttribute]
public class Groups : List<Group>
C++
[SerializableAttribute]
ref class Groups : List<Group>
J#
/** @attribute SerializableAttribute() */
public class Groups extends List<Group>
JScript
public
SerializableAttribute
class Groups extends List<Group>
Inheritance Hierarchy
System.Object
System.Collections.Generic.List<T>
UCCM_NG.Plugin.Groups
Groups Members
List of groups. The following tables list the members exposed by Groups.
Public Properties
Name
Description
Capacity
Gets or sets the total number of elements the internal data
structure can hold without resizing. (inherited from List)
Count
Gets the number of elements actually contained in the List.
(inherited from List)
Item
Gets or sets the element at the specified index. (inherited from
List)
Public Methods
294
Name
Description
Add
Adds an object to the end of the List. (inherited from List)
AddRange
Adds the elements of the specified collection to the end of the
List. (inherited from List)
AsReadOnly
Returns a read-only IList wrapper for the current collection.
(inherited from List)
BinarySearch
Overloaded. Uses a binary search algorithm to locate a specific
element in the sorted List or a portion of it. (inherited from List)
Clear
Removes all elements from the List. (inherited from List)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Name
Description
Contains
Determines whether an element is in the List. (inherited from
List)
ConvertAll
Converts the elements in the current List to another type, and
returns a list containing the converted elements. (inherited from
List)
CopyTo
Overloaded. Copies the List or a portion of it to an array.
(inherited from List)
Equals
Determines whether the specified Object is equal to the current
Object. (inherited from Object)
Exists
Determines whether the List contains elements that match the
conditions defined by the specified predicate. (inherited from
List)
Find
Searches for an element that matches the conditions defined by
the specified predicate, and returns the first occurrence within
the entire List. (inherited from List)
FindAll
Retrieves the all the elements that match the conditions defined
by the specified predicate. (inherited from List)
FindIndex
Overloaded. Searches for an element that matches the conditions
defined by a specified predicate, and returns the zero-based
index of the first occurrence within the List or a portion of it.
(inherited from List)
FindLast
Searches for an element that matches the conditions defined by
the specified predicate, and returns the last occurrence within the
entire List. (inherited from List)
FindLastIndex
Overloaded. Searches for an element that matches the conditions
defined by a specified predicate, and returns the zero-based
index of the last occurrence within the List or a portion of it.
(inherited from List)
ForEach
Performs the specified action on each element of the List.
(inherited from List)
GetEnumerator
Returns an enumerator that iterates through the List. (inherited
from List)
GetHashCode
Serves as a hash function for a particular type. GetHashCode is
suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a
hash table. (inherited from Object)
GetRange
Creates a shallow copy of a range of elements in the source List.
(inherited from List)
GetType
Gets the Type of the current instance. (inherited from Object)
IndexOf
Overloaded. Returns the zero-based index of the first occurrence
of a value in the List or in a portion of it. (inherited from List)
Insert
Inserts an element into the List at the specified index. (inherited
from List)
InsertRange
Inserts the elements of a collection into the List at the specified
index. (inherited from List)
LastIndexOf
Overloaded. Returns the zero-based index of the last occurrence
of a value in the List or in a portion of it. (inherited from List)
Remove
Removes the first occurrence of a specific object from the List.
(inherited from List)
RemoveAll
Removes the all the elements that match the conditions defined
by the specified predicate. (inherited from List)
RemoveAt
Removes the element at the specified index of the List. (inherited
from List)
RemoveRange
Removes a range of elements from the List. (inherited from List)
Reverse
Overloaded. Reverses the order of the elements in the List or a
portion of it. (inherited from List)
Sort
Overloaded. Sorts the elements in the List or a portion of it.
(inherited from List)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
295
iPD Plug-in API
296
Name
Description
ToArray
Copies the elements of the List to a new array. (inherited from
List)
ToString
Returns a String that represents the current Object. (inherited
from Object)
TrimExcess
Sets the capacity to the actual number of elements in the List, if
that number is less than a threshold value. (inherited from List)
TrueForAll
Determines whether every element in the List matches the
conditions defined by the specified predicate. (inherited from
List)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Location Class
Describes a location.
Syntax
Visual Basic (Declaration)
<SerializableAttribute>
Public Class Location
C#
[SerializableAttribute]
public class Location
C++
[SerializableAttribute]
ref class Location
J#
/** @attribute SerializableAttribute() */
public class Location
JScript
public
SerializableAttribute
class Location
Inheritance Hierarchy
System.Object
UCCM_NG.Plugin.Location
Location Members
Describes a location. The following tables list the members exposed by Location.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
297
iPD Plug-in API
Public Fields
Name
Description
Id
Name
Syntax > Location.Id
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Id As Integer
C#
public int Id;
C++
public:
int Id sealed ;
J#
public int Id
JScript
public Id : int;
Syntax > Location.Name
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Name As String
C#
public string Name;
C++
public:
String Name sealed ;
J#
public string Name
JScript
public Name : String;
Public Methods
Name
Description
Equals
Determines whether the specified Object is equal to the current
Object. (inherited from Object)
GetHashCode
Serves as a hash function for a particular type. GetHashCode is
suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a
hash table. (inherited from Object)
GetType
Gets the Type of the current instance. (inherited from Object)
ToString
Overridden.
Syntax > Location.ToString
298
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overrides Function ToString() As String
C#
public override string ToString()
C++
public:
virtual String ToString() override
J#
public override string ToString()
JScript
public override function ToString() : String
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
NotificationKind Enumeration
Kind to treat a notification as.
Syntax
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Enum NotificationKind
C#
public enum NotificationKind
C++
public enum class NotificationKind
J#
public enum NotificationKind
JScript
public enum NotificationKind
Members
Name
Description
Info
Informational message
Warning
Warning
Error
Error message
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
299
iPD Plug-in API
OpResult Class
Deprecated.
Syntax
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Class OpResult
C#
public class OpResult
C++
ref class OpResult
J#
public class OpResult
JScript
public class OpResult
Inheritance Hierarchy
System.Object
UCCM_NG.Plugin.OpResult
OpResult Members
Deprecated. The following tables list the members exposed by OpResult.
300
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Public Constructors
Name
Description
OpResult
Overloaded. Initializes a new instance of the OpResult class.
OpResult (Boolean)
OpResult (Boolean, String)
OpResult (String)
Syntax > OpResult Constructor ()
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub New()
C#
public OpResult()
C++
public:
OpResult() sealed
J#
public OpResult()
JScript
public function OpResult()
Syntax > OpResult Constructor (Boolean)
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub New( _
ByVal ok As Boolean _
)
C#
public OpResult(
bool ok
)
C++
public:
OpResult(
bool ok
) sealed
J#
public OpResult(
bool ok
)
JScript
public function OpResult(
ok : bool
)
Syntax > OpResult Constructor (Boolean, String)
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub New( _
ByVal ok As Boolean, _
ByVal description As String _
)
C#
public OpResult(
bool ok,
string description
)
C++
public:
OpResult(
bool ok,
String description
) sealed
J#
public OpResult(
bool ok,
string description
)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
301
iPD Plug-in API
JScript
302
public function OpResult(
ok : bool,
description : String
)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > OpResult Constructor (String)
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub New( _
ByVal description As String _
)
C#
public OpResult(
string description
)
C++
public:
OpResult(
String description
) sealed
J#
public OpResult(
string description
)
JScript
public function OpResult(
description : String
)
Public Properties
Name
Description
Description
Value
Syntax > OpResult.Description
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public ReadOnly Property Description As String
C#
public string Description { get; }
C++
public property string Description sealed {
String get();
}
J#
public string get_Description();
JScript
public function get Description() : String
Syntax > OpResult.Value
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public ReadOnly Property Value As Boolean
C#
public bool Value { get; }
C++
public property bool Value sealed {
bool get();
}
J#
/** property */
public bool get_Value();
JScript
public function get Value() : bool
Public Methods
Name
Description
Equals
Determines whether the specified Object is equal to the current
Object. (inherited from Object)
GetHashCode
Serves as a hash function for a particular type. GetHashCode is
suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a
hash table. (inherited from Object)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
303
iPD Plug-in API
Name
Description
GetType
Gets the Type of the current instance. (inherited from Object)
op_Implicit
ToString
Overridden.
Syntax > OpResult.op_Implicit
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Shared Shadows Widening Operator CType( _
ByVal val As OpResult _
) As Boolean
C#
public new static bool op_Implicit(
OpResult val
)
C++
public:
static bool op_Implicit(
OpResult val
)
J#
JSharp does not support overloaded operators.
JScript
JScript supports the use of overloaded operators, but not the
declaration of new ones.
Syntax > OpResult.ToString
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overrides Function ToString() As String
C#
public override string ToString()
C++
public:
virtual String ToString() override
J#
public override string ToString()
JScript
public override function ToString() : String
Explicit Interface Implementations
304
Name
Description
OpResult
Overloaded.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
PropBool Class
Deprecated.
Syntax
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Class PropBool
Inherits PropObject
C#
public class PropBool : PropObject
C++
ref class PropBool : PropObject
J#
public class PropBool extends PropObject
JScript
public class PropBool extends PropObject
Inheritance Hierarchy
System.Object
UCCM_NG.Plugin.PropObject
UCCM_NG.Plugin.PropBool
PropBool Members
The following tables list the members exposed by PropBool.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
305
iPD Plug-in API
Public Constructors
Name
Description
PropBool
Overloaded. Initializes a new instance of the PropBool class.
Syntax > PropBool Constructor ()
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub New()
C#
public PropBool()
C++
public:
PropBool() sealed
J#
public PropBool()
JScript
public function PropBool()
Syntax > PropBool Constructor (Boolean)
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub New( _
ByVal initialValue As Boolean _
)
C#
public PropBool(
bool initialValue
)
C++
public:
PropBool(
bool initialValue
) sealed
J#
public PropBool(
bool initialValue
)
JScript
public function PropBool(
initialValue : bool
)
Public Properties
Name
Description
IsChanged
(inherited from PropObject)
Value
Syntax > PropObject.IsChanged
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable ReadOnly Property IsChanged As Boolean
C#
public virtual bool IsChanged { get; }
C++
public virtual property bool IsChanged {
bool get();
}
J#
/** property */
public bool get_IsChanged();
JScript
public function get IsChanged() : bool
Syntax > PropBool.Value
Visual Basic (Declaration)
306
Public Property Value As Boolean
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
C#
public bool Value { get; set; }
C++
public property bool Value sealed {
bool get();
void set(bool value);
}
J#
/** property */
public bool get_Value();
/** property */
public void set_Value(bool value);
JScript
public function get Value() : bool
public function set Value(value : bool);
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
307
iPD Plug-in API
Public Methods
Name
Description
Equals
Determines whether the specified Object is equal to the current
Object. (inherited from Object)
GetHashCode
Serves as a hash function for a particular type. GetHashCode is
suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a
hash table. (inherited from Object)
GetType
Gets the Type of the current instance. (inherited from Object)
op_Implicit
ResetChanged
(inherited from PropObject)
SetValueIndirect
SetValueUnchanged
ToString
Overridden.
Syntax > PropBool.op_Implicit
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Shared Widening Operator CType( _
ByVal val As PropBool _
) As Boolean
C#
public static bool op_Implicit(
PropBool val
)
C++
public:
static bool op_Implicit(
PropBool val
)
J#
JSharp does not support overloaded operators.
JScript
JScript supports the use of overloaded operators, but not the
declaration of new ones.
Syntax > PropObject.ResetChanged
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Sub ResetChanged()
C#
public virtual void ResetChanged()
C++
public:
virtual void ResetChanged()
J#
public virtual void ResetChanged()
JScript
public virtual function ResetChanged()
Syntax > PropBool.SetValueIndirect
308
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub SetValueIndirect( _
ByVal newValue As Boolean _
)
C#
public void SetValueIndirect(
bool newValue
)
C++
public:
void SetValueIndirect(
bool newValue
) sealed
J#
public void SetValueIndirect(
bool newValue
)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
JScript
public function SetValueIndirect(
newValue : bool
)
Syntax > PropBool.SetValueUnchanged
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub SetValueUnchanged( _
ByVal newValue As Boolean _
)
C#
public void SetValueUnchanged(
bool newValue
)
C++
public:
void SetValueUnchanged(
bool newValue
) sealed
J#
public void SetValueIndirect(
bool newValue
)
JScript
public function SetValueIndirect(
newValue : bool
)
Syntax > PropBool.ToString
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overrides Function ToString() As String
C#
public override string ToString()
C++
public:
virtual String ToString() override
J#
public override string ToString()
JScript
public override function ToString() : String
Explicit Interface Implementations
Name
Description
PropBool
Overloaded. Initializes a new instance of the PropBool class.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
309
iPD Plug-in API
PropObject Class
Syntax
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public MustInherit Class PropObject
C#
public abstract class PropObject
C++
ref class PropObject abstract
J#
public class PropObject
JScript
public class PropObject
Inheritance Hierarchy
System.Object
UCCM_NG.Plugin.PropObject
UCCM_NG.Plugin.PropBool
UCCM_NG.Plugin.PropString
PropObject Members
The following tables list the members exposed by PropObject.
310
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Public Properties
Name
Description
IsChanged
Syntax > PropObject.IsChanged
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable ReadOnly Property IsChanged As Boolean
C#
public virtual bool IsChanged { get; }
C++
public virtual property bool IsChanged {
bool get();
}
J#
/** property */
public bool get_IsChanged();
JScript
public function get IsChanged() : bool
Public Methods
Name
Description
Equals
Determines whether the specified Object is equal to the current
Object. (inherited from Object)
GetHashCode
Serves as a hash function for a particular type. GetHashCode is
suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a
hash table. (inherited from Object)
GetType
Gets the Type of the current instance. (inherited from Object)
ResetChanged
ToString
Returns a String that represents the current Object. (inherited
from Object)
Syntax > PropObject.ResetChanged
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Sub ResetChanged()
C#
public virtual void ResetChanged()
C++
public:
virtual void ResetChanged()
J#
public virtual void ResetChanged()
JScript
public virtual function ResetChanged()
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
311
iPD Plug-in API
PropString Class
Syntax
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Class PropString
Inherits PropObject
C#
public class PropString : PropObject
C++
ref class PropString : PropObject
J#
public class PropString extends PropObject
JScript
public class PropString extends PropObject
Inheritance Hierarchy
System.Object
UCCM_NG.Plugin.PropObject
UCCM_NG.Plugin.PropString
PropString Members
The following tables list the members exposed by PropString.
312
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Public Constructors
Name
Description
PropString
Overloaded. Initializes a new instance of the PropString class.
Syntax > PropString Constructor ()
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub New()
C#
public PropString()
C++
public:
PropString() sealed
J#
public PropString()
JScript
public function PropString()
Syntax > PropString Constructor (String)
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub New( _
ByVal initialValue As String _
)
C#
public PropString(
string initialValue
)
C++
public:
PropString(
String initialValue
) sealed
J#
public PropString(
string initialValue
)
JScript
public function PropString(
initialValue : String
)
Public Properties
Name
Description
IsChanged
(inherited from PropObject)
Value
Syntax > PropObject.IsChanged
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable ReadOnly Property IsChanged As Boolean
C#
public virtual bool IsChanged { get; }
C++
public virtual property bool IsChanged {
bool get();
}
J#
/** property */
public bool get_IsChanged();
JScript
public function get IsChanged() : bool
Syntax > PropString.Value
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Public Property Value As String
313
iPD Plug-in API
C#
public string Value { get; set; }
C++
public property string Value sealed {
String get();
void set(String value);
}
J#
/** property */
public string get_Value();
/** property */
public void set_Value(string value);
JScript
public function get Value() : String
public function set Value(value : String);
314
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Public Methods
Name
Description
Equals
Determines whether the specified Object is equal to the current
Object. (inherited from Object)
GetHashCode
Serves as a hash function for a particular type. GetHashCode is
suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a
hash table. (inherited from Object)
GetType
Gets the Type of the current instance. (inherited from Object)
op_Implicit
ResetChanged
(inherited from PropObject)
SetValueIndirect
SetValueUnchanged
ToString
Overridden.
Syntax > PropString.op_Implicit
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Shared Widening Operator CType( _
ByVal val As PropString _
) As String
C#
public static string op_Implicit(
PropString val
)
C++
public:
static String op_Implicit(
PropString val
)
J#
JSharp does not support overloaded operators.
JScript
JScript supports the use of overloaded operators, but not the
declaration of new ones.
Syntax > PropObject.ResetChanged
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Sub ResetChanged()
C#
public virtual void ResetChanged()
C++
public:
virtual void ResetChanged()
J#
public virtual void ResetChanged()
JScript
public virtual function ResetChanged()
Syntax > PropString.SetValueIndirect
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub SetValueIndirect( _
ByVal newValue As String _
)
C#
public void SetValueIndirect(
string newValue
)
C++
public:
void SetValueIndirect(
String newValue
) sealed
J#
public void SetValueIndirect(
string newValue
)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
315
iPD Plug-in API
JScript
public function SetValueIndirect(
newValue : String
)
Syntax > PropString.SetValueUnchanged
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub SetValueUnchanged( _
ByVal newValue As String _
)
C#
public void SetValueUnchanged(
string newValue
)
C++
public:
void SetValueUnchanged(
String newValue
) sealed
J#
public void SetValueUnchanged(
string newValue
)
JScript
public function SetValueUnchanged(
newValue : String
)
Syntax > PropString.ToString
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overrides Function ToString() As String
C#
public override string ToString()
C++
public:
virtual String ToString() override
J#
public override string ToString()
JScript
public override function ToString() : String
Explicit Interface Implementations
316
Name
Description
PropString
Overloaded. Initializes a new instance of the PropString class.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
UCCMIf Class
Syntax
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Class UCCMIf
C#
public class UCCMIf
C++
ref class UCCMIf
J#
public class UCCMIf
JScript
public class UCCMIf
Remarks
Callback object allowing plug-in to interact with iLink Pro.
Inheritance Hierarchy
System.Object
UCCM_NG.Plugin.UCCMIf
UCCMIf Members
Callback object. The following tables list the members exposed by UCCMIf.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
317
iPD Plug-in API
Public Properties
Name
Description
Extension
Current extension.
IsAvailable
Availability flag.
IsConnected
Online flag.
IsPhoning
Phone state.
Location
Human readable location name.
Syntax > UCCMIf.Extension
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public ReadOnly Property Extension As String
C#
public string Extension { get; }
C++
public property string Extension sealed {
String get();
}
J#
/** property */
public string get_Extension();
JScript
public function get Extension() : String
Syntax > UCCMIf.IsAvailable
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public ReadOnly Property IsAvailable As Boolean
C#
public bool IsAvailable { get; }
C++
public property bool IsAvailable sealed {
bool get();
}
J#
/** property */
public bool get_IsAvailable();
JScript
public function get IsAvailable() : bool
Availability flag.

Remarks: True if mailbox is available.
Syntax > UCCMIf.IsConnected
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public ReadOnly Property IsConnected As Boolean
C#
public bool IsConnected { get; }
C++
public property bool IsConnected sealed {
bool get();
}
J#
/** property */
public bool get_IsConnected();
JScript
public function get IsConnected() : bool
Online flag.

318
Remarks: True if iLink Pro is online.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > UCCMIf.IsPhoning
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public ReadOnly Property IsPhoning As Boolean
C#
public bool IsPhoning { get; }
C++
public property bool IsPhoning sealed {
bool get();
}
J#
/** property */
public bool get_IsPhoning();
JScript
public function get IsPhoning() : bool
Phone state.

Remarks: True if user is on the phone.
Syntax > UCCMIf.Location
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public ReadOnly Property Location As String
C#
public string Extension { get; }
C++
public property string Location sealed {
String get();
}
J#
/** property */
public string get_Location();
JScript
public function get Location() : String
Human readable location name.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
319
iPD Plug-in API
Public Methods
Name
Description
Equals
Determines whether the specified Object is equal to the current
Object. (inherited from Object)
GetCall
Get call object.
GetCalls
List of currently monitored calls.
GetGroups
List of user defined groups.
GetHashCode
Serves as a hash function for a particular type. GetHashCode is
suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a
hash table. (inherited from Object)
GetLocations
List of locations.
GetType
Gets the Type of the current instance. (inherited from Object)
GetUsers
GetUsersInGroup
List of users in the group.
Log
iLink Pro logging facility.
Notification
Show notification.
OfferDial
Offer phone number to dial.
ReportAvailabilityFluctuation
ReportNewState
Report new plug-in state to iLink Pro.
ReportShutdown
RequestDial
Dial the number.
SetLocationFollow
Activate location calendar.
SetLocationId
Set new location.
ToString
Returns a String that represents the current Object. (inherited
from Object)
Syntax > UCCMIf.GetCall
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Function GetCall( _
ByVal Id As String _
) As Call
C#
public Call GetCall(
string Id
)
C++
public:
Call GetCall(
String Id
) sealed
J#
public Call GetCall(
string Id
)
JScript
public function GetCall(
Id : String
) : Call
Syntax > UCCMIf.GetCalls
320
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Function GetCalls() As Calls
C#
public Calls GetCalls()
C++
public:
Calls GetCalls() sealed
J#
public Calls GetCalls()
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
JScript
public function GetCalls() : Calls
List of currently monitored calls.
Syntax > UCCMIf.GetGroups
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Function GetGroups() As Groups
C#
public Groups GetGroups()
C++
public:
Groups GetGroups() sealed
J#
public Groups GetGroups()
JScript
public function GetGroups() : Groups
List of user defined groups.
Syntax > UCCMIf.GetLocations
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Function GetLocations() As List(Of Location)
C#
public List<Location> GetLocations()
C++
public:
List<Location> GetLocations() sealed
J#
public List<Location> GetLocations()
JScript
public function GetLocations() : List<Location>
List of locations.
Syntax > UCCMIf.GetUsers
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Function GetUsers() As Users
C#
public Users GetUsers()
C++
public:
Users GetUsers() sealed
J#
public Users GetUsers()
JScript
public function GetUsers() : Users
Syntax > UCCMIf.GetUsersInGroup
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Function GetUsersInGroup( _
ByVal GroupId As String _
) As Users
C#
public Users GetUsersInGroup(
string GroupId
)
C++
public:
Users GetUsersInGroup(
String GroupId
) sealed
J#
public Users GetUsersInGroup(
string GroupId
)
JScript
public function GetUsersInGroup(
GroupId : String
) : Users
List of users in the group.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
321
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > UCCMIf.Log
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub Log( _
ByVal isError As Boolean, _
ByVal message As String _
)
C#
public void Log(
bool isError,
string message
)
C++
public:
void Log(
bool isError,
String message
) sealed
J#
public void Log(
bool isError,
string message
)
JScript
public function Log(
isError : bool,
message : String
)
iLink Pro logging facility.
Syntax > UCCMIf.Notification
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub Notification( _
ByVal key As Integer, _
ByVal notificationKind As NotificationKind, _
ByVal text As String, _
ByVal ignoreQuietMode As Boolean _
)
C#
public void Notification(
int key,
NotificationKind notificationKind,
string text,
bool ignoreQuietMode
)
C++
public:
void Notification(
int key,
NotificationKind notificationKind,
String text,
bool ignoreQuietMode
) sealed
J#
public void Notification(
int key,
NotificationKind notificationKind,
string text,
bool ignoreQuietMode
)
JScript
public function Notification(
key : int,
notificationKind : NotificationKind,
text : String,
ignoreQuietMode : bool
)
Show notification.

322
Remarks: Show notification via iLink Pro notification engine. Any notification replaces that previously shown with the
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
same key.
Syntax > UCCMIf.OfferDial
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Function OfferDial( _
ByVal PhoneNo As String, _
ByVal Validate As Boolean, _
ByVal IgnoreQuietMode As Boolean _
) As Boolean
C#
public bool OfferDial(
string PhoneNo,
bool Validate,
bool IgnoreQuietMode
)
C++
public:
bool OfferDial(
String PhoneNo,
bool Validate,
bool IgnoreQuietMode
) sealed
J#
public bool OfferDial(
string PhoneNo,
bool Validate,
bool IgnoreQuietMode
)
JScript
public function OfferDial(
PhoneNo : String,
Validate : bool,
IgnoreQuietMode : bool
) : bool
Offer phone number to dial.

Remarks: Offer just-discovered phone number to user. Validate and re-format phone number if Validate is True. Offer
even in busy-mode if IgnoreQuietMode is True.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
323
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > UCCMIf.ReportAvailabilityFluctuation
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub ReportAvailabilityFluctuation( _
ByVal pluginNewAvailabilityState As Boolean _
)
C#
public void ReportAvailabilityFluctuation(
bool pluginNewAvailabilityState
)
C++
public:
void ReportAvailabilityFluctuation(
bool pluginNewAvailabilityState
) sealed
J#
public void ReportAvailabilityFluctuation(
bool pluginNewAvailabilityState
)
JScript
public function ReportAvailabilityFluctuation(
pluginNewAvailabilityState : bool
)
Syntax > UCCMIf.ReportNewState
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub ReportNewState()
C#
public void ReportNewState()
C++
public:
void ReportNewState() sealed
J#
public void ReportNewState()
JScript
public function ReportNewState()
Report new plug-in state to iLink Pro.
324
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > UCCMIf.ReportShutdown
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub ReportShutdown( _
ByVal Message As String _
)
C#
public void ReportShutdown(
string Message
)
C++
public:
void ReportShutdown(
String Message
) sealed
J#
public void ReportShutdown(
string Message
)
JScript
public function ReportShutdown(
Message : String
)
Syntax > UCCMIf.RequestDial
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Function RequestDial( _
ByVal PhoneNo As String _
) As Boolean
C#
public bool RequestDial(
string PhoneNo
)
C++
public:
bool RequestDial(
String PhoneNo
) sealed
J#
public bool RequestDial(
string PhoneNo
)
JScript
public function RequestDial(
PhoneNo : String
) : bool
Dial the number.
Syntax > UCCMIf.SetLocationFollow
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub SetLocationFollow()
C#
public void SetLocationFollow()
C++
public:
void SetLocationFollow() sealed
J#
public void SetLocationFollow()
JScript
public function SetLocationFollow()
Activate location calendar.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
325
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > UCCMIf.SetLocationId
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub SetLocationId( _
ByVal id As Integer _
)
C#
public void SetLocationId(
int id
)
C++
void SetLocationId(
int id
) sealed
J#
public void SetLocationId(
int id
)
JScript
public function SetLocationId(
id : int
)
Set new location.
326
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
UCCMPlugin Class
Plug-in prototype. This class is abstract (MustInherit in Visual Basic)abstractMustInherit and so cannot be instantiated.
Syntax
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public MustInherit Class UCCMPlugin
C#
public abstract class UCCMPlugin
C++
ref class UCCMPlugin abstract
J#
public class UCCMPlugin
JScript
public class UCCMPlugin
Example
class UCCMPluginDummy : UCCMPlugin
{
private _started = false;
public override string Description
{
get { return "Dummy plugin"; }
}
public override bool Started
{
get { return _started; }
}
public override bool Start(KeyValueConfiguration cfgdata)
{
_started = true;
return false; // No configuration updates
}
public override bool Shutdown(KeyValueConfiguration cfgdata)
{
_started = false;
return false; // No configuration updates
}
private static bool CheckOs()
{
// Check for Windows Vista (just for example)
return (Environment.OSVersion.Platform == System.PlatformID.Win32NT)
&& (Environment.OSVersion.Version.Major == 6)
&& (Environment.OSVersion.Version.Minor == 0);
}
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
327
iPD Plug-in API
public static object UCCMCreatePlugin()
{
try
{
if (!CheckOs())
{
// Return diagnostic message
return "This operating system is not supported";
}
return new UCCMPluginDummy();
}
catch (Exception ex)
{
// Error reporting
return ex.ToString();
}
}
}
Remarks
If you want to create iLink Pro plug-in, you should create a class derived from UCCMPlugin. Also you need a static method
named UCCMCreatePlugin as a class factory.
Inheritance Hierarchy
System.Object
UCCM_NG.Plugin.UCCMPlugin
UCCMPlugin Members
Plug-in prototype. This class is abstract (MustInherit in Visual Basic)abstractMustInherit and so cannot be instantiated. The
following tables list the members exposed by UCCMPlugin.
Public Constructors
Name
Description
UCCMPlugin
Initializes a new instance of the UCCMPlugin class.
Syntax > UCCMPlugin
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Sub New()
C#
public UCCMPlugin()
C++
public:
UCCMPlugin() sealed
J#
public UCCMPlugin()
JScript
public function UCCMPlugin()
Initializes a new instance of the UCCMPlugin class.
328
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Public Fields
Name
Description
IsAvailable
Reflects plug-in availability status (if applicable)
IsOnline
Reflects plug-in online status (if applicable)
IsPhoning
Reflects plug-in phone status (if applicable)
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.IsAvailable
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public IsAvailable As PropBool
C#
public PropBool IsAvailable;
C++
public:
PropBool IsAvailable sealed ;
J#
public PropBool IsAvailable
JScript
public IsAvailable : PropBool;
Reflects plug-in availability status (if applicable)

Remarks: Change the value if needed and call ReportNewState method. iLink Pro reacts to this change with adjusting
own availability. That allows synchronizing of with an instant messenger and so on.
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.IsOnline
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public IsOnline As PropBool
C#
public PropBool IsOnline;
C++
public:
PropBool IsOnline sealed ;
J#
public PropBool IsOnline
JScript
public IsOnline : PropBool;
Reflects plug-in online status (if applicable)

Remarks: Change the value if needed and call ReportNewState method.
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.IsPhoning
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public IsPhoning As PropBool
C#
public PropBool IsPhoning;
C++
public:
PropBool IsPhoning sealed ;
J#
public PropBool IsPhoning
JScript
public IsPhoning : PropBool;
Reflects plug-in phone status (if applicable)

Remarks: Change the value if needed and call ReportNewState method. reacts to this change with reporting phone
status to UC server. That allows synchronizing of with an instant messenger and so on.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
329
iPD Plug-in API
Public Properties
Name
Description
Description
Human readable description to show in plug-in list
HasConfig
Configuration UI flag
Image
IsEnabledByDefault
Started
Plug-in should return True if successfully started and not stopped
Status
Human readable status (e.g. "Running", "Failure" and so on)
UCCM
Callback object
UID
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.Description
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable ReadOnly Property Description As String
C#
public virtual string Description { get; }
C++
public virtual property string Description {
String get();
}
J#
/** property */
public string get_Description();
JScript
public function get Description() : String
Human readable description to show in plug-in list
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.HasConfig
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable ReadOnly Property HasConfig As Boolean
C#
public virtual bool HasConfig { get; }
C++
public virtual property bool HasConfig {
bool get();
}
J#
/** property */
public bool get_HasConfig();
JScript
public function get HasConfig() : bool
Configuration UI flag

330
Remark: Plug-in having configuration UI should return True
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.Image
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable ReadOnly Property Image As Image
C#
public virtual Image Image { get; }
C++
public virtual property Image Image {
Image get();
}
J#
/** property */
public Image get_Image();
JScript
public function get Image() : Image
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.IsEnabledByDefault
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable ReadOnly Property IsEnabledByDefault As
Boolean
C#
public virtual bool IsEnabledByDefault { get; }
C++
public virtual property bool IsEnabledByDefault {
bool get();
}
J#
/** property */
public bool get_IsEnabledByDefault();
JScript
public function get IsEnabledByDefault() : bool
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.Started
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public MustOverride ReadOnly Property Started As Boolean
C#
public abstract bool Started { get; }
C++
public abstract property bool Started abstract {
bool get();
}
J#
/** property */
public bool get_Started();
JScript
public function get Started() : bool
Plug-in should return True if successfully started and not stopped
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.Status
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable ReadOnly Property Status As String
C#
public virtual string Status { get; }
C++
public virtual property string Status {
String get();
}
J#
/** property */
public string get_Status();
JScript
public function get Status() : String
Human readable status (e.g. "Running", "Failure" and so on)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
331
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.UCCM
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public ReadOnly Property UCCM As UCCMIf
C#
public UCCMIf UCCM { get; }
C++
public property UCCMIf UCCM sealed {
UCCMIf get();
}
J#
/** property */
public UCCMIf get_UCCM();
JScript
public function get UCCM() : UCCMIf
Callback object

332
Remark: UCCM property allows plug-in to access various methods and properties of iLink Pro Desktop.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.UID
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable ReadOnly Property UID As String
C#
public virtual string UID { get; }
C++
public virtual property string UID {
String get();
}
J#
/** property */
public string get_UID();
JScript
public function get UID() : String
Public Methods
Name
Description
Equals
Determines whether the specified Object is equal to the current
Object. (inherited from Object)
GetAlternativeConfigurationTyp GetHashCode Serves as a hash function for a particular type.
es
GetHashCode is suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data
structures like a hash table. (inherited from Object)
GetType
Gets the Type of the current instance. (inherited from Object)
Init
Post-load initialization
OnUCCMAvailabilityChanged
Availability changed
OnUCCMCallCreated
New call created
OnUCCMCallCreated2
OnUCCMCallOtherPartySwitche
d
Handles other party change
OnUCCMCallOtherPartySwitche
d2
OnUCCMCallRemoved
Call disposed
OnUCCMCAPChanged
Connectivity, availability or phone status changed (aggregated)
OnUCCMConnectivityChanged
Online status changed
OnUCCMExtensionChanged
The method handles client’s current extension change
OnUCCMLocationChanged
The method handles client’s location change
OnUCCMOnThePhone
Phone status changed
OnUCCMReqContacts
External search
OnUCCMUserChange
ShowConfig
Configuration UI
Shutdown
Plug-in shutdown
Start
Plug-in startup
SystemSleep
Prepares plug-in to sleep
SystemWakeup
Occurs on system wake-up after sleep
ToString
Returns a String that represents the current Object. (inherited
from Object)
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.GetAlternativeConfigurationTypes
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Function GetAlternativeConfigurationTypes()
As String()
C#
public virtual string[] GetAlternativeConfigurationTypes()
C++
public:
virtual array<String>^ GetAlternativeConfigurationTypes()
J#
public virtual string[] GetAlternativeConfigurationTypes()
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
333
iPD Plug-in API
JScript
public virtual function GetAlternativeConfigurationTypes() :
String[]
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.Init
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Function Init( _
ByVal cfg As KeyValueConfiguration _
) As Boolean
C#
public virtual bool Init(
KeyValueConfiguration cfg
)
C++
public:
virtual bool Init(
KeyValueConfiguration cfg
)
J#
public virtual bool Init(
KeyValueConfiguration cfg
)
JScript
public virtual function Init(
cfg : KeyValueConfiguration
) : bool
Post-load initialization

Parameters:
cfg
Key-value mapped configuration

Remarks: Post-load initialization if required. Returns True if the configuration passed has been updated and should be
saved.
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.OnUCCMAvailabilityChanged
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Sub OnUCCMAvailabilityChanged( _
ByVal Available As Boolean _
)
C#
public virtual void OnUCCMAvailabilityChanged(
bool Available
)
C++
public:
virtual void OnUCCMAvailabilityChanged(
bool Available
)
J#
public virtual void OnUCCMAvailabilityChanged(
bool Available
)
JScript
public virtual function OnUCCMAvailabilityChanged(
Available : bool
)
Availability changed
334

Parameters:
Available
New availability

Remarks: Availability changed. Default implementation just calls OnUCCMCAPChanged.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.OnUCCMCallCreated

Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Sub OnUCCMCallCreated( _
ByVal call As Call _
)
C#
public virtual void OnUCCMCallCreated(
Call call
)
C++
public:
virtual void OnUCCMCallCreated(
Call call
)
J#
public virtual void OnUCCMCallCreated(
Call call
)
JScript
public virtual function OnUCCMCallCreated(
call : Call
)
Parameters:
call
Call object
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
335
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.OnUCCMCallCreated2
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Sub OnUCCMCallCreated2( _
ByVal umcall As CallObject _
)
C#
public virtual void OnUCCMCallCreated2(
CallObject umcall
)
C++
public:
virtual void OnUCCMCallCreated2(
CallObject umcall
)
J#
public virtual void OnUCCMCallCreated2(
CallObject umcall
)
JScript
public virtual function OnUCCMCallCreated2(
umcall : CallObject
)
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.OnUCCMCallOtherPartySwitched
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Sub OnUCCMCallOtherPartySwitched( _
ByVal call As Call _
)
C#
public virtual void OnUCCMCallOtherPartySwitched(
Call call
)
C++
public:
virtual void OnUCCMCallOtherPartySwitched(
Call call
)
J#
public virtual void OnUCCMCallOtherPartySwitched(
Call call
)
JScript
public virtual function OnUCCMCallOtherPartySwitched(
call : Call
)
Handles other party change
336

Parameters:
call
Affected call

Remarks: This event occurs if other party has been switched (line switched to another person).
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.OnUCCMCallOtherPartySwitched2
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Sub OnUCCMCallOtherPartySwitched2( _
ByVal umcall As CallObject _
)
C#
public virtual void OnUCCMCallOtherPartySwitched2(
CallObject umcall
)
C++
public:
virtual void OnUCCMCallOtherPartySwitched2(
CallObject umcall
)
J#
public virtual void OnUCCMCallOtherPartySwitched2(
CallObject umcall
)
JScript
public virtual function OnUCCMCallOtherPartySwitched2(
umcall : CallObject
)
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.OnUCCMCallRemoved
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Sub OnUCCMCallRemoved( _
ByVal Id As String _
)
C#
public virtual void OnUCCMCallRemoved(
string Id
)
C++
public:
virtual void OnUCCMCallRemoved(
String Id
)
J#
public virtual void OnUCCMCallRemoved(
string Id
)
JScript
public virtual function OnUCCMCallRemoved(
Id : String
)
Call disposed

Parameters:
Id
ID of the call

Remarks: The call is not supervised by anymore (e.g. finished or removed by user).
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
337
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.OnUCCMCAPChanged
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Sub OnUCCMCAPChanged()
C#
public virtual void OnUCCMCAPChanged()
C++
virtual void OnUCCMCAPChanged()
J#
public virtual void OnUCCMCAPChanged()
JScript
public virtual function OnUCCMCAPChanged()
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.OnUCCMConnectivityChanged
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Sub OnUCCMConnectivityChanged( _
ByVal Connected As Boolean _
)
C#
public virtual void OnUCCMConnectivityChanged(
bool Connected
)
C++
public:
virtual void OnUCCMConnectivityChanged(
bool Connected
)
J#
public virtual void OnUCCMConnectivityChanged(
bool Connected
)
JScript
public virtual function OnUCCMConnectivityChanged(
Connected : bool
)
Online status changed

Parameters:
Connected
New connection status

Remarks: connected or disconnected. Default implementation just calls OnUCCMCAPChanged.
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.OnUCCMExtensionChanged
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Sub OnUCCMExtensionChanged( _
ByVal Extension As String _
)
C#
public virtual void OnUCCMExtensionChanged(
string Extension
)
C++
public:
virtual void OnUCCMExtensionChanged(
String Extension
)
J#
public virtual void OnUCCMExtensionChanged(
string Extension
)
JScript
public virtual function OnUCCMExtensionChanged(
Extension : String
)
The method handles client’s current extension change

338
Parameters:
Extension
New extension
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.OnUCCMLocationChanged
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Sub OnUCCMLocationChanged( _
ByVal Location As String _
)
C#
public virtual void OnUCCMLocationChanged(
string Location
)
C++
public:
virtual void OnUCCMLocationChanged(
String Location
)
J#
public virtual void OnUCCMLocationChanged(
string Location
)
JScript
public virtual function OnUCCMLocationChanged(
Location : String
)
The method handles client’s location change

Parameters:
Location
Name of new location
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.OnUCCMOnThePhone
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Sub OnUCCMOnThePhone( _
ByVal OnThePhone As Boolean _
)
C#
public virtual void OnUCCMOnThePhone(
bool OnThePhone
)
C++
public:
virtual void OnUCCMOnThePhone(
bool OnThePhone
)
J#
public virtual void OnUCCMOnThePhone(
bool OnThePhone
)
JScript
public virtual function OnUCCMOnThePhone(
OnThePhone : bool
)
Phone status changed

Parameters:
OnThePhone
New phone status

Remarks: Default implementation just calls OnUCCMCAPChanged.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
339
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.OnUCCMReqContacts
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Function OnUCCMReqContacts( _
ByVal SearchText As String _
) As List(Of ExternalContact)
C#
public virtual List<ExternalContact> OnUCCMReqContacts(
string SearchText
)
C++
public:
virtual List<ExternalContact> OnUCCMReqContacts(
String SearchText
)
J#
public virtual List<ExternalContact> OnUCCMReqContacts(
string SearchText
)
JScript
public virtual function OnUCCMReqContacts(
SearchText : String
) : List<ExternalContact>
External search
340

Parameters:
SearchText
Text to search for
Return Value 
List of contacts

Remarks: Searches for external contacts. Default implementation just returns null.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.OnUCCMUserChange
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Sub OnUCCMUserChange( _
ByVal user As User _
)
C#
public virtual void OnUCCMUserChange(
User user
)
C++
public:
virtual void OnUCCMUserChange(
User user
)
J#
public virtual void OnUCCMUserChange(
User user
)
JScript
public virtual function OnUCCMUserChange(
user : User
)
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.ShowConfig
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Function ShowConfig( _
ByVal owner As IWin32Window, _
ByVal cfg As KeyValueConfiguration _
) As Boolean
C#
public virtual bool ShowConfig(
IWin32Window owner,
KeyValueConfiguration cfg
)
C++
public:
virtual bool ShowConfig(
IWin32Window owner,
KeyValueConfiguration cfg
)
J#
public virtual bool ShowConfig(
IWin32Window owner,
KeyValueConfiguration cfg
)
JScript
public virtual function ShowConfig(
owner : IWin32Window,
cfg : KeyValueConfiguration
) : bool
Configuration UI

Parameters:
owner
Parent window
cfg
Key-value mapped configuration

Return Value: True to save configuration

Remarks: Bound to "Configure" button. Should show UI allowing configuration and diagnostic.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
341
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.Shutdown
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public MustOverride Function Shutdown( _
ByVal cfg As KeyValueConfiguration _
) As Boolean
C#
public abstract bool Shutdown(
KeyValueConfiguration cfg
)
C++
public:
bool Shutdown(
KeyValueConfiguration cfg
) abstract
J#
public abstract bool Shutdown(
KeyValueConfiguration cfg
)
JScript
public abstract function Shutdown(
cfg : KeyValueConfiguration
) : bool
Plug-in shutdown.

Return Value: Returns True to save configuration.

Remarks: Stops plug-in.
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.Start
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public MustOverride Function Start( _
ByVal cfg As KeyValueConfiguration _
) As Boolean
C#
public abstract bool Start(
KeyValueConfiguration cfg
)
C++
public:
bool Start(
KeyValueConfiguration cfg
) abstract
J#
public abstract bool Start(
KeyValueConfiguration cfg
)
JScript
public abstract function Start(
cfg : KeyValueConfiguration
) : bool
Plug-in startup

Return Value: Returns True to save configuration.

Remarks: Initiates plug-in startup. calls this method right after loading a previously enabled plug-in or on enabling
plug-in (user clicks “Start”). does not expect immediate startup; it uses Started property to monitor plug-in availability.
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.SystemSleep
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Sub SystemSleep()
C#
public virtual void SystemSleep()
C++
public:
virtual void SystemSleep()
J#
public virtual void SystemSleep()
JScript
public virtual function SystemSleep()
Prepares plug-in to sleep.
342
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > UCCMPlugin.SystemWakeup
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Overridable Sub SystemWakeup()
C#
public virtual void SystemWakeup()
C++
public:
virtual void SystemWakeup()
J#
public virtual void SystemWakeup()
JScript
public virtual function SystemWakeup()
Occurs on system wake-up after sleep.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
343
iPD Plug-in API
User Class
User class represents a user's mailbox.
Syntax
Visual Basic (Declaration)
<SerializableAttribute>
Public Class User
C#
[SerializableAttribute]
public class User
C++
[SerializableAttribute]
ref class User
J#
/** @attribute SerializableAttribute() */
public class User
JScript
public
SerializableAttribute
Remarks
User class contains various information about a mailbox such display name, ID and state
Inheritance Hierarchy
System.Object
UCCM_NG.Plugin.User
User Members
User class represents a user's mailbox. The following tables list the members exposed by User.
Public Fields
Name
Description
Available
User is available..
DisplayName
User name.
Location
Name of user's current location.
Online
User is logged in.
OnThePhone
User is on the phone.
UserId
User ID.
Syntax > User.Available
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Available As Boolean
C#
public bool Available;
C++
public:
bool Available sealed ;
J#
public bool Available
JScript
public Available : bool;
User is available.
344
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > User.DisplayName
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public DisplayName As String
C#
public string DisplayName;
C++
public:
String DisplayName sealed ;
J#
public string DisplayName
JScript
public DisplayName : String;
User name.
Syntax > User.Location
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Location As String
C#
public string Location;
C++
public:
String Location sealed ;
J#
public string Location
JScript
public Location : String;
Name of user's current location.
Syntax > User.Online
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public Online As Boolean
C#
public bool Online;
C++
public:
bool Online sealed ;
J#
public bool Online
JScript
public Online : bool;
User is logged in.
Syntax > User.OnThePhone
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public OnThePhone As Boolean
C#
public bool OnThePhone;
C++
public:
bool OnThePhone sealed ;
J#
public bool OnThePhone
JScript
public OnThePhone : bool;
User is on the phone.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
345
iPD Plug-in API
Syntax > User.UserId
Visual Basic (Declaration)
Public UserId As String
C#
public string UserId;
C++
public:
String UserId sealed ;
J#
public string UserId
JScript
public UserId : String;
User ID.
Public Methods
346
Name
Description
Equals
Determines whether the specified Object is equal to the current
Object. (inherited from Object)
GetHashCode
Serves as a hash function for a particular type. GetHashCode is
suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a
hash table. (inherited from Object)
GetType
Gets the Type of the current instance. (inherited from Object)
ToString
Returns a String that represents the current Object. (inherited
from Object)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Users Class
List of users.
Syntax
Visual Basic (Declaration)
<SerializableAttribute>
Public Class Users
Inherits List(Of User)
C#
[SerializableAttribute]
public class Users : List<User>
C++
[SerializableAttribute]
ref class Users : List<User>
J#
/** @attribute SerializableAttribute() */
public class Users extends List<User>
JScript
public
SerializableAttribute
class Users extends List<User>
Inheritance Hierarchy
System.Object
System.Collections.Generic.List<T>
UCCM_NG.Plugin.Users
Users Members
List of users. The following tables list the members exposed by Users.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
347
iPD Plug-in API
Public Properties
Name
Description
Capacity
Gets or sets the total number of elements the internal data
structure can hold without resizing. (inherited from List)
Count
Gets the number of elements actually contained in the List.
(inherited from List)
Item
Gets or sets the element at the specified index. (inherited from
List)
Public Methods
348
Name
Description
Add
Adds an object to the end of the List. (inherited from List)
AddRange
Adds the elements of the specified collection to the end of the
List. (inherited from List)
AsReadOnly
Returns a read-only IList wrapper for the current collection.
(inherited from List)
BinarySearch
Overloaded. Uses a binary search algorithm to locate a specific
element in the sorted List or a portion of it. (inherited from List)
Clear
Removes all elements from the List. (inherited from List)
Contains
Determines whether an element is in the List. (inherited from
List)
ConvertAll
Converts the elements in the current List to another type, and
returns a list containing the converted elements. (inherited from
List)
CopyTo
Overloaded. Copies the List or a portion of it to an array.
(inherited from List)
Equals
Determines whether the specified Object is equal to the current
Object. (inherited from Object)
Exists
Determines whether the List contains elements that match the
conditions defined by the specified predicate. (inherited from
List)
Find
Searches for an element that matches the conditions defined by
the specified predicate, and returns the first occurrence within
the entire List. (inherited from List)
FindAll
Retrieves the all the elements that match the conditions defined
by the specified predicate. (inherited from List)
FindIndex
Overloaded. Searches for an element that matches the conditions
defined by a specified predicate, and returns the zero-based
index of the first occurrence within the List or a portion of it.
(inherited from List)
FindLast
Searches for an element that matches the conditions defined by
the specified predicate, and returns the last occurrence within the
entire List. (inherited from List)
FindLastIndex
Overloaded. Searches for an element that matches the conditions
defined by a specified predicate, and returns the zero-based
index of the last occurrence within the List or a portion of it.
(inherited from List)
ForEach
Performs the specified action on each element of the List.
(inherited from List)
GetEnumerator
Returns an enumerator that iterates through the List. (inherited
from List)
GetHashCode
Serves as a hash function for a particular type. GetHashCode is
suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a
hash table. (inherited from Object)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
iPD Plug-in API
Name
Description
GetRange
Creates a shallow copy of a range of elements in the source List.
(inherited from List)
GetType
Gets the Type of the current instance. (inherited from Object)
IndexOf
Overloaded. Returns the zero-based index of the first occurrence
of a value in the List or in a portion of it. (inherited from List)
Insert
Inserts an element into the List at the specified index. (inherited
from List)
InsertRange
Inserts the elements of a collection into the List at the specified
index. (inherited from List)
LastIndexOf
Overloaded. Returns the zero-based index of the last occurrence
of a value in the List or in a portion of it. (inherited from List)
Remove
Removes the first occurrence of a specific object from the List.
(inherited from List)
RemoveAll
Removes the all the elements that match the conditions defined
by the specified predicate. (inherited from List)
RemoveAt
Removes the element at the specified index of the List. (inherited
from List)
RemoveRange
Removes a range of elements from the List. (inherited from List)
Reverse
Overloaded. Reverses the order of the elements in the List or a
portion of it. (inherited from List)
Sort
Overloaded. Sorts the elements in the List or a portion of it.
(inherited from List)
ToArray
Copies the elements of the List to a new array. (inherited from
List)
ToString
Returns a String that represents the current Object. (inherited
from Object)
TrimExcess
Sets the capacity to the actual number of elements in the List, if
that number is less than a threshold value. (inherited from List)
TrueForAll
Determines whether every element in the List matches the
conditions defined by the specified predicate. (inherited from
List)
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
349
iPD Plug-in API
350
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Default Prompts
In This Chapter:
352
Introduction
353
File Names and Text
CHAPTER 20
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
351
Default Prompts
Introduction
Should the System Administrator wish to rerecord the system prompts, this section provides a complete list of those
prompts, including their file names and their contents (or an explanation thereof).
352
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Default Prompts
File Names and Text
File Name
Text
sal0000.vox
Thank you for calling. Your Call is being handled by our Unified Communications
System. Please dial the extension of the person you wish to speak with, or press
star for the company directory, or stay on the line for further assistance.
mess003.vox
I'm sorry….
mess004.vox
…did not answer. Please leave a message.
mess005.vox
…is on the phone. Please leave a message.
mess006.vox
You have reached the voice mailbox of…
mess007.vox
Please hold for assistance.
mess008.vox
Paging your party.
mess009.vox
Thank you for calling. Good-bye.
mess010.vox
Thank you, Please Hold
mess011.vox
Transferring you to...
mess012.vox
Paging...
mess013.vox
One moment, you have a call.
mess014.vox
I'm sorry I did not understand that, please try again.
mess015.vox
…is busy, you have reached the voice mail of…
mess016.vox
…did not answer. You've reached voice mail of…
mess017.vox
I'm sorry. Your party is not in office right now. Please leave a message.
mess018.vox
....is out of the office and will return at .....
mess019.vox
Please enter your area code and telephone number
mess020.vox
Call For
mess021.vox
I am sorry that extension is busy, to try another extension press 1, to be transfer to
the receptionist press 0, or stay on the line to leave a message.
mess022.vox
Please enter the mailbox number of the person for whom you wish to leave a
message.
mess023.vox
I'm sorry….
mess024.vox
…is not in the office right now. Please leave a message.
mess025.vox
…is not available to take your call. Please leave a message.
mess026.vox
At the tone, please leave a message.
mess027.vox
Caller found, Please hang up for to receive the call
mess028.vox
I'm sorry, no-one is currently leaving you a message
mess029.vox
Your party is now available
mess031.vox
I'm sorry that extension is busy. To try another extension press 1, to try the
extension again press 2, to be transferred to the receptionist press 0. or stay on the
line to leave a message
mess032.vox
I'm sorry there is no answer at that extension to try another extension press 1, to be
transferred to the receptionist press 0, or stay on the line to leave a message.
mess033.vox
Enter the extension of the person you wish to redirect this call to.
mess035.vox
May I say who is calling?
mess038.vox
You have a call from...
mess040.vox
To accept press 1, send to another extension press 2, send to your mailbox press
pound
mess041.voxTo accept press 1, send to another extension press 2, accept and
record conversation press 3, send to your mailbox press pound.
mess043.vox
There are...
mess044.vox
There is...
mess045.vox
...calls ahead of you.
mess046.vox
...call ahead of you.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
353
Default Prompts
354
File Name
Text
mess048.vox
That extension is still busy. To try another extension press 1, To remain on hold
press 2, To leave a message press 5, or press star to exit.
mess049.vox
That extension is busy. To try another extension press 1, To remain on hold press 2,
To leave a message press 5, or press star to exit.
mess050.vox
That extension is busy. Your call is being processed next, To try another extension
press 1, To remain on hold press 2, To leave a message press 5, or press star to exit.
mess052.vox
That extension is still busy, your call is being processed next. To try another
extension press 1, To remain on hold press 2, To leave a message press 5, or press
star to exit.
mess054.vox
Press 1 after hearing the name of the person you wish to be transferred to.
mess055.vox
Enter the digits that correspond to the first few letters of the person's first or last
name. For the letter Q or Zed press 1.
mess056.vox
Enter the digits that correspond to the first few letters of the person's first or last
name. For the letter Q or Zee press 1.
mess057.vox
I'm sorry I do not recognize that name. Please re-enter the digits that correspond to
the first few letters of the person's first or last name. For the letter Q or Zed press
1.
mess058.vox
I'm sorry I do not recognize that name. Please re-enter the digits that correspond to
the first few letters of the person's first or last name. For the letter Q or Zee press 1.
mess059.vox
Press…
mess060.vox
for…
mess061.vox
Press 1 for…
mess062.vox
Press 2 for…
mess063.vox
Press 3 for…
mess064.vox
Press 4 for…
mess065.vox
Press 5 for…
mess066.vox
Press 6 for…
mess067.vox
Press 7 for…
mess068.vox
Press 8 for…
mess069.vox
Press 9 for…
mess073.vox
Please enter the telephone number or numeric message to be sent.
mess074.vox
You entered …
mess075.vox
Thank you. Your message will be sent
mess077.vox
I'm sorry, that mailbox is full, please try again later.
mess078.vox
I'm sorry this mailbox cannot receive messages.
mess079.vox
I'm sorry this mailbox cannot receive messages at this time. The user of this mailbox
is in a extended absence.
mess080.vox
Record your message at the tone. When finished, hang-up or press pound for more
options
mess081.vox
"To try another extension...Press 1, To leave a message...Press 5, To be transferred
to the receptionist...Press 0.
"
mess082.vox
To send your message press 1, re-record press 2, review press 3, to continue
recording press 4, to cancel your message press star.
mess083.vox
To send with normal delivery press 1, to send with urgent delivery press 2
mess084.vox
There are 10 seconds of recording time left.
mess086.vox
If you would like to receive a response for this message press 1.
mess087.vox
I'm sorry, there is no answer at that extension. To leave a message for…
mess088.vox
"I'm sorry, that extension is busy. To leave a message for..."
mess090.vox
Thank you. Your message has been sent.
Mess091.vox
Enter the digits that correspond to the first few letters of the person's first or last
name. For the letter Q press 7 for Zed press 9.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Default Prompts
File Name
Text
Mess092.vox
Enter the digits that correspond to the first few letters of the person's first or last
name. For the letter Q press 7 for Zee press 9.
Mess093.vox
I'm sorry I do not recognize that name. Please re-enter the digits that correspond to
the first few letters of the person's first or last name . For the letter Q press 7 for
Zed press 9
Mess094.vox
I'm sorry I do not recognize that name. Please re-enter the digits that correspond to
the first few letters of the person's first or last name. For the letter Q press 7 for Zee
press 9
mess103.vox
To confirm deletion of this message press 9, or press pound to return to the previous
menu.
mess107.vox
Mass Recall Deleted
mess108.vox
I'm sorry, you do not currently have access to that feature.
mess109.vox
I'm sorry, that is not a valid entry.
mess110.vox
You have…
mess112.vox
...New messages
mess113.vox
New message.
mess119.vox
This message is a fax.
mess121.vox
End of new messages
mess124.vox
I'm sorry, you cannot reply to a message sent by an outside caller.
mess125.vox
… received your message on…
mess126.vox
You Cannot Forward a Confidential Message
mess131.vox
Reply sent, what would you like to do with the original message.
mess132.vox
To send this message standard press 1, certified press 2.
mess133.vox
message sent certified.
mess134.vox
Message Saved.
mess135.vox
Message Deleted
mess136.vox
Message Moved
mess139.vox
Enter the next recipient's mailbox number.
mess140.vox
Enter the destination mailbox number
mess142.vox
That is an invalid mailbox, please try again.
mess143.vox
Begin speaking at the tone, press pound when finished
mess145.vox
"To send your message press 1,
re-record your message press 2,
review your message press 3,
continue recording press 4,
cancel your message press star."
mess146.vox
Nothing Recorded
mess147.vox
There is nothing currently recorded
mess148.vox
We did not get your recording, either because your message was too short or due to
a bad connection.
mess149.vox
To disconnect press 1, to record a message press 2
mess152.vox
Notification entries.
mess153.vox
Notification entry
mess155.vox
Blank.
mess156.vox
There are no notifications defined
mess160.vox
"To add a new notification entry press 1,
modify an entry press 2,
delete an entry press 3,
listen to an entry press 4,
turn notification on or off press 5,
Or to return to the previous menu press pound."
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
If finished press pound.
355
Default Prompts
356
File Name
Text
mess163.vox
Please enter the telephone number for notification. When finished press the pound
sign
mess167.vox
If this is correct press 1, otherwise press 2.
mess168.vox
If this is a beeper press 1, phone press 2
mess169.vox
Notification Added
mess170.vox
Please record your notification prompt at the tone, press pound to exit
mess171.vox
Notification deleted
mess172.vox
Please enter the 4 digit start time, hour then minute
mess173.vox
Please enter the 4 digit start date, month then day.
mess174.vox
Please enter the 4 digit stop time, hour then minute.
mess175.vox
Please enter the 4 digit stop date, month then day.
mess176.vox
Please enter the entry number to be changed.
mess177.vox
That is an invalid outcall entry
mess178.vox
Please enter the outcall entry to delete. To delete all entries press star.
mess179.vox
Notification is now active
mess180.vox
Notification is now off.
mess186.vox
Hello this is your voice messaging system there is a message for…
mess189.vox
Urgent message
mess190.vox
New voice message
mess195.vox
New data messages
mess197.vox
New email messages
mess200.vox
Enter the destination number. To return to the previous menu press pound.
mess202.vox
I'm sorry that is an invalid mailbox number.
mess203.vox
To add comments press 1, to forward without comments press 2.
mess205.vox
Message Forwarded. What would you like to do with the original message?
mess230.vox
"To listen to an existing list press 1,
add a list press 2,
modify an existing list press 3,
delete an existing list press 4,
Or to return to the previous menu press pound"
mess233.vox
There are no distribution lists at this time
mess235.vox
End of list
mess240.vox
Enter the list number to modify
mess242.vox
I'm sorry there is no such list.
mess245.vox
To listen to list members press 1, add members to your list press 2, delete members
from your list press 4, change list name press 5, or to return to the previous menu
press pound.
mess248.vox
End of list.
mess255.vox
Enter the mailbox number to be added
mess260.vox
Enter the mailbox number to be deleted
mess265.vox
Enter the List Number to add
mess267.vox
Please record the list name at the tone, when finished press pound.
mess268.vox
This list number already exists. Press 1 to modify, or any other key to continue.
mess270.vox
To accept press 1, re-record press 2, or to return to the previous menu press pound.
mess272.vox
To add members to this list press 1, to continue press 2, or to return to the previous
menu press pound
mess275.vox
Enter the list number to be deleted.
mess280.vox
Enter the list number to send this message to.
mess281.vox
Your distribution list is being processed. Please hold until you hear main menu
prompt or hang up and call back later.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Default Prompts
File Name
Text
mess300.vox
Please enter the supervisor password
mess306.vox
"SUPERVISOR MAIN MENUTo configure mailboxes press 1,
configure feature groups press 2,
system prompts press 4,
company maintenance press 5,
return to the automated attendant press 0,
Or to disconnect press pound."
mess310.vox
I’m sorry there is no such voice prompt.
mess311.vox
"To change system time press 1,
change system date press 2,
change operation mode press 3,
To return to the previous menu press pound."
mess312.vox
The office is now open
mess313.vox
The office is now closed
mess323.vox
Enter the parameter number followed by the new value for that parameter followed
by the pound sign
mess326.vox
Enter the two digit feature group number to change. To return to the previous menu
press pound.
mess329.vox
To review Press 1, to modify press 2
mess343.vox
You have entered an incorrect value, try again.
mess351.vox
Please enter the message segment number to be recorded.
mess355.vox
For system prompts Press 1, for company Salutation press 2
mess358.vox
Enter the system prompt to work with.
mess361.vox
Press 1 to Accept, 2 to review, 3 to record, or pound to exit.
mess370.vox
Please enter the 4 digit system salutation to work with.
mess371.vox
Salutation accepted
mess380.vox
Please enter the first mailbox.
mess382.vox
Please enter the last mailbox.
mess385.vox
To create mailboxes press 1, To delete mailboxes press 3.
mess387.vox
Please enter the two digit feature group for these mailboxes.
mess395.vox
Press 1 to confirm deletion of these mailboxes, or press pound to return to the
previous menu.
mess400.vox
Please enter you mailbox number.
mess404.vox
I'm sorry that mailbox is invalid please try again.
mess405.vox
Please enter your password…
mess406.vox
The mailbox you are traing to access is already in session. Please try again later.
mess407.vox
To rewind the message…
mess411.vox
If you are forwarding a message to a distribution list, make sure your mailbox is not
a member of that list.
mess412.vox
Enter the mailbox number to have calls forwarded to
mess413.vox
Call forwarding is now off.
mess414.vox
Calls forwarded to…
mess415.vox
Enter the destination to forward messages to.
mess416.vox
Enter the 4 digit delay time, hour then minute.
mess417.vox
Call screening is now off.
mess418.vox
Call screening is now active.
mess419.vox
Messages forwarded to…
mess420.vox
"To delete messages upon forwarding press 1,
To leave messages in your mailbox after forwarding press 2."
mess421.vox
Message forwarding is now off.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
357
Default Prompts
358
File Name
Text
mess422.vox
Call queuing is now off.
mess423.vox
Call queuing is now active
mess426.vox
You are logged in
mess427.vox
You are logged out.
mess454.vox
"To accept this greeting press 1, re-record press 2, delete press 3, review press 4, to
return to the previous menu press pound."
mess458.vox
Message playback will be Last In First Out.
mess459.vox
Message playback will First In First Out.
mess472.vox
Your mailbox is no longer password protected.
mess473.vox
Please enter you new password, up to 15 digits followed by the pound sign.
mess475.vox
To confirm re-enter your new password followed by the pound sign.
mess476.vox
I'm sorry your entries do not match, please try again.
mess477.vox
Your new password will be active the next time you call
mess478.vox
Auto time stamp is now active.
mess479.vox
Auto time stamp is now off.
mess480.vox
Do not disturb is now active.
mess481.vox
Do not disturb is turned off.
mess482.vox
Pre-Paging is now off.
mess483.vox
Pre-Paging is now active
mess484.vox
Post-Paging is now off.
mess485.vox
Post-Paging is now active.
mess490.vox
To repeat this prompt press zero, or to return to the previous menu press pound.
mess492.vox
Enter the 2 digit greeting to record, 1 to 99
mess493.vox
Enter the 2 digit greeting to activate. To deactivate your optional greeting press 0
mess494.vox
Select the language number to record your greetings for
mess496.vox
Default Greetings are now active
mess497.vox
Your Active greeting is number
mess500.vox
<One minute of music used in the Holding Queue.>
mess515.vox
Enter the two digit company number
mess516.vox
I’m sorry that is not a valid company number.
mess517.vox
"To listen to existing holidays press 1,
add a holiday press 2,
delete a holiday press 3,
To return to the previous menu press the pound sign."
mess522.vox
Enter the 4 digit holiday date, month then day.
mess524.vox
Enter the 4 digit holiday salutation
mess526.vox
Holiday added.
mess527.vox
Enter the 4 digit holiday to delete, month then day
mess529.vox
Holiday deleted
mess562.vox
This is an automated call, to disconnect press 1.
mess581.vox
… is at Lunch and will return at …
mess582.vox
… is at Lunch
mess583.vox
… cannot be interrupted, but will be available after …
mess584.vox
… cannot be interrupted
mess585.vox
… is in a meeting, and will be available after …
mess586.vox
… is in a meeting
mess587.vox
… is at home until …
mess588.vox
… is at home
mess589.vox
… is away on vacation until …
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Default Prompts
File Name
Text
mess590.vox
… is on vacation
mess591.vox
… is out of town until …
mess592.vox
… is out of town
mess593.vox
… is away on business
mess594.vox
… is away on business until …
mess620.vox
There are new unreceived faxes.
mess621.vox
There are no unreceived faxes.
mess622.vox
"To save this fax as a document press 1,
delete this fax press 2,
skip to the next fax press the star key,
Or to return to the previous menu press pound"
mess624.vox
Enter the document number to save the fax as.
mess625.vox
Document saved
mess626.vox
Error saving document, you may have to re-fax this document to save it properly
mess627.vox
There are more unreceived faxes
mess628.vox
No more unreceived faxes.
mess629.vox
Deleting fax. To confirm the deletion of this fax press 9, otherwise press pound to
return to the previous menu
mess630.vox
Fax deleted
mess631.vox
Error deleting fax
mess640.vox
At the sound of the fax tone, please press start on your fax machine
mess641.vox
There are currently no free fax ports, please try again later.
mess650.vox
To change the mailbox language press 3
mess672.voxThis is your Wakeup Call, To Cancel press 1, to reschedule press 2, or
press any other key to Snooze
mess673.voxFor Same Time tomorrow press 1, to enter a new time press 2
mess680.vox
Please enter you area code and fax number.
mess700.vox
… press 0
mess701.vox
… press 1
mess702.vox
… press 2
mess703.vox
… press 3
mess704.vox
… press 4
mess705.vox
… press 5
mess706.vox
… press 6
mess707.vox
… press 7
mess708.vox
… press 8
mess709.vox
… press 9
mess710.vox
… press Star
mess711.vox
… press Pound
mess712.vox
… press Star
mess720.vox
Please enter your customer ID
mess721.vox
Please re-enter your customer ID
mess730.vox
Please enter your access code.
mess740.vox
Please enter the document number to be faxed.
mess742.vox
I’m sorry you have entered an invalid document number, please try again.
mess743.vox
Document has been sent
mess744.vox
Please enter the area code and fax number of the receiving fax machine.
mess745.vox
Your fax will be sent to…
mess746.vox
Please enter your extension number so that the fax can be directed to your attention
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
359
Default Prompts
360
File Name
Text
mess747.vox
... is an invalid fax number
mess755.vox
To send your message to your default fax machine press 1. To select a different fax
number press 2, To print your fax to a printer press 3.
mess756.vox
To send your fax to your default fax machine press 1. To select a different fax
number press 2. To print your fax on a printer press 3. To save this fax as a fax on
demand document press 4.
mess757.vox
To send your fax to …
mess758.vox
…Press 1. To select a different fax number press 2. To print your fax on a printer
press 3. To save this fax as a fax on demand document press 4.
mess770.vox
Please enter the country code of the receiving fax machine followed by the pound
sign
mess756.vox
To send your fax to your default fax machine press 1. To select a different fax
number press 2. To print your fax to a printer press 3. To save this fax as a fax on
demand document press 4.
mess771.vox
Please enter your country code followed by the pound sign
mess772.vox
Please enter the country code for your outcall destination followed by the pound sign
mess773.vox
Please enter the country code for your wakeup call followed by the pound sign
mess774.vox
That is an invalid number, Please try again
mess775.vox
Please enter your area code followed by the pound sign
mess776.vox
Please enter your telephone number followed by the pound sign
mess800.vox
Welcome to your new voice messaging system. Over the next few minutes we will
introduce you to some of the features of the system and help you initialize your
mailbox. If you wish to exit the tutorial at any point press the pound sign located on
the bottom right hand corner of your telephone keypad.
mess801.vox
Your mailbox is where all your messages will be stored and also where you can send
messages to others in your company. To keep your mailbox secure you should enter
a password.
mess802.vox
Callers will hear one of the user's greetings when they are leaving a message for
you. There are three default greetings. First there is the personal greeting. This
greeting is heard when you are not at your desk but present. Try to change this
prompt as
mess803.vox
The busy greeting will let the caller know that you are on the phone. An example of
this greeting would be " Hi. It is Kim Stevens. I’m currently on the phone . Please
leave a message and I will get back to you as soon as I can. Thanks". You will now
record your busy greeting.
mess804.vox
The gone home prompt is activated when you have gone home for the day. This will
automatically be played when you logout of the system, so you only need to record it
once. An example of this prompt would be "Hi, this is Kim Stevens, I have gone
home for the day. Please leave a message at the tone and I will return your call
tomorrow.” You will now record your at hom prompt.
mess805.vox
The next greeting to record is your name greeting. It consists of your first and last
name. This greeting is entered in a variety of places, and will identify your mailbox
to callers leaving you messages. An example of a name greeting is " Mark Smith".
mess806.vox
Finally, in order to register you in the company directory you will have to spell the
first three letters of your last name. Callers who do not know your extension can
access your mailbox by spelling your last name in the company directory. For
example
mess807.vox
This completes your mailbox tutorial. If you require to make additional changes to
your greetings, you can follow the instructions in your user's guide. If you have any
questions about using your new mailbox, you may ask your system supervisor.
Thanks
mess808.vox
Since you have decided to not to carry out your tutorial, you will need to follow the
instructions in your user's guide to change your greetings and password. If you
have any questions about using your new mailbox, you may ask your system
supervisor. Thanks.
mess809.vox
Your password will expire in …
mess810.vox
Your password will expire tomorrow
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Default Prompts
File Name
Text
mess811.vox
Your password is expiring today
mess812.vox
Your password has expired.
mess813.vox
To enter a new password press 1, to continue press 2.
mess814.vox
You will need to enter a new password to continue.
Mess815.vox
I'm sorry, that is not the correct password.
mess820.vox
Welcome to your Voice Mail. Your mailbox is where your messages will be stored. It
is simple to use. If you have any questions about using your mailbox, please contact
the front desk
mess840.vox
Your current wakeup call is set for
mess841.vox
To add a wake up call press 1, to return to the previous menu press #
mess842.vox
To cancel your wake up call press 1, to reschedule your wake up call press2, to
return to the previous menu press #.
mess844.vox
Please enter the 4-digit wake-up call time, hour then minutes.
mess845.vox
Please enter the 4-digit wake-up call date, month then day.
mess850.vox
Please enter the telephone number for your wake up call.
mess885.vox
Wake-up call added
mess899.vox
Press 1 for Yes, 2 for No.
mess900.vox
Allow message lights.
mess901.vox
Allow Beeper Message Delivery.
mess902.vox
Allow Phone Message Delivery.
mess903.vox
Allow long distance Message Delivery
mess904.vox
Allow Call Screening.
mess905.vox
Allow Call forwarding.
mess906.vox
Allow Do not Disturb.
mess907.vox
Allow busy hold.
mess908.vox
Allow Call Queuing
mess909.vox
Allow Pre-transfer Paging.
mess910.vox
Allow Post-Transfer Paging.
mess911.vox
Allow distribution lists.
mess912.vox
Allow directory registration
mess913.vox
Allow message confirmation.
mess914.vox
Allow message recovery.
mess915.vox
Allow login / logout.
mess916.vox
Allow access to supervisor functions
mess917.vox
Enter maximum number of messages allowed
mess918.vox
Enter maximum message length.
mess919.vox
Enter maximum days to save messages
mess920.vox
Enter maximum rings for call progress.
mess921.vox
"For no transfer supervision press 1,
For busy only supervision press 2,
For Busy no answer supervision press 3,
For multilingual supervision press 4."
mess922.vox
Enter mailbox language number.
mess1000.vox
Send to Menu …
mess1001.vox
For Mailbox Options…
mess1002.vox
To Record Greetings…
mess1003.vox
For Notification Options …
mess1004.vox
For Call Transfer Options…
mess1005.vox
For Distribution List Maintenance …
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
361
Default Prompts
362
File Name
Text
mess1006.vox
To Change your password …
mess1007.vox
For Message Options
mess1008.vox
To return to the automated attendant ...
mess1009.vox
To disconnect …
mess1010.vox
To Add a List …
mess1011.vox
To Delete an existing List …
mess1012.vox
To modify a List …
mess1013.vox
To Review Lists …
mess1014.vox
To return to the main menu
mess1015.vox
To go to the next menu
mess1016.vox
To return to the previous menu
mess1021.vox
To Add a Notification Entry …
mess1022.vox
To Delete a Notification Entry …
mess1023.vox
To modify an existing Notification Entry…
mess1024.vox
To Review Notifications …
mess1025.vox
To turn notifiction on or off.
mess1029.vox
To Set a Wakeup Call …
mess1031.vox
To Clear your Password …
mess1032.vox
To Listen to your existing password …
mess1033.vox
To Set a New Password …
mess1034.vox
To Clear your Voice Password …
mess1035.vox
To Listen to your existing Voice Password …
mess1036.vox
To Set a New Voice Password
mess1038.vox
To browse …
mess1040.vox
To Browse Folders ….
mess1041.vox
To AutoPlay Messages …
mess1042.vox
To Listen to …
mess1043.vox
Unread …
mess1044.vox
Read …
mess1045.vox
Voice …
mess1046.vox
Email …
mess1047.vox
Fax …
mess1048.vox
And …
mess1049.vox
In …
mess1050.vox
To…
mess1051.vox
Messages…
mess1052.vox
your Inbox…
mess1053.vox
your Deleted Folder …
mess1054.vox
your OutBox …
mess1055.vox
your Sent Items …
mess1056.vox
Folder ….
mess1057.vox
To Send a Message …
mess1059.vox
To Change Auto Forwarding …
mess1060.vox
To Reply to All …
mess1061.vox
To Delete …
mess1062.vox
To Move To …
mess1063.vox
To Review …
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Default Prompts
File Name
Text
mess1064.vox
To Reply …
mess1065.vox
To Forward …
mess1066.vox
For Message Information …
mess1067.vox
For Time and Date …
mess1068.vox
To skip to the next message
mess1069.vox
To Record Out of Town Greeting
mess1070.vox
To Record Personal Greeting …
mess1071.vox
To Record Busy Greeting …
mess1072.vox
To Record At Home Greeting …
mess1073.vox
To Record Name Greeting …
mess1074.vox
To Record Do Not Disturb Greeting…
mess1075.vox
To Record Lunch Greeting …
mess1076.vox
To Record Vacation Greeting …
mess1077.vox
To Record In Meeting Greeting …
mess1078.vox
To Record Customized Greetings …
mess1079.vox
To Set Active Greeting …
mess1081.vox
To Change your Status …
mess1082.vox
To Play Active Options …
mess1083.vox
To Clear Mass Recall …
mess1084.vox
To Recall a Caller …
mess1091.vox
To Turn Call Screening On or Off …
mess1092.vox
To Turn Call Forwarding On or Off …
mess1093.vox
To Turn Call Queuing On or Off …
mess1094.vox
To Turn Post Paging On or Off …
mess1095.vox
To Turn Pre Paging On or Off …
mess1096.vox
To print …
mess1097.vox
To deliver to a fax machine or a printer…
mess1098.vox
To review & print …
mess1100.vox
To Skip to the previous message
mess1101.vox
To Skip to the previous message without changing Read status
mess1102.vox
To Mark the message Unread
mess1103.vox
To Mark the message Read
mess1104.vox
To Skip to the next message without changing Read status
mess1105.vox
Next Message
mess1106.vox
Previous Message
mess1109.vox
Message Saved in Draft
mess1110.vox
For Message Options
mess1111.vox
To Send your message
mess1112.vox
To save your message in Draft and Exit
mess1113.vox
To Re-Record your message
mess1114.vox
To append to your message
mess1115.vox
To cancel message and exit
mess1116.vox
To review your message
mess1117.vox
To Certify Message…
mess1118.vox
To Cancel Certified mark…
mess1119.vox
To Mark Message urgent
mess1120.vox
To Cancel Urgent Mark….
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
363
Default Prompts
File Name
Text
mess1121.vox
To change message normal
mess1122.vox
To Mark Message Confidential …
mess1123.vox
To Cancel Confidential Mark…
mess1124.vox
To Send your Message as urgent
mess1125.vox
To Send your message as certified
mess1126.vox
To Send your message as Confidential
mess1127.vox
To Send your message as Certified and Urgent
mess1128.vox
To Send your message as certified and Confidential
mess1129.vox
To Send your message as Urgent and Confidential
mess1130.vox
To Send your message as Urgent, Confidential and Certified
mess1131.vox
To Send your Message as
mess1132.vox
urgent
mess1133.vox
certified
mess1134.vox
Confidential
mess1135.vox
and
mess1136.vox
To Set Mass Recall Delivery…
mess1137.vox
To Cancel Mass Recall Delivery…
mess1140.vox
For Distribution List Items
mess1141.vox
To add distribution list member
mess1142.vox
To Delete Distribution List Member
mess1143.vox
To Review Distribution List Members
mess1144.vox
To Review List Name
mess1145.vox
To Re-Record List Name
mess1146.vox
your Draft folder…
mess1147.vox
your Sent folder…
mess1148.vox
your Top folder…
mess1149.vox
mess1150.vox
For Message Options…
mess1151.vox
For Fax Options…
mess1152.vox
For Distribution List Options…
mess1154.vox
To transfer to the operator
mess1155.vox
To transfer to …
mess1160.vox
To save your message press 1, re-record press 2, review press 3, to continue
recording press 4
mess1161.vox
To Send to Tutorial
mess1162.vox
To Define default fax address
mess1163.vox
Please enter the country code for your default fax address followed by the pound
sign
mess1164.vox
To save your message press 1, re-record press 2, review press 3, to continue
recording press 4, to cancel your message press star
mess1165.vox
Default Fax Address Added
mess1166.vox
Your current default fax address is ...
mess1167.vox
To Change your default fax address press 1, to return to the previous menu press #.
mess1169.vox
Remote site number is invalid. Please try again
mess1170.vox
Remote site number is invalid.
mess1171.vox
I'm sorry that is invalid remote site number, please try again
mess1172.vox
I'm sorry that is invalid remote site number.
mess1173.vox
364
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Default Prompts
File Name
Text
mess1174.vox
To listen to messages in the folder press 1, to browse subfolders press 2.
mess1180.vox
To train your voice print …
mess1181.vox
To delete your voice print …
mess1182.vox
Your voice print has been deleted
mess1183.vox
I'm sorry I couldn't delete your voice print. Please try again later.
mess1184.vox
Document has been printed
mess1185.vox
Your documents will be saved as batch mode. Please enter the starting document
number to save the fax as
mess1186.vox
To record conditional greetings
mess1187.vox
I'm sorry the Message Storage Server is busy at this moment, please retry it later.
mess1188.vox
Your mailbox is full.Please delete unneeded messages.
mess1189.vox
I'm sorry your IMAP password is locked or has expired, please use your WebClient
mailbox or iLink Pro Desktop to change it or ask the system Administrator for
assistance.
mess1190.vox
For more options
mess1191.vox
For message delivery options
mess1192.vox
For more mailbox options
mess1193.vox
For more message options
mess1194.vox
For more delivery options
mess1195.vox
To reply to this message
mess1917.vox
Maximum number of messages allowed is…
mess1918.vox
Maximum message length is...
mess1919.vox
Maximum days to save messages is…
mess1920.vox
Maximum rings for call progress is…
mess1921.vox
Transfer supervision option is…
mess1922.vox
Mailbox language number is…
mess1963.vox
No transfer supervision is on
mess1964.vox
Busy only supervision is on
mess1965.vox
Busy no answer supervision is on
mess1966.vox
Multilingual supervision is on
mess1967.vox
Centrex supervision is on
mess1968.vox
Blind centrex transfer is on
mess1997.vox
Unread Message
mess1998.vox
Unread Messages
mess1999.vox
Read Message
mess2000.vox
Read Messages
mess2001.vox
Unread Voice Message
mess2002.vox
Unread Voice Messages
mess2003.vox
Unread Email Message
mess2004.vox
Unread Email Messages
mess2005.vox
Unread Fax Message
mess2006.vox
Unread Fax Messages
mess2007.vox
Read Voice Message
mess2008.vox
Read Voice Messages
mess2009.vox
Read Email Message
mess2010.vox
Read Email Messages
mess2011.vox
Read Fax Message
mess2012.vox
Read Fax Messages
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
365
Default Prompts
366
File Name
Text
mess2016.vox
Please Enter the Desired Folder Number, to list sub folders, press *
mess2018.vox
When you hear your desired subfolder name, press 1
mess2019.vox
End of Sub Folders
mess2022.vox
For Unread Messages press 1, Read Messages press 2, All messages press 9
mess2023.vox
For Voice Messages press 1, Email Messages press 2, Fax Messages press 3, All
messages press 9
mess2024.vox
Message marked Urgent
mess2025.vox
Message marked Confidential
mess2026.vox
Message marked Certified
mess2027.vox
To Set your Status to In Office Press 1, At Home Press 2, Do Not Disturb Press 3, At
Lunch Press 4, In a Meeting Press 5, On Vacation Press 6
mess2028.vox
Please enter the four digit Date you will return, month then day
mess2029.vox
Please enter the four digit Time you will return, hour then minute
mess2030.vox
Urgent Mark Cancelled
mess2031.vox
Confidential Mark Cancelled
mess2032.vox
Certified mark cancelled
mess2034.vox
To Send this message press 1, Mark Message Urgent press 2, Review Message press
3, Rerecord message press 4, Append Message press 5, Cancel Message press *
mess2035.vox
To Send this message press 1, Mark Message Urgent press 2, Review Message press
3, Rerecord message press 4, Append Message press 5, Cancel Message press *
mess2036.vox
To Send Standard press 1, Certified Press 2, Confidential press 3, Certified and
Confidential press 4, Future Delivery press 5
mess2037.vox
Enter the 4 digit date you want this message delivered, month then day
mess2038.vox
Enter the 4 digit time you want this message delivered, hour then minute
mess2039.vox
Your message will be delivered on …
mess2040.vox
Your current greeting is …
mess2041.vox
This is how your new greeting will sound….
mess2045.vox
For …
mess2046.vox
...Voice Messages press 1
mess2047.vox
… Email Messages press 2
mess2048.vox
...Fax Messages press 3
mess2049.vox
… all messages press 9.
mess2050.vox
To return to the previous menu press pound …
mess2060.vox
I'm sorry that is not a valid entry, please try again.
mess2087.vox
I'm sorry there is no answer at that extension, To leave a message for…
mess2088.vox
I'm sorry that extension is busy, To leave a message for…
mess2100.vox
To enroll, press 1. To return to the previous menu, press pound
mess2101.vox
Your voiceprint is not in our database.
mess2102.vox
Would you like to enroll now?
mess2103.vox
Your voiceprint is already registered.
mess2104.vox
Would you like to re-enroll?
mess2105.vox
To re-enroll, press 1. To return to the previous menu, press pound
mess2106.vox
Please say the keyword followed by your first and last name
mess2107.vox
Please repeat the keyword followed by your first and last name
mess2108.vox
Please count from zero to nine as follows: zero, one, and so on.
mess2109.vox
Please count from nine to zero as follows: nine, eight, and so on.
mess2110.vox
Lastly, please say the four-digit year your were born in.
mess2111.vox
Thank you. You have successfully enrolled.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Default Prompts
File Name
Text
mess2150.vox
Hello, thank you for calling. Please say the person you're trying to reach, or use the
keyword, followed by your name, to login to your mailbox. Alternatively, you can
enter the extension you are trying to reach, or press pound to log into your mailbox.
mess2151.vox
Please say your mailbox number
mess2152.vox
Please say your extension
mess2153.vox
Please say the following five-digit number:
mess2154.vox
Please say what day of the week it is
mess2155.vox
Please say your phone number
mess2156.vox
Please say the four-digit year you were born in
mess2165.vox
This list number already exists as a company wide distribution list and cannot be
modified
mess2166.vox
I'm sorry there is no Text To Speech Engine enabled, you are not able to access this
feature.
mess2167.vox
End of contact list
mess2168.vox
There are no contacts.
mess2169.vox
To review contacts…
mess2170.vox
To call a contact…
mess2171.vox
The default phone number is…
mess2175.vox
The default email address is…
mess2177.vox
To review private contacts…
mess2178.vox
To review public contacts…
mess2179.vox
To call a private contact
mess2180.vox
To call a public contact
mess2185.vox
End of messages
mess2186.vox
End of read messages
mess2187.vox
This is an undeliverable message
mess2188.vox
Message skipped.
mess2189.vox
…no Unread Messages.
mess2311.vox
the original message is
mess2400.vox
Enter the destination mailbox number or press * to dial by name
mess2401.vox
Enter the next recipient's mailbox number, or press * to dial by name. If finished
press pound
mess2402.vox
Nothing recorded, please try again
mess2403.vox
You haven't entered a valid recipient's mailbox number, press 1 to retry or any other
key to return to the previous menu.
mess2404.vox
Message Forwarded certified. What would you like to do with the original message?
mess2405.vox
Reply sent certified, what would you like to do with the original message.
mess2406.vox
Public Contact…
mess2407.vox
Private Contact…
mess2408.vox
Mailbox…
mess2409.vox
I'm sorry there is no default phone number defined for that contact, we cannot
transfer you to that person.
mess2410.vox
I'm sorry there is no default Email address defined for that contact, we cannot send
message to that person.
mess2411.vox
Certified Reply Message
mess2412.vox
Confidential message
mess2413.vox
I'm sorry that is an invalid extension, please try again
mess2414.vox
That mailbox is already added in the list, please try again.
mess2415.vox
That destination is already added in the list, please try again.
mess2416.vox
That contact is already added in the list, please try again.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
367
Default Prompts
368
File Name
Text
mess2417.vox
You cannot add yourself to your own Distribution List, please try again.
mess2418.vox
and your current location is…
mess2419.vox
In office
mess2420.vox
Meeting
mess2421.vox
At Lunch
mess2422.vox
At Home
mess2423.vox
Out of Town
mess2424.vox
Vacation
mess2425.vox
Extended absence
mess2426.vox
Temporary
mess2427.vox
User defined Location
mess2428.vox
Away on Business
mess2442.vox
You pressed…
mess2443.vox
Termination keys added.
mess2444.vox
… is on extended absence
mess2445.vox
… is on extended absence until …
mess2451.vox
To Send your Message as urgent in the future
mess2452.vox
To Send your message as certified in the future
mess2453.vox
To Send your message as Confidential in the future
mess2454.vox
To Send your message as Certified and Urgent in the future
mess2455.vox
To Send your message as certified and Confidential in the future
mess2456.vox
To Send your message as Urgent and Confidential in the future
mess2457.vox
To Send your message as Urgent, Confidential and Certified in the future
mess2458.vox
To Send your message in the future
mess2459.vox
Please enter the 4 digit message delivery time, hour then minute, or press pound to
return to the previous menu.
mess2460.vox
Please enter the 4 digit message delivery date, month then day,or press pound to
return to the previous menu.
mess2462.vox
Please enter the two digit year
mess2463.vox
Please enter the two digit month
mess2464.vox
Please enter the two digit day of the month.
mess2465.vox
Please enter the two digit hour
mess2466.vox
Please enter the two digit minute
Mess2467.vox
Start
mess2468.vox
Stop
mess2469.vox
For day of the week, press star 1 for…
mess2470.vox
Press star 1 for…
mess2471.vox
Star 7 for…
mess2472.vox
Please enter the two digit day of the week.
mess2473.vox
For delivery time and date
mess2474.vox
Your message will be delivered on…
mess2475.vox
Your message delivery date is…
mess2476.vox
Unknown
mess2477.vox
To reply to the sender and all recipients…
mess2478.vox
To add recipients…
mess2479.vox
To delete a recipient…
mess2480.vox
To listen to recipients…
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Default Prompts
File Name
Text
mess2481.vox
Press 1 after hearing the name of the recipient you wish to delete, or press pound to
return to the previous menu.
mess2482.vox
Recipient…
mess2483.vox
I'm sorry there is no recipient entered.
mess2484.vox
…has been deleted.
mess2488.vox
Enter the digits that correspond to the first few letters of the person's first or last
name you wish to send message. For the letter Q or Zee press 1.
mess2489.vox
Enter the digits that correspond to the first few letters of the person's first or last
name you wish to send message. For the letter Q press 7, for Zee press 9.
mess2490.vox
Enter the digits that correspond to the first few letters of the person's first or last
name you wish to call. For the letter Q or Zee press 1.
mess2491.vox
Enter the digits that correspond to the first few letters of the person's first or last
name you wish to call. For the letter Q press 7, for Zee press 9.
mess2492.vox
Enter the digits that correspond to the first few letters of the person's first or last
name you wish to send the message. For the letter Q or Zed press 1.
mess2493.vox
Enter the digits that correspond to the first few letters of the person's first or last
name you wish to send the message. For the letter Q press 7, for Zed press 9.
mess2494.vox
Enter the digits that correspond to the first few letters of the person's first or last
name you wish to call. For the letter Q or Zed press 1.
mess2495.vox
Enter the digits that correspond to the first few letters of the person's first or last
name you wish to call. For the letter Q press 7, for Zed press 9.
mess2496.vox
I'm sorry I do not recognize that name. Please re-enter the digits that correspond to
the first few letters of the person's first or last name you wish to send message. For
the letter Q or Zee press 1.
mess2497.vox
I'm sorry I do not recognize that name. Please re-enter the digits that correspond to
the first few letters of the person's first or last name you wish to send the message.
For the letter Q press 7, for Zee press 9
mess2498.vox
I'm sorry I do not recognize that name. Please re-enter the digits that correspond to
the first few letters of the person's first or last name you wish to send the message.
For the letter Q or Zed press 1.
mess2499.vox
I'm sorry I do not recognize that name. Please re-enter the digits that correspond to
the first few letters of the person's first or last name you wish to send the message.
For the letter Q press 7, for Zed press 9
mess2500.vox
I'm sorry I do not recognize that name. Please re-enter the digits that correspond to
the first few letters of the person's first or last name you wish to call. For the letter
Q or Zee press 1.
mess2501.vox
I'm sorry I do not recognize that name. Please re-enter the digits that correspond to
the first few letters of the person's first or last name you wish to call. For the letter
Q press 7, for Zee press 9
mess2502.vox
I'm sorry I do not recognize that name. Please re-enter the digits that correspond to
the first few letters of the person's first or last name you wish to call. For the letter
Q or Zed press 1.
mess2503.vox
I'm sorry I do not recognize that name. Please re-enter the digits that correspond to
the first few letters of the person's first or last name you wish to call. For the letter
Q press 7, for Zed press 9
mess2504.vox
Press 1 after hearing the name of the person you wish to send the message.
mess2505.vox
Press 1 after hearing the name of the person you wish to call.
mess2508.vox
Text to Speech is currently unavailable, please try again later.
mess2509.vox
Please wait while the message is retrieved.
mess2510.vox
Press 1 to review the current greeting, 2 to record a new greeting, or any other key
to keep the current recording
mess2511.vox
<one second silence>
mess2512.vox
Or say the name of the person you wish to call.
mess2513.vox
Enter the destination mailbox number or press * to dial by name. Or say the name of
the person you wish to send the message.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
369
Default Prompts
370
File Name
Text
mess2514.vox
Enter the next recipient's mailbox number, or press * to dial by name. Or say the
name of the person you wish to send the message. If finished press pound
mess2515.vox
I'm sorry the time should be later than the current time, please try again.
mess2516.vox
The existing system prompt is…
mess2517.vox
The system prompt is not recorded yet. Press 1 to record, 2 for next prompt, or
pound to exit.
mess2518.vox
First Unread Message
mess2519.vox
First Read Message
mess2520.vox
First Message
mess2523.vox
will be delivered on
mess2524.vox
your future delivery messages
mess2525.vox
To Auto Play…
mess2530.vox
… press A
mess2531.vox
… press B
mess2532.vox
… press C
mess2533.vox
… press D
mess2534.vox
… press E
mess2535.vox
… press F
mess2536.vox
… press G
mess2537.vox
… press H
mess2538.vox
… press I
mess2539.vox
… press J
mess2540.vox
… press K
mess2541.vox
… press L
mess2542.vox
… press M
mess2543.vox
… press N
mess2544.vox
… press O
mess2545.vox
… press P
mess2546.vox
… press Q
mess2547.vox
… press R
mess2548.vox
… press S
mess2549.vox
… press T
mess2550.vox
… press U
mess2551.vox
… press V
mess2552.vox
… press W
mess2553.vox
… press X
mess2554.vox
… press Y
mess2555.vox
… press Zee
mess2556.vox
… press Zed
mess2560.vox
Future delivery message
mess2561.vox
ress 1 to Deliver now, press 2 to change the delivery date and time, or any other key
to keep the existing delivery date and time.
mess2562.vox
Message Delivered
mess2563.vox
To Deliver now
mess2564.vox
To change the delivery date and time
mess2565.vox
To keep the existing delivery date and time
mess2566.vox
Delivery date and time changed
mess2567.vox
…and other recipients
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Default Prompts
File Name
Text
mess2568.vox
I'm sorry, there is no valid file to print.
mess2569.vox
To complete your request press 1, any other key to reject
mess2570.vox
To deliver to a fax machine
mess2571.vox
To send your message to your default fax machine press 1. To select a different fax
number press 2.
mess2572.vox
To Call back on…
mess2573.vox
To Call back this person…
mess2574.vox
To Call back on this number press 1, to enter a different number, press 2.
mess2575.vox
Please enter the country code of the person followed by the pound sign
mess2576.vox
To accept press 1, any other key to reject.
mess2577.vox
Hello, This call is for…
mess2578.vox
Your party has hung up. You are being returned to your mailbox session.
mess2579.vox
Your party has hung up. Please enter your password to go back to your mailbox
session.
mess2580.vox
The maximum conversation time has been reached; to keep the conversation active
press 1, or any other key to go back to your mailbox session.
mess2581.vox
You will now be sent back to your mailbox session.
mess2582.vox
I'm sorry that phone number is busy.
mess2583.vox
I'm sorry there is no answer at that phone number.
mess2584.vox
Now system will ask your notification start date and time.
mess2585.vox
Now system will ask your notification stop date and time.
mess2586.vox
Your notification start date time is:
mess2587.vox
Your notification stop date time is:
mess2588.vox
First
mess2589.vox
Second
mess2590.vox
Third
mess2591.vox
Fourth
mess2592.vox
Fifth
mess2593.vox
Last
mess2594.vox
To send your message to …
mess2595.vox
... press 1. To select a different fax number press 2.
mess2608.vox
Recurs
mess2609.vox
On
mess2610.vox
I'm sorry the Stop Date time should be later than Start Date Time.Please try again.
mess2611.vox
Notification entry deleted
mess2612.vox
Everyday
mess2613.vox
Every
mess2614.vox
Day
mess2615.vox
Days
mess2616.vox
Every weekday
mess2617.vox
Every week
mess2618.vox
Week
mess2619.vox
Weeks
mess2620.vox
Every Month
mess2621.vox
Month
mess2622.vox
Months
mess2623.vox
On Day…
mess2624.vox
On the…
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
371
Default Prompts
372
File Name
Text
mess2625.vox
Weekday
mess2626.vox
Every year.
mess2627.vox
Of
mess2628.vox
Weekend
mess2649.vox
Hello,
mess2650.vox
… is calling,
mess2651.vox
There was no answer in that extension
mess2652.vox
to find…
mess2653.vox
press 1 or any other key to leave a message
mess2670.vox
You can press pound pound to terminate the conversation and go back to your menu
any time.
mess2671.vox
I'm sorry there is no answer at that extension, please try later.
mess2672.vox
I'm sorry that extension is busy, please try later.
mess2673.vox
To play back the text message in…
mess2674.vox
English
mess2675.vox
French
mess2676.vox
German
mess2677.vox
Spanish
mess2678.vox
Italian
mess2679.vox
Cantonese
mess2680.vox
Mandarin
mess2681.vox
Japanese
mess2682.vox
Arabic
mess2683.vox
Farsi
mess2684.vox
Russian
mess2685.vox
Polish
mess2686.vox
Hungarian
mess2687.vox
Greek
mess2688.vox
Thai
mess2689.vox
Portuguese
mess2690.vox
Dutch
mess2700.vox
Next Language
mess2701.vox
Please wait while the message is retrieved.
mess2702.vox
I'm sorry currently there is no resource to broadcast, system will just transfer you to
default phone number of this person.
mess2703.vox
…is assigning the call to…
mess2704.vox
To Find me press 1, or any other key to continue
mess2706.vox
Searching your party…
mess2707.vox
…is in office.
mess2708.vox
…is in office and will return at…
mess2710.vox
…is in temporary location
mess2711.vox
…is in temporary location until…
mess2713.vox
until…
mess2714.vox
…is in user defined location
mess2715.vox
…is in user defined location until…
mess2716.vox
…is on extended absence
mess2717.vox
…is on extended absence until…
mess2718.vox
Please leave a message
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Default Prompts
File Name
Text
mess2719.vox
You are available
mess2720.vox
You are unavailable
mess2721.vox
To make yourself available, press 1; To change your location, press 2; To listen to
your current greeting when you are not available, press 3, or press # to continue.
mess2722.vox
To make yourself Unavailable, press 1; To change your location, press 2; To listen to
your current greeting when you are not available, press 3, or press # to continue.
mess2723.vox
Press 1 after hearing the name of the Location you wish to switch to. To return to
previous menu, press pound.
mess2724.voxI'm sorry there is no valid location to switch to, please try later.
mess2725.vox
<<10 minutes of music used in the Holding while Broadcasting>>
mess2726.vox
I'm sorry the caller already hung up the call.
mess2727.vox
The other extension already picked up the call
mess2728.vox
You are now available
mess2729.vox
You are now unavailable.
mess2730.vox
…unless you say No
mess2731.vox
...unless you say Cancel
mess2732.vox
…unless you say…
mess2733.vox
Your current location is switched to…
mess2734.vox
Press 1 to re-record the current greeting, or any other key to continue.
mess2735.vox
Greeting accepted
mess2736.vox
Greeting deleted
mess2737.vox
This is your system automated Name and Location greeting. To switch to your
location greeting, press 1, any other key to continue.
mess2738.vox
Current location greeting is not recorded, the following default greeting will be
played in case you are away from your desk…
mess2739.vox
Press 1 to record the greeting for the current location, 2 to re-record default
greeting, any other key to continue.
mess2740.vox
Your current greeting is switched to your location greeting
mess2741.vox
Your location greeting is not recorded yet. Press 1 to record, any other key to
continue.
mess2742.vox
To change your location…
mess2743.vox
To change your location to…
mess2744.vox
I'm sorry there is no user defined location to switch to.
mess2745.vox
and the associated extension number is…
mess2746.vox
To change the current extension number, press 1, or any other key to continue
mess2747.vox
Your current extension number has changed.
mess2748.vox
Go back to your locations calendar
mess2749.vox
Your Caller Id is:
mess2750.vox
To make it your default extension, press 1, or any other key to continue.
mess2751.vox
To make current Caller Id…
mess2752.vox
...your default extension, press 1; To change current extension number, press 2, or
any other key to continue.
mess2753.vox
…your default extension.
mess2754.vox
To block callers from leaving messages …
mess2755.vox
To allow callers to leave messages ...
mess2756.vox
To block callers from skipping your greeting
mess2757.vox
To allow callers to skip your greeting.
mess2758.vox
Otherwise press pound.
mess2759.vox
To record more greetings.
mess2760.vox
To record a greeting for location…
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
373
Default Prompts
374
File Name
Text
mess2761.vox
I'm sorry there is no user defined location.
mess2762.vox
Press 1 after hearing the name of the Location you wish to record greeting for. To
return to the previous menu, press pound.
mess2763.vox
Please enter the country code of the current extension number followed by the
pound sign.
mess2764.vox
I'm sorry you cannot add yourself to a distribution list.
mess2765.vox
This destination is already in the distribution list.
mess2766.vox
Hello, you wanted to talk to …
mess2767.vox
Press 1 to call this person now, any other key to ignore.
mess2768.vox
The speech recognition ability for public contacts is disabled
mess2769.vox
The speech recognition ability for private contacts is disabled
mess2770.vox
...is busy. To be automatically notified if this extension becomes free in next 30
minutes, press *; or stay on the line to leave a message.
mess2771.vox
You will be automatically called at this extension if it becomes free in next 30
minutes.
mess2772.vox
Please enter your…
mess2773.vox
…digit password.
mess2774.vox
The minimum length is…
mess2775.vox
…digit.
mess2776.vox
To confirm, re-enter your new password.
mess2777.vox
The password minimum length is...
mess2778.vox
…digits, please try again.
mess2779.vox
Your Password cannot be the same as your mailbox number. Please try again.
mess2780.vox
Your Password cannot be sequential numbers. Please try again.
mess2781.vox
Your Password cannot have repeat numbers. Please try again.
mess2782.vox
Your Password was used as a previous password. Please try again.
mess2783.vox
Your Password does not obey the established security rules. Please try again.
mess2784.vox
I'm sorry your mailbox is locked, please contact your administrator.
mess2785.vox
Voice Recorded
mess2786.vox
The password lenght is …
mess2787.vox
and…
mess2788.vox
Your mailbox is almost full, please delete any messages that you no longer require.
mess2789.vox
To reply to the sender only…
mess2790.vox
...Is not available right now.
mess2791.vox
I'm sorry, there are multiple matches.
mess2792.vox
Enter the digits that correspond to the first few letters of the person's first or last
name you wish to leave the message. For the letter Q or Zee press 1.
mess2793.vox
Enter the digits that correspond to the first few letters of the person's first or last
name you wish to leave the message. For the letter Q press 7, for Zee press 9.
mess2794.vox
Or say the name of the person you wish to leave the message.
mess2795.vox
Press 1 after hearing the name of the person you wish to leave the message.
mess2796.vox
Enter the digits that correspond to the first few letters of the person's first or last
name you wish to leave the message. For the letter Q or Zed press 1.
mess2797.vox
Enter the digits that correspond to the first few letters of the person's first or last
name you wish to leave a message. For the letter Q press 7, for Zed press 9.
mess2798.vox
To record an Unavailable greeting…
mess2799.vox
To record a personal greeting for an internal caller…
mess2800.vox
To record a busy greeting for an internal caller…
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Default Prompts
File Name
Text
mess2801.vox
Your mailbox is where all your messages will be stored and also where you can send
messages to others in your company.
mess2802.vox
The Unavailable greeting will let the caller know when you are not able to take call.
An example of this greeting would be " Hi. It is Mark Smith. Sorry, I’m unavailable
right now. Please leave a message and I will get back to you as soon as I can. Than
mess2805.vox
I'm sorry I do not recognize that name. Please re-enter the digits that correspond to
the first few letters of the person's first or last name you wish to leave the message.
For the letter Q or Zee press 1.
mess2806.vox
I'm sorry I do not recognize that name. Please re-enter the digits that correspond to
the first few letters of the person's first or last name you wish to leave the message.
For the letter Q press 7, for Zee press 9
mess2807.vox
I'm sorry I do not recognize that name. Please re-enter the digits that correspond to
the first few letters of the person's first or last name you wish to leave the message.
For the letter Q or Zed press 1.
mess2808.vox
I'm sorry I do not recognize that name. Please re-enter the digits that correspond to
the first few letters of the person's first or last name you wish to leave the message.
For the letter Q press 7, for Zed press 9
mess2809.vox
To record an unavailable greeting for an internal caller…
mess2810.vox
To play back current extension number.
mess2811.vox
The current time is…
mess2812.vox
To make yourself Unavailable…
mess2813.vox
To make yourself Available…
mess2814.vox
To review your current availability and location...
mess2815.vox
Dot…
mess2816.vox
You current location is…
mess2817.vox
To save message…
mess2818.vox
Message Cancelled
mess2819.vox
Press 1 after hearing the phone number of the person you wish to dial. To return to
previous menu, press pound.
mess2820.vox
You were a copied recipient…
mess2821.vox
You were a blind \copied recipient…
mess2822.vox
…digits.
mess2823.vox
Mass Recall Cancelled
mess2824.vox
Mass Recall is set
mess2827.vox
The current day is…
mess2928.vox
on (946:AM on July 7th, 2005)
mess2900.vox
Please hold for...
mess2901.vox
Looking for...
mess2902.vox
Searching for...
mess2903.vox
Please wait while I look for...
mess2904.vox
Just a moment while I locate your party...
mess2999.vox
Attachment
mess3000.vox
Answer
mess3001.vox
When you hear the name of the person you are trying to reach say yes, or press 1.
mess3002.vox
Say no.
mess3003.vox
I'm sorry can you please repeat that?
mess3003b.vox
I don't think I heard you, can you please repeat that?
mess3003c.vox
I'm sorry, please say the first and last name of the person you are trying to reach or
dial their extention number.
mess3003d.vox
Who?
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
375
Default Prompts
376
File Name
Text
mess3004.vox
Please say the person you're trying to reach, or use the keyword, followed by your
name, to login to your mailbox. Alternatively, you can enter the extension you are
trying to reach, or press pound to log into your mailbox.
mess3005.vox
Did you say?
mess3005b.vox
I think you said …
mess3005c.vox
… is that correct?
mess3006.vox
The following names match your selection.
mess3006b.vox
There are multiple matches.
mess3006c.vox
More than one person has this name.
mess3007.vox
Sorry you are having trouble. Please try again later. Thank you for calling goodbye.
mess3008.vox
Star
mess3009.vox
Pound
mess3010.vox
I think I heard
mess3011.vox
To stop the transfer to …
mess3011b.vox
Say no if you'd like to try another name.
mess3011c.vox
To stop this transfer please say no
mess3012.vox
Sorry I'm having so much trouble, I'm transfering you to the operator and I'll work
on recognizing that name better.
mess3100.vox
Say one for
mess3101.vox
Say two for
mess3102.vox
Say three for
mess3104.vox
Say four for
mess3105.vox
Say five for
mess3106.vox
Say six for
mess3107.vox
Say seven for
mess3108.vox
Say eight for
mess3109.vox
Say nine for
mess3110.vox
or say zero for the next recognized name
mess3111.vox
or press zero for the receptionist
mess3112.vox
I'm sorry, could you please repeat that name?
mess3113.vox
I'm sorry, could you please repeat that digit?
mess3114.vox
I'm sorry, could you please say yes or no?"
mess3115.vox
I'm sorry, I'm having trouble understanding you
mess3116.vox
… unless you say cancel.
mess3117.vox
… the next recognized name
mess3118.vox
Did you want to transfer to
mess3119.vox
Did you want to login as
mess3120.vox
I'm sorry, I couldn't verify you. Let me transfer you to the operator.
mess3121.vox
I’m sorry, I couldn't enroll you. Please try again later.
mess3122.vox
Thank you, you have been verified.
mess3123.vox
Welcome…
mess3124.vox
Verified…
mess3125.vox
Please say a question that has a four-digit answer.
mess3126.vox
Please answer that question.
mess3127.vox
Say one …
mess3128.vox
Say two …
mess3129.vox
Say three …
mess3130.vox
Say four …
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Default Prompts
File Name
Text
mess3131.vox
Say five …
mess3132.vox
Say six …
mess3133.vox
Say seven …
mess3134.vox
Say eight …
mess3135.vox
Say nine …
mess3136.vox
Say Zero…
mess3137.vox
Please say your PIN number
mess3150.vox
Say yes when you hear the name of the person you want to transfer to.
mess3151.vox
Say yes when you hear the name of the person you want to login as.
mess3152.vox
Say no to hear the next recognized name
mess3153.vox
… to transfer to …
mess3154.vox
… to login as …
mess3160.vox
The next group of names
mess3161.vox
or…
mess3162.vox
Say yes when you hear the name of the person or department you want to be
transferred to or no at anytime to start over.
mess3163.vox
Say yes when you hear the the name of the person you want to send a message to
or no at anytime to start over.
mess3164.vox
Say yes when you hear the name of the person you are trying to call to or no at
anytime to start over.
mess3165.vox
Say yes when you hear the name of the person you are searching for or no at
anytime to start over.
mess3166.vox
would you like to hear the next group of names?
mess3167.vox
Could you please repeat that name?
mess3168.vox
Could you please repeat that digit?
mess3169.vox
Could you please repeat those digits?
mess3170.vox
Could you please repeat that?
mess3171.vox
Please say yes or no.
mess3172.vox
Operator…
mess3173.vox
Receptionist…
mess3175.vox
Private contact…
mess3176.vox
Public contact…
mess3177.vox
To start over.
mess3178.vox
First business number
mess3179.vox
Second business number
mess3180.vox
First home number
mess3181.vox
Second home number
mess3182.vox
Other number
mess3184.vox
Business fax number
mess3185.vox
Home fax number
mess3186.vox
Other fax number
mess3187.vox
Mobile number
mess3188.vox
T T Y number
mess3189.vox
Pager number
mess3190.vox
I S D N number
mess3191.vox
SIP Address
mess3192.vox
There are multiple phone numbers for this person
mess3193.vox
From
mess3194.vox
With email
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
377
Default Prompts
378
File Name
Text
mess3195.vox
With phone number
A.VOX
A
B.VOX
B
C.VOX
C
D.VOX
D
E.VOX
E
F.VOX
F
G.VOX
G
H.VOX
H
I.VOX
I
J.VOX
J
K.VOX
K
L.VOX
L
M.VOX
M
N.VOX
N
O.VOX
O
P.VOX
P
Q.VOX
Q
R.VOX
R
S.VOX
S
T.VOX
T
U.VOX
U
V.VOX
V
W.VOX
W
X.VOX
X
Y.VOX
Y
Z.VOX
Z
1
Zero
2
One
3
Two
4
Three
5
Four
6
Five
7
Six
8
Seven
9
Eight
10
Nine
11
Ten
12
Eleven
13
Twelve
14
Thirteen
15
Fourteen
16
Fifteen
17
Sixteen
18
Seventeen
19
Eighteen
20
Nineteen
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Default Prompts
File Name
Text
21
Twenty
22
Thirty
23
Forty
24
Fifty
25
Sixty
26
Seventy
27
Eighty
28
Ninety
29
Hundred
30
Thousand
31
Million
32
Cents
33
Record Silence
34
AM
35
PM
36
Seconds
37
Minutes
38
Hours
39
Month
40
Day
41
Year
42
January
43
February
44
March
45
April
46
May
47
June
48
July
49
August
50
September
51
October
52
November
53
December
54
Star
55
Pound
56
Flash Hook
57
Comma
58
Number
59
Oh
60
Message
61
Less Than
62
Equals
63
Greater Than
64
Question
65
At
66
A
67
Today
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
379
Default Prompts
380
File Name
Text
68
Yesterday
69
Monday
70
Tuesday
71
Wednesday
72
Thursday
73
Friday
74
Saturday
75
Sunday
76
K
77
L
78
M
79
N
80
O
81
P
82
Q
83
R
84
S
85
T
86
U
87
V
88
W
89
X
90
Y
91
Z
92
Extension
93
Added
94
Changed
95
Deleted
96
Salutation
97
Messages
98
Through
99
From
100
Range
101
Parameter
102
Time
103
Date
104
Yes
105
No
106
Entry
107
Telephone
108
Box
109
List
110
Tomorrow
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Supervisory Functions
Over Phone
In This Chapter:
382
Introduction
383
Supervisor Menu
CHAPTER 21
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
381
Supervisory Functions Over Phone
Introduction
Although Officelinx is designed with a comprehensive set of system screens, you can perform many of the system's
supervisory functions through the telephone. Thus, the System Administrator is not restricted to his or her desktop PC when
the need arises to perform supervisory functions. A set of prompts guides you through these functions.
 Hint: This chapter contains key information relating to the system’s remote functions.
382
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Supervisory Functions Over Phone
Supervisor Menu
Accessing the Supervisor Menu
You can access the Supervisor menu from the handset.
Internal Extension
1.
To access the system from an internal extension, press [*]. The system will ask for the Mailbox number.
2.
Having provided the Mailbox number, press [*] again. The system will prompt you to enter the Supervisor password.
3.
Enter the Supervisor password. The default password is 1111.
The password entered will be specific for the administrator’s settings and language. Once
 Note:
the password is accepted, the system will play instructions and prompts based on the
administrator’s language.
If an incorrect password is entered, you have three retries at entering the correct
I Caution:
password. If you do not enter the correct password, the system hangs up.
External Extension
1.
To access the system from an external extension, press [#]. The system will ask for the Mailbox number.
2.
Having provided the Mailbox number, press [*]. The system will prompt you to enter the Supervisor password.
3.
Enter the Supervisor password. The default password is 1111.
The system will play the Supervisor Menu:

To configure mailboxes, press [1]

To configure feature groups, press [2]

For system prompts, press [4]

For company maintenance, press [5]
 Note: Multiple supervisors may access the system supervisory functions at the same time.
Creating a mailbox / range of mailboxes
You can use the handset to create a mailbox for a user without accessing the Administration Console.
1.
Press [1] at the Supervisor Main Menu.
2.
You will be prompted to enter the first mailbox. Enter the lowest mailbox number in the list.
3.
The system will prompt you to enter the last mailbox number. Enter the highest mailbox number.
4.
You will be asked to press [1] to create a mailbox, or [3] to delete a mailbox.
To work with a single mailbox, enter the same mailbox number for both values. If you make a
 Hint:
mistake, press # to return to the previous menu.
Creating a range of mailboxes automatically creates sequentially numbered mailboxes. You can
delete any unwanted mailboxes later.
5.
Press [1] to create a mailbox. You are prompted to enter the 2-digit feature group.
6.
Enter the feature group number containing the options you want the mailboxes to have. There will then be a short pause
while the system creates the mailboxes.
7.
The system will play a confirmation message and you will be returned to the Supervisor Main Menu.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
383
Supervisory Functions Over Phone
Deleting a mailbox
Officelinx allows you to delete one or more mailboxes that have been set up on your system.
Warning: When the system deletes a mailbox, all prompts, messages, and settings will be permanently
 removed
and cannot be recovered.
1.
Press [1] at the Supervisor Main Menu.
2.
You are prompted to enter the first mailbox. Enter the lowest mailbox number in the list.
3.
You are prompted to enter the last mailbox. Enter the highest mailbox number.
To work with a single mailbox, enter the same mailbox number for both values. If you make a
 Hint:
mistake, press # to return to the previous menu.
4.
The system prompts you press [1] to create a mailbox or [3] to delete a mailbox.
5.
Press [3] to delete mailboxes. The system prompts you to confirm the deletion of these mailboxes by pressing [1].
 Note: When you press [1], there will be a short pause while the system performs the deletion.
6.
Press [1]. The system confirms that you have successfully deleted the mailbox, and you will be returned to the
Supervisor Main Menu.
Recording a system prompt
The System Prompts are the default prerecorded messages listed in Introduction on page 352.
1.
Press [4] at the Supervisor main menu.
2.
The system speaks the following message: 
Press [1] for system prompts; press [2] for company greetings.
3.
Press [1] to record system prompts. The system speaks the following message: 
Please enter the system prompt to work with.
4.
Enter the system prompt. The system plays back the prompt you have chosen. When the playback ends, the system
speaks the following message:
Press [1] to accept; [2] to review; [3] to record; or [#] to exit.
5.
The system plays the system prompt that you just recorded. The system then prompts you to choose one of the
following options: 
To accept press [1]; to review press [2]; to re-record press [3];or to return to the previous menu press [#].
“Record” deletes and replaces the original prompt. Press [3] to record. After the tone,
 Warning:
begin speaking in a clear, slow voice. When you finish, press [1].
384
6.
If you are satisfied with the system prompt, press [1].
If you are not satisfied with the prompt, press [3] to re-record it.
7.
To record another system prompt, repeat Steps 2 through 5.
8.
To return to the Supervisor Menu, stay on the line.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Supervisory Functions Over Phone
Recording a company greeting
A company greeting is used to greet callers when they reach the company. For best quality, use a telephone handset to
record a company greeting.
1.
Press [4] at the Supervisor Main Menu. The system speaks the following message:
Press [1] for system prompts; press [2] for company greetings.
The Company Greetings are the custom salutations that callers hear when they call your company (for example, Good
morning...you have reached the ABC company...). They may be used when defining Business Hours, Voice Menus for
companies or Mailboxes and Customized TUIs.
2.
Press [2] to record company greetings. The system speaks the following message:
Please enter the two-digit company greeting to work with.
3.
Enter the company number. Press 1 is company is #1. The system speaks the following message:
Please enter the four-digit system salutation to work with.
The Company greetings are salutations set up on the Company Menu. The numbers you use
 Note:
must be entered on the Company Menu in the Greeting Times/Phrases section of the screen.
4.
Enter the company greeting. The system speaks the company greeting you chose, if it was previously recorded.
When the recording ends (if a greeting was previously recorded), the system speaks the following prompt:
Press [1] to accept; [2] to review; [3] to record; or [#] to exit.
5.
Press [3] to record. At the tone, begin speaking in a clear, slow voice.
Try to eliminate all background noise. If possible, use a telephone within your office. Accessing
 Hint:
the system through outside lines may result in additional background noise.
6.
When you finish, press [#]. The system plays the new greeting automatically. When the greeting ends, the system
speaks the following prompt:
Press [1] to accept; [2] to review; [3] to record; or [#] to exit.
7.
If you are satisfied with the system prompt, press [1].
8.
If you are not satisfied with the prompt, press [3] to re-record it.
9.
To record another system prompt, repeat Steps 2 through 5.
10. To return to the Supervisor Menu, stay on the line.
Changing the holiday setting
Use the handset to change the holiday setting.
1.
Press [5] at the Supervisor’s Administration Console. The system speaks the following prompt:
Please enter the two-digit company number.
2.
Enter the number of the company that you wish to modify. The system speaks the following prompt:
To listen to existing holidays, press [1]; to add a holiday, press [2]; to delete a holiday, press [3]; or to return to the
previous menu, press [#].” Press [1] to review the dates and greeting numbers of existing holidays for this particular
company, press [2] to enter a new holiday date and prompt number, and press [3] to remove an existing holiday date
and prompt number.
3.
Press [1] to listen to existing holidays. If any holidays exist, the system plays the date and greeting number of each
holiday assigned to this particular company.
4.
Press [2] to add a holiday. The system speaks the following prompt:
Enter the four-digit holiday date, month, then day.
5.
Enter the 4-digit holiday salutation. For example: Christmas Day (December 25) would be entered 1225.
 Note: When adding holidays, remember to record the new Holiday Salutation.
6.
Press [3] to delete a holiday:
When you press [3] to delete a holiday, you are prompted for the following:
Enter the four-digit holiday date to delete, month, then day.
For example, to remove Christmas Day (December 25) from the holiday list, enter 1225.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
385
Supervisory Functions Over Phone
386
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Client Preparations
In This Chapter:
Introduction
388
Web Client Preparations
390
Permissions
391
Getting Started
394
Domain Name System (Auto Discovery from iPD)
396
Single Sign On (Integrated Credentials)
397
Push Install for iLink Pro Desktop
401
Push iLink Pro Desktop Settings to Client PCs
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 22
388
387
Client Preparations
Introduction
So that the end user’s experience with the client software is smooth, customize and prepare the client software environment
from the Officelinx server.
Web Client Preparations
Web Client is a web-based interface that provides users with access to their UC account and features over the Internet. Web
Client must be configured before the user can take advantage of his or her iLink Pro Desktop.
The following four (4) steps must be performed prior to using Web Client:
1.
Configure the UC Server to install Web Client services
2.
Configure your browser to support the UC portal for Web Client
3.
Install the Java Plug-In, which allows user to listen to voice messages over the web
4.
Install Permissions for Java, which allows users to record voice messages and greetings over the web
Configuring your browser
In order for Web Client to work properly, you must be using a Windows or Linux OS along with either:

Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6.0 or later

Firefox
Java Plug-In
Downloading the Java plug-in
Users must install a special Java Plug-In in order to listen to voice messages using the PCs sound card. The plug-in is
downloaded from the Web Client login page.
To download the Java plug-in:
1.
Close all running applications and open the browser.
2.
Enter the IP address of the UC server in the Address field followed by /UC, then click Go.
3.
On the splash selection page, click on Web Client. The Web Client login page appears.
 Note: Contact your System Administrator for the IP address of your UC server.
388
4.
Click on 1 | Java Plugin. The File Download dialog box appears.
5.
Click Save. The Save As dialog box appears.
6.
Select a download location and click Save.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Client Preparations
Installing the Java plug-in
After downloading the Java Plug-In, install it onto your PC.
1.
If installing the Java plug-in immediately after down loading, click the
Open button on the Download complete dialog box. If installing
sometime after the download, locate the downloaded file on your hard
drive and double-click. The Welcome screen appears.

Click Install.
2.
Java will be installed on your computer.
3.
When the installation is complete, the following screen appears.

Click Close.








Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
389
Client Preparations
Permissions
Downloading Permissions
Permissions, along with the Java plug-in, allow you to record greetings and voice messages using your PC’s sound card.
If you are setting up Web Client at home or anywhere outside the office, the server should point to
 Note:
http://IP Address/UC/WebClient.
1.
Close all running applications and open your browser.
2.
Enter the IP address of the UC server in the Address field, followed by /UC/WebClient, then click Go.
3.
On the splash page, click on Web Client. The Web Client login page appears.
 Note: Contact your System Administrator for the IP address of your UC server.
4.
Click on 2 | Grant Permission. The File Download dialog box appears.
5.
Click Save. The Save As dialog box appears.
6.
Select a location for the download and click Save.
Installing Permissions
Once you have downloaded the Permissions, you can install them onto your PC.
390
1.
Double click on GrantPermission.exe (the installation file you downloaded). The
Installing dialog box appears as the permissions begin to install.

The Set Client-Side Permissions dialog box appears:
2.
Enter the IP address of the UC server and click OK. A dialog box appears,
confirming that permission is granted.
3.
Click OK. You can now use the Record and Listen function in Web Client.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Client Preparations
Getting Started
If you have just installed the Java Plug-In and Grant Permissions, you will have to close all open browsers and start a new
browser session for these changes to take effect. With all changes now made, return to the Web Client login screen, enter
your Mailbox number and password to access your account.
Enabling SSL for Web Client
Before using Web Client, it is recommended that you enable SSL on the Web Client website to ensure a secure connection.
Note: Digital certificates encrypt data using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) technology. This is the industry standard
method for protecting web communications. The SSL security protocol provides data encryption,
server authentication, message integrity, and optional client authentication for a TCP/IP connection.
SSL is built into all major browsers and web servers. By simply installing a digital certificate, you enable your browser’s SSL
capabilities.
1.
From the Windows desktop, click Start > Settings > Control Panel.
2.
Double click on Administrative Tools, then Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager. The Internet
Information Services screen appears.
3.
Locate your Web Client web site in the left-hand pane and
right-click on the site entry.

Select the Properties for your web site.
4.
On the Directory Security tab, click on the 
Server Certificate button.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
391
Client Preparations
5.
Click Next.
6.
Select the Create a new certificate radio button.

Click Next.
7.
Select the Prepare the request now, but send it later radio button.

Click Next.
8.
In the Name field enter a name for the certificate. 
Click Next.
9.
Specify the following:

From the Organization drop down list, type or select your
organization name.

From the Organizational unit drop down list, type or select your
department name.
Click Next.
10. Enter your country, state/province and city, then click Next.
11. Enter the file name that the request will be saved in, then click Next. 
A summary of the information you have entered is displayed.
392
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Client Preparations
12. Verify that the information displayed is correct, then click Next.

At this point, a private and public key for the certificate request is created. A certificate holds your name, your public key
and other secondary information, all of which are signed by a Certification Authority (CA) using a private key and
integrity algorithm. The private key stays in your PC and the public key is sent to the CA.
For this example, the certification authority Verisign is used. Only the trial version method is
 Note:
illustrated. It is recommended that you apply for a commercial certificate once you have decided
on the CA that best suits your needs.
13. In your web browser, go to www.verisign.com.
14. On the Verisign main page, click on SSL Trial ID. At this point, you will be prompted to enter your information.
15. When prompted for CSR (Certificate Signing Request), open the request file that you saved, then copy and paste the
contents of the request file in the space provided by Verisign. Verisign will email the test server-side certificate to the
address you have specified.
 Note: Begin copying the request file from the line “Begin New Certificate Request”.
16. To ensure that the certificate you receive is Base64-encoded, create an empty file with the .cer extension, then copy
and paste the contents that appear between the lines "Begin Certificate" and "End Certificate".
17. In IIS 5.0, click the Properties/Directory Security tab.
18. Click Edit Secure Communications, then click Server Certificate.
19. Select Process, then click Next.
20. Select the file name (.cer format) you created from the Verisign certification issued to you, then click Next.
21. When you have verified that the certificate overview information is correct, click Next.
22. Click Finish. Your web server certificate is installed for Web Client.
Ensuring SSL requirement for Web Client
Sometimes your URLs will be changed back to HTTP and you will be making regular, non-secure HTTP connections. To ensure
that your server requires an SSL connection for your web service at all times, you will need to specify that SSL is required on
the virtual directory your service is located in.
1.
In the IIS 5.0 Manager, right click the UC/Web Client virtual directory and click Properties.
2.
On the Directory Security tab, click Edit Secure Communications.
3.
Select Require SSL.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
393
Client Preparations
Domain Name System (Auto Discovery from iPD)
This appendix provides information on configuring the DNS (Domain Name System) Auto Discovery function as it pertains to
Officelinx. This will allow the system to automatically convert host names and domain names into IP addresses on the
Internet or on local networks that employ the TCP/IP protocol.
DNS Auto Discovery Configuration
 Note: The following steps may vary depending on the type of Windows operating system you have.
Configuring a Service: _webclient
394
1.
Locate your DNS/MMC snap-in via the following path: Start > Settings > Control Panel > Administrative Tools. Its
precise location at this point will depend on where the System Administrator placed it.
2.
Click on the DNS icon. Ensure that there is an entry for your Voice Server and make note of the name.
3.
On left-hand side of the screen, click on the _tcp folder.
4.
Right click in the right hand pane and select Other New Records... from the popup menu.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Client Preparations
5.
Select Service Location and click the Create Record button.
6.
On the New Resource Record screen, enter _webclient in the Service: text field.
7.
Select _tcp from the Protocol drop down list.
8.
The Priority:, Weight: and Port number: fields may be left at their default
values.
9.
In the Host offering this service: text field, enter the Name value as found in
Step 2. In this case, voicemail.
10. Click OK.
Configuring a Service: _umst
1.
Repeat Steps step 1 through step 4 from page 394.
2.
Select Service Location and click the Create Record button.
3.
Enter _umst in the Service: text field.
4.
Select _tcp from the Protocol drop down list.
5.
The Priority:, Weight: and Port number: fields may be left at their default
values.
6.
In the Host offering this service: text field, enter the Name value as found in
Step step 2. In this case, voicemail.
7.
Click OK.
The DNS Auto Discover option is now available for use with iLink Pro Desktop.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
395
Client Preparations
Single Sign On (Integrated Credentials)
Once you have auto discovery configured on the Domain Name System (Auto Discovery from iPD) on page 394, you
have the option to configure a single sign-on for end users. Single sign-on allows iLink Pro Desktop to use the current user’s
Windows domain account credentials to log them into a UC mailbox. This means that a user can simply install and run iLink
Pro Desktop on their workstation without having to consider server settings or entering a password.
In order for UC server to recognize a user’s domain account name, you
must manually enter it in the mailbox settings of the individual user.
From the Advanced tab of the user’s mailbox, enter the user’s network
domain and user name in the Domain Account Name field, separated by
a backslash \.
For example:
windows_domain\user_name
Once the information has been saved, the end user will be able to employ automatic settings
for both server setup and security credentials. All that is necessary is click on Login to launch
the iLink Pro Desktop.
This feature will only work when the user is logged into the computer with
 Note:
their own credentials within the domain. If they are using computer in a different
domain (e.g. a home computer which is not connected to organization’s domain),
or has logged in with different credentials (e.g. public terminal within the
organization), they will have to manually enter their login information.
396
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Client Preparations
Push Install for iLink Pro Desktop
A Push install allows the System Administrator to install software across a network, eliminating the need to physically visit
each machine. The following procedure outlines the steps required to configure a push install of iLink Pro Desktop.
Creating transformations for MSI installation
In order to create a transformation for the MSI (Microsoft Installer) package, it is necessary to use an MSI editing tool. One
example is ORCA, available as part of the Windows Installer SDK at
http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/library/en-us/msi/setup/orca_exe.asp
Download and run the Windows Installer SDK, then install the ORCA.MSI package. This will install the ORCA editor on your
PC.
When transformations are necessary
You can apply a transformation to an MSI package when you want to control the features that will be pushed to the
workstations.
Modifying the transformation
If changes to the features being installed are necessary, modify the Properties table.
In the case of a iLink Pro Desktop setup, all features are installed by default.
iPD Features installation is controlled by the following MSI properties:
USE OUTLOOK - the Outlook plugin.
USE LOTUS - the Lotus plugin.
USE PLUGINS - UCCM plugins.
USE TAPI - TAPI components.
To disable one or more of these features, go to the Property table, double-click on the Value field and change the number
to 0.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
397
Client Preparations
To create a transform:
1.
Start the ORCA editor and open the iLink Pro Desktop MSI package:
2.
In the ORCA menu, select Transform > New Transform. From New
Transform, select Transform Properties. The following screen appears:
398
3.
In the Suppress Errors feature box, select the checkboxes as required to set
transformation error handling. As a rule, you will not want to suppress any errors.
4.
In the Validation feature box, select the checkboxes as required to set
verification options. It is worthwhile to leave the Product Version is Higher
checkbox disabled to ensure that the transformation will be unusable with higher
versions of a product (higher versions might have a modified setup structure and
transformations generated for the current product version may be in conflict).
5.
Modify other table values in the MSI package as required. Click OK.
6.
Select Transform > Generate Transform. Enter the name of the MST file to be
created.
7.
Select Transform > Close Transform to save the transformation.
8.
Close the current MSI file and repeat Steps 1-7 as necessary to create further
transformations.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Client Preparations
How to publish transformations for MSI installation
When a transformation has been saved, it is possible to publish it along with the MSI package in active directory. In so doing,
the default behavior of the MSI installation will be modified for a push install.
1.
Open the Group policy snap-in and navigate to the Software installation node.
2.
Right-click in the right-hand pane and select New > Package.
3.
Select the appropriate MSI package for which the transformation was created.
4.
Select Advanced published or assigned in the Deploy
Software dialog box and click OK.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
399
Client Preparations
400
5.
Select the Modifications tab and add all transformations to be applied using the Add button. If necessary, you may
revise the order in which the transformations are to be applied.
6.
Click OK after all transformations have been added. The transformation package is now ready for push installation.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Client Preparations
Push iLink Pro Desktop Settings to Client PCs
With iLink Pro Desktop, it is possible to push detailed settings regarding iPD along with the application. Through the use of
client.xml and plugins.xml, you will be able to push specific settings related to iPD to any user.
This section lists all settings related to iPD so that you can troubleshoot settings related problems as well. Not all settings
within this section are meant to be pushed to the users. In most cases, these settings files (client.xml and plugins.xml) will
be available under the \Documents and Settings\User\Application Data\UCCM_NG\ folder, which may vary
depending on the type of OS that the user has. Pushing iPD settings to users will customize these setting files.
Once you have finished creating the custom xml files for your push process, please refer to Creating
 Note:
a Custom MSI Package on page 408.
Client.xml
Client.xml is used to push most settings regarding iPD other than those
related to plug-ins. You will be able to configure the connectivity
settings (login settings), set the size and position of iPD, and manually
assign values to most configuration settings available under the Settings
window in iPD. By default, the client.xml file provided to you for
customization will contain most of the fields covered in this document. If
you see a particular setting that is in this document but not in the xml
file, simply create the entry using the same format and assign the
appropriate values.
Root node “Configuration” is mandatory for all xml files. Sub-nodes and parameters are optional
 Note:
and may be omitted when creating default configuration files.
To define a setting for a user, you must first select a section to define. These sections are Session, Forms and Props and
can be configured as below.
<SECTION_NAME>
<!-<Param Name="PARAMETER_NAME" Value=" " />
-->
</SECTION_NAME>
To define a specific setting under a section, place the below field within the defined section.
<Param Name="PARAMETER_NAME" Value=" " />
Refer to the below charts for specific information on each group of settings and their parameters.
 Note: Parameter Name is the name you must define to configure a specific setting.
Type field indicates the type of data that a specific setting requires.
 Note:

String: Can be numeric or alphanumeric value.
Number: Must be a numeric value.
Boolean: Can be either true (1) or false (0).
Responsibility field indicates who has control over the field in question.
 Note:

Corporate: The value of this setting is mostly managed by the server. For most applications, corporate
type fields are ideal for creating a configuration file.
User: The value of this setting is managed by the user. This field should be left for the user to configure on
their own.
Internal: This field is maintained by the application. Modifications may cause problems and are only meant
to be used during troubleshooting by technicians. Do not include these in a configuration file.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
401
Client Preparations
UMST Connectivity Parameters
Section Name: Session
Parameter Name Type
Responsibility
Notes
SERVER
String
corporate
UC server address (IP or FQDN).
PORT
Number
corporate
UC server port.
COMPANY
Number
corporate
Company Number for User’s UC Company.
MAILBOX
String
user
User’s Mailbox Number.
PASSWORD
String
user
User’s Mailbox Password.
SAVEPASSWORD
Boolean
user
If true, save mailbox password.
ENCPASSWD
Boolean
internal
Protocol option.
LOGINNOTIF
Boolean
internal
Protocol option.
CLIENTTYPE
Number
internal
Protocol option.
Window size/position
Section Name: Forms
Currently, this section contains size and location parameters for a set of screen forms used in iPD.
 Note:
These parameters are not intended for manual configuration and should be used for reference only. Formname is unique to each window within iLink Pro Desktop.
Parameter Name Type
Notes
form-name.x
Number
X-coordinate of form.
form-name.y
Number
Y-coordinate of form.
form-name.h
Number
Form’s height.
form-name.w
Number
Form’s width.
form-name.m
Number
Non-zero means maximized window.
iLink Pro Desktop Settings
Section Name: Props
402
Parameter Name
Type
Responsibility
Notes
cfg20.import.done
Boolean
internal
Set to 'true' after iPD configuration check/
import to avoid repetitive processing.
log.filter
Number
internal
Log window filter setting.
mac.no.help.warn
Boolean
internal
Allows user to suppress the warning
concerning to help viewer.
internal.debug
Boolean
internal
Switches debug pieces on.
internal.contacts.fresh.hours
Number
internal
Internal use.
internal.oem
Number
internal
Last active OEM identifier.
internal.oem.eula
Number
internal
Last accepted EULA.
internal.seen.missed.timestamp
Number
internal
Tracks which missed calls are already
seen.
ui.contacts.expand
Boolean
user/internal
If true, contacts will be shown in expanded
mode.
ui.groups.expand
String
user/internal
Pipe-separated list of group IDs to be
shown expanded.
internal.dialout.extension
String
internal
Contains the user's preferred dial-out
extension if any.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Client Preparations
Parameter Name
Type
Responsibility
Notes
internal.dialout.extension.type
Number
internal
Contains the user's preferred dial-out
extension if any.
internal.dialout.pbx
String
internal
Contains the user's preferred dial-out
extension if any.
web.home
String
corporate
Use this field to override Web Client
address. Leave empty to use server-side
settings.
web.secure
Boolean
corporate
If true, use HTTPS instead of HTTP.
be.quiet.if.not.avail
Boolean
user
If true, suppress sounds if status is set to
not available.
search.engine
String
user
Default search engine ID. Currently
supported: "GoogleDesktop" for Google
Desktop, "MSSearch" for Microsoft Search.
autologin
Boolean
user
If true, iLink Pro Desktop automatically
connects to the server when application
starts. Safely ignored if there are no
credentials saved.
autostart
Boolean
user
If true, start iLink Pro Desktop
automatically when user logs into
Windows. Requires iPD to start at least
once to apply the setting.
reconnect
Boolean
user
If true, iLink Pro Desktop automatic reconnects whenever the connection is
dropped.
conversation.single.window
Boolean
user
If true, use a single window with multiple
tabs to display multiple Chat
conversations.
callman.separate.window
Boolean
user
If true, show separate Call Manager
window instead of integrating into main
window.
callman.autoclose
Boolean
user
If true, close Call Manager window
automatically if there are no calls.
callman.track.outgoing
Boolean
user
If true, display outgoing calls in Call
Manager and allow call control.
callman.save.dialout.extension
Boolean
user
If true, save currently selected dial-out
extension. If the setting is false, then dialout extension will be reset to default next
time the application is launched.
callman.default.action
Number
user
Default action for incoming calls that are
not answered by the users in person. 0 for
Take Call (no action), 2 for Take Message,
3 for Transfer. Transfer setting cannot be
pushed to users since it requires a target
which must be defined by the user.
callman.default.action.transfer
String
user
Destination of transfer when using Transfer
as the call’s default action. This setting
cannot be pushed to users.
callman.history.cleanup.days
Number
user
Cleanup call history older than defined
number of days. Zero to disable cleanup.
callman.history.mask
Number
user
Call history filter. Bitwise combination of
missed (2), answered (1) and dialed (4)
calls.
callman.autosearch
Boolean
user
If true, perform automatic desktop search
against caller name/id on incoming calls.
notification.on.new.message
Boolean
user
If true, activate notification for new
messages.
notification.record.beep
Boolean
user
If true, play sound when recording starts.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
403
Client Preparations
Parameter Name
Type
Responsibility
Notes
notification.lantalk.focused
Boolean
user
If true, play sound even if Chat window is
in use when a new message arrives.
notification.tray.animation
Boolean
user
If true, use animated tray icon instead of
static icons during notification.
notification.mailbox.flags
String
user/internal
Internally maintained list of notification
flags per mailbox.
sound.no.sound
Boolean
user
If true, turn off all sounds.
sound.file.connected
String
user
Sound to play when logging in. Prefix with
pipe ("|") to mark as disabled.
sound.file.disconnected
String
user
Sound to play connection is dropped.
Prefix with pipe ("|") to mark as disabled.
sound.file.incoming.call
String
user
Sound to play on incoming calls. Prefix
with pipe ("|") to mark as disabled.
sound.file.record.started
String
user
Sound to play when recording starts. Prefix
with pipe ("|") to mark as disabled.
sound.file.lantalk
String
user
Sound to play when new Chat message is
received. Prefix with pipe ("|") to mark as
disabled.
sound.file.new.message
String
user
Sound to play when new message arrives.
Prefix with pipe ("|") to mark as disabled.
sound.file.user.online
String
user
Sound to play when other users come
online. Prefix with pipe ("|") to mark as
disabled.
plugins.xml
plugins.xml is used to push settings regarding various iPD plug-ins. This
will allow you to manually assign values to the plug-ins that your
organization uses and automatically push the settings that are
commonly used. By default, the plugins.xml file provided to you for
customization will contain most of the fields covered in this document. If
you see a particular setting that is in this document but not in the xml
file, simply create the entry using the same format and assign the
according values.
Root node “Configuration” is mandatory for all xml files. Sub-nodes and parameters are optional
 Note:
and may be omitted when creating default configuration file.
To enable a plug-in by default for the users, use
<Plugin Type="PLUG-IN_ID" Enabled="1" />
Value of 1 is enabled, and 0 is disabled. Plug-ins which require the user to provide information (e.g.
 Note:
username, password, etc.) may also be turned on automatically through this setting but will be inactive
until the user finishes configuring the plug-in.
If you wish to specify a certain setting for a specific plug-in, use
<Plugin Type="PLUG-IN_ID" Enabled="x">
<Param Name="PARAMETER_NAME" Value=" " />
</Plugin>
Refer to the below charts for specific information on plug-in IDs and their parameters.
 Note: Parameter name is the name you must define under the plug-in ID to configure a specific setting.
404
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Client Preparations
Type field indicates the type of data that a specific setting requires.
 Note:

String: Can be numeric or alphanumeric value.
Number: Must be a numeric value.
Boolean: Can be either true (1) or false (0).
Pre-configurable indicates whether a specific setting can be pushed to the user or not. For most
 Note:
cases, settings which cannot be pushed are those that are specific to the user (e.g. username, password,
etc.).
Bluetooth Plug-in
Plug-in ID: UCCM.Plugin.BT.BluetoothPlugin
Parameter Name
Type
PreNotes
configurable
Device
String
No
Bluetooth device information including MAC-address.
ActionInRange
Number
Yes
Action to be performed if the device is in range. Do
Nothing = 0, Follow Calendar = 1, Set Location = 2.
ActionOutOfRange
Number
Yes
Action to be performed if the device is out of range. Do
Nothing = 0, Follow Calendar = 1, Set Location = 2.
InRangeFirst
Boolean
Yes
If set to true, actions may only be performed if the
device is seen in range first.
LocationIdInRange
Number
Probably
EEAM location identifier. Valid if ActionInRange is set to
“set location”.
LocationIdOutOfRange Number
Probably
The same as for LocationIdInRange.
Smart tags Plug-in
Plug-in ID: UCCM.Plugin.STG.UCPlugin
No parameters are available for this plug-in.
Skype Plug-in
Plug-in ID: UCCMPluginSkype.SkypePlugin
Parameter Name
Type
PreNotes
configurable
RespectSkypeStatus
Boolean
Yes
If true, UC Client changes availability when Skype
status changes.
ExposeAvailability
Boolean
Yes
If true, Skype changes its status when UC Client
availability changes.
ExposeExtension
Boolean
Yes
If true, Skype displays current UC extension in the
mood field.
ExposeExtensionIfAvai Boolean
l
Yes
If true, Skype only exposes current UC extension only if
UC Client is in available state.
ExposeLocation
Boolean
Yes
If true, include UC Location name in Skype mood field.
ExposeOnThePhone
Boolean
Yes
If true, include “on the phone” text in Skype mood field
when UC status is “on the phone”.
SearchContacts
Boolean
Yes
If true, allow Skype contacts search.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
405
Client Preparations
Google Talk Plug-in
Plug-in ID: UCCM.Plugin.GTalk.GoogleTalk
Parameter Name
Type
PreNotes
configurable
User
String
No
Google Talk user name.
Password
String
No
Google Talk password.
RespectGTalkAvailabili
ty
Boolean
Yes
If true, UC Client changes availability when Google Talk
availability changes.
RespectUccmAvailabili
ty
Boolean
Yes
If true, Google Talk changes availability UC Client
availability changes.
ExposeUccmLocation
Boolean
Yes
If true, include UC location name into Google Talk status
text.
ExposeUccmExtension
Boolean
Yes
If true, include current UC extension into Google Talk
status text.
ExposeUccmPhoneSta
tus
Boolean
Yes
If true, include “on the phone” string into Google Talk
status text when UC status is “on the phone”.
Microsoft Dynamics CRM Plug-in
Plug-in ID: UCCM.Plugin.CRM.UCPlugin
Parameter Name
Type
PreNotes
configurable
Version
Number
Yes
Define MS CRM server version. “0” for CRM v1 and v2,
“1” for CRM v3, “2” for CRM v4.
Server
String
Yes
FQDN or IP address of the CRM server.
Organization
String
Yes
Organization name to work with. CRM v3-and v4specific.
DefaultCredentials
Boolean
Yes
If true, use Windows authentication to log in to CRM.
User
String
No
User name.
Password
String
No
Password.
Domain
String
Yes
Domain name.
AddIfMissing
Boolean
Yes
If true, create new contact entry if the caller ID does
not match existing records.
ForceIE
Boolean
No
Internally used for testing.
ACT! Plug-in
Plug-in ID: UCCM.Plugin.ACT.UCPlugin
Parameter Name
Type
PreNotes
configurable
AddNew
Boolean
Yes
If true, create new contact entry if the caller ID does
not match existing records.
OCS Plug-in
Plug-in ID: UCCM.Plugin.OCS.UCPlugin
No parameters are available for this plug-in.
406
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Client Preparations
Microsoft Office Plug-in
Plug-in ID: UCCM.Plugin.MSO.UCPlugin
No parameters are available for this plug-in.
MSN/Live/Windows Messenger Plug-in
Plug-in ID: UCCM.Plugin.MSN.MSNPlugin
No parameters are available for this plug-in.
PCRecruiter Plug-in
Plug-in ID: UCCM.Plugin.PCR.UCPlugin
No parameters are available for this plug-in.
SalesForce Plug-in
Plug-in ID: UCCM.Plugin.SFC.SalesForce
No parameters are available for this plug-in.
TAPI Plug-in
Plug-in ID: UCCM.Plugin.TSP.UCPlugin
No parameters are available for this plug-in.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
407
Client Preparations
Creating a Custom MSI Package
Once the custom configuration files are ready, you must create a custom MSI package which will contain the new
configuration files along with the iLink Pro Desktop application.
To create an MSI packaged with customized settings, place all the necessary
files in a single folder. These files are:
client.xml: File containing custom settings for iLink Pro Desktop.
plugins.xml: File containing custom settings for iPD Plug-ins.
UCClientManager.msi: Default installation file for iPD.
UCMSIConfig.exe: Executable file for creating customized iPD MSI.
When all the files are ready, double click on the
UCMSIConfig.exe file to start the compile process. Once the
process is complete, press any key to exit the compiler.
There will be two files created. The only file necessary for
custom push installation is UCClientManager_Custom.msi. Use this file
during your push install process to push custom settings along with the iPD
application.
408
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Web Report
In This Chapter:
Introduction
411
Starting Web Report
412
Creating a Reports Template
413
User Reports
422
System Activity
428
Web Reports Legend
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 23
410
409
Web Report
Introduction
Officelinx allows you to generate a variety of reports on key areas of the system, such as calls per hour by PBX and company,
port usage and mailbox usage. These reports help you adjust server load and performance to ensure maximum productivity.
In order to use Web Report, you must first enable it in the OL Admin console by clicking Configuration > Logs. 
Set the Log System Statistics field value to True.
410
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Web Report
Starting Web Report
Before you can generate a report, you must log in.
To log in:
1.
In a web browser, enter the IP address or hostname of the UC server (i.e. user.yourcompany.com or http://
192.168.1.10) and hit Enter. The following screen appears. If you do not know the proper IP address, contact your
network administrator.
2.
Click Reports Portal. The login screen appears:
3.
Enter the administrator’s credentials for User Name and Password, then click Login.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
411
Web Report
Creating a Reports Template
Hint: Due to the large number of report parameters available, templates should be created that focus on
 specific
areas.
When you click User Activity in the left-hand pane, the following screen appears:
All report screens contain a number of useful, predefined templates. By making changes to these templates and saving them,
reports can be created to meet almost any requirement.
412
1.
Highlight User Activity (left hand pane). The User Report screen appears.
2.
Specify the mailbox search parameters in the mailbox tabs.
3.
Specify the date range for the report in the From and To fields.
4.
Add the parameters that are to be included in the report.
5.
Click Save. The New Template dialog box appears:
6.
In the New Template Name field, enter the name for the template.
7.
Click Continue. The new template displays in the left hand pane, under "Saved Templates".
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Web Report
User Reports
Generating a User Report
User Reports provide details on a great number of user-specific actions and activities.
1.
2.
Under Predefined Templates, click General Information Reports. The following screen appears.
On the Mailbox List tab, specify the following:

Select the All radio button if you want the report to be generated for all companies in the system.
OR

Choose the Select radio button to specify one company.
Note: Picking Select enables the Organizational Unit radio button. Choosing the OU Select radio
 button
enables the Mailbox radio button.

3.
Choose the Select radio buttons under both OU, then Mailbox. Specify the OU(s) and mailbox(es) to include in the
report.
Click the Mailbox Range tab. From the Company dropdown list, select a company. The specify the mailbox range in the
From and To fields..
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
413
Web Report
4.
Beneath the Mailbox List fields is the place to enter period covered by the report. Use the From and To fields to specify
the start and stop dates for the report. Dates may be entered manually, via a calendar generated by the associated
ellipsis buttons, or by clicking on the This week / This month buttons.
This week starts last Sunday and ends on the current day of the week. This month starts on the
 Note:
1st of the month, and ends on the current day, not the last day of the month.
414
5.
From the Actions on addresses drop down list, select an action to include in the report. Clicking the Add button will
append that item to the list. Repeat until all required actions have been added.
6.
Click the View Report toolbar button. The report is generated and shown as per the parameters specified above.
7.
Click the Save toolbar button to save the report.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Web Report
Generating a Remote Sites Report
The Remote Sites Report provides details on (AMIS/VPIM) remote site user activity.
1.
2.
Click Remote Sites in the left hand pane. The following screen appears.
On the Mailbox List tab, specify the following:

Select the All radio button if you want the report to be generated for all companies in the system.
OR

Choose the Select radio button to specify one company.
Note: Picking Select enables the Organizational Unit radio button. Choosing the OU Select radio
 button
enables the Mailbox radio button.

3.
Choose the Select radio buttons under both OU, then Mailbox. Specify the OU(s) and mailbox(es) to include in the
report.
Click the Mailbox Range tab. From the Company dropdown list, select a company. The specify the mailbox range in the
From and To fields..
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
415
Web Report
4.
Beneath the Mailbox List fields is the place to enter period covered by the report. Use the From and To fields to specify
the start and stop dates for the report. Dates may be entered manually, via a calendar generated by the associated
ellipsis buttons, or by clicking on the This week / This month buttons.
This week starts last Sunday and ends on the current day of the week. This month starts on
 Note:
the 1st of the month, and ends on the current day, not the last day of the month.
416
5.
From the Actions on addresses drop down list, select an action to include in the report. Clicking the Add button will
append that item to the list. Repeat until all required actions have been added.
6.
Click the View Report toolbar button. The report is generated and shown as per the parameters specified above.
7.
Click the Save toolbar button to save the report.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Web Report
Generating a Call Activity Report
The Call Activity Report provides details on user wakeup call activity.
1.
2.
Click Call Activity. The following appears:
On the Mailbox List tab, specify the following:

Select the All radio button if you want the report to be generated for all companies in the system.
OR

Choose the Select radio button to specify one company.
Note: Picking Select enables the Organizational Unit radio button. Choosing the OU Select radio
 button
enables the Mailbox radio button.

Choose the Select radio buttons under both OU, then Mailbox. Specify the OU(s) and mailbox(es) to include in the
report.
3.
Click the Mailbox Range tab. From the Company dropdown list, select a company. The specify the mailbox range in the
From and To fields..
4.
Beneath the Mailbox List fields is the place to enter period covered by the report. Use the From and To fields to specify
the start and stop dates for the report. Dates may be entered manually, via a calendar generated by the associated
ellipsis buttons, or by clicking on the This week / This month buttons.
This week starts last Sunday and ends on the current day of the week. This month starts on
 Note:
the 1st of the month, and ends on the current day, not the last day of the month.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
417
Web Report
418
5.
From the Actions on addresses drop down list, select an action to include in the report. Clicking the Add button will
append that item to the list. Repeat until all required actions have been added.
6.
Click the View Report toolbar button. The report is generated and shown as per the parameters specified above.
7.
Click the Save toolbar button to save the report.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Web Report
Generating a Notification Report
The Notification Report provides details on user notifications activity.
1.
2.
Click Notification. The following appears:
On the Mailbox List tab, specify the following:

Select the All radio button if you want the report to be generated for all companies in the system.
OR

Choose the Select radio button to specify one company.
Note: Picking Select enables the Organizational Unit radio button. Choosing the OU Select radio
 button
enables the Mailbox radio button.

Choose the Select radio buttons under both OU, then Mailbox. Specify the OU(s) and mailbox(es) to include in the
report.
3.
Click the Mailbox Range tab. From the Company dropdown list, select a company. The specify the mailbox range in the
From and To fields..
4.
Beneath the Mailbox List fields is the place to enter period covered by the report. Use the From and To fields to specify
the start and stop dates for the report. Dates may be entered manually, via a calendar generated by the associated
ellipsis buttons, or by clicking on the This week / This month buttons.
This week starts last Sunday and ends on the current day of the week. This month starts on
 Note:
the 1st of the month, and ends on the current day, not the last day of the month.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
419
Web Report
420
5.
From the Actions on addresses drop down list, select an action to include in the report. Clicking the Add button will
append that item to the list. Repeat until all required actions have been added.
6.
Click the View Report toolbar button. The report is generated and shown as per the parameters specified above.
7.
Click the Save toolbar button to save the report.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Web Report
Generating a System Report
The System Report provides details on many system-specific actions and activities.
 Hint: The System Report is an abbreviated User Reports on page 413 and so will appear familiar.
1.
Click User Activity. The following screen appears.
2.
From the Company radio buttons, select the company for which you want to see report information.
3.
Beneath the Mailbox List fields is the place to enter period covered by the report. Use the From and To fields to specify
the start and stop dates for the report. Dates may be entered manually, via a calendar generated by the associated
ellipsis buttons, or by clicking on the This week / This month buttons.
This week starts last Sunday and ends on the current day of the week. This month starts on
 Note:
the 1st of the month, and ends on the current day, not the last day of the month.
4.
From the Actions on addresses drop down list, select an action to include in the report. Clicking the Add button will
append that item to the list. Repeat until all required actions have been added.
5.
Click the View Report toolbar button. The report is generated and shown as per the parameters specified above.
6.
Click the Save toolbar button to save the report.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
421
Web Report
System Activity
System Activity reports provide details on a great number of system-wide activities.
Generating a Call Per Hour Report
The Call Per Hour Report shows the number of calls per hour that have been made on a particular PBX and company.
1.
Click on Call Activity in the left hand pane and select CallPerHour from the drop down list. The CallPerHour screen
appears:
2.
From the Company radio buttons, select the company for which you want to see report information.
3.
Beneath the Mailbox List fields is the place to enter period covered by the report. Use the From and To fields to specify
the start and stop dates for the report. Dates may be entered manually, via a calendar generated by the associated
ellipsis buttons, or by clicking on the This week / This month buttons.
This week starts last Sunday and ends on the current day of the week. This month starts on
 Note:
the 1st of the month, and ends on the current day, not the last day of the month.
4.
422
Click the View Report toolbar button. A report such as the example below is displayed:
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Web Report
Creating a Port Usage By Hour Report
The Port Usage by Hour report details port usage by hour for all ports.
1.
Click Call Activity in the left hand pane and select Port Usage By Hour from the drop down list. The Port Usage By
Hour screen appears:
2.
From the Company radio buttons, select the company for which you want to see report information.
3.
Beneath the Mailbox List fields is the place to enter period covered by the report. Use the From and To fields to specify
the start and stop dates for the report. Dates may be entered manually, via a calendar generated by the associated
ellipsis buttons, or by clicking on the This week / This month buttons.
This week starts last Sunday and ends on the current day of the week. This month starts on
 Note:
the 1st of the month, and ends on the current day, not the last day of the month.
4.
Click the View Report toolbar button. A report such as the example below is displayed:
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
423
Web Report
Creating a Port Usage By Port Report
The Port Usage by Port report details port usage by individual port.
1.
Click Call Activity in the left hand pane and select Port Usage By Port from the drop down list. The Port Usage By Port
screen appears:
2.
From the Company radio buttons, select the company for which you want to see report information.
3.
Beneath the Mailbox List fields is the place to enter period covered by the report. Use the From and To fields to specify
the start and stop dates for the report. Dates may be entered manually, via a calendar generated by the associated
ellipsis buttons, or by clicking on the This week / This month buttons.
This week starts last Sunday and ends on the current day of the week. This month starts on
 Note:
the 1st of the month, and ends on the current day, not the last day of the month.
4.
424
Click the View Report toolbar button. Web Report displays the Port Usage By Port Report.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Web Report
Creating a Port Usage By Company Report
The Port Usage By Company report details port usage by company.
1.
Click on Call Activity in the left hand pane and select Port Usage By Company from the drop down list. The Port
Usage By Company screen appears.
2.
Use the From and To fields to specify the start and stop dates for the report. Dates may be entered manually, via a
calendar generated by the associated ellipsis buttons, or by clicking on the This week / This month buttons.
This week starts last Sunday and ends on the current day of the week. This month starts on
 Note:
the 1st of the month, and ends on the current day, not the last day of the month.
3.
Click the View Report toolbar button. A report such as the example below is displayed.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
425
Web Report
Creating a Port Usage By Usage Report
The Port Usage By Usage Report details port usage by usage. Each port is reported on in one-hour increments.
1.
Click on Call Activity in the left hand pane and select Port Usage By Usage from the drop down list. The Port Usage By
Usage screen appears:
2.
Use the From and To fields to specify the start and stop dates for the report. Dates may be entered manually, via a
calendar generated by the associated ellipsis buttons, or by clicking on the This week / This month buttons.
This week starts last Sunday and ends on the current day of the week. This month starts on
 Note:
the 1st of the month, and ends on the current day, not the last day of the month.
3.
426
Click the View Report toolbar button. A report such as the example below is displayed.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Web Report
Generating a Caller ID Report
The Caller ID report provides detail on Caller ID.
1.
Click on Call Activity in the left hand pane and select Caller ID from the drop down list. The Caller ID screen appears:
2.
From the Company radio buttons, select the company for which you want to see report information.
3.
Use the From and To fields to specify the start and stop dates for the report. Dates may be entered manually, via a
calendar generated by the associated ellipsis buttons, or by clicking on the This week / This month buttons.
This week starts last Sunday and ends on the current day of the week. This month starts on
 Note:
the 1st of the month, and ends on the current day, not the last day of the month.
4.
From the Mailbox drop down list, select a mailbox.
5.
Use the Prefix field to apply a filter to the report. Enter digits from the telephone number, starting from the left-most
digit. For example, if you want to view only those calls from a particular area code, enter the three digits of the area code
in the prefix field. Entering the prefix 613 will generate a report that only displays numbers that begin with 613.
6.
Click View Report. Web Report displays the Caller ID Report.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
427
Web Report
Web Reports Legend
Use the following information to help interpret the output generated by Web Reports.
Duration - All time related values are in seconds unless otherwise noted.
Availability
Value
Description
0
Available
1
Unavailable
Destination Type
Value
428
Description
0
All
1
Mailbox
2
AMIS
3
VPIM
4
eMail
5
Phone
6
DL
7
Beeper
8
Voice Menu
9
URL
10
Fax
11
Voice Submenu
12
Contact
13
SMS eMail
14
Printer
19
SMS Phone
20
BBPIN
21
Folder
22
Google Docs
23
Customized
24
Storage
Notes
Voice menu with sub menu
Submenu of current voice menu
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Web Report
Greeting Type
Value
Description
0
None
1
Personal External
2
Busy External
3
Name
4
Location
5
Personal Internal
6
Busy Internal
7
Unavailable Internal
8
Unavailable External
10
User Defined
Value
Description
-1
All
Location Type
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
0
In Office
1
At Lunch
2
At Home
3
In a Meeting
4
Away on Business
5
On Vacation
6
Extended Absence
7
Temporary Location
8
Mobile
9
Remote Office
10
User Defined
429
Web Report
430
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
International Dial Plan
In This Chapter:
Introduction
433
The Dial Plan Engine
436
Parser Rules
439
Formatting Rules
440
Dialing Rules
442
Alphabet Rules
443
Tests
445
Sample Rule #1
446
Sample Rule #2
447
Sample Rule #3
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 24
432
431
International Dial Plan
Introduction
Dialing a telephone number is normally a simple procedure, but when it involves contacting people in other countries, where
different number conventions apply, it can become considerably more difficult. Officelinx includes a Dial Plan Engine that
allows administrators to define the dialing rules needed for their location. Since the rules may change depending upon where
you are, the Engine allows telephone number patterns to be created that tell Officelinx how to break up the number into
country code, area code, phone number, and all of the other components needed to complete the call.
The input can come from any source: through user input on the telephone or on the computer, the UC Call Handler, or from
an email client or other contact management application.
Multiple rules can be defined to handle calls to many destinations. The Engine starts at the top of the list and continues down
until it finds a matching format. The number is then broken into its components according to the matching Parser Rule.
Dialing Rules are then applied to convert the number into a format appropriate for Officelinx to pass along to the PBX to place
the call.
Formatting Rules take the Parsed output and format it for display.
011 (44) 55-1234
Display
(Human Readable)
011 (44) 55-1234
Formatting Rules
01144551234
01 11 44 55 1234
Number Input *
Parser Rules
(user or software generated)
9,,011,,44551234
Dialing Rules
9,,011,,44551234
Output to PBX
(Machine Readable)
* - The telephone number can come from any source:
the telephone keypad, a software package
(i.e. Salesforce, Outlook), or the UC Call Handler.
For example, the telephone number 9876543210 can be interpreted differently depending upon where the call originates.
In North America, it would become (987) 654-3210: area code 987, calling the number 6543210.
In Europe, it could be seen as (98) 76 543 210: country code 98, area/city code 76, calling the number 543210.
The Dial Plan Engine allows administrators to create rules that determine how telephone numbers will be read by the system.
432
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
International Dial Plan
The Dial Plan Engine
Starting the Engine
To launch the Dial Plan Engine, run the OL Admin program and open the menu for the PBX.
Click the icon for the Dial Plan. The Dialing Rules Editor screen appears.
This window contains 5 tabs:

Parser Rules - Used to define how a number should be broken up into its constituent elements.

Formatting Rules - Once the number has been parsed, this rule set defines how to display the number.

Dialing Rules - These rules are applied to the parsed number and then passed to the dial engine of OL.

Alphabet Rules - Describes the abbreviations used throughout the engine.

Tests - Used to check the validity of each rule before committing it to a live system.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
433
International Dial Plan
Default Rules
Officelinx provides a variety of dialing rules already programmed and enabled. To access these templates, select Default
Rules, then click Edit.
The rules are processed in order from the top down. The first match found will be the one used by the system. Highlight a
rule and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the order.
To change the parameters for a template, select it from the list and click Edit. The Template Editor screen appears allowing
you to modify the rule. Refer to the following sections of this manual for details on making changes to a rule.
This is the North America rule set. Four different rules are created to meet different
needs: normal local, long distance, and toll free dialing are detailed here.
434
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
International Dial Plan
Abbreviations
The Dial Plan Engine uses many abbreviations to simplify the coding of rules. The shorthand used follows industry standard
conventions as outlined below.
Phone Number Formatting Codes
{A}
Area code
{C}
Country code
{D}
Dial the number exactly as it is entered
{E}
Extension, for internal calls
{M}
Account code
{N}
Node ID
{O}
Outcall access code, to connect to an outside line
{P}
The telephone number
{T}
Trunk code
{Z}
Account code
Parsing Alphabet
Use these codes to define the telephone number parsing rules.
Character
Substitution
Definition
A
[A-Z0-9]
Any single capital letter or the digits 0-9
C
\,
Comma
D
[0-9\*\#\,]
Digits available from the keypad
H
\#
Pound sign / Hash mark
L
( *(\(|.|_) *)
Left bracket with optional white space
N
[1-9]
Digits 1-9
P
\+
Plus sign
R
( *(\)|.|_) *)
Right bracket with optional white space
S
\*
Star / Asterisk
T
[\#\*\+\,0-9]
Digits available from the keypad
X
[\.\- ]
Separator characters
Z
[0-9]
Digits 0-9
?
Optional Value
The preceding explicit value is optional (i.e. 0? ).
Upper case characters mean that an element is required. Using lower case characters indicate that
 Note:
the element is optional (N means the number requires a digit, n means that it is optional).
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
435
International Dial Plan
Parser Rules
Parser Rules are the patterns the system will use to locate the parts of a given number: from any entered string, identify the
area code, the country code, the phone number, and so on.
The Parser Rules tab is where each new rule is created by the administrator. Any existing rules are shown here, displaying the
rule name, the type of dialing required (Detect As), the current status of the rule (Enabled), and any filters that apply.

Name: The name of the rule.

Detect As: Can be one of Internal, External, or DialAsIs.

Enabled: Shows whether or not the rule is active (True or False).

Filter: This field shows which filter is to be applied to each rule.
Select Add to create a new rule.
Select an existing rule and click Edit to make changes to it.
Select a rule and then click Delete to remove the rule from the system.
Use the Load and Save buttons to bring up an existing set of rules for editing, or to save the current
setup to the computer.
The rules are checked from the top down. The first match found will be the one used by the system.
Highlight a rule and use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the order of the rules.
436
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
International Dial Plan
Add / Edit a Rule
When adding a new rule, or editing an existing rule, the Phone Parser Rule screen is used. Enter the necessary general
information for the rule. If a field does not apply, then leave it blank.
General Information
Name: Give the rule a name so that it can be easily identified from the list.
Detect As: Assign the type of number being dialed. Choose one of 
Internal - An extension within the company.

External - A number outside of the company.

DialAsIs - Tells the system to dial the number exactly as it is entered, and that no parsing is required.
Filter Country Code: If this rule applies to a specific country, enter the country code value here. Only numbers which
include this code will be included in the result.
Filter Area Code: If this rule applies to a specific region, enter the area code value here.
Filter Node Id: If this rule applies to a specific node on your network (i.e. a corporate office in another country reached
through a particular PBX), enter the node ID to be used here.
 Note: Nodes (switches or PBX’s) are setup through Officelinx where the node ID is assigned.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
437
International Dial Plan
Components
This section shows the individual elements of each rule, and can contain as many items as are required to complete the rule.
The rule is read from the top down: when searching for a match, the first component checked appears on the first line.
Index: Automatically generated line number of the component.
Type: The type of component being displayed (phone number, area code, outside line prefix, etc.).
Match: Shows the specific pattern to be matched. This column uses the standard Parsing Alphabet (see page 435).
Click Add or Edit to create a new pattern. Choose the appropriate category for the component from the drop-down list, then
enter the pattern for that component to match against.
Use the Parser Alphabet abbreviations (see page 435) to create the pattern.
This figure shows the element is a phone number that matches the following format:

Starts with any number between 1 and 9. (N)

Followed by 2 numbers, each between 0 and 9. (ZZ)

An optional (lower case) separator, such as a dash or space is next. (x)

Then two more numbers (0-9). (ZZ)

Another optional separator follows. (x)

Finally, 2 more digits (0-9) are required. (ZZ)
 Hint: Use OR to enter multiple values for an element. For example, “NZZZZZZ or NZZxZZZZ”.
Continue building the rule, element by element, until the appropriate pattern to match has been created. Include only those
elements that are required to generate the rule. Create as many unique rules as are required to cover all probable situations.
438
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
International Dial Plan
Formatting Rules
Once the number has been parsed, Formatting Rules define how the number will appear when displayed on various devices
and programs (i.e. iLink Pro Desktop on a computer screen).
With all of the component parts identified by the parser, the proper means to display the number is universal, so most options
here have been disabled. This feature is provided as a means to review the existing Formatting Rules if necessary.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
439
International Dial Plan
Dialing Rules
Dialing Rules take the parsed number and format it according to the needs of the phone system and PBX. Codes for outside
line access, account and long distance coding, and necessary pauses between components are added according to the rules
specified here.

Index: The order in which the rules will be checked.

Name: The name of the rule.

Filter: This field shows which filter, if any, is to be applied to that rule.
The rules are checked from the top down. The first match found will be the one used to format the number for processing by
the system.
Displaying a Rule
When adding a new rule, or editing an existing rule, the Formatting Rules screen is used. The current elements of the rule are
displayed. Each component can be edited or deleted, and new ones can be added from this screen.
Click Add to add a new element to the rule.
Highlight an element, then click Edit to modify it.
440
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
International Dial Plan
General Information
Name: Give the rule a name so that it can be easily identified on the list.
NodeId: Displays which node on the network will be used.
Formats
This section shows the individual elements of each rule, and can contain as many items as are required. The rule is read from
the top down: when searching for a match, the first component checked appears on the first line.
Type: This will be one of Internal, External, or DialAsIs.
Prefix: Defines the specific pattern to be matched. This column uses the standard Parsing Alphabet (see page 435) with the
specific value added after the colon (i.e. C:1). Multiple entries for a single type are separated by a comma (P:123,124).
Multiple item types are separated by a semi-colon (C:1;A:416).
Format: This column shows the format that the number will take when passed on through the system. This field uses the
standard Phone Number Formatting Codes.
Add / Edit a Rule
Creating a new rule, or editing a existing one is done from the Format Item screen.
Type: Choose from:

Internal - An extension within the company.

External - A number outside of the company.

DialAsIs - Tells the system to dial the number exactly as it is entered, and that no parsing is required.
NodeId Prefixes: Enter the node ID that the call will be placed through. NodeId is setup through Officelinx.
Country code: Add a country code for the call.
Area code: Add an area code for the call.
Phone prefixes: Add any necessary phone prefixes (i.e. to select outside line).
Format: Specify the order of the parsed components, pauses (use the comma), and explicit digits to add to the dialed
expression.
Detect As: Select from:

Local - Targets a destination that is close to the calling party.

LongDistance - Specifies a number that is within the current country, but is outside of the current region.

International - Tells the system that the call will be terminated in a different country from the point of origin.
The entries under Match internal (NodeId Prefixes) and Match external (Country code, Area code,
 Note:
Phone prefixes) are only enabled when the appropriate Type (internal or external) is selected.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
441
International Dial Plan
Alphabet Rules
This tab displays the Alphabet Rules used in many places throughout the engine. These items cannot be changed. They are
included for review purposes.
442
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
International Dial Plan
Tests
The Tests tab is used to validate the rules before committing them to a live system. Add and Edit phone numbers, then test
them to determine if the correct rule catches the number and parses it properly.
Phone: This is the raw number entered. In practice, this will be the number entered by the user on their keypad, or the
number passed to Officelinx from another program.
The remaining items are only populated once a test has been run. 
 Note:
Choose a number, then click Test to validate that number.
Click on Test All to validate all of the listed numbers against the current rules.
Type: Displays the detected Type for the number (Internal, External, DialAsIs).
Matches: Shows how many rules matched that number. For testing, all rules are used and the results listed here.
E164: This column displays the number using the E164 international standard format.
DB: This is how the number is stored in the program database.
Dial: This is the string that will be passed to the phone system for processing. It is derived from the
Dialing Rules.
Hint: Once a rule has been tested, use the Details button to see the specifics for each rule that
 matched
the number tested. This can be used to see all of the rules that matched the number,
and to correct the order of the parser rules to ensure that the correct match is made.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
443
International Dial Plan
Add / Edit a Test Number
The Parser Test window allows the administrator to enter various elements associated with a phone number. These details
can then be tested against all of the current rules to validate the results.
Leave any unneeded fields blank.
Phone: Use this field to enter a sample phone number as the system will receive it.
Client Address: Specifies the context for recognition of incomplete numbers. For example, if Client Address is 
+1 9057079700, then an incomplete address of 4161234567 should be read as +1 4611234567.
Server NodeId: Put in the ID of the node to be used in the simulation.
Outside Code: Enter the digits that must be used to access an outside line.
Mailbox Code: Used for the account code where applicable.
No calls will be placed during a test. The rules are being tested for accuracy, and to ensure that the
 Note:
correct rule catches each number.
444
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
International Dial Plan
Sample Rule #1
A single location can have multiple rules to handle different situations; toll free calling, long distance or local calling patterns
can be created. Change the order as required to ensure correct behavior.
Many rules
This sample shows a rule created to handle toll free calls in North America.
This rule will catch calls identified as External, with the country code of “1”.
Index
Type
Match
Explanation
1
Separator
l
Optional* left bracket
2
AreaCode
800 or 822 or 833 ...
Any of the listed values as Area Code (required*)
3
Separator
rx
Optional right bracket and/or a separator
4
PhoneNumber
AxAxAxAxAxAxAxaxaxa
7 required characters ( A ) followed by 3 optional characters
( a ), with optional separators between ( x )
(
(
-
* - Optional elements are defined with lower case characters in the match string, Required elements with upper case
characters.
Results
Match
No Match
Details
18005551212
+8005551212
Number includes international prefix code
1(800)-555-1212
800-555-1212
Missing country code
1(833)-MY-PIZZA
1(905)707-9700
Area code is not on the list
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
445
International Dial Plan
Sample Rule #2
Index
Type
Match
Explanation
1
Int’l Prefix
p
Plus sign
2
CountryCode
1
Country code of 1 (required)
3
Separator
l
Left bracket (optional)
4
AreaCode
[2-9]ZZ
One digit 2-9, followed by 2 more digits 0-9 (required)
5
Separator
r
Right bracket (optional)
6
PhoneNumber
[2-9]ZZZZZZ or
[2-9]ZZxZZZZ or
[2-9]ZZxZZxZZ
One digit 2-9, followed by 6 more digits 0-9 (required) or ...
+
(optional)
Results
446
Match
No Match
Details
+1(800)5551212
1(833)MY-PIZZA
No characters allowed, digits only
1800555-12-12
800555-12-12
No country code defined
+1(905)707-9700
1(144)905-7700
Area code cannot start with 0 or 1
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
International Dial Plan
Sample Rule #3
Index
Type
Match
Explanation
1
Int’l Prefix
p
Plus sign
2
CountryCode
44
44 (required)
3
Separator
l
Left bracket (optional)
4
TrunkCode
l0?r
5
AreaCode
[2357]Z
One of 2, 3, 5 or 7 (required), followed by a digit (0-9)
6
Separator
rx
Optional right bracket and/or a separator
7
PhoneNumber
ZZZZZZZz
7 digits (0-9) required, followed by one optional digit
*
+
(optional)
Left bracket (optional), 0 (optional), right bracket (optional)
* - The question mark ? makes the previous explicit digit optional. 0? means enter either a 0, or nothing at all.
Results
Match
No Match
Details
+44(0)21-1234567
+42(0)21-1234567
Incorrect country code
44()76-12345678
44(9)76-12345678
Trunk code out of range
440311234567
44031123456
Insufficient number of digits
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
447
International Dial Plan
448
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Security Enhancements
In This Chapter:
450
Introduction
451
Send URL (Voice Mail & Fax Security)
457
Enabling SSL from the IIS
CHAPTER 25
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
449
Security Enhancements
Introduction
To ensure that your organization is protected from potential threats Officelinx offers various features which you can easily
implement on your site. Officelinx is compatible with many common security measures, such as the SSL standard for web
access to web applications within Officelinx.
Please refer to the below sections for details regarding implementation.
Send URL (Voice Mail & Fax Security) on page 451 - This configuration forces users to access attachments on their messages
via a link, which means that the attachments cannot be forwarded as usual.
Enabling SSL from the IIS on page 457 - This configuration allows users to securely connect to Officelinx web services.
450
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Security Enhancements
Send URL (Voice Mail & Fax Security)
Overview
This feature allows you to increase the security level of Voicemail and Faxes that are transferred via email by storing all the
files on the server itself. Instead of the attachments being sent and received, the sender’s attachment is stored on the server
while the receiver gets a link to access the file.
The below process illustrates an example of how this can be implemented. Due to the variation between different sites,
following these steps exactly as shown (especially with regards to the URL and folder paths) may prevent the feature from
working properly on your own system. A professional technician with networking knowledge who understands the process
would be able to configure the settings necessary for your own system setup.
Also, please keep in mind that the configuration procedure will differ depending on the version of your IIS. In general,
Windows 2003 and XP will use IIS 6 while Windows 2008 and Windows 7 use IIS 7, which changes the interface you must
configure the feature from.
Voice messages which are listened to through the telephone using the Send URL action link within
 Note:
the email will not automatically change the read status of the voice message. Therefore, listening to
message in this fashion will not extinguish the message light on integrated environments. The end users
have the option of marking the message as read through the options available at the bottom of the send
URL message. Performing such an action will extinguish the message light on integrated environments if the
message is the last unread message.
Configuration Process
The exact procedure to setup Send URL depends upon which version of IIS (Internet Information Services) is installed on the
server.
Only follow the procedure that is relevant to your system. Do Not perform both IIS setup
 Warning:
procedures.
If the server has IIS 7 installed, begin the process on page 452.
If the server has IIS 6 installed, begin the process on page 453.
Regardless of which version of IIS is present, the Officelinx setup remains the same. Once the appropriate version of IIS has
been configured, continue with the Officelinx setup on page 454.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
451
Security Enhancements
Configuration with IIS 7
Use these instructions only if you have IIS 7 or later on your system. If you have IIS 6, use the
 Warning:
section Configuration with IIS 6 on page 453.
1.
In order to utilize Send URL, you must first
confirm that you have the necessary Windows
components installed for IIS. 

You will need HTTP Redirection and CGI
enabled within IIS. 

The screenshot here shows adding the
component from 
Windows Server 2008, which occurs under
Role management.

If you are utilizing Windows 7, you will see this screen, available from 
Control Panel > Programs & Features > Windows Features.












 Important: Continue with the section Officelinx Configuration on page 454.
452
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Security Enhancements
Configuration with IIS 6
Use these instructions if have IIS 6 on your system. If you have IIS7, then use the section
 Warning:
Configuration with IIS 7 on page 452.
1.
Open the Start menu. 

Right-click My Computer then choose Manage.
2.
On the left-hand side, select 
Web Service Extensions.
3.
On the right-hand side, select
All Unknown CGI Extensions.

Click on Allow.
4.
You will get the following warning. 

Click Yes to accept the changes and continue.
5.
Repeat steps step 1- step 4 for All Unknown ISAPI Extensions.
 Important: Continue with the section Officelinx Configuration on page 454.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
453
Security Enhancements
Officelinx Configuration
Once the appropriate version of IIS has been setup, continue with the Officelinx configuration.
1.
From OL Admin > Configuration > VPIM/SMTP, change
the value of HTML Content to True.








2.
In order to utilize the Send URL function, the mailbox has
to be associated with the Feature Group that has the function
enabled. 

From OL Admin > PBX > Company > Feature Group, go to the
Synchronization Options tab and select the type of messages you
wish to use Send URL with from the drop down menu.
3.
If a user does not utilize IMAP TSE Synchronization between their
Officelinx mailbox and the mail server account, you may opt for the
forwarding method. 

From OL Admin > PBX > Company > Mailbox, open the properties
of the mailbox you wish to enable Send URL for, then go to the
Message Options tab. Create an entry to forward the emails. When
the mailbox is associated with the Feature Group that has the
Send URL enabled, as shown in previous step, you can enable the
HTML Content checkbox. Be sure to leave the Attachment
checkbox disabled if you wish to send the URL only.
Please keep in mind that this step is only for
 Warning:
users who will be using email forwarding instead of
IMAP TSE Synchronization. If you configure forwarding for
users who are using IMAP TSE Synchronization, there will be
an infinite loop of messages. You should either use IMAP
sync or forwarding but never both for the same mailbox.
4.
454
When all your server side configuration has been completed, restart
the server computer.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Security Enhancements
5.
Locate the webmailconfig.exe file in the Officelinx folder (by default, this is
C:\UC). 

From Windows, go to Start > Run and enter the full path and file name in the
space provided. Add the /i parameter, and the URL of the server where the files
will be kept. 
For example:

C:\UC\webmailconfig.exe /i user.erb.com

Click OK and the program will automatically configure the remaining settings.
6.
Stop and restart the World Wide Web Publishing Service on the computer to complete the setup.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
455
Security Enhancements
Send URL Example
The following is an example of how the attachments are handled using this function. The email itself only contains the text of
the message. The attachment is left on the server. If you were to forward this email to someone with no permission to access
the mail server, they would not be able to listen to the message. While the email was forwarded, the attachment itself
remains secure on the server.
By using the buttons along the top of the email, the voice message can be played through the current device, or the
telephone associated with the user’s default extension. Actions below the attachment bar allow the message to be marked as
read, deleted from the voice server. A call to the sender can also be initiated.
Fax messages processed through Send URL will behave in exactly in the same manner. The attachment remains on the server
while only links are sent to the user.
Forwarded messages will contain links which are only viewable by authorized users.
Playback Controls:
- Play, Playback the attachment through a phone, Pause, Stop.
- Increase/Decrease playback speed, Adjust playback volume.
- Initiate a call to the sender.
456
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Security Enhancements
Enabling SSL from the IIS
Introduction
It is recommended that you enable SSL on the Web related features to ensure secure connections.
Digital certificates encrypt data using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) technology, the industry-standard
 Note:
method for protecting web communications. The SSL security protocol provides data encryption, server
authentication, message integrity, and optional client authentication for a TCP/IP connection.
SSL is built into all major browsers and web servers. By installing a digital certificate, you enable your browser’s SSL
capabilities.
Requirements
Requirements
Details
License
---
Software
Officelinx version 9.0 or higher
Procedure
SSL configuration is done on the Microsoft Windows platform hosting the site. This guide is provided as a courtesy for those
who wish to configure SSL with Officelinx. For further assistance, consult the professionals at Microsoft and its affiliates.
This example shows Windows Server 2008 with IIS 7.
1.
From the Windows desktop, click Start > All Programs > Administrative Tools > Server Manager.
2.
In the left hand-pane, open Roles, then Web Server (IIS), and select 
Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager.
3.
Under Connections, choose the web site. In the Home pane for the site, scroll down to the IIS section and double-click
Server Certificates.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
457
Security Enhancements
4.
In the right-hand Actions pane, click Create Certificate Request.
5.
Fill in the information for Distinguished Name Properties.
Common name: Enter the publicly accessible URL for the
site.
Organization: Type the corporation name.
Organizational unit: Define the department for this
certificate.
City/locality: Enter the location information.
State/province: Enter the location information.
Country/region: Enter the location information.
Click Next when ready.
458
6.
Choose the Cryptographic service provider and Bit length
(2048 or better is recommended) required by the certifying
agency. 

Click Next.
7.
Enter the filename and path for the certificate request file.

Click Finish.
8.
Pass this file to the authority providing the certificate. Make sure
that it has the correct file extension specified by the authority.
9.
The certifying authority will return the certificate in another file. 

Save the certificate file on the computer’s hard drive in a known
location.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Security Enhancements
10. In the right-hand Actions pane, click Complete Certificate Request.
11. To Specify Certificate Authority Response, enter the path to
and the filename of the certifying authority’s response from step
9. Click the ellipsis button ... to browse for the file.

Enter a user Friendly name to use when referring to this
certificate.

Click OK when finished. The certificate will be installed for the
site.







12. Double-clicking on the Server Certificates icon brings up a list of the certificates installed on the server. The new
certificate is listed using its Friendly name.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
459
Security Enhancements
460
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Server PC Name Change
In This Chapter:
462
Introduction
463
Server Configuration
CHAPTER 26
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
461
Server PC Name Change
Introduction
This document is intended to aid in changing the computer name of the Officelinx PC so that the voicemail database is not
affected by the change.
When the computer name is changed, whether because it has joined a domain or because of the need to conform to a
specific naming convention, the change must be reflected in the database.
Requirements
462
Requirements
Details
License
---
Software
Officelinx version 8.1 or higher
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Server PC Name Change
Server Configuration
1.
On the Windows taskbar, go to Start > Run. 
In the space provided, type c:\windows\system32\odbcad32.exe then click OK.
2.
Click on the System DSN tab. The following screen appears.
3.
Two of these entries must be modified. 

UC21_NUANCE_SQLANY 
UC21_SQLANY. 

Double click on one of the entries to modify.
4.
From the ODBC Configuration screen, click on the Database tab (if
present) or the Login tab (if there is no Database tab).
Which tabs appear is dependant upon the operating
 Note:
system installed on the voicemail server.
5.
Under Server Name you will see text similar to the one in the picture
“UC_TEST2” where TEST2 is the computer name. If the computer name
is incorrect, click inside this field to edit the computer name. For
example, to change the computer name to TEST3, enter UC_TEST3.
When editing this field, make sure that no additional
 Warning:
spaces are added in front of or behind the computer name.
6.
Repeat the process with the second entry. 
Click OK on all the open windows then proceed to the next step.
7.
From Windows, go to Start > Run. Type 
c:\sybase\sql anywhere 12\bin32\scjview.exe then click OK.
8.
On the screen that appear, double-click SQL Anywhere 12 in the right-hand pane. 
Open the Services tab, and double-click on the ASADB_UC entry.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
463
Server PC Name Change
9.
On the Service Properties screen, go to the Configuration tab.
10. Under the Parameters section there will be a long string with many
elements. Inside the string there will be “UC_ComputerName” text
which will be the old or the new voice server computer name. In this
example the computer name is TEST2. If the compute name is
incorrect, click inside the field and edit the computer name so that the
new name appears instead.
When editing this field, make sure that no
 Warning:
additional spaces are added in front of or behind the
computer name.
11. Once the computer name is confirmed or changed, click OK on all
windows and then close the database utility by clicking on the X at the
top right corner of the window.
12. Restart your computer.
13. After the reboot, open OLAdmin and go to Voice Server.
14. Make sure the name is the new computer name. 
If not, double click Voice Server Computer Name to edit the
name. Enter the new name of the computer.

15. Restart the computer and test that voicemail is working.
464
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Creating an MMC
Admin Console
In This Chapter:
466
Introduction
467
Server Configuration
CHAPTER 27
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
465
Creating an MMC Admin Console
Introduction
This document is to be used when a technician opens the OL Admin console on the computer and can only see the PBX
information.To circumvent this problem, the technician must create a new Microsoft Management Console (MMC) by following
the steps outlined in this guide.
Requirements
466
Requirements
Details
License
---
Software
Officelinx version 8.0 or higher
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Creating an MMC Admin Console
Server Configuration
OL Admin uses the MMC package which is included with the Microsoft Windows operating system. If an error occurs, you will
have to recreate the MMC and save it to desktop so that it can be easily accessed.
Procedure
1.
Go to Start > Run and type MMC in the run command field.
Click OK.
2.
Click on File > Add Remove Snap-in.
 Note: For Windows 7 users, skip to step 6.
3.
When the Add Remove Snap-in window appears, click on the
Add button.
4.
The Add Standalone Snap-in screen will appear. Scroll down until you see the 
OL Admin Snap-in. 

Select it and click Add then Close.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
467
Creating an MMC Admin Console
5.
Once you have clicked the Close button, you will see the Snap-in in the Add
Remove Snap-in window. 

Click OK.

Proceed to step 9.
6.
In the left-hand window, scroll down and select the UC
Admin snap-in.
7.
Click Add to copy it to the right-hand side.
8.
Click OK.













9.
The Console login screen for OL Admin appears. Enter the voicemail server administrator
user name and password

By default, this is Administrator and 111.
10. Once you enter the OL Admin, you will not see its full
content unless you click the + sign to the left of the word
OL Admin as indicated by the arrow.
11. Now that you have successfully opened the new console
you must save it for future use. Go to File > Save As
and save the console with an appropriate name and
place it on the desktop.






468
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Creating an MMC Admin Console
12. The newly saved console will appear on the Windows desktop.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
469
Creating an MMC Admin Console
470
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
UC Folder And
File Structure
In This Chapter:
472
Introduction
CHAPTER 28
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
471
UC Folder And File Structure
Introduction
This chapter contains a list of system folders and their contents. All Officelinx files are stored in either the Application or
Windows folders. This chapter also details the system file backup process and the system file restoration process.
Handling the Application Folder
The Application folder can be specified during the installation process. The default is C:\UC. Within that folder:
UMMonitor.exe is the user interface for Officelinx.
TOLee.exe is the Voice Server service.
Within the application folder, there are several other important folders.
Admin (OL Administration program folder)
TOLAdmin.dll modifies the configuration of the system.
AppWebFolder
This page has links to the WebClient and WebReport applications. Under IIS, the root virtual folder for voicemail points here.
DB (Database file folder)
EEAM21.db is the database file. All of the database information goes into this file.
DBbackup (Backup files of EEAM_DB.mdb)
C:\UC\DBbackup. If Reorg is configured from the Administrator console, the database will be backed up into this directory. By
default, numbered folders are created during the Reorg process to hold these files. Each numbered folder represents a
certain day of the week.
Folder
Day of the Week
1
Sunday
2
Monday
3
Tuesday
4
Wednesday
5
Thursday
6
Friday
7
Saturday
DBCOM (Database component folder)
EEAM.dll is the database access layer that manipulates the COM Object.
Messages (Message file folder)
Company ID (System creates the folder for Company 1 by default)
Fax contains all the fax type files.
Mime contains all of the files of this type.
Other contains all the files other than fax, text, and voice types.
Text contains all the email type files.
Voice contains all the voice type files.
472
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
UC Folder And File Structure
Prompts (Prompt file folder)
Company is the company greeting file folder. Company ID (System creates the folder for Company 1 by default).
Personal is the personal greeting file folder. Company ID (System creates the folder for Company 1 by default).
System. LanguageID (System creates the folder for Language 1 by default).
UMST (Unified Message Service Tasks service Folder)
UMSTService.exe sends email, forwards messages, delivers distribution lists and communicates with desktop applications
(iLink Pro Desktop).
VPIM
VPIMServer.exe sends and receives messages for VPIM.
Temp holds temporary files of VPIM.
Unresolved holds unresolved message files of VPIM.
Backup backs up VPIM files.
WebClient
Holds all the WebClient files including all the HTMLs, ASPs, Java applets and graphics.
ucSoundApplet.jar is the Java sound applet.
Ucclient.jar is the file that refreshes the web screen for real-time synchronization.
Download
jre-6u20-windows-i586.exe is the Java runtime engine for downloading.
GrantPermission.EXE is an executable run by the user to grant permission to the web client application to be able to record
on the PC.
UCClientManager.exe is the client CTI application for screen pop-ups and instant messaging.
WebReport
Holds all the WebReport files, including all HTML files, ASPs, Java applets and graphics.
.class files are used to display report results in graph form.
Handling the Windows Folder
The default is C:\WINDOWS.
EEAM.ini is the database component configuration file.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
473
UC Folder And File Structure
Backing Up System Files
Once you begin using the Officelinx system, it is recommended that the important system files are backed up for
precautionary reasons. Esna recommends that the following folders and their contents be backed up:

C:\UC\DB

C:\UC\Messages

C:\UC\Prompts
 Note: Other folders can be backed up if necessary. These listed folders are minimum required.
Before backing up any system files, ensure that the following services have been stopped.
 Warning:
▫ SQL Anywhere - ASADB_UC
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
UC FaxService
UC IMAP Server
UC POP3Server
UC Remote Printer
UC TSE Cache Manager
UC Unified Messaging System Tasks Service
UC Voice Server
UC VPIMServer
World Wide Web Publishing Service
To back up system files:
474
1.
In the Windows Taskbar, click Start > Programs > Accessories > System
Tools > Backup. The Backup or Restore Wizard screen appears.
2.
Click on Advanced Mode. The following screen appears:
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
UC Folder And File Structure
3.
Click the Backup tab. The following screen appears:
4.
Select and expand C:\UC and select the checkboxes beside the DB,
Prompts, and Messages folders:
5.
In the Backup media or file name field, enter the name for the backup file and select the location
that it will be copied to.
6.
Click Start Backup. The Backup Job Information dialog box appears:
7.
Click Start Backup. The Backup process begins:
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
475
UC Folder And File Structure
8.
When the backup process is complete, click Close. The system files
are now backed up to the specified destination.
When files are backed up, the information is saved based
 Note:
on the day that the backup process occurred. Therefore, it is
recommended that the system files be backed up regularly in
order to keep the backup files up-to-date.
476
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
UC Folder And File Structure
Restoring Files
In scenarios of system malfunction and the restoring of backed up files is needed, you must first completely uninstall
Officelinx, and then proceed with the file restoration process outlined in this section.
The restoration of files is only possible if the backed up files to be restored are of the same version as
 Note:
the system version that they are being restored to.
Before removing Officelinx, ensure that the following services have been stopped.
 Warning:
▫ SQL Anywhere - ASADB_UC
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
▫
UC FaxService
UC IMAP Server
UC POP3Server
UC Remote Printer
UC TSE Cache Manager
UC Unified Messaging System Tasks Service
UC Voice Server
UC VPIMServer
World Wide Web Publishing Service
If you are restoring the database files (originally in C:\UC\Db), you must navigate to C:\UC and
 Note:
delete the original \Db folder. The database files are read-only files and cannot be overwritten by the
restore process. These files must be removed before the restore procedure can begin.
To restore backed up files:
1.
In the Windows Taskbar, click Start > Programs > Accessories > System
Tools > Backup. The Backup or Restore Wizard screen appears:
2.
Click on Advanced Mode. The following screen appears:
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
477
UC Folder And File Structure
478
3.
Click the Restore and Manage Media tab.
4.
Under the Backup Identification Level list, double click the
Backup.bkf file that represents the backup file that was created. The
file expands, displaying the locations where the backup files exist.
5.
Select the checkbox denoting the location of the backup file that you
want to restore.
6.
From the Restore Files To drop down list box, select Original
location.
7.
Select the files to be restored.








8.
Click Start Restore. The Confirm
Restore dialog box appears.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
UC Folder And File Structure
9.
Click OK. The Restore Progress screen appears indicating that the
restore process is in progress.
10. When restoration is complete, click Close.
11. Restart all services that were stopped or reboot the system.


















The restoration of Officelinx files is complete and previously backed
up data is now recovered on the system.

System32
Files
Purpose
CSapiTTS.dll
This DLL sits in the middle layer, providing speech synthesis capabilities for
Enterprise.
CV_32DLL.dll
RHETOREX file format conversion library. Used only for Rhetorex voice boards.
VPIMServer.exe
Service of VPIM server (C:\UC\VPIM)
VPIMEventLog.dll
Error messages of VPIM for event viewer (C:\UC\VPIM)
TOLWebClient.dll
Core WebClient IIS application
MSWCRUN.DLL
This is the dependency file provides IIS VB application RUN time.
WebReportPrj.dll
This file is the core WebReport application.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
479
UC Folder And File Structure
480
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Understanding IMAP TSE
In This Chapter:
Introduction
483
IMAP TSE Gateway architectural diagram:
484
Operating Requirements
485
Integrating IMAP TSE Gateway
486
Installing and configuring IMAP SSL connection
490
Configuring IPSec
500
IMAP TSE and Exchange Transaction Logs
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 29
482
481
Understanding IMAP TSE
Introduction
The IMAP TSE Gateway is a server component that provides unified messaging and integration services between Officelinx
and other messaging systems. Using the IMAP4 protocol, the UM TSE provides an easily managed and highly scalable system
that supports a broad range of messaging platforms.
The IMAP TSE Gateway works directly with EEAM (unified messaging - UM - data and the business objects layer) to provide
UM clients (phone devices, web clients, etc.) access to a single messaging data store that combines all email, faxes, voice
mail and other types of information. The IMAP TSE Gateway allows UC users to access mailboxes that are located on a
messaging systems commonly found in a company network, such as Exchange Servers.
The IMAP TSE Gateway is tightly integrated with the EEAM. It intercepts any message store-related operations for configured
mailboxes, and transforms them into protocol commands that are supported by major messaging systems (acting as clients
for that system).
The IMAP layer is used to integrate with a broad range of messaging systems. Officelinx provides the ability to extend
protocol support by using plug-in modules for the IMAP TSE Gateway. If any operation that is regularly intercepted by the
IMAP TSE Gateway fails due to a network failure, the IMAP TSE Gateway gives EEAM the opportunity to continue to operate
through its own database so that data loss is prevented. Once a network connection is re-established, the IMAP TSE Gateway
automatically retries any stored operations.
To fully use IMAP TSE Gateway, user information must be specified. The LDAP protocol allows for the creation of a link
between the voice mailbox and a mailbox within the major messaging system.
482
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Understanding IMAP TSE
IMAP TSE Gateway architectural diagram:
Exchange
Lotus
Server
Clients
Web
Client
Msg
System
Directory
Data
Admin
LNAPI
EEAM
TSE
INTRCEPTOR
UC
TSE
User’s
Manager
MAPI
Store
Manager
IMAP
IMAP Server
CLIENTS (Outlook and others)
LDAP Server
(IMAP4 Rev1 Required)
Messaging
Database
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Officelinx
Messaging
System
Exchange
Store
483
Understanding IMAP TSE
Operating Requirements
To successfully utilize the IMAP TSE Gateway, the following components are required:

UM components

Major Messaging System components

100 BaseT Ethernet or faster

IMAP4 rev1 support on the Major Messaging System

Secure Socket Layer certification for each machine involved in running IMAP transactions, allowing for encrypted
authentication (provided SSL services are required)
Data flow
Three (3) major operation modes are used by the UM TSE Gateway:
1.
Active Session Support
2.
Background File Transfers for Inactive Sessions
3.
Managing Mailbox Statistics
Active session support
Once an active client session is established by one of the UM clients, EEAM receives the corresponding request and forwards
the command to the IMAP TSE Gateway. The command checks to see if a mailbox for this operation is configured to use a
single store. The IMAP TSE Gateway holds the pool of active sessions. These sessions are maintained until the client requests
can be processed. In the case of a session failure, the error will be reported to the EEAM with a corresponding status code
and the session will continue to execute without the IMAP4 Gateway using the local UM database. Once the session is
reestablished, EEAM will forward all outstanding requests to the IMAP TSE Gateway.
IMAP TSE Gateway uses data caching for storing message header information in order to return results back to the EEAM as
quickly and efficiently as possible.
Background file transfers
Due to possible network failures, the single store used by the IMAP TSE Gateway may be inaccessible. At these times, the
EEAM stores all of the data in the UM database. When the connection is re-established, the system will search for the data
stored in the UM database and transfer it onto the single store. After this process is completed, the system verifies that
database synchronization is correct.
Managing mailbox statistics
In order to support the fast retrieval of mailbox statistics, the UM TSE Gateway executes a number of threads that establish
new temporary sessions to the single store. This is done on a regular basis for each configured mailbox, checking for the
number of messages in each folder, and the number of unread/read messages by type (voice, fax, email). When the UM
application retrieves this value from the EEAM, the UM TSE Gateway gives the last computed values stored in the cache.
484
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Understanding IMAP TSE
Integrating IMAP TSE Gateway
For details on integrating IMAP enabled mail servers with Officelinx, please refer to the Feature Description Guide which is
available on the Officelinx installation DVD, and Esna’s documentation website at 
http://documents.esna.com.
The following servers support Superuser implementation, which allows a single admin level account to oversee
synchronization, eliminating the need for users to update their mail server passwords on Officelinx.

Microsoft Exchange 2010

Microsoft Exchange 2007

Microsoft Exchange 2003

Google Apps

Lotus Domino
The following servers which support generic IMAP integration, which requires the entry of each user’s mail server password
within Officelinx mailbox.

Novell Groupwise

Most IMAP enabled Mail Servers
If you wish to utilize Blackberry devices within your organization, please refer to Blackberry
 Note:
Enterprise Server integration section within Feature Description Guide.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
485
Understanding IMAP TSE
Installing and configuring IMAP SSL connection
This section describes the steps to establish a secure IMAP connection between the UC system and a Microsoft Exchange
Server, to protect IMAP traffic while synchronizing mailboxes. Configuration steps provided here should be considered only as
the simplest way to make an SSL connection. Implementing secured networking as well as certificate services largely
depends on an organization’s needs, and may impact or depend upon many factors not covered here. For full documentation
of Microsoft Certificate Services, Private Key Infrastructure, Microsoft Exchange and other linked topics, please refer to
Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Exchange product documentation.
The suggested method for establishing a secure IMAP connection between Officelinx and Microsoft Exchange requires:

Creating certification authority that will be used to issue a server certificate for the IMAP server.

Assigning a server certificate to IMAP server.
Creating certification authority
In order to create certification authority (if one is not yet available) it is necessary to pick a PC that will serve as the
certificate server for a domain where Microsoft Exchange Server is installed, and install Certificate Services on it. Certificate
services are a Windows component that comes with Windows Server.
486
1.
Go to Control panel > Add or Remove Programs.
2.
Click Add/Remove Windows Components.
3.
Check Certificate Services and click Next.
4.
Select the Certification Authority type required. 

For this example, we are considering the simplest case when Certificate
Authority was not present. Select Enterprise root CA.

Click Next.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Understanding IMAP TSE
5.
Enter the appropriate identity information.

Click Next.
6.
Modify data storage location options if necessary, then click Next.
7.
Windows will start installing Certificate services. After the process is
finished Certification Authority can be used to issue a certificate for IMAP
server.











Assigning certificate to IMAP server
1.
On PC the where Microsoft Exchange Server is installed, start the
Microsoft Exchange System Manager. 

Open the Protocols container (see below).
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
487
Understanding IMAP TSE
488
2.
Right-click on the IMAP server instance and select Properties.
3.
Open the Access tab.
4.
Click Certificate button. The Web Server Certificate Wizard will start.
5.
Click Next.
6.
Click Create a new certificate.

Click Next.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Understanding IMAP TSE
7.
Pick Send the request immediately option. 

Click Next.
8.
Put the DNS name of Exchange server into Name box. 

Click Next.
9.
Select Organization and Organizational Unit. Click Next.
10. Put full DNS name of Exchange server into Common name box. 

Click Next.
11. Specify geographical location of Exchange server. Click Next.
12. Pick certification authority to request certificate from. Click Next.
13. Click Next to submit request.
14. Request will be sent to Certification authority, and if it is online, server
certificate will be assigned immediately. Click Finish.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
489
Understanding IMAP TSE
Configuring IPSec
The IMAP Transparent Storage Engine (IMAP TSE) requires regular access user mailboxes. To achieve this access, IMAP TSE
uses either:

A superuser account which has permission to access all user mailboxes.

Individual user accounts.
In both cases, the credentials used for authentication (Username and Password) are passed between the IMAP TSE and the
IMAP server in plain text. Depending on corporate requirements (e.g. network topology, corporate security standards), this
situation may be undesirable. The possibility exists for a malicious user to intercept network traffic, thereby gaining access to
authentication credentials. This possibility exists for both private (behind a firewall/proxy server) and public networks.
Attempts to compromise your network come not only from outside individuals; they often come from your user base as well.
In order to remove the possibility of usernames and passwords being collected this way, you may employ Internet Security
Protocol (IPSec) to encrypt both the authentication and data packets being passed between the IMAP TSE and your IMAP
server. IPSec provides application transparent encryption services for IP network traffic. With IPSec, you can provide data
privacy, integrity, authenticity and anti-replay protection for network traffic.
The following is a guide to the configuration of IPSec on both your Voicemail and Email servers. This article assumes both
servers run on a Windows platform.
The Security Policy MMC
In order to access IPSec policy, the Security Policy MMC must be open. Log on to your Voicemail server and navigate to the
Start Menu, select Run, and enter “secpol.msc” (without quotes). The Local Security Settings dialog box appears.
From here, you can create a custom IPSec policy.
Configuring an IPSec policy
1.
490
On the Voicemail Server, in the left-hand pane of the MMC Console,
right-click IP Security Policies on Local Computer and select Create
IP Security Policy. The IP Security Policy Wizard appears. 

Click Next.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Understanding IMAP TSE
2.
Enter IMAP as the name of your policy, then click Next.
3.
Disable Activate the default response rule.

Click Next.
4.
Make sure that Edit Properties is enabled.

Click Finish.
5.
In the Properties dialog box for the policy you have just created,
ensure that the Use Add Wizard checkbox in the lower-right corner is enabled. 

Click Add to start the Security Rule Wizard.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
491
Understanding IMAP TSE
492
6.
Click Next to proceed through the Security Rule Wizard.
7.
Enable This rule does not specify a tunnel. 

Click Next.
8.
Select the radio button for All network connections and click Next.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Understanding IMAP TSE
Configuring an IKE authentication method
Next, the trust relationship between computers is established by specifying how they will authenticate themselves, or prove
their identities to each other when trying to establish a security association. IKE for Windows provides three authentication
methods to establish this trust relationship:

Kerberos v5 authentication provided by the Windows domain that serves as a Kerberos v5 Key Distribution Center (KDC).
This provides easy deployment of secure communications between Windows computers who are members of a domain or
across trusted domains. IKE only uses the authentication properties of Kerberos. Key generation for IPSec security
associations is done using IKE RFC 2409 methods.

Pre-shared key, which is a password used strictly for establishing trust between computers.

Public/Private key signatures using certificates, compatible with several certificate systems, including Microsoft, Entrust,
VeriSign, and Netscape.
The method of authentication employed will depend upon the network environment. If both the Voicemail and Email servers
are members of the same Windows domain, the easiest method to employ is Kerberos (the default). If the computers are not
members of the same Windows domain, use a pre-shared key. Only use Public/Private key authentication if you have a full
understanding of Public Key structure, and ready access to a certificate services machine.
To configure the authentication method for the rule:
Choose Kerberos (if both servers are members of the same Windows domain).
OR
Choose Use this string to protect this key exchange and enter a string of characters (ABC123, for example). Try to make
the string somewhat complex. Record this string, because you must use it when configuring the policy on the email Server as
well.
Configuring an IPSec filter list
IP Security is applied to IP packets as they are sent and received. Packets are matched against filters when being sent
(outbound) to see if they should be secured, blocked, or passed through in clear text. Packets are also matched when
received (inbound) to see if they should be secured, blocked, or permitted into the system
1.
In the IP Filter List dialog box, click Add.
2.
An empty list of IP filters is displayed. Name your filter IMAP Filter.

Make sure Use Add Wizard is enabled.

Click Add to start the IP Filter Wizard.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
493
Understanding IMAP TSE
494
3.
Click Next to continue.
4.
Enter a description for the filter in the space provided if desired.
5.
Choose My IP Address from the drop-down list as the default source
address.

Click Next.
6.
Choose A Specific IP address from the drop down list.

Enter the IP address of your email Server. 

Click Next.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Understanding IMAP TSE
7.
Select the protocol type as TCP, then click Next.
8.
On the IP Protocol Port screen, select From any port and below,
select To this Port. Enter 143 in the box. 

Click Next.
9.
Make sure the Edit Properties checkbox is disabled.

Click Finish.
10. Click OK to leave the IP Filter List dialog box and return to the New
Rule Wizard.
11. In the IP Filter List dialog box, select the radio button next to 
IMAP Filter.

Click Next.










I Caution: Read the following section before proceeding to the steps involved in configuring the filter action.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
495
Understanding IMAP TSE
Configuring an IPSec filter action
Both the input and output filters for TCP/IP packets are now configured. The next step is to configure the action to take for
those packets. You can permit, block, or secure the packets that match the filters. If you want to secure the traffic, both
computers must have a compatible negotiation policy configured. Two of the methods allow communication with computers
that are not able to execute IPSec:
496

Use the filter action Permit to let the packets go unsecured. Use this action in combination with a filter that matches the
traffic you want to permit in its own rule within the IPSec policy. Typical uses would be to permit traffic types of ICMP,
DNS, or SNMP, or to permit traffic to certain destinations, such as the default gateway, DHCP and DNS servers, or other
non-IPSec systems.

Configure your filter action to use the setting Fall back to unsecured communication. You will see this option
presented in the wizard. Selecting this option in the wizard will enable the filter action parameter Allow unsecured
communication with non-IPSec aware computer. Using this setting permits unsecured communication with a
destination, by falling back to clear text if the destination does not reply to the IKE negotiation request. If at any time the
client does reply, then a negotiation is in progress and must succeed completely. If IKE negotiation fails, the outbound
packets that matched the filter will be discarded (blocked) for one minute, whereupon another outbound packet will
cause another IKE negotiation to be attempted. This setting only affects IKE negotiations that are initiated by the
computer. It has no effect on computers that receive a request and thus respond. The IKE RFC 2409 standard does not
provide a method for both sides to negotiate to normal, or unsecured, or clear text mode.
1.
In the right-hand panel, right-click and select Manage IP filter lists and filter actions... from the list.
2.
Go to the Manager Filter Actions tab.
3.
Enable the Use Add Wizard checkbox.

Click Add.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Understanding IMAP TSE
4.
Click Next to proceed through the Filter Action Wizard.
5.
Name this filter action IMAP Filter Action.

Click Next.
6.
In the Filter Action General Options dialog box select Negotiate
Security.

Click Next.
7.
Click Fall Back to Unsecured Communication from the next wizard
page.
This will ensure that computers you have not configured
 Note:
to use IPSec will still be able to establish IMAP sessions.
Click Next.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
497
Understanding IMAP TSE
8.
Select Integrity and Encryption from the list of security methods.

Click Next.
9.
Make sure the Edit Properties checkbox is cleared. 

Click Finish to complete the action wizard.
10. In the Filter Action dialog box click the radio button next to IMAP
Filter Action and click Next.
11. Make sure the Edit properties checkbox is cleared. Click Finish.
12. In the Properties page now displaying, click Close.
You have successfully configured an IPSec Policy.
You have just configured the filter action that will be used during
negotiations with the Email Server.
 Note: You can re-use this filter action in other policies.
Configure IPSec policy on the email server
The policy you make on the email server will similar to the policy just created. There are a few changes.
Repeat the instruction set above making the following changes

In the section Configuring an IPSec Filter List step 6, enter your Voicemail Server’s IP Address.

In the same section, step 7, select From this Port and enter 143. 
Underneath that, select To any port.

In the section To Configure the Authentication Method for the Rule, if you selected the Pre-Shared Key for
authentication, ensure that you enter the same pre-shared key string when configuring the policy on the email server.
Assigning the IPSec policies
Once you have created the IPSec policy on both the Voicemail and email servers, you must assign the policies.
Open the Security Policy MMC on each computer. The Local Security Settings dialog box appears.
Right-click the “IMAP” policy which you added and select assign. Do this on both the email and voicemail servers. At any
time, you may un-assign the policy by right-clicking it and selecting un-assign.
498
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Understanding IMAP TSE
Verifying that the IPSec policies are working
You should now test to see whether the two machines are employing IPSec to encrypt their IMAP traffic.
On both machines:
1.
Go to Start > Run and enter MMC in the command line to launch the Management Console.
2.
Select File > Add/Remove Snap-In...
Click Add.
3.
Choose IP Security Monitor from the available options.
Click Add.
Click OK.
4.
Locate and open the Statistics menu item in the left-hand pane.
In this window, you can view the status of the security association between the two servers configured to use IPSec. If your
policies have been configured properly, and IMAP traffic is currently being passed between the two servers, there will be an
entry under Active Security Associations.
If no association appears, check to make sure that IMAP traffic is flowing. If IMAP traffic is flowing, check to ensure you
followed the steps above exactly.
Your traffic is secure
Once you have verified the Security Association on both the email and voice servers, IMAP traffic is secure. No one will be
able to intercept usernames, passwords, or the contents of the IP packets as they are passed between the two servers.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
499
Understanding IMAP TSE
IMAP TSE and Exchange Transaction Logs
What are transaction logs?
Exchange utilizes a transactional database model. Transactional databases are generally regarded as robust and stable, as
database events are either wholly committed or discarded. If data is only partially committed to a database, corruption may
result. Transactional logging greatly reduces this likelihood.
Exchange transaction logs record every transaction
taking place on your Exchange server (reads, deletes,
logons, meeting notifications, etc). Literally thousands of
transactions can occur every hour when user email traffic
is at its highest. These transactions are stored in
“transaction logs”. By default, they are located at:
C:\Program Files\Exchsrvr\MDBdata
Transaction logs are 5120KB in size, and each log has a
unique hexadecimal identifier. Below is an example list of
Exchange transaction logs:
Log files such as these are extremely important to the
health of your Exchange server.
Managing the transaction logs
It is extremely important that you monitor your transaction logs regularly as they are continually growing. If Exchange runs
out of disk space and is unable to continue creating transaction logs, the Exchange server will shut down and your users will
be unable to access their email. To prevent this situation from occurring, you should take the following actions:
1.
Ensure there is sufficient disk space for Exchange transaction logs to grow. Sufficient space will differ from organization
to organization. When in doubt, err on the side of caution and provide as much free space as possible.
It is possible and usually desirable to specify a path for your transaction logs. Consider placing them on a dedicated disk
or RAID array. Not only will this ensure adequate size, but you will realize performance gains as well.
For more information, refer to Microsoft's documentation for transaction log placement.
2.
Back up your Exchange Information stores regularly. Each time you back up your Exchange information stores, the
transaction logs for said stores are committed to the Exchange database and the transaction log process “zeros out”,
thereby eliminating the disk space utilized by the logs. This disk space is recovered when a backup is completed. If the
Exchange information stores are never backed up, the transaction logs will inevitably grow to a size which outstrips
available space.
It is extremely important that you back up the Exchange information stores properly. A file level backup is incorrect and
will not result in the transaction logs being committed and flushed.
The IMAPTSE and your Exchange transaction logs
The IMAPTSE is the agent responsible for unifying your email and voicemail databases. It needs to interact with the Exchange
server on a regular basis in order to achieve this end. Every time the TSE interacts with your Exchange server, many
transactions take place. These transactions are logged in the Exchange transaction logs. Logically, you can expect an
increased rate of growth for your Exchange transaction logs when you are using the TSE to unify your messages. You should
account for this before you configure the IMAPTSE to point to your Exchange server.
Accounting for accelerated transaction log growth
In order to determine how much extra space you will require on the Exchange server for your transaction logs, you should
enumerate at least a week’s worth of logs and determine the size they occupy. This is easily achieved by locating your
transaction logs, selecting one created (for example) on Monday 12:00 AM, and then scrolling down until you reach (for
example) Sunday 11:59PM. Shift-click to select all logs between these two points, and note the total disk space they occupy.
Let’s say this results in 4GB total disk space. To be safe, double this (to 8GB) and ensure you have at least this much disk
space available for your transaction logs.
500
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Understanding IMAP TSE
Summary
1.
The IMAPTSE will logically result in accelerated growth of Exchange transaction logs.
2.
Sufficient space must be provided for this growth. 2x your current transaction log usage is a safe guideline.
3.
Regular backups should be carried out to free up disk space and clear your transaction logs.
Turning off the transaction logs
It is possible to turn off the logging on Lotus Notes. Follow the procedure below if you need to turn off the creation of
transaction logs.
1.
Open the Notes.ini file.
Note: If you are not sure of the location of this file, select Start > Search > For Files or Folders...,
 which
opens the Search Results screen. In the Search for files or folders named field, enter ".ini"
and click Search Now. When “Notes.ini” displays in the list of search results, double click it to open the
file.
2.
3.
Make sure the following lines exist in the .ini file:

Log_Sessions 0

Log_Tasks 0
Save the .ini file and close it.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
501
Understanding IMAP TSE
502
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
User Dictionary
In This Chapter:
Introduction
504
User Dictionary
504
Adding a dictionary entry
504
Limitation
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 30
504
503
User Dictionary
Introduction
When the Text-to-Speech engine does not pronounce a word correctly, you can refine the pronunciation of the word with the
custom user dictionary. This is located in the folder where Officelinx is installed. By default this is:
C:\UC
The path will be different if you chose to install Officelinx in a different directory or drive. The location of this file can always
be determined from the following registry entry:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Generic\UMS\InstallPath
Every time the engine encounters the word, it will pronounce it as it is defined by the user dictionary.
User Dictionary
The User Dictionary is a text file (usrdict.dct) stored on the Officelinx server. It can be opened by a text editor such as
Notepad. The file contains information formatted like this:
[Header]
Dictionary Name =
Language =
Algorithm =
Data Type = ANSI
Date=
Description = User Dictionary
[Data]
DLL
Dynamic Link Library
P.
Pee
B. Bee
Adding a dictionary entry
To add an entry to the user dictionary, open the dictionary file (usrdict.dct). At the bottom of the [Data] section, type the
word you want TTS to pronounce differently, followed by a space or tab, then the corrected pronunciation of the word.
The system recognizes the first space as the dividing line between the word you want to be
 Note:
pronounced differently and the “new” word. For example, if you were to enter “P<SPACE>Pee” in the user
dictionary, the system takes it to mean that you want any instance of “P” to be pronounced “Pee”.
Limitation
Unfortunately there are limitations to the user dictionary. For example, you can not have the system pronounce a term like
“Dynamic Link Library” as “DLL”. Because the system only the first space as the dividing line between the word and the
corrected pronunciation, the system would read your user dictionary entry in the following way:
Dynamic<SPACE>Link Library DLL
In cases such as this, what is to the left of the space (Dynamic) is read hereafter as “Link Library DLL”. Obviously, this is not
what is desired.
504
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Network Optimization
In This Chapter:
Optimizing Network Traffic with Multiple Adaptors
506
Environments with multiple subnetwork addresses
508
Binding SIP voice traffic to one network adaptor
509
Ensuring application data separation
512
Reference Documents
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 31
506
505
Network Optimization
Optimizing Network Traffic with Multiple Adaptors
In a typical environment, there are 2 types of traffic that are generally present on a Officelinx server:

Voice traffic - Voice traffic refers to all information exchanged from the communication network that is connected to
Officelinx.

Data traffic - Officelinx exchanges information with other data servers to perform its tasks as a Unified Communications
server. This data includes: email synchronization, database synchronization in High Availability systems, client access via
web, desktop and mobile clients, SMTP, IMAP, LDAP and other types of data traffic.
Servers with multiple network adaptors can optimize their network traffic by creating a division between the voice and data
traffic. Voice (and fax) represents real time data exchange and as real time information, requires its traffic to be prioritized.
This document discusses the methods available to IT departments to optimize the traffic between the two types of data.
Environments with multiple subnetwork addresses
In many environments, their voice traffic is on a separate subnetwork. For example, data traffic resides on 192.168.0.x and
voice traffic resides on the 192.168.1.x subnetwork. In this case, the simplest way to direct network traffic is to assign one
network adaptor to the 192.168.0.x subnetwork and one network adaptor to the 192.168.1.x subnetwork. In this example,
the VoIP PBX or Gateway should be on the same subnetwork as the voice adaptor on 192.168.1.x. Since Officelinx
applications will try to connect via TCP to their destination via the Windows TCP stack, preference will be automatically given
to the network adaptor within the subnetwork that the application is trying to reach. This will isolate the Officelinx
applications’ attempts to connect to the VoIP end point to the network adaptor within the same subnetwork. Visual examples
of both single server and high availability implementations of multiple network adaptor configurations are shown below.
Single Server
Multi Network
Environment
UC Server
PSTN
Analog Phones
PBX
NIC 1
NIC 2
Data Network
(192.168.0.x)
IP Switch
(Voice)
IP Telephones
Email Server
Voice Network
(192.168.1.x)
IP Switch
(Data)
Gateway
Router
Client PCs
Firewall
Internet
506
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Network Optimization
High Availability
Multi Network
Environment
Analog Phones
Voice Server 1
(Master)
PSTN
Consolidated
Database Server
PSTN
NIC 1
Legacy
PBX
NIC 2
Data Network
(192.168.0.x)
IP PBX
IP Media
Gateway
NIC 1
NIC 2
Voice Server 2
(Slave)
Voice Network
(192.168.1.x)
IP Telephones
IP Switch
(Voice)
Email Server
IP Switch
(Data)
Remote
Client PC
Client PCs
Remote
IP Telephone
Gateway
Router
Firewall
Internet
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
507
Network Optimization
Binding SIP voice traffic to one network adaptor
Officelinx allows you to bind a specific adaptor to the SIP application layer. This can be done by:
1.
Open the ETSIPSERVICE.INI file.
2.
Find the line that states Internal IP =
3.
The default value is DETECT. Change this to the physical address of the network adaptor to be bound, e.g.
192.168.1.100.
4.
Save the file.
5.
Open Service Control Manager.
6.
Locate and STOP the UC SIP Service.
Any active calls will be disconnected when you stop this service. Choose a time when traffic
 Note:
loads are low to limit the impact of making this change.
7.
The service will automatically restart.
The SIP endpoints (PBX, Media Gateway, etc.) should be configured on the voice subnetwork IP range only to avoid any
cross routing between networks and thus defeating the purpose of separate adaptors.
508
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Network Optimization
Ensuring application data separation
To ensure the use of a separate adapter, the application servers and clients must be configured to use the corresponding
subnetwork intended for data use. Relevant configuration parameters are listed below.
email (IMAP) Synchronization
Ensure that the IMAP server intended for configuration resides on
the same data network as the intended data NIC (our example uses
the 192.168.0.x subnetwork). The image below shows an example
configuration of a data network configured IMAP server.
If your IMAP server resides on another network or across the
internet, ensure the default gateway for the UC server resides on
the data network and is configured for the data NIC only (voice NIC default gateway configuration should be left blank).
Web Client Access
Verify that the IIS Website IP Address setting is configured to the data
subnetwork as shown below on the web site properties dialog box, and that all
DNS entries and client access attempts are directed to this IP address.
Desktop Clients (iLink Pro Desktop)
Ensure that all clients are configured to connect to the UC server via the data network address (our example uses the
192.168.0.x subnetwork). If connecting externally, ensure all relevant NAT, DNS and Routing entries direct requests to the
data network IP address.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
509
Network Optimization
Mobile Clients
Similar to the desktop clients, all UC Mobile clients should be directed to the data network IP address. If connecting
externally, ensure all relevant NAT, DNS and Routing entries direct requests to the data network IP address.
SMTP, IMAP, LDAP and others
The following fields should be setup to only use the data subnetwork as well:
VPIM/SMTP:
IMAP Server:
LDAP Synchronization Host Name:
510
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Network Optimization
Company Domain Name/IP Address:
This ensures that all relevant UC Communication and non-voice protocols are transmitted via the data network rather than
voice.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
511
Network Optimization
Reference Documents
Microsoft does not recommend assigning multiple network adaptors to the same physical network
 Note:
and subnet. Please refer to the link below.

http://support.microsoft.com/?id=175767
To read about Network adaptor teaming and server clustering refer to the link below.
 Note:

http://support.microsoft.com/?id=254101
To read about configuring your server for network load balancing, please refer to the link below.
 Note:

http://support.microsoft.com/kb/323431/en-us
512
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Service Recovery
Manager
In This Chapter:
Introduction
515
Configuring Service Recovery Manager (SRM)
517
Alerts
517
CPU Usage
518
Memory Usage
519
Disk Usage
520
Services
522
Processes
523
Events
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
CHAPTER 32
514
513
Service Recovery Manager
Introduction
The purpose of the Service Recovery Manager (SRM) is to provide a means by which the system administrator can be notified
on the status of the UC system, without having to monitor it directly. The SRM, according to how it has been configured, will
keep the system administrator precisely informed about performance on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis.
Note: SRM was designed to be run locally for complete functionality. Therefore, all set up must be done on
 the
server computer. Once SRM is set up, it may be accessed remotely.
514
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Service Recovery Manager
Configuring Service Recovery Manager (SRM)
1.
Type the following http://address of PC/srm into the address bar of a web browser (i.e. Windows Explorer) and press
Enter. The following screen appears. Choose the server to access from the list provided.
2.
The SRM main screen appears.
 Hint: If prompted, enter the Officelinx administrator username and password to access the SRM.
3.
Working from top to bottom, the date and time can be read in the banner. Directly beneath the banner, from left to right,
are the current values of Run Time, Stop time, Warning time and Critical time.
4.
Just inside the right hand edge of the banner is Stop UC. Click on this to stop the services and processes that are being
monitored.
5.
At the far end of the banner is Settings. Clicking on this calls up the following screen.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
515
Service Recovery Manager
6.
7.
516
Enter the following information:

Check system status each - The interval (in seconds) between system status checks. The default is 60 seconds.

Delay first system status check for - The time (in seconds) to delay the initial system status check after startup.
Leave this field blank if no delay is needed. The default is 120 seconds.

SMTP server for email notifications - The SMTP server IP address or DNS name. The default is localhost.

SMTP from addresses for email notifications - The email address from which SRM updates will be sent. By
default, this address is srmevents@uc.local.

SMTP to addresses for email notifications - The email address to which SRM updates will be sent. Enter as
many addresses as desired, separating each entry in the list with a comma.

Store logs for - Enter the number of days to keep system logs.

Enable Clear statistics now to immediately to clear the logs after clicking Save.

VB Script - Add custom Visual Basic code to conduct your own specific actions.
Click Save. You are returned to the Main Screen.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Service Recovery Manager
Alerts
Any system alerts are displayed underneath this banner. Click on Clear all to remove any alert notifications.
CPU Usage
Beneath the CPU Usage banner is the date, time, and current CPU usage.
1.
Click on Settings. The following screen appears.
2.
In UC SRM Web - CPU usage settings:
3.
4.
5.

Warning CPU usage level - Enter the value (as a percent) at which a warning will be issued to the Main SRM
screen regarding CPU usage.

Critical CPU usage level - Enter the value (as a percent) for the level where a more severe warning will be sent to
the Main SRM screen regarding CPU usage.
In the Warning state actions section, enable:

Stop System - to bring the Officelinx system to a halt.

Start system after timeout - to restart the system after a pause.

Add event log record - adds any warning events to the log record.

Add alert - to set up an alert.

Send email - sends an email with a warning is issued.

Run script - runs a custom VB script after a warning.
In the Critical state actions section, enable:

Stop System - to bring the Officelinx system to a halt.

Start system after timeout - to restart the system after a pause.

Add event log record - adds any warning events to the log record.

Add alert - to set up an alert.

Send email - sends an email with a warning is issued.

Run script - runs a custom VB script after a warning.
Click Save or Cancel to save or remove your selections.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
517
Service Recovery Manager
Memory Usage
Beneath the Memory usage banner is the date, time, and current memory usage.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
518
Click on Settings. The following screen appears.
In UC SRM Web - Memory usage settings:

Warning memory usage level - Enter the value (as a percent) at which a warning will be issued to the Main SRM
screen regarding memory usage.

Critical memory usage level - Enter the value (as a percent) for the level where a more severe warning will be
sent to the Main SRM screen regarding memory usage.
In the Warning state actions section, enable:

Stop System - to bring the Officelinx system to a halt.

Start system after timeout - to restart the system after a pause.

Add event log record - adds any warning events to the log record.

Add alert - to set up an alert.

Send email - sends an email with a warning is issued.

Run script - runs a custom VB script after a warning.
In the Critical state actions section, enable:

Stop System - to bring the Officelinx system to a halt.

Start system after timeout - to restart the system after a pause.

Add event log record - adds any warning events to the log record.

Add alert - to set up an alert.

Send email - sends an email with a warning is issued.

Run script - runs a custom VB script after a warning.
Click Save or Cancel to save or remove your selections.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Service Recovery Manager
Disk Usage
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on Add. The following screen appears.
In UC SRM Web - Disk usage add:

In Disk volume to monitor - Select the volume to be monitored from the dropdown list.

Warning disk usage level - Enter the value (as a percent) at which a warning will be issued to the Main SRM
screen regarding disk usage.

Critical disk usage level - Enter the value (as a percent) for the level where a more severe warning will be sent to
the Main SRM screen regarding disk usage.
In the Warning state actions section, enable:

Stop System - to bring the Officelinx system to a halt.

Start system after timeout - to restart the system after a pause.

Add event log record - adds any warning events to the log record.

Add alert - to set up an alert.

Send email - sends an email with a warning is issued.

Run script - runs a custom VB script after a warning.
In the Critical state actions section, enable:

Stop System - to bring the Officelinx system to a halt.

Start system after timeout - to restart the system after a pause.

Add event log record - adds any warning events to the log record.

Add alert - to set up an alert.

Send email - sends an email with a warning is issued.

Run script - runs a custom VB script after a warning.
Click Save or Cancel to save or remove your selections.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
519
Service Recovery Manager
Services
Beneath the Services banner can be read the date, time, and service(s) running.
1.
Click on Add. The following screen appears:
2.
In UC SRM Web - Service add:
3.
4.
5.
520

Service name - Enter the name of the service to monitor.

When service is not running change system state to - Select either Warning or Critical.
In the Warning state actions section, enable:

Stop System - to bring the Officelinx system to a halt.

Start system after timeout - to restart the system after a pause.

Add event log record - adds any warning events to the log record.

Add alert - to set up an alert.

Send email - sends an email with a warning is issued.

Run script - runs a custom VB script after a warning.

Start service - start the newly added service.
In the Critical state actions section, enable:

Stop System - to bring the Officelinx system to a halt.

Start system after timeout - to restart the system after a pause.

Add event log record - adds any warning events to the log record.

Add alert - to set up an alert.

Send email - sends an email with a warning is issued.

Run script - runs a custom VB script after a warning.

Start service - start the newly added service.
Click Save or Cancel to save or remove your selections.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Service Recovery Manager
6.
Click on Settings. The following screen appears:
7.
In UC SRM Web - Service add:
8.
9.

Service name - Enter the name of the service to monitor.

When service is not running change system state to - Select either Warning or Critical.
In the Warning state actions section, enable:

Stop System - to bring the Officelinx system to a halt.

Start system after timeout - to restart the system after a pause.

Add event log record - adds any warning events to the log record.

Add alert - to set up an alert.

Send email - sends an email with a warning is issued.

Run script - runs a custom VB script after a warning.

Start service - start the newly added service.
In the Critical state actions section, enable:

Stop System - to bring the Officelinx system to a halt.

Start system after timeout - to restart the system after a pause.

Add event log record - adds any warning events to the log record.

Add alert - to set up an alert.

Send email - sends an email with a warning is issued.

Run script - runs a custom VB script after a warning.

Start service - start the newly added service.
10. Click Save or Cancel to save or remove your selections. You are returned to the Main Screen.
11. Click on Delete to remove the service running in the banner (in this case, Adaptive Server Anywhere - ASA9_UC).
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
521
Service Recovery Manager
Processes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
522
Click on Add. The following screen appears:
In UC SRM Web - Processes add:

Executable - Insert the file path of the process .exe file to run.

When process is not running change system state to - Select either Warning or Critical.
In the Warning state actions section, enable:

Stop System - to bring the Officelinx system to a halt.

Start system after timeout - to restart the system after a pause.

Add event log record - adds any warning events to the log record.

Add alert - to set up an alert.

Send email - sends an email with a warning is issued.

Run script - runs a custom VB script after a warning.
In the Critical state actions section, enable:

Stop System - to bring the Officelinx system to a halt.

Start system after timeout - to restart the system after a pause.

Add event log record - adds any warning events to the log record.

Add alert - to set up an alert.

Send email - sends an email with a warning is issued.

Run script - runs a custom VB script after a warning.
Click Save or Cancel to save or remove your selections. You are returned to the Main Screen.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Service Recovery Manager
Events
1.
Click on Add. The following screen appears:
2.
In UC SRM Web - Event add:
3.
4.
5.
523

Event log - select either System, Security, or Application from the dropdown list.

Event type - Choose from Critical, Error, Warning, Information, Audit success or Audit failure.

Event id - enter the event ID.

Event text - enter the text that will accompany the event ID.

When event found change system state to - select Critical or Warning.
In the Warning state actions section, enable:

Stop System - to bring the Officelinx system to a halt.

Start system after timeout - to restart the system after a pause.

Add event log record - adds any warning events to the log record.

Add alert - to set up an alert.

Send email - sends an email with a warning is issued.

Run script - runs a custom VB script after a warning.
In the Critical state actions section, enable:

Stop System - to bring the Officelinx system to a halt.

Start system after timeout - to restart the system after a pause.

Add event log record - adds any warning events to the log record.

Add alert - to set up an alert.

Send email - sends an email with a warning is issued.

Run script - runs a custom VB script after a warning.
Click Save or Cancel to save or remove your selections.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Service Recovery Manager
524
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
High Availability Server
Configuration
In This Chapter:
526
Introduction
526
HA Fax Configuration
526
HA ASR Configuration
CHAPTER 33
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
525
High Availability Server Configuration
Introduction
Officelinx High Availability provides redundancy for the voice servers, limiting downtime in the event of hardware failures. Up
to 10 servers are linked together to provide load balancing for high traffic sites, and failover support when one or more
machines go down.
Due to the nature of High Availability systems, additional steps are required during configuration to ensure the proper
operation of some features of Officelinx.
Please use this chapter as a guide when you wish to configure your HA system.
HA Fax Configuration
To enable faxing under an HA environment, please ensure that the following settings have been made.
On the Master Server
Ensure that the Master Voice Server has Fax Channels available.
On the Master & Slave Server(s)
Go to OL Admin > Advanced and set Disable Fax Detection = False.
Go to OL Admin > Configuration > Fax and set Fax Mail Installed = True.
Go to OL Admin > Configuration > Fax and set Fax Board = softfax.
On the Consolidated Server
Go to Admin > Company and assign a mailbox to receive the faxes.
HA ASR Configuration
To enable Automatic Speech Recognition under an HA environment, please ensure that the following settings have been
made.
On the Master Server
Ensure that the Master Voice Server has ASR Channels available.
On the Consolidated Server
Go to Admin > Company and enable Voice Recognition. Then Compile Grammar after a server restart.
Go to Admin > Configuration > Advanced and set Voice Recognition = Nuance 8.5.
526
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
Glossary
A
AMIS - Audio Messaging Interchange Specification is a protocol that allows voicemail communication between messaging systems
from different vendors. This task is now more commonly handled by a Unified Communications Solution.
B
BES - BlackBerry Enterprise Server is a system that connects to communications servers. Its function is to redirect and synchronize
messages, contact lists and calendar events between message providers, computers and mobile devices.
Blind Connection - A means of transferring a call whereby the current session is ended as soon as the call is transferred regardless
of the success or failure of the transfer.
C
GLOSSARY
C.O. - A Central Office is the physical location at the telephone company where the signal connecting equipment (switches, etc.)
resides.
C.O. Line - Central Office line from the telephone service provider to the company PBX/Switch.
Cadence Detection - Cadence Detection examines the audio received on a phone line to determine if the result is a busy signal,
silence, or a ring tone. The phone system can then react according to its programmed settings.
Centrex - Centrex is a telephone switching service where all hardware and software reside with the telephone company instead of
at the customer’s site.
Channel - (Also known as a port.) A A line such as a T1 may carry multiple channels. However a channel can only carry one phone
conversation.
Collaboration Service - A network location, usually on the internet, setup by the company or the user where groups can meet to
perform collective tasks (i.e. web conferences, online meeting space).
CTI - Computer Telephone Integration combines data with voice systems in order to enhance telephone services. For example,
automatic number identification (ANI) allows a caller’s records to be retrieved from the database while the call is forwarded to the
appropriate party. An outbound example would be automatic telephone dialing from an address list.
D
Debounce - Techniques used to remove possible stutter or vibration in a signal when a switch is open or closed.
DID - Direct Inward Dialing is a service which allows a range of telephone numbers to be associated with a single trunk line. When
an incoming call is received by the PBX, the extension is entered and the call is routed accordingly. This service allows call routing
to each extension while requiring fewer subscriber lines
DNIS - Dialed Number Identification Service is a feature provided by the phone company allowing corporations to determine which
telephone number was dialed by a customer. For example, if a call is directed at a number for a particular product, the PBX uses
DNIS to determine the appropriate recorded greeting to play.
DTMF - Dual Tone Multi Frequency signaling is a method of sending data over analog telephone lines using the voice-frequencies
of the telephone system.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
527
Glossary
F
FIFO - First In First Out, review messages is the order that they arrived (see also LIFO).
Frequency Detection - Frequency Detection is used to detect the tri-tone sudio signal used to identify some issues on the telephone
line (i.e. no signal, vacant line, line busy, operator intercept).
FTP - File Transfer Protocol is a means to permit the uploading and downloading of files from a central location across a network
or the internet.
G
Global Tone Detection - Global Tone Detection allows system to identify tones that match a programmed set of criteria and are
used to determine call status.
H
Huntgroup - When an incoming call is received, the huntgroup is the list of telephone lines that the system will search to see if
there is one available to route the call through. If all lines in the huntgroup are in-use, then the caller will hear a busy signal.
GLOSSARY
I
IIS - Internet Information Services is a web server application and features created by Microsoft for use with Windows.
IKE - Internet Key Exchange is the protocol used to establish a security association between two computers.
IMAP - Internet Message Access Protocol, along with Post Office Protocol (POP) is one of the most common Internet standards for
e-mail communications.
Inband - In-band signaling is the sending of message control information (i.e. calling line identification, the called party identification, reason for the call,etc.) in the same band and on the same channel as is used for data.
IP Address - An Internet Protocol Address given to a computer, usually assigned by the network, which allows it to communicate
with other machines on the network or across the internet. All outgoing communications are tagged with the IP Address of the
sender allowing replies to be addressed appropriately.
IPSec - Internet Security Protocol provides application transparent encryption services for IP network traffic. Using IPSec, you can
provide data privacy, integrity, authenticity and anti-replay protection for network traffic.
IVR - In response to caller input, an Interactive Voice Response system will provide prerecorded or dynamically generated responses which help to guide users through the system and reach their destination.
L
LAP - Local Area Paging is a protocol used to send messages to a pager.
LDAP - Lightweight Directory Access Protocol is a set of procedures for reading and modifying directories over an TCP/IP network.
LIFO - Last In First Out, review items in the reverse order to which they arrived (see also FIFO).
Loop Current Detection - Some telephone systems send a brief drop in the loop current when a connection is established. Loop
Current Detection transmits a connect signal when this current drop is detected.
M
MMC - Microsoft Management Console is a component of Windows that allows users to configure and monitor the system. Special-
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
528
Glossary
ized Snap-Ins are available to handle specific tasks or software configurations.
MWI - Message Waiting Indicator is the signal on a telephone set that indicates that a message is waiting to be recovered.
P
POP - Post Office Protocol, along with Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) is one of the most common Internet standards for
e-mail communications.
Port - See Channel.
Positive Answering Machine Detection - If an outbound call is answered by an answering machine, the system will terminate the
call.
Positive Voice Detection - The PBX system can analyze the signal received on a telephone line to determine if the recipient is a live
or recorded human voice.
S
SIP - Session Initiation Protocol is the procedures for controlling multimedia communication sessions (i.e. voice, video, messaging).
GLOSSARY
SIT - Special Information Tones are a standard three beep signal which indicates that a call did not go through. Typically, the tones
are followed by a recorded message explaining the problem.
Soft Fax - Soft fax emulates all fax processes through software. Fax messages that are received by Office-LinX server will be stored
in TIFF or another standard digital format, allowing the fax messages to be accessible to all users regardless of the device.
SSL - Secure Socket Layer is the industry-standard method for protecting web communications. The SSL security protocol provides
data encryption, server authentication, message integrity, and optional client authentication for a TCP/IP connection.
T
TAPI - Telephony Application Programming Interface allows computers using Windows to access telephone services.
TSE - Transparent Storage Engine
TUI - Telephone User Interface is a system used to navigate the menus of a Unified Messaging (UM) system using DTMF or touchtone inputs (i.e. "Press 1 for Sales, Press 2 for Support").
U
UNC - Universal Naming Convention is a standardized language to specify the location of resources on a network (i.e. files, computers, printers).
URL - Uniform Resource Locator specifies the location where a target resides. For example, use URLs to locate sites on the internet
(i.e. http
//www.esnatech.com/).
V
VPIM - Voice Profile for Internet Mail is a subset of the MIME messaging protocol designed to allow the transmission of data between
voice processing platforms.
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide
529
Glossary
GLOSSARY
530
Officelinx Server Configuration Guide